Professional Documents
Culture Documents
04)
Instruction manual
GRZ200-Z--
S, G, and T positions
TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION
Notice: GRZ200 manual is issued for ‘Z31’ and
‘Z32’ software code, which you can identify at ’S, G,
and T positions’ on Software nameplate.
6F2S1935 (0.04)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly
read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
Invisible laser radiation
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
i
6F2S1935 (0.04)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire(link)
Do not remove the short-link wire(s) connected to the frame earth (FG) at the terminal
block on the rear of the relay.
•Electric wire between #35 - #37 on the power-supply terminal block
Make sure the wire is connected.
(Exception: This wire needs to be detached for performing the dielectric voltage test.)
ii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled.
When disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be punished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems &
Solutions Corporation (TESSC, Japan).
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
•Equipment operation
The user shall have responsibilities to use and install the equipment where the
specifications are designated by the manufacture. Never operate the equipment on the
condition where the manufacture cannot intend. Otherwise, the safety function furnished
into the equipment may not be operated properly.
•Symbols
Symbol Description
iii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
•Copyright
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2018.
All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
iv
6F2S1935 (0.04)
Contents
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 1
Protection functions ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.1 Purposes of the protection ....................................................................................................... 2
1.1.2 Requirements in the protection functions .............................................................................. 2
1.1.3 Behavior of backup protections ............................................................................................... 4
1.1.4 Concepts of distance protection (ZS/ZG) function.................................................................. 6
1.1.5 Concepts of carrier command protection (DISCAR/DEFCAR) function .............................. 9
1.1.6 Tripping CB by the protection functions .................................................................................. 9
1.1.7 Autoreclosing CB (ARC) after the operation of the protection functions .......................... 10
1.1.8 Conventional applications ..................................................................................................... 10
Control............................................................................................................................................ 11
Monitoring and metering functions ............................................................................................. 11
Hardware overview ....................................................................................................................... 12
Symbols used in logical diagrams ................................................................................................ 13
Abbreviation .................................................................................................................................. 17
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number (Data ID) .................................................... 19
2 Relay application .................................................................................................................................. 20
Distance protection (ZS/ZG) ......................................................................................................... 21
2.1.1 Principle of distance measurement ...................................................................................... 22
2.1.2 Equations in distance protection function ........................................................................... 26
2.1.3 Element characteristic in distance relay.............................................................................. 33
2.1.4 Common application for ZS and ZG...................................................................................... 47
2.1.5 Extended application ............................................................................................................. 54
2.1.6 Command protection feature................................................................................................. 56
2.1.7 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................... 61
2.1.8 Tips to set the main/remote backup relays .......................................................................... 77
2.1.9 Tips to set the distance zones for multi-terminal lines ....................................................... 81
2.1.10 Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 83
2.1.11 Data ID ................................................................................................................................... 97
Switch on to fault (SOTF-OC) .................................................................................................... 110
2.2.1 Scheme logic ..........................................................................................................................111
2.2.2 Setting ................................................................................................................................... 113
2.2.3 Data ID ................................................................................................................................. 113
Distance carrier command protection (DISCAR) ...................................................................... 114
2.3.1 Permissive underreach protection (PUP) ........................................................................... 115
2.3.2 Permissive overreach protection (POP) .............................................................................. 116
2.3.3 Unblocking overreach protection (UOP) ............................................................................ 119
2.3.4 Blocking overreach protection (BOP) ................................................................................. 121
v
6F2S1935 (0.04)
vi
6F2S1935 (0.04)
vii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
viii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
ix
6F2S1935 (0.04)
x
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xi
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xiii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xiv
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xv
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xvi
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xvii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xviii
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xix
6F2S1935 (0.04)
xx
6F2S1935 (0.04)
1 Introduction
Contents Page Page
Abbreviation 17 Control –
Autoreclose (ARC) 10 -Counter function (GCNT) 11
Backup protections – Function identifies and signals (FB) 19
-Pilot schemes (DISCAR, DEFCAR) 9 Hardware overview 12
-Over current protection (OC) 10 Main protections –
-Earth fault protection (EF) 10 -Distance protection (ZS/ZG) 6
-Switch on to fault relay (SOTF) 10 Monitoring and metering functions 11
-VT failure relay (VTF) 10 Symbols used in logical diagrams 13
-CT failure relay (CTF) 10 Trip circuit (TRC) 9
-Fault locator (FL) 10
-Voltage check relay (VCHK) 10
Protection functions
The IED has a number of protection functions and these functions are being optimized for
transmission or distribution systems. The followings functions incorporated and programmed
with the user’s settings using the menus on the IED or in the engineering tools can operate
well with mutual linkage between protection functions.
Figure 1.1-2 illustrates the locations of a circuit breaker (CB) and a current transformer
(CT) connected with the relays. In Figure 1.1-2(a), for example, two CTs locates on the both
sides of the CB(N): a CT is connected with the relay Ry(S) seeing into the line and another CT is
connected with the relay Ry(X) seeing to the busbar; the zones protected by the two relays are
overlapped.
Figure 1.1-2(b) exemplifies that both the forward line and the busbar are protected using
a CT. Once a fault occurs between the CT and the CB(N), the relay Ry(S) for the forward line
can operate, but the relay Ry(X) for the busbar may fail to operate to clear the fault. That is, we
should keep in mind that a blind spot never exits in the power system for designing the
protection.
Busbar G Busbar H
M N K L Line
Busbar G Busbar G
N Line N Line
(a)Line and Busbar protected relays with two CTs isolated (b)Line and Busbar protected relays with a CT
(ii) Speediness
As mentioned earlier, shortening the fault duration is realized by the speedy operation of the
relay; it is achieved by the high speed signal processing module. However, we have to note
that the operating time of the CB is slower comparted with the one of the processing module.
Additionally, the propagation delay of the communion should also be considered when the
carrier command protection function is considered for the protection.
(iii) Reliability
The relay is in a quiescent state normally, but the relay shall respond to a fault instantly once
it occurs on the power system. Hence, the operation availability shall be checked whenever
the line is energized in unfaulted state. Additionally, to improve the operation reliability, the
protection scheme is checked externally by fail-safe function (FS). That is, the relay
operations are checked not to issue a trip command mistakenly by the FS relay; consequently,
erroneous tripping can be prevented dramatically if the prime (main) relay operates
mistakenly. The check results of the FS relay are combined together with the operation
results of the prime relay at the last stage (i.e., AND logics runs on the trip circuit).
Zone2(N)
Zone1(N)
Line
M S N K O
Trip command
EF(N) t 0 Zone2 i
Extra FS relay
Figure 1.1-3 Protection zone provided by the main relay and backup relays
†Note:When the carrier command protection function (DISCAR or DEFCAR) is available,
the function can also service as a local backup protection. We shall also note that
the function cannot operate in the device failure in the telecommunication.
from the remote end is essential so that the main protection is backed up remotely. For the
ZS/ZG protection, the zone2 and zone3 for the relaying elements can be serviced as the remote
backup protections.
Z4S-Mho.Reach
Z3S
Z2S
Z1XS
Z5S-R.Reach
Z4S-R.Reach
Z1S
R Z5S-R.Angle
Z5S
Z5S-Mho.Angle
Z4S Z4S-R.Angle
Regarding measuring errors in the relay, it is also necessary to consider hardware errors
in the relay itself, errors introduced by coupling capacitor voltage transformers (CCVT), and
transient overreach errors caused by the DC component of the fault current. For the GR200
series relays, the errors are defined to be less than 5%.
no countermeasure is applied. Most power swings are transient conditions from which the
power system can recover after a short interval, and distance protection tripping is therefore
highly undesirable in such cases. GR200 series relay provides the block function for power
swing (PSB) so that preventing unwanted tripping is possible during the power swing. Figure
1.1-5 illustrates the typical impedance locus as seen by the distance relay during the transient
power swing.
X Distance protection
characteristic
(Mho)
R
Load Area
A special case of the power swing condition occurs when the power system disturbance is
so severe that generators lose synchronism with each other and are said to be out-of-step.
During an out-of-step condition the phase angle between generators continues to increase and
pass through 180°, at which point a distance relay measures an impedance equal to that for a
three phase fault at the center of the power system. The impedance locus typically describes
an arc passing through the electrical center, as shown in Figure 1.1-6.
X
Distance protection
characteristic
(Mho)
R
Load Area
In the case of a full out-of-step condition (as opposed to a transient power swing), it is
desirable to separate the system in the vicinity of the center of the out-of-step condition.
GR200 series can provide an out-of-step detection element (OST) which can provide tripping
in these circumstances.
Although the power swing and out-of-step conditions are very closely related (in fact one
is simply the most severe form of the other), completely different actions are required from the
protection relay. The PSB function must ensure stability of the distance protection during
transient power system conditions, while the OST element initiates system separation by
tripping in the event that a severe power swing results in potentially irrecoverable loss of
stability in the power system. The PSB and OST elements are therefore completely separate
functions within the relay, with different characteristics, separate scheme logic and different
settings.
within the relay for transferring the trip commands to the CB. The TRC function can operate
for tripping single-pole or multi-poles. Before the protection functions is reset, the auxiliary
contacts of the CB must be derived to open; this is because, the protection function cannot
interrupt straightforward the current flowing on the tripping coil circuit of the CB.
Control
The control functions are provided for circuit breakers and isolators, other switchgear and
transformers. The user can operate the functions using the human machine interface; the
functions are able to operate together with such as automatic sequence control, interlocking
safeguard function and manual overridden function.
Monitoring function:
This function supervises status of protection functions, and displays power system quantities.
It also shows failure information in the CT and VT.
Hardware overview
The HMI consists of a screen, indication lights, operation and function keys, monitoring jacks
and a USB connector. The signal enters into the IED via terminals at the rear. Input and
output module circuits are provided as the interface.
HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for relay setting or viewing of stored data.
- A standard LCD or a large LCD (MIMIC) screen, LEDs, function keys and operation keys
- Password protection
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
- RS485 for Substation control and Automation System (SAS) with IEC60870-5-103 protocol
- Fiber Optic (FO, option) for SAS with IEC60870-5-103 protocol
- 100BASE-TX, or -FX for SAS with IEC61850 protocol
3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Signal No.) Signal name corresponding to Element or Signal No.(Data ID)
Note that the symbol can be used for the reception point coming from the output of PLC
logics.
4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Signal No. (Data ID) and its name
Signal number (Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Signal No. (Data ID)
1Note that the symbol can be used as a signal reception-point coming from the SAS.
The reception point is mapped to the LN of the IEC61850.
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
One-shot timer
A Output A
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
CB Circuit Breaker
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
NA Not Applicable
SC Station Computer
Abbreviation Description
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
VT Voltage Transformer
FB (Function ID=123456)
80000xxxx0 8000xxxxx
A & ≥1 XX1_OPT
81000xxxx1
XX1 B &
82000xxxx2
C
&
Element ID Signal name
&
8000011xxxx0 XX_BLOCK 1
2 Relay application
Contents Pages Pages
Autoreclosing 316 Fault locator (FL-Z) 300
-Reclosing CB (ARC) 316 Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ) 260
-Blocking reclose in CBF 211 Inrush current detection(ICD) 278
-Blocking reclose in ZS, ZG 52 Overcurrent protection (OC) 143
-Blocking reclose in OC 155 Overcurrent protection in negative (OCN) 180
-Blocking reclose in EF 173 Overvoltage protection (OV) 221
-Blocking reclose in OCN 189 Overvoltage protection for ground (OVG) 236
Broken conductor protection (BCD) 202 Overvoltage protection in phases (OVS) 229
Breaker failure protection (CBF) 208 Out of step (OSTZ) 270
CT failure detection scheme 295 Pilot (carrier) scheme 114
Common function(PROT_COMMON) 393 -Relay characteristics for pilot scheme 56
-Common relays 399 -POP with directional earth (DEFCAR) 133
-Detection of current change 399 -POP with distance relay (DISCAR) 116
Cold load protection (CLP) 405 -UOP with directional earth (DEFCAR) 136
Distance protection (ZS/ZG) 21 -UOP with distance relay (DISCAR) 119
-Principle and equations 22 -BOP with directional earth (DEFCAR) 136
-Z1 element control 52 -BOP with distance relay (DISCAR) 121
-Z1,Z1X,Z2 to Z5 element characteristics. 33 -PUP with distance relay (DISCAR) 115
-Load encroachment block relay (LEB) 51 Switch on to fault scheme 110
-Power swing block relay (PSB) 47 -SOTF with OC (SOTF-OC) 110
-1LG coordination in Z1G 54 -SOTF with Distance relay 54
Earth fault protection (EF) 164 Stub scheme (STUB-OC) 216
Fail safe schemes 281 Thermal overload function (THM) 196
-using Common relay (FS) 281 Trip command (TRC) 378
---with Overcurrent element 282 Under-voltage function (UV) 243
---with Phase current change detector 282 Under-voltage function for phases(UVS) 251
---with Earth fault current element 282 VT failure detection (VTF) 289
---with Multi-level OC elements 283 Voltage check for ARC(VCHK) 359
---with UV element in single phase 284
---with UV element in phases 284
---with UV change element 284
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.1-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
– Power swing block ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Figure 2.1-1 provides an illustration of the power system for the condition of a
phase-to-phase fault. The impedance from the relay to the fault is the same in phase-B and
phase-C, the self-impedance is Zs and the mutual impedance between phases is Zm. If the
voltages and currents of phase-B and phase-C are Vb, Vc, Ib and Ic and the fault point voltage
is VF, then Vb and Vc are given by the following equations.
𝑉𝑏 = 𝑍𝑠 × 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑍𝑚 × 𝐼𝑐 + 𝑉𝐹 (2.1-1)
𝑉𝑐 = 𝑍𝑠 × 𝐼𝑐 + 𝑍𝑚 × 𝐼𝑏 + 𝑉𝐹 (2.1-2)
where,
Zs: Self impedance
Zm: Mutual impedance
Since the effect of the phase-A current is small, and hence negligible in equation (2.1-3),
there is no need to introduce it in equations (2.1-1) and (2.1-2).
When each phase of the line is symmetric with the other, the positive-sequence and
zero-sequence impedances are Z1 and Z0 according to the method of symmetrical components.
Z1 and Z0 are defined by the following equations, using the self-impedance Zs and the mutual
impedance Zm:
𝑍1 = 𝑍𝑠 − 𝑍𝑚 (2.1-4)
𝑍0 = 𝑍𝑠 + 2𝑍𝑚 (2.1-5)
where,
Z1: Positive-sequence impedance
Z0: Zero-sequence impedance
𝑉𝑏 − 𝑉𝑐
𝑍1 = (2.1-6)
𝐼𝑏 − 𝐼𝑐
As shown above, the positive-sequence impedance is used when determining settings for
phase faults.
Va
Ib
Vb
Ic Zm VF
Vc VF
Zs
ZS
Ia
Va
Ib VaF
Vb
Ic
Vc
ZG
impedance and negative-sequence impedance are the same and that the influences of the fault
resistance are ignored.
𝑉1 = 𝑍1 × 𝐼1 + 𝑉1 𝐹 (2.1-7)
𝑉2 = 𝑍1 × 𝐼2 + 𝑉2 𝐹 (2.1-8)
𝑉0 = 𝑍0 × 𝐼0 + 𝑍0 𝑚 × 𝐼0 𝑚 + 𝑉0 𝐹 (2.1-9)
where,
V1: Relay point positive-sequence voltage
V2: Relay point negative-sequence voltage
V0: Relay point zero-sequence voltage
V1F: Fault point positive-sequence voltage
V2F: Fault point negative-sequence voltage
V0F: Fault point zero-sequence voltage
I1: Relay point positive-sequence current
I2: Relay point negative-sequence current
I0: Relay point zero-sequence current
I0m: Adjacent line zero-sequence current
Z1: Fault point - relay point positive-sequence impedance
Z0: Fault point - relay point zero-sequence impedance
Z0m: Adjacent line zero-sequence mutual impedance
Considering the faulted phase voltage VaF at the point of fault is,
𝑉𝑎 𝐹 = 𝑉1 𝐹 + 𝑉2 𝐹 + 𝑉0 𝐹 = 0 (2.1-10)
𝑍0 − 𝑍1 𝑍𝑚0
𝑉𝑎 = 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 + 𝑉0 = 𝑍1 (𝐼𝑎 + × 𝐼0 + × 𝐼0𝑚 ) (2.1-11)
𝑍1 𝑍1
Where, Ia is the current of phase-A at the relay and is defined in the following equation
by the symmetrical component of the current:
𝐼𝑎 = 𝐼1 + 𝐼2 + 𝐼0 (2.1-12)
Here, defining the current synthesized using the phase-A current at the relay as Ia', and
(𝑍0 − 𝑍1 )
Ia′ = 𝐼𝑎 + × 𝐼0 + 𝑍0 𝑚/𝑍1 × 𝐼0 𝑚 (2.1-13)
𝑍1
𝑉𝑎 = 𝑍1 × 𝐼𝑎 ′ (2.1-14)
That is, the positive-sequence impedance Z1 up to the fault point can be obtained from
the simple ratio of voltage Va to compensated current Ia' according to equation (2.1-14).
In equations (2.1-7) to (2.1-9), the fault resistance is ignored. Since the measurement of
the distance up to the fault point, based on equation (2.1-14) is carried out using the reactance
component, in principle there is no influence on the voltage component due to the fault
resistance. However, under real operating conditions, distance measurement errors are
introduced because of the fault resistance combined with the power flow or the current
flowing into the fault point from the remote terminal opposite to the relay location.
Z1
I1
V1
V1F
Positive-sequence circuit
Z2
I2
V2
V2F
Negative-sequence circuit
Z0
I0
V0
Zero-sequence circuit V0F
ZG
S1=V–IZs
S2=Vp
IZs
o R
Figure 2.1-4 shows the Mho characteristic obtained by comparing phases, provided the
fault voltage (V) and the polarizing voltage (Vp) are in phase. In Figure 2.1-4 the Mho
characteristic is obtained by dividing the voltage (V) by the current (I).
The Mho characterize is provided to detect for both the distance relays in phase-to-phase
(ZS) and in ground-fault (ZG); a self-polarization in accompany with cross-polarization (i.e., a
dual polarization) is employed for the both characteristic. The polarizing voltage (Vp) is
expressed using Equations (2.1-17) and (2.1-18).
To the ZS element (for a fault in phase-bc):
Vpbc =√3×(Va − V0 )∠-90° + Vbc (2.1-17)
To the ZG element (for an earth fault in phase-a):
Vpa =√3×(Va − V0 ) + Vbc ∠90° (2.1-18)
where,
Va = Voltage in phase-a
V0 = Voltage in zero-sequence
Vbc = Voltage in phase-ab
The dual-polarization can improve the directional security when applied to heavily
loaded lines or weak infeed terminals. If a close-in fault in three-phase occurs, the polarizing
voltage is memorized in the relay (i.e., memory action). That is, voltage information (Va and
Vbc) just before the occurrence of the fault is memorized; the memory action will be held for
two-cycles after the fault.
X
S2=Vp
Mho element
R IZs
o
Figure 2.1-5 shows that an offset Mho characteristic is applied when the relay detects a
fault in three-phase. That is, the ZS element having the memory action is able to issue a trip
signal with a time delay; the ZS element is able to issue an instantaneous tripping for the
close-in fault in three-phase.
Note that the memory action is not performed in the ZG element; the offset action is only
available for the ZS elements.
I = fault current
Zs = reach setting
Vso = offset reach setting
IZs
V
o S2=Vp
R
–IZso
S2=V+IZso
V
X Reactance element X
Mho element
Xs Xs knee
θ2
θ1
o R o R
a. Reactance element with a level line b. Reactance element with a gradual descent line
The composite characteristic is available only when the load current flows from the
local-end to the remote-end. If the load current flows oppositely from the remote-end to the
local-end, the reactance characteristic will be a horizontal line, which is parallel to the R-axis.
The horizontal characteristic is taken when no load current flowing; it is also taken when the
θ1 angle is set to zero (0). The level element in the reactance characteristic is shown using
Equation (2.1-21); the element in the gradual descent characteristic is shown in Equation
(2.1-22):
X ≤ XS (2.1-21)
R ≤ X S × tan(90° − 𝜃2) + ( X S − X) tan(90° − 𝜃1) (2.1-22)
where,
R = resistance component of measured impedance
X = reactance component of measured impedance
Xs = reach setting
The values of the θ1 and θ2 are obtained using Equations (2.1-23) and (2.1-24):
I
θ1 < tan−1 ( Lmax⁄(I ) (2.1-24)
Lmax +IFmin )
where,
X = reactance component
RF = fault resistance
ILmax = maximum load current
IFmin = minimum fault current
To commence the element of the distance relay (Z) in accompany with the reactance
characteristic, a fault recognition is executed every one-sixth of a power-cycle (system
frequency), using Equations (2.1-21) and (2.1-22). The Z relay shall operate if two fault
recognitions are obtained consecutively in a power-cycle, if the fault occurs within 90% of the
reach setting (Zs). If the fault is beyond the 90% of the Zs, the Z relay shall operate when four
fault are recognized consecutively in a power-cycle. Six-times-fault-recognitions in a power
cycle can prevent an erroneous operation in the transient phenomena; that is, the means of
the six-times-fault-recognitions to avoid overreach results when a fault occurs close to the
boundary of two zones (e.g., a boundary of the Z1 and Z2 relay elements).
BRR
θ X
o R BRR blinder BRL blinder
Rs R
BRL
a. Forward blinder b. Reverse blinder
The characteristics about the BFR and BRR lines are obtained by Equations (2.1-25) and
Equation (2.1-26), respectively:
X ≥ (R − R s ) tan 𝜃 (2.1-25)
X ≤ (R + R s ) tan 𝜃 (2.1-26)
where,
R = resistance component of measured impedance
X = reactance component of measured impedance
Rs = reach setting
If the minimum load impedance (ZLmin) is predictable, we can take the Rs setting for
the worst case such that the load angle is of 30° and the margin is of 80% in case of θ=75°;
Equation (2.1-27) can be applied to obtain the resistive setting for the blinder element:
sin 30°
Rs < 0.8 × ZLmin × (cos 30° − ) (2.1-27)
tan 75°
𝜑 = lagging angle of I to Vp
θ = directional angle setting
X
Quad element
lagging
I R
o θ
Directional element
For the element for the fault in phase-bc, the polarizing voltage (Vpbc) is given using
Equation (2.1-29):
𝑉𝑝𝑏𝑐 = √3 × (𝑉𝑎 − 𝑉0 )∠ − 90° + 𝑉𝑏𝑐 (2.1-29)
For the element for the fault in phase-a, the polarizing voltage (Vpa) is given using
Equation (2.1-30):
𝑉𝑝𝑎 = √3 × (𝑉𝑎 − 𝑉0 ) + 𝑉𝑏𝑐 ∠90° (2.1-30)
where,
V0 = voltage in zero-sequence
Va = voltage in phase-A
Vbc = voltage in phase-bc
In Equation (2.1-29), the Vpbc voltage is subject to the memory action if the close-in
fault occurs in three-phases; that is, the values of the Va and Vbc voltages are set from the
pre-fault voltages. The memory is retained for two cycles after the fault occurs. Note that the
polarizing voltage (Vpa) in Equation (2.1-30) is not subject to the memory action.
If a close-in fault in three-phases occurs, the Quad element can be enhanced for an offset
Quad element, as shown in Figure 2.1-10. Similar to issuing the instantaneous trip signal for
the close-in three-phase fault, this enables the Quad element to issue a trip signal with a
delayed time together using the memory action.
o R
The element of the offset directional characteristic is obtained using Equation (2.1-31):
X + R tan 𝜃 ≤ 𝑍𝐵 (2.1-31)
where,
X = reactance component of measured impedance
R = resistance component of measured impedance
θ = directional angle setting (= directional element angle setting in (2.1-28))
ZB = offset reach setting (fixed to be 1.5Ω in 5A rating and 7.5Ω in 1A rating)
This distance protection function can be selected to have either a Mho characteristic
(Mho) or a Quadrilateral characteristic (Quad) for both ZS and ZG. Each of the measuring
zones in this function has a directional characteristic.
Note: The Asterisk (*) in the setting is used to show the zone number in ZS/ZG (either "1",
"1X", "2", "3", "4", or "5"). The numbering and application of ZS/ZG are described
later.
Note: The complete elements and their characteristics, ZS and ZG are based on the
scheme switches [ZS-Chara] and [ZG-Chara].
Mho characteristic
(i)-1-1 Conventional Mho characteristic
Figure 2.1-11(a) and (b) show Z*S and Z*G with the Mho characteristic. The Z*S can
be set using the settings [Z*S-Mho.Reach] and [Z*S-Mho.Angle].
The blinder positions (left line and right line) are defined by the resistance and the
angle in the Figure 2.1-11; they are set using settings [Z*S-R.Reach] and
[Z*S-R.Angle]. The blinders are aligned symmetrically with the X-coordinate.
Scheme switches [Z*S-MhoR.EN] should be set On to enable the blinders.
Z1S-Mho.Angle Z1G-Mho.Angle
Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle Z1G-R.Angle
R R
Z1S-R.Reach (in the left) Z1S-R.Reach (in the right) Z1G-R.Reach (in the left) Z1G-R.Reach (in the right)
Figure 2.1-11 Z1S Mho element (Zone1 Mho element with Blinders)
The ZS with the MHO reactance characteristic should be set using the setting
[Z*S-X.Reach], when the user set On for the scheme switch [Z*S-MhoX.EN]. Similarly,
ZG should be set using the setting [Z*G-X.Reach], when On set for the
[Z*G-MhoX.EN].
A directional reactance element ‘DX’ (left line crossing the originate) can be set by the
settings [Z*S-DX.Angle] when On set for the [Z*S-MhoDX.EN]. Similarly, ZG should
be set using the setting [Z*G-DX.Angle] when On set for the [Z*G-MhoDX.EN].
Z1S-DX.Angle
X Z1G-DX.Angle X
Z1S-X.Reach Z1G-X.Reach
ZSF-X.GrAngle1 ZGF-X.GrAngle1
Z1S-R.Reach (in the left) Z1S-R.Reach (in the right) Z1G-R.Reach (in the left) Z1G-R.Reach (in the right)
Figure 2.1-12 Zone1 MHO element set with reactance X in forward direction
Quad characteristic
Figure 2.1-13(a) and (b) show the Z*S and the Z*G used in the Quad characteristics. For
example, the reach of Z*S (top line) is defined by reactance X and the reach value should be
set for the scheme switch [Z*S-X.Reach]. A resistive element (left line) and a directional
element (bottom line) can be set by the settings [Z*S-DX.Angle] and [Z*S-DR.Angle]
respectively. The resistive elements (right and left lines) can be configured by the settings
[Z*S-R.Reach] and [Z*S-R.Angle]; the blinder (left line) is used to cut the area of the Quad
characteristic by applying settings [Z*S-R.Reach] and [Z*S-R.Angle].
Z1S-X.Reach Z1G-X.Reach
ZSF-X.GrAngle1 ZGF-X.GrAngle1
R R
Z1S-DR.Angle Z1G-DR.Angle
Z1S-DX.Angle Z1G-DX.Angle
Z1S-R.Reach (in the left) Z1S-R.Reach (in the right) Z1G-R.Reach (in the left) Z1G-R.Reach (in the right)
Number of zones
The distance protection for phase-to-phase faults (ZS) includes six measuring zones and these
are termed Z1S, Z1XS, Z2S, Z3S, Z4S and Z5S. The distance protection for single-phase-earth
faults (ZG) also includes six measuring zones that are similarly termed Z1G, Z1XG, Z2G, Z3G,
Z4G and Z5G.
Z1XS–Z5S Mho with impedance Z
X
Z3S-Mho.Reach
Z3S
Z2S
Z1XS
Z5S-R.Reach Z1S
Z3S-R.Angle
R
Z5S-R.Angle
Z5S-Mho.Angle
Z4S
Z3S-R.Reach
Z5S
Elements in the reverse direction of ZG are not drawn in Figure 2.1-15 to Figure 2.1-17,
but they are similar to the ZS elements.
Z1S-DX.Angle
X
Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Reach
Z1S-Mho.angle
R
Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle
Z1S-DR.Angle
Z1S-Mho.Reach
Z1S-Mho.angle Z1S-R.Reach
Z1S-R.Reach
R
Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle
Z1S-X.Reach
Z1S-DX.Angle
Figure 2.1-16 Z1S MHO element set with reactance X in reverse direction
Z1S-DR.Angle X
Z1S-R.Reach Z1S-R.Reach
R
Z1S-R.Angle Z1S-R.Angle
Z1S-DX.Angle
Z1S-X.Reach
Z1S-Mho.Reach
Z1S-Mho.angle
Z1S-R.Angle
Z1S-R.Reach R
X
Z1S-X.Reach
Z1S-R.Angle
R
Z1S-R.Reach
Note that the elements Z2S to Z5S and the Z2G to Z5G can have either the Mho or the
Quad characteristic element, but these elements do not have the ‘knee’ function.
Zone
Element
Purpose
Directional
Characteristic
Reverse
Non-directional
Quadrilateral
MHO
Set Z
Set X
1 Z1S Protection for Zone 1 (Relay Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
/Z1G reach ≤ 80 % )
1X Z1XS Protection for Zone 1 extension Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Z1XG (Relay reach ≤ 100 %)
2 Z2S Back up for Z1S, Z1X Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
/Z2G
3 Z3S Back up for Z1S, Z1X Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
/Z3G
/
4 Z4S Back up for Z1S, Z1X Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
/Z4G
5 Z5S Protection for over Zone 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
/Z5G extension (Relay reach > 100 %)
The charging current compensation function has common scheme switches for both ZS
and ZG. The On setting is selected for the scheme switch [Z-IcC.EN] along with a setting value
for the setting [Z-IcC].
Zca
Zbc
X1
Zab
o R
60°
60°
Operation zone of
S
X1 element
Bus G Bus H
F
O Ia
Zbc
ZS
ZL1
F: Fault location
S: Infinite bus system
O: Location of Protective relay
ZL1: Fault impedance seen from S
Zbc: Fault impedance of phase-to-phase bc in the fault
Offset characteristics in ZS
Some elements in ZS are used for the detection of faults in the reverse direction and these
elements can have an offset characteristic, which assures the detection of a close-up
three-phase fault. Offset characteristic1 is provided in Z1S, Z1XS, and Z5S; the offset
characteristic instructs to start the memory action at which the voltage drops to zero upon the
occurrence of a fault. That is, for dropping to zero voltage, the memory action services an
important role for deciding whether the fault is located in the forward or in the reverse
direction based upon the relay location. In the offset characteristic, its offset value is fixed at
1.5Ω for 5A rating2, whereas it is fixed at 7.5Ω for 1A rating2. Figure 2.1-21 exemplifies the
action of the Mho offset characteristic of Z1S in the reverse direction; Figure 2.1-22 illustrates
that the action of the Quad characteristic is applied. Note that the offset characteristic in the
reverse direction is not provided in Z2S and Z3S.
1Note: As a rule, Z1S, Z1XS, and Z5S are utilized for a close-up three-phase fault. For
example, the Z1S element can be instructed to operate in the reverse direction; the
operation of the Z1S element should be covered the origin (i.e., voltage=0), as
shown in Figure 2.1-21. Owing to the memory action for the close-up fault, the Z1S
element is able to detect a fault even if the memory does not hold voltage data (say,
in the memory the voltage data is set to zero for the close-up three-phase fault).
The operation of the memory action has been available for the last three-cycles at
the occurrence of the close-up fault; the memory action has not been available for
the last four-cycles. The same memory action is also provided in the Z1XS and the
Z5S.
2Note: Either 1A or 5A rating is fixed to operate on a transfer modules (VCT). For more
information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical Description: Transformer
module for AC analog input.
Z1S-Mho.Angle
Z1S-R.Reach
Z1S-R.Angle
R
Z1S-X.Reach
Figure 2.1-21 Z1S Mho element during close up fault (Offset action)
Z1S-R
R
ZS-Rθ
Z1S
ZS-DirXθ(X ordinate)
In ZG, this function provides the compensation factors for all elements and these factors
are defined with settings. For example, for Z1G, the settings [Z1G-Krs], [Z1G-Kxs],
[Z1G-Krm], [Z1G-Kxm] are provided. Where, “s” refers to the protected line; the resistance “r”;
the reactance “x” reflect its property and “m” refers to a mutual circuit line for parallel line
applications.
Table 2.1-3 ZG compensation factors in lines
Element Settings for Protected line Settings for Parallel line
Z1G [Z1G-Krs], [Z1G-Kxs] [Z1G-Krm], [Z1G-Kxm]
Z1XG [Z1XG-Krs], [Z1XG-Kxs] [Z1XG-Krm], [Z1XG-Kxm]
Z2G [Z2G-Krs], [Z2G-Kxs] [Z2G-Krm], [Z2G-Kxm]
Z3G [Z3G-Krs], [Z3G-Kxs] [Z3G-Krm], [Z3G-Kxm]
Z4G [Z4G-Krs], [Z4G-Kxs] [Z4G-Krm], [Z4G-Kxm]
Z5G [Z5G-Krs], [Z5G-Kxs] [Z5G-Krm], [Z5G-Kxm]
On the other hand, for a double circuit line, the current input is compensated by the
residual current (3I0) of the protected line and residual current (3I0’) of the adjacent line.
Generally, the following equation is used to compensate the zero-sequence voltage drop,
in this example for the case of phase “a”.
Va = (Ia − 𝐼0 ) × Z1 + 𝐼0 × 𝑍0 + 𝐼0𝑚 × 𝑍0𝑚 (2.1-32)
where,
Va: Phase “a” voltage
Ia: Phase “a” current
I0: Zero-sequence current of the protected line
I0m: Zero-sequence current of the adjacent line
Z1: Positive-sequence impedance (Z1 = R1 + jX1)
Z0: Zero-sequence impedance (Z0 = R0 + jX0)
Zom: Zero-sequence mutual impedance (Zom = Rom + jXom)
I 0’
Zom
I 1, I 2, I 0 Fault
Va
ZG
Z1, Z2, Z0
When an earth fault occurs on the protected line, the ZPCC function will operate, in this
case parallel line compensation is performed to prevent under-reach caused by the mutual
zero-sequence current of the adjacent line.
When an earth fault occurs on the adjacent line, the ZPCC function does not operate,
compensation for the adjacent line is not performed to prevent overreach. The operating
condition of the ZPCC function is as follows:
3𝐼0
≥ 0.8 (2.1-35)
3𝐼0𝑚
There is the possibility that ZG even operates in multi-phase fault. Since ZG cannot
have the distance measurement accurately in the multi-phase fault, it is better to make just
ZS operates in the multi-phase fault. In order for ZG not to operate in the multi-phase fault, it
is possible for the user to set Block for setting [Z*G-MPFBlk]†. If this operation condition shall
not be added in ZG operation, it is possible to set Non for the setting [Z*G-MPFBlk].
setting Block, it is desirable to set Non in the backup protection easier to operate.
With regard to the leading-phase-block function, where the leading phase of ZG tends to
operate in event of a multi-phase fault. Thus it is possible to set Non for scheme switch
[Z*G-LPBlk] in order to enable the operation of Z*G. However, Block can be set for this
scheme switch in order to block the operation of Z*G.
X
Distance protection zone (Mho char.)
Impedance locus
during transient
power swing
R
Load Area
As shown in Figure 2.1-25 (a), for ZS, the power swing blocking elements (PSBSOUT
and PSBSIN) are formed as shown in the shaded area. For ZG, as shown in Figure 2.1-25 (b),
power swing blocking elements (PSBGOUT and PSBGIN) are provided and have the same
characteristic and feature. The PSBG function is disengaged when a residual overcurrent
(EFL) element operates. The detection of earth faults is discussed later.
X X
PSBSOUT PSBGOUT
PSBSZ PSBGZ
PSBSIN Z2S PSBGIN Z2G
PSBGZ
PSBGZ
PSBSZ
PSBSZ
0 R 0 R
Z3S Z3G
PSBSZ PSBGZ
The setting of PSBSIN adjusts automatically so that the PSBS operates properly in
accordance with the operation of ZS. The shaded area formed by the rectangle, which is
tangential with the elements (circles) in both directions of ZS, determines the size of PSBSIN.
For example, in Figure 2.1-25, Z2S is the most distant measuring element in the forward
direction; Z3S is the most distant measuring element in reverse direction; the top line of the
PSBSIN function is similar to the tangent of Z2S, the bottom line of the PSBSIN function is
similar to the tangent of Z3S. The outer element PSBSOUT encloses the inner element
PSBSIN with a width which can be set using the setting [PSBSZ].
The case of the Quad characteristic is similar to that of the Mho characteristic.
The case of the Quad characteristic is similar to that of the Mho characteristic, as shown
in Figure 2.1-26.
X X
PSBSOUT PSBGOUT
PSBSZ PSBGZ
PSBSIN PSBGIN
Z2S Z2G
PSBGZ
PSBGZ
PSBSZ
PSBSZ
0 R 0 R
Z3S Z3G
PSBSZ PSBGZ
Figure 2.1-27 shows the PSBS-out and PSBS-in logic. During a power swing, the
impedance viewed from the PSB elements passes through the area between the PSBSOUT
and PSBSIN in a certain time. In the event of a system fault, the impedance passes through
this area instantaneously. A power swing, therefore, can be detected in the time that the locus
of the power swing remains within the shaded area of the rectangle between the outer and
inner elements. A delayed pick-up timer, [TPSBS] is initiated when the locus passes through
the PSBSOUT element and continues until the PSBSIN element operates in order to measure
the time duration for the locus to pass through the shaded area. If this time duration is longer
than the set value of the delayed pick-up timer, [TPSBS] the PSBS element will operate to
block the operation of the distance protection trip signal.
Suppose that impedance locus may stay in the PSBS zone for a certain time. On this
case, the PSB detection is reset forcibly when the user set On for scheme switches [PSBSFR].
Another delayed timer resets the trip block signal that is generated by the PSBS
element when the power swing is detected after the PSBSOUT operation is removed; 500ms is
the value set for the delayed pick-up timer.
Similarly, a PSB element is also provided for ZG and its operation is termed as PSBG.
(See Figure 2.1-28) The setting of PSBG is similar to that of PSBS.
EFL ≥1 0.5s
8000081BB0
800008EBB0 PSBS_BLOCK 1
TPSBSFR
t 0
&
PSBSFR
On 0.0 to 10.00s
8100081BB1
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
EFL ≥1 0.5s
8000081BB0
800008EBB0 PSBG_BLOCK 1
TPSBGFR
t 0
&
PSBGFR
On 0.0 to 10.00s
8100081BB1
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
As shown in Figure 2.1-29(a), for ZS the minimum load resistance R is defined by the
setting of scheme switches [LESR] and [LESL]. Setting of the maximum load angles across the
R ordinate is performed using scheme switches [LESR-Angle] and [LESL-Angle].
For ZG, when Block is set for the scheme switches [Z*G-LEBlk], similar settings and
scheme switches are available: settings [LEGR], [LEGL], [LEGR-Angle], and [LEGL-Angle],
are shown in Figure 2.1-29(b).
X X
ZESL-Angle ZEGL-Angle
ZESR-Angle ZEGR-Angle
R R
LESR LEGR
LESL LEGL
The load encroachment element can operate for the command protection functions (ZCS
and ZCG elements) when the user sets Block for the scheme switches [ZCS-LEBlk] and
[ZCG-LEBlk]. We shall see the ZCS and ZCG functions later.
For Z1S and Z1G tripping, either instantaneous tripping or time delayed tripping can be
selected; hence, the scheme switch [Z1CNT-INSTOP] is provided for the selection of the trip
mode, which is described earlier.
The function for blocking the initiation of autoreclose is also represented in Figure
2.1-42 and Figure 2.1-50 of section 2.1.7.
Note: The operation and setting of the ARC are discussed separately. For more
information on ARC, see Chapter Relay application: Autoreclose and voltage check.
8000001B62
Z1CNT-TPBLK
&
Z1CNT-TPBlk On
8100001B63
Z1CNT-3PTP
&
Z1CNT-3PTP On
8200001B64
Z1CNT-ARCBLK
&
Z1CNT-ARCBlk On
8300001B65
1 Z1CNT-INSTOP
&
Z1CNT-INSTOP On
The SOTF function can operate, in the case when a line remains in a non-energized state
for a certain time, which is termed as the deadline time defined by the protection common
(PROT_COMMON2) function.
If Z*S is required to operate for the SOTF function, On is set for the scheme switch
[Z*S-SOTF]. When Z*S is not required to operate for the SOTF operation, the scheme switch
is set to Off.
The SOTF function is provided for all of the ZS/ZG elements; hence, all of the elements
are provided with similar scheme switches and these switches are termed “SOTF” with the
zone names [Z*S-SOTF] for ZS, [Z*G-SOTF] for ZG.
1Note: The distance- measuring element can operate for faults other than close-up
three-phase faults.
2Note: The operation and settings of the PROT_COMMON is described separately, (See
Chapter Relay application: Protection common)
The user is recommended so that the reach of ‘Covering zones’ is set to at least 1.5 times
the reach of the associated operating zones. This ‘Covering zones’ does not have zero-sequence
compensation; hence, the user can select maximum, compensated reach of the operating zone
as the base value.
The resistance reaches of the ‘Covering zones’ are automatically set to be identical to the
operating zone resistance reaches; hence the user does not need to consider them.
Figure 2.1-31 illustrates the Z1G covering zone (Z1GCOV) characterized with setting
[Z1G-CovCoeff]; it shows the Z1GCOV element can operate between the zone2 and the zone3.
X 300% X
Z3G-X.Reach
Z2G-X.Reach
150%
Z1G-X.Reach
100%
R R
Directional element (DR)
Calculation in Z*G-CovCoeff
The user can have recommended [Z1G-CovCoeff] calculated by Equation (2.1-36):
Compenstaed 'setting [Z1G-X.Reach]'
Setting [Z1G-CovCoeff] = 1.5× (2.1-36)
Setting [Z1G-X.Reach]
The user can also have simplified Equation (2.1-37), because the compensated reach is a
function of the set reach.
Kxs
Setting [Z1G-CovCoeff]=1+ (2.1-37)
200
For example, when Kxs=400, the user can have the following setting.
400
Setting [Z1G-CovCoeff]=1+ =3 (2.1-38)
200
Testing
Note that testing of a single phase to ground fault by standard methods will result in
failures at the resistance line boundary, because the resistance line of the ‘Covering zones’ is
set to the same value as the operating zone. This is due to test equipment applying the
zero-sequence compensation on a ‘system’ basis, rather than on a ‘per zone’ basis.
As for the ZS, we provide the user the function of distance protection telecommunicated
as command protection (ZCSF and ZCSR). As for the ZG, we also provide the user the ZCSF
and ZCSR for the command protection. The user should take case that, discussed here are the
elements and characteristic of the command protection only; we provide the operation
instruction of this function separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Distance carrier
command protection.)
For the operation, the user should set On for the scheme switches [ZCS-EN] and
[ZCG-EN], respectively.
As shown in Figure 2.1-32, if you require placing an element in the Mho characteristic in
forward direction (ZCSF), you should place the reach setting of the ZCSF for settings
[ZCSF-Mho.Reach] and [ZCSF-Mho.Angle] both. On the other hand, when you need to
prescribe the reach setting of the ZCSF in reactance X, you should place its setting value for
setting [ZCSF-X.Reach] with a set of On being placed for scheme switch [ZCSF-MhoX.EN].
You can also prescribe resistive elements as shown on right and left side with settings
[ZCSF-R.Reach] and [ZCSF-R.Angle]; the resistive elements are applicable when you place a
set of On for scheme switch [ZCSF-MhoR.EN].
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 2.1-33, when you require placing an element in
the Quad characteristic in forward direction, you should place the reach of the ZCSF with
setting [ZCSF-X.Reach]. You can also place resistive elements, right side and left side in the
figure with setting [ZCSF-R.Reach] and [ZCSF-R.Angle]. The resistive elements are
symmetrical and the right side is placed across the origin from the left side. Additionally, you
can place a directional element—as shown with a bottom line—with setting
[ZCSF-DR.Angle].
The same holds true for an element in the Mho characteristic in reverse direction (ZCSR) and
you can place the ZCSR with settings and scheme switches:
for the Mho, [ZCSR-Mho.Reach], [ZCSR-Mho.Angle], [ZCSR-X.Reach]
[ZCSR-R.Reach], [ZCSR-R.Angle], [ZCSR-MhoX.EN] and
[ZCSR-MhoR.EN] and
for the Quad, [ZCSR-X.Reach], [ZCSR-R.Reach], [ZCSRF-R.Angle], and
[ZCSR-DR.Angle].
You should place a set of Block for setting [ZCSF-PSBBlk] because the operation of the ZCSF
should stop when the power swing is detected. You should place a set of Non for the setting
when you require the ZCSF operation keeping in the power swing detection.
You also should place a set of a set of Block for setting [ZCSR-VTFBlk] because the operation
of the ZCSR should stop when the VTF is detected. Conversely, you should place a set of Non
for the setting were you to require the ZCSR operation keeping in the VTF detection.
Make sure that the ZCSF does not supply the offset feature while the ZCSR supplies the offset
feature. The settings for the offset element are fixed at 7.5 Ω for 1 A rating or 1.5 Ω for 5 A
rating. The fix offset makes the ZCSR operate constantly even when the three-phase fault
appears close in the reverse side. However, the ZCSF blocks its operation in the three-phase
fault because the ZCSR runs together with the ZCSF. As a result, the command protection can
X
ZCSF-Mho.Angle
ZCSF-Mho.Reach
ZCSF-R.Angle ZCSF-R.Angle
ZCSF-X.Reach
ZCSR-R.Reach ZCSR-R.Reach
R
ZCSF-R.Reach ZCSF-R.Reach
ZCSR-R.Angle
ZCSR-R.Angle
ZCSR-X.Reach
ZCSR-Mho.Reach
ZCSB-Mho.Angle
ZCSF-DX.Angle X
ZCSF-X.Reach
ZCSF-R.Angle ZCSF-R.Angle
ZCSR-DR.Angle
ZCSF-R.Reach
ZCSR-R.Reach
R
ZCSR-R.Angle ZCSF-R.Reach
ZCSF-DR.Angle
ZCSR-X.Reach
ZCSR-R.Angle
As for the cancellation of the ZCGF and the ZCGR, provided are settings [ZCGF-PSBBlk] and
[ZCGR-VTFBlk].
ZCGF-Mho.Angle
ZCGF-Mho.Reach
ZCGF-R.Angle ZCGF-R.Angle
ZCGF-X.Reach
ZCGR-R.Reach ZCGR-R.Reach
R
ZCGF-R.Reach ZCGF-R.Reach
ZCGR-R.Angle
ZCGR-R.Angle
ZCGR-X.Reach
ZCGR-Mho.Reach
ZCGR-Mho.Angle
X
ZCGF-DX.Angle
ZCGF-X.Reach
ZCGF-R.Angle
ZCGB-DR.Angle
ZCGF-R.Reach
ZCGR-R.Reach
R
ZCGR-R.Angle
ZCGF-DR.Angle
ZCGR-DX.Angle
ZCGR-X.Reach
≥1
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 Z1S-EN On
&
From DISCAR 1
DISCAR=PUP
Z1S-SOTF On
&
800001EBB0 SOTF-Z1S BLOCK 1
From SOTF-OC
SOTF-EN-COND
&
800001EBB0 Z1STP_BLOCK 1
8000011C24
AB ≥1
8100011C25
OCF1S BC ≥1
8200011C26
CA
Z1S-OCFS Off
8000081B68 8000081B6F
AB ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8100081B69 8100081B6F
LES-R BC ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8200081B6A 8200081B70
CA ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8000081B6B To CTF,VTF
S
AB 8400081B65 1 &
8100081B6C PSBS-VCTF-BLK
LES-L BC AB & ≥1 R
8200081B6D PSBS 8500081B66 & TPSBS
CA OUT BC & t 0 S
8600081B67 &
CA & 0.020-0.100s R
8000081B61
800008EBB2 LES BLOCK 1 8000081B62 1
AB 8100081B63 & ≥1
Z1S-LEBlk ON PSBS 1 Z1S-PSBBlk
IN BC &
8200081B64 Block
CA &
≥1 &
800008EBB0 PSBS BLOCK 1 t 0 ≥1
PSBSRS ≥1 1 0.05s
ON & TPSBSFR
PSBSFR t 0
&
ON
0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
Z1XS element
Zab ≤ Z1XS &
≥1
Zbc ≤ Z1XS
&
Zca ≤ Z1XS Checking ≥1 8700011B63
particular reach ≥1
From Z1S & TZ1XS
≥1 ≥1 ≥1
ZminF-PERM-AB Z-min 8400011C20
ZminF-PERM-BC PERM Check Z1XS-AB t 0
8100061B23
& & & To Grouping logic
ZminF-PERM-CA 8500011C21
ZminR-PERM-AB Z1XS-BC t 0 Z1XS-OPT
& & & ≥1
ZminR-PERM-BC 8600011C22
ZminR-PERM-CA
Z1XS-CA t 0
& & & ≥1
0.00-100.00s
8400011B66
Z1XS-OPT-AB
Z1XS-MDDET OFF & 8500011B67
From ZG
Z1XS-OPT-BC
≥1 &
& 8600011B68 Z1XS-OPT-CA
Z1X_M.PHASE_FAULT
Z1XS-ARCBlk On ≥1
& &
≥1 Z1XS-ARC-BL
8100006EBB2 Z1XS_ARCBLOCK
OCK
OCN
& ≥1
8100061B2B
SOTF-Z1XS-TRIP
&
810006EBB1 Z1XS_INST_OP
≥1
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 Z1XS-EN On
Z1XS-SOTF On
&
810006EBB3 SOTF-Z1XS BLOCK 1
From SOTF-OC
SOTF-EN-COND
&
810006EBB0 Z1XSTP_BLOCK 1
8400011C24
AB ≥1
8500011C25
OCF1XS BC ≥1
8600011C26
CA
Z1XS-OCFS Off
8000081B68 8000081B6F
AB ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8100081B69 8100081B6F
LES-R BC ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8200081B6A 8200081B70
CA ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8000081B6B To CTF,VTF
S
AB 8400081B65 1 &
8100081B6C PSBS-VCTF-BLK
LES-L BC AB & ≥1 R
8200081B6D PSBS 8500081B66 & TPSBS
CA OUT BC & t 0 S
8600081B67 &
CA & 0.020-0.100s R
800008EBB2 LES BLOCK 1 8000081B62 1
AB 8100081B63 & ≥1
Z1XS-LEBlk ON PSBS 1 Z1XS-PSBBlk
IN BC &
8200081B64 Block
CA &
≥1 &
800008EBB0 PSBS BLOCK 1 t 0 ≥1
PSBSRS ≥1 1 0.05s
ON & TPSBSFR
PSBSFR t 0
&
ON
0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
Z2S element
Zab ≤ Z2S &
≥1
Zbc ≤ Z2S
&
Zca ≤ Z2S Checking ≥1 8300021B63
particular reach ≥1
From Z1S & TZ2S
≥1 ≥1 ≥1
ZminF-PERM-AB Z-min 8000021C20
ZminF-PERM-BC PERM Check Z2S-AB t 0
8200021B23
& & & To Grouping logic
ZminF-PERM-CA 8100021C21
ZminR-PERM-AB Z2S-BC t 0 Z2S-OPT
& & & ≥1
ZminR-PERM-BC 8200021C22
ZminR-PERM-CA
Z2S-CA t 0
& & & ≥1
NonDir 0.00-100.00s
8000021B66
Z2S-Dir Forward Z2S-OPT-AB
Z2S-MDDET OFF & 8100011B67
Reverse Z2S-OPT-BC
From ZG ≥1 &
& 8200011B68 Z2S-OPT-CA
M.PHASE_FAULT-F & ≥1
&
M.PHASE_FAULT-R &
Z2S-ARCBlk On Z2S-ARC-BLOCK
≥1 &
8200002EBB2 Z2S_ARCBLOCK
OCN
& ≥1
8200021B2B
SOTF-Z2S-TRIP
&
820002EBB1 Z2S_INST_OP
≥1
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 Z2S-EN On
Z2S-SOTF On
&
820002EBB3 SOTF-Z2S BLOCK 1
From SOTF-OC
SOTF-EN-COND
&
820002EBB0 Z2STP_BLOCK 1
8000021C24
AB ≥1
8100021C25
OCF2S BC ≥1
8200021C26
CA
Z2S-OCFS Off
8000081B68 8000081B6F
AB ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8100081B69 8100081B6F
LES-R BC ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8200081B6A 8200081B70
CA ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8000081B6B To CTF,VTF
S
AB 8400081B65 1 &
8100081B6C PSBS-VCTF-BLK
LES-L BC AB & ≥1 R
8200081B6D PSBS 8500081B66 & TPSBS
CA OUT BC & t 0 S
8600081B67 &
CA & 0.020-0.100s R
800008EBB2 LES BLOCK 1 8000081B62 1
AB 8100081B63 & ≥1
Z2S-LEBlk ON PSBS 1 Z2S-PSBBlk
IN BC &
8200081B64 Block
CA &
≥1 &
800008EBB0 PSBS BLOCK 1 t 0 ≥1
PSBSRS ≥1 1 0.05s
ON & TPSBSFR
PSBSFR t 0
&
ON
0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
Z3S element
Zab ≤ Z3S
Zbc ≤ Z3S
Zca ≤ Z3S 8700021B63
≥1
TZ3S ≥1
8400031C20 ≥1
Z3S-AB t 0
8300031B23
& & & To Grouping logic
8500031C21 Z3S-BC t 0 Z3S-OPT
& & & ≥1
8600031C22 Z3S-CA t 0
& & & ≥1
NonDir 0.00-100.00s
8400031B66
Z3S-Dir Forward Z3S-OPT-AB
Z3S-MDDET OFF & 8500031B67
Reverse Z3S-OPT-BC
From ZG ≥1 &
& 8600031B68 Z3S-OPT-CA
M.PHASE_FAULT-F & ≥1
&
M.PHASE_FAULT-R &
Z3S-ARCBlk On Z3S-ARC-BLOCK
≥1 &
830003EBB2 Z3S_ARCBLOCK
OCN
& ≥1
8300031B2B
SOTF-Z3S-TRIP
&
830003EBB1 Z3S_INST_OP
≥1
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 Z3S-EN On
Z3S-SOTF On
&
830003EBB3 SOTF-Z3S BLOCK 1
From SOTF-OC
SOTF-EN-COND
&
830003EBB0 Z3STP_BLOCK 1
8400031C24
AB ≥1
8500031C25
OCF3S BC ≥1
8600031C26
CA
Z3S-OCFS Off
8000081B68 8000081B6F
AB ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8100081B69 8100081B6F
LES-R BC ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8200081B6A 8200081B70
CA ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8000081B6B To CTF,VTF
S
AB 8400081B65 1 &
8100081B6C PSBS-VCTF-BLK
LES-L BC AB & ≥1 R
8200081B6D PSBS 8500081B66 & TPSBS
CA OUT BC & t 0 S
8600081B67 &
CA & 0.020-0.100s R
800008EBB2 LES BLOCK 1 8000081B62 1
AB 8100081B63 & ≥1
Z3S-LEBlk ON PSBS 1 Z3S-PSBBlk
IN BC &
8200081B64 Block
CA &
≥1 &
800008EBB0 PSBS BLOCK 1 t 0 ≥1
PSBSRS ≥1 1 0.05s
ON & TPSBSFR
PSBSFR t 0
&
ON
0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
Z4S element
Zab ≤ Z4S
Zbc ≤ Z4S
Zca ≤ Z4S 8B00041B63
≥1
TZ4S ≥1
8800041C20 ≥1
Z4S-AB t 0
8400041B23
& & & To Grouping logic
8900041C21
Z4S-BC t 0 Z4S-OPT
& & & ≥1
8A00041C22 Z4S-CA t 0
& & & ≥1
NonDir 0.00-100.00s
8800041B66
Z4S-Dir Forward Z4S-OPT-AB
Z4S-MDDET OFF & 8900041B67
Reverse Z4S-OPT-BC
From ZG ≥1 &
& 8A00041B68 Z4S-OPT-CA
M.PHASE_FAULT-F & ≥1
&
M.PHASE_FAULT-R &
Z4S-ARCBlk On Z4S-ARC-BLOCK
≥1 &
840004EBB2 Z4S_ARCBLOCK
OCN
& ≥1
8400041B2B
SOTF-Z4S-TRIP
&
840004EBB1 Z4S_INST_OP
≥1
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 Z4S-EN On
Z4S-SOTF On
&
840004EBB3 SOTF-Z4S BLOCK 1
From SOTF-OC
SOTF-EN-COND
&
840004EBB0 Z4STP_BLOCK 1
8800041C24
AB ≥1
8900041C25
OCF4S BC ≥1
8A00041C26
CA
Z4S-OCFS Off
8000081B68 8000081B6F
AB ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8100081B69 8100081B6F
LES-R BC ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8200081B6A 8200081B70
CA ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8000081B6B To CTF,VTF
S
AB 8400081B65 1 &
8100081B6C PSBS-VCTF-BLK
LES-L BC AB & ≥1 R
8200081B6D PSBS 8500081B66 & TPSBS
CA OUT BC & t 0 S
8600081B67 &
CA & 0.020-0.100s R
800008EBB2 LES BLOCK 1 8000081B62 1
AB 8100081B63 & ≥1
Z4S-LEBlk ON PSBS 1 Z4S-PSBBlk
IN BC &
8200081B64 Block
CA &
≥1 &
800008EBB0 PSBS BLOCK 1 t 0 ≥1
PSBSRS ≥1 1 0.05s
ON & TPSBSFR
PSBSFR t 0
&
ON
0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
Z5S element
Zab ≤ Z5S &
≥1
Zbc ≤ Z5S
&
Zca ≤ Z5S Checking ≥1 8B00051B63
particular reach ≥1
From Z1S & TZ5S
≥1 ≥1 ≥1
ZminF-PERM-AB Z-min 8800051C20
ZminF-PERM-BC PERM Check Z5S-AB t 0
8100061B23
& & & To Grouping logic
ZminF-PERM-CA 8900051C21
ZminR-PERM-AB Z5S-BC t 0 Z1XS-OPT
& & & ≥1
ZminR-PERM-BC 8A00051C22
ZminR-PERM-CA
Z5S-CA t 0
& & & ≥1
0.00-100.00s
8400011B66
Z1XS-OPT-AB
Z5S-MDDET OFF & 8500011B67
From ZG
Z1XS-OPT-BC
≥1 &
& 8600011B68 Z1XS-OPT-CA
Z5_M.PHASE_FAULT
Z5S-ARCBlk On ≥1
& &
≥1 Z1XS-ARC-BL
8500005EBB2 Z5S_ARCBLOCK
OCK
OCN
& ≥1
8500051B2B
SOTF-Z5S-TRIP
&
850005EBB1 Z5S_INST_OP
≥1
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 Z5S-EN On
Z5S-SOTF On
&
850005EBB3 SOTF-Z5S BLOCK 1
From SOTF-OC
SOTF-EN-COND
&
850005EBB0 Z5STP_BLOCK 1
8800051C24
AB ≥1
8900051C25
OCF5S BC ≥1
8A00051C26
CA
Z5S-OCFS Off
8000081B68 8000081B6F
AB ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8100081B69 8100081B6F
LES-R BC ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8200081B6A 8200081B70
CA ≥1 & 1 ≥1
8000081B6B To CTF,VTF
S
AB 8400081B65 1 &
8100081B6C PSBS-VCTF-BLK
LES-L BC AB & ≥1 R
8200081B6D PSBS 8500081B66 & TPSBS
CA OUT BC & t 0 S
8600081B67 &
CA & 0.020-0.100s R
800008EBB2 LES BLOCK 1 8000081B62 1
AB 8100081B63 & ≥1
Z5S-LEBlk ON PSBS 1 Z5S-PSBBlk
IN BC &
8200081B64 Block
CA &
≥1 &
800008EBB0 PSBS BLOCK 1 t 0 ≥1
PSBSRS ≥1 1 0.05s
ON & TPSBSFR
PSBSFR t 0
&
ON
0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBS F.RESET
The Z1S element generates a trip signal for the trip function (TRC) immediately when
the instantaneous mode is selected using the scheme switch [Z1CNT_INSTOP]. Note that the
scheme switch [LES_EN] can be used to block the Z1S element. The scheme switches
[Z1S-PSBBLK] and [Z1G-PSBBLK] can be used to block CB tripping when a power swing
occurs in the system. The scheme switch [Z1S-MSDET] is also used to cancel the operation
condition, which we have discussed with regard to the selection of the operation of ZS effected
by the occurrences of multi-phase fault or earth-fault. (see section 2.1.3(ii)-3).
The ZS elements generate trip signals if On is set for all of the scheme switches termed
“EN” with zone names [Z*S-EN]. The user should set Off for scheme switch [Z*S-EN] to disable
for issuing the trip signals. Using PLC signal ‘Z*S_ARCBLOCK’, the Z*S elements can issue
‘ARC-BLOCK’ signals for the ARC function via the TRC function; we shall see it later in
Chapter Relay application: Autoreclose.
To TRC
From Z1S to Z5S logics 8300001B23To DISCARC
Z1S-OPT ≥1 ZS-OPT-TRIP
Z1XS-OPT
Z2S-OPT
Z3S-OPT
Z4S-OPT
Z5S-OPT 8500001B61
Z1S-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 ZS-ARC-BLOCK
Z1XS-ARC-BLOCK
Z2S-ARC-BLOCK
Z3S-ARC-BLOCK
Z4S-ARC-BLOCK
Z5S-ARC-BLOCK
8C00001B62
Z1S-OPT-AB ≥1 ZS-OPT-ABR
8D00001B63
Z1S-OPT-BC ZS-OPT-BCR
8E00001B64
Z1S-OPT-CA ZS-OPT-CAR
Z1XS-OPT-AB
Z1XS-OPT-BC
≥1
Z1XS-OPT-CA
Z2S-OPT-AB
Z2S-OPT-BC
Z2S-OPT-CA
Z3S-OPT-AB
≥1
Z3S-OPT-BC
Z3S-OPT-CA
Z4S-OPT-AB
Z4S-OPT-BC
Z4S-OPT-CA
Z5S-OPT-AB
Z5S-OPT-BC
Z5S-OPT-CA
To TRC
From Z1S to Z5S logics 8300001B28 To DISCARC
SOTF-Z1S-OPT ≥1 SOTF-ZS-OPT-TRIP
SOTF-Z1XS-OPT
SOTF-Z2S-OPT
SOTF-Z3S-OPT
SOTF-Z4S-OPT
SOTF-Z5S-OPT
SOTF-ZS-ARC-BLOCK
8C00001B66
SOTF-Z1S-OPT-AB ≥1 SOTF-ZS-OPT-ABR
8D00001B67
SOTF-Z1S-OPT-BC SOTF-ZS-OPT-BCR
8E00001B68
SOTF-Z1S-OPT-CA SOTF-ZS-OPT-CAR
SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-AB
SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-BC
≥1
SOTF-Z1XS-OPT-CA
SOTF-Z2S-OPT-AB
SOTF-Z2S-OPT-BC
SOTF-Z2S-OPT-CA
SOTF-Z3S-OPT-AB
≥1
SOTF-Z3S-OPT-BC
SOTF-Z3S-OPT-CA
SOTF-Z4S-OPT-AB
SOTF-Z4S-OPT-BC
SOTF-Z4S-OPT-CA
SOTF-Z5S-OPT-AB
SOTF-Z5S-OPT-BC
SOTF-Z5S-OPT-CA
(ii) ZG logic
Figure 2.1-44 to Figure 2.1-49 to shows the ZG logics and corresponding SOTF logics. All
logics (Z1G, Z1GX, Z2G, Z3G, Z4G, and Z5G) and can be selected using the scheme switches.
Scheme switch [Z*G-EFL] is used to select the EFL element for the detection of earth faults;
when the EFL element operates, detection of the PSB is canceled.
800001EBB2 Z1G_3PTP
8300011B63
≥1 ≥1
8000011C20 TZ1G
t 0 ≥1
A & & & 8000011B69 To Grouping logic
Z1G 8100011C21
B t 0
≥1 Z1G-OPT
& & &
8200011C22
C t 0
& & &
≥1
≥1 0.00-100.00s 8000011B66
A & ≥1 &
≥1 & Z1G-OPT-A
≥1 8100011B67
Z1GCOV B &
& &
Non ≥1 Z1G-OPT-B
Z1G-LPBlk 8200011B68
C 1 &
& &
Z1G-OPT-C
≥1 1
Z1G-MPFBlk ≥1
& & Z1G-ARC-BLOCK
Non
≥1
&
≥1
&
≥1 Z1G-TRIP-A
≥1
≥1 1 &
≥1 Z1G-TRIP -B
1
1 ≥1 Z1G-TRIP -C
1 Z1G-TPMD
≥1 &
3P
& ≥1 8000011B2B
SOTF-Z1G-TRIP
&
&
From VTF
VTF-DETECT 1 8000011B6B
SOTF-Z1G-OPT-A
Distance common function
8100011B6C
&
A SOTF-Z1G-OPT-B
OCCR 8200011B6D
B &
SOTF-Z1G-OPT-C
C &
Z1G-EFL
EFL ≥1
Off
OCN
To ZS
Z1_M.PHASE_FAULT
8000081B60
A & 1 NON_PWIBLK-C
8100081B61
UVPWI B & 1 NON_PWIBLK-A
8200081B62 1 NON_PWIBLK-B
C &
1
Z1G-ARCBlk On
≥1
800001EBB3 Z1GARC_BLOCK
≥1 &
1 t 0
800008EBB0 PSBG BLOCK ≥1
1 0.05s
≥1
& TPSBGFR
PSBGRS ON ≥1 PSBGFR
t 0
&
ON 0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
3P
& ≥1 8100061B2B
SOTF-Z1XG-TRIP
&
&
From VTF
VTF-DETECT 1 8400011B6B
SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-A
Distance common function
8500011B6C
&
A SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-B
OCCR 8600011B6D
B &
SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-C
C &
Z1XG-EFL
EFL ≥1
Off
OCN
To ZS
Z1X_M.PHASE_FAULT
8000081B60
A & 1 NON_PWIBLK-C
8100081B61
UVPWI B & 1 NON_PWIBLK-A
8200081B62 1 NON_PWIBLK-B
C &
Z1XG-EN On Z1XG-TPEN=ON
1
Z1XG-ARCBlk
On
≥1
810006EBB3 Z1XG_ARCBLOCK
≥1 &
1 t 0
800008EBB0 PSBG BLOCK ≥1
1 0.05s
≥1
& TPSBGFR
PSBGRS ON ≥1 PSBGFR
t 0
&
ON 0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
8400001B66
& & Z2G-ARC-BLOCK
A & ≥1
8500001B67 1
ZGRCOV B & ≥1
&
8600001B68 &
C ≥1
& Z2G-TRIP-A
1 & ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 Z2G-TRIP -B
1 & ≥1
≥1 ≥1 Z2G-TRIP -C
1 ≥1
& &
≥1 ≥1 Z2G-TPMD
8000001B63
& ≥1 3P
A
8100001B64 1
ZGFCOV B
& &
≥1 ≥1 & ≥1 8200021B2B
8200001B65
C
& & SOTF-Z2G-TRIP
1 ≥1 ≥1 &
& &
1 & ≥1 ≥1
& &
1
&
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 8000021B6B
&
SOTF-Z2G-OPT-A
Distance common function
8100021B6C
A & SOTF-Z2G-OPT-B
OCCR 8200021B6D
B &
SOTF-Z2G-OPT-C
C &
Z2G-EFL
EFL
Off ≥1
OCN
To ZS
M.PHASE_FAULT-F
M.PHASE_FAULT-R
8000081B60
A & 1 NON_PWIBLK-C
8100081B61
UVPWI B & 1 NON_PWIBLK-A
8200081B62 1 NON_PWIBLK-B
C &
Z2G-EN On Z2G-TPEN=ON
1
Z2G-ARCBlk
On
≥1
820002EBB3 Z2G_ARCBLOCK
≥1 &
1 t 0
800008EBB0 PSBG BLOCK ≥1
1 0.05s
≥1
& TPSBGFR
PSBGRS ON ≥1 PSBGFR
t 0
&
ON 0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
8400001B66
& & Z3G-ARC-BLOCK
A & ≥1
8500001B67 1
ZGRCOV B & ≥1
&
8600001B68 &
C ≥1
& Z3G-TRIP-A
1 & ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 Z3G-TRIP -B
1 & ≥1
≥1 ≥1 Z3G-TRIP -C
1 ≥1
& &
≥1 ≥1 Z3G-TPMD
8000001B63
& ≥1 3P
A
8100001B64 1
ZGFCOV B
& &
≥1 ≥1 & ≥1 8300021B2B
8200001B65
C
& & SOTF-Z3G-TRIP
1 ≥1 ≥1 &
& &
1 & ≥1 ≥1
& &
1
&
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 8400031B6B
&
SOTF-Z3G-OPT-A
Distance common function
8500021B6C
A & SOTF-Z3G-OPT-B
OCCR 8600021B6D
B &
SOTF-Z3G-OPT-C
C &
Z3G-EFL
EFL
Off ≥1
OCN
To ZS
M.PHASE_FAULT-F
M.PHASE_FAULT-R
8000081B60
A & 1 NON_PWIBLK-C
8100081B61
UVPWI B & 1 NON_PWIBLK-A
8200081B62 1 NON_PWIBLK-B
C &
Z3G-EN On Z3G-TPEN=ON
1
Z3G-ARCBlk
On
≥1
830003EBB3 Z3G_ARCBLOCK
≥1 &
1 t 0
800008EBB0 PSBG BLOCK ≥1
1 0.05s
≥1
& TPSBGFR
PSBGRS ON ≥1 PSBGFR
t 0
&
ON 0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
8400001B66
& & Z4G-ARC-BLOCK
A & ≥1
8500001B67 1
ZGRCOV B & ≥1
&
8600001B68 &
C ≥1
& Z4G-TRIP-A
1 & ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 Z4G-TRIP -B
1 & ≥1
≥1 ≥1 Z4G-TRIP -C
1 ≥1
& &
≥1 ≥1 Z4G-TPMD
8000001B63
& ≥1 3P
A
8100001B64 1
ZGFCOV B
& &
≥1 ≥1 & ≥1 8400041B2B
8200001B65
C
& & SOTF-Z4G-TRIP
1 ≥1 ≥1 &
& &
1 & ≥1 ≥1
& &
1
&
From VTF &
VTF-DETECT 1 8800041B6B
&
SOTF-Z4G-OPT-A
Distance common function
8900041B6C
A & SOTF-Z4G-OPT-B
OCCR 8A00041B6D
B &
SOTF-Z4G-OPT-C
C &
Z4G-EFL
EFL
Off ≥1
OCN
To ZS
M.PHASE_FAULT-F
M.PHASE_FAULT-R
8000081B60
A & 1 NON_PWIBLK-C
8100081B61
UVPWI B & 1 NON_PWIBLK-A
8200081B62 1 NON_PWIBLK-B
C &
Z4G-EN On Z4G-TPEN=ON
1
Z4G-ARCBlk
On
≥1
840004EBB3 Z4G_ARCBLOCK
≥1 &
1 t 0
800008EBB0 PSBG BLOCK ≥1
1 0.05s
≥1
& TPSBGFR
PSBGRS ON ≥1 PSBGFR
t 0
&
ON 0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
3P
& ≥1 8500051B2B
SOTF-Z5G-TRIP
&
&
From VTF
VTF-DETECT 1 8800051B6B
SOTF-Z5G-OPT-A
Distance common function
8800051B6C
&
A SOTF-Z5G-OPT-B
OCCR 8A00051B6D
B &
SOTF-Z5G-OPT-C
C &
Z5G-EFL
EFL ≥1
Off
OCN
To ZS
Z5_M.PHASE_FAULT
8000081B60
A & 1 NON_PWIBLK-C
8100081B61
UVPWI B & 1 NON_PWIBLK-A
8200081B62 1 NON_PWIBLK-B
C &
Z5G-EN On Z5G-TPEN=ON
1
Z5G-ARCBlk
On
≥1
850005EBB3 Z5G_ARCBLOCK
≥1 &
1 t 0
800008EBB0 PSBG BLOCK ≥1
1 0.05s
≥1
& TPSBGFR
PSBGRS ON ≥1 PSBGFR
t 0
&
ON 0.00-10.00s
810008EBB1 PSBG F.RESET
Z1G-TRIP-B ≥1
8100001B21
ZG-TRIP-B
Z1G-TRIP-C ≥1 8200001B22
ZG-TRIP-C
Z1XG-TRIP-A
Z1XG-TRIP-B
Z1XG-TRIP-C
Z2G-TRIP-A
Z2G-TRIP-B
Z2G-TRIP-C
Z3G-TRIP-A
Z3G-TRIP-B
Z3G-TRIP-C
Z4G-TRIP-A
Z4G-TRIP-B
Z4G-TRIP-C
Z5G-TRIP-A
Z5G-TRIP-B
Z5G-TRIP-C
Z1G-OPT-A ≥1
8800001B70
ZG-OPT-AR
Z1G-OPT-B ≥1
8900001B7E
ZG-OPT-BR
Z1G-OPT-C ≥1 8A00001B7F
ZG-OPT-CR
Z1XG-OPT-A
Z1XG-OPT-B
Z1XG-OPT-C
Z2G-OPT-A
Z2G-OPT-B
Z2G-OPT-C
Z3G-OPT-A
Z3G-OPT-B
Z3G-OPT-C
Z4G-OPT-A
Z4G-OPT-B
Z4G-OPT-C
Z5G-OPT-A
Z5G-OPT-B
Z5G-OPT-C
8500001B7C
Z1G-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 ZG-ARC-BLOCK
Z1XG-ARC-BLOCK
Z2G-ARC-BLOCK
Z3G-ARC-BLOCK
Z4G-ARC-BLOCK
Z5G-ARC-BLOCK
To TRC
From Z1G to Z5G logics 8300001B28 To DISCARC
SOTF-Z1G-OPT ≥1 SOTF-ZG-OPT-TRIP
SOTF-Z1XG-OPT
SOTF-Z2G-OPT
SOTF-Z3G-OPT
SOTF-Z4G-OPT
SOTF-Z5G-OPT
SOTF-ZG-ARC-BLOCK
8800001B81
SOTF-Z1G-OPT-A ≥1 SOTF-ZG-OPT-AR
8900001B82
SOTF-Z1G-OPT-B SOTF-ZG-OPT-BR
8A00001B83
SOTF-Z1G-OPT-C SOTF-ZG-OPT-CR
SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-A
SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-B
≥1
SOTF-Z1XG-OPT-C
SOTF-Z2G-OPT-A
SOTF-Z2G-OPT-B
SOTF-Z2G-OPT-C
SOTF-Z3G-OPT-A
≥1
SOTF-Z3G-OPT-B
SOTF-Z3G-OPT-C
SOTF-Z4G-OPT-A
SOTF-Z4G-OPT-B
SOTF-Z4G-OPT-C
SOTF-Z5G-OPT-A
SOTF-Z5G-OPT-B
SOTF-Z5G-OPT-C
Zone3(X) Zone3(Y)
TZ3
TZ2
Zone2(R) Zone2(Q) Zone2(P)
TZ3
Zone3(Q) Zone3(P)
TZ4
Zone4(R) Zone4(Q) Zone4(P)
TZ5
Zone5(R) Zone5(Q)
CTI
operate instantly. As shown in Figure 2.1-52, the reach of the zone1(X) is required to cover the
majority of the line length AB, whereas the zone1(X) should be independent on faults that
occur beyond the busbar B. Given the existence of the measuring errors in the VT and the CT,
approximate 80 to 90% of the line AB is required to set for the reach setting at the zone1(X).
When the ZS/ZG function is used in the main relay, zero should be set for the both
settings [TZ*S] in order that tripping is executed instantly.
Note that setting TZ2(X) does not influence the CTI regarding the zone1(Y). If delayed
tripping in the zone1(X) is preferred, the CTI between the zone2(X) and the zone1(Y) should be
taken into account. Note that setting TZ2(X) should be satisfied with Equations (2.1-39) and
(2.1-40):
Figure 2.1-53 shows that the adjacent line BC is too short so that the coordination
between the zone1(Y) and the zone2(X) is not realized straightforward. Hence, setting TZ2(X) is
required to be larger than setting TZ2(Y); consequently, the coordination between is achieved.
Zone3(X)
TZ3
Zone2(X)
TZ2(X)
Zone2(Y)
TZ2(Y)
Zone1(X) Zone1(Y)
TZ1
X Y Reach
(iii) Setting for far adjacent lines (Zone3 serviced as a backup relay)
The zone3(X) will be served as a backup relay for far adjacent lines, if the coordination could be
satisfied with the zone2(Y); then, the user should set the reach of the zone3(x) that can cover the
remote-end of the longest adjacent line whenever possible. Note that the effect of fault infeed
should be taken into account at the remote busbars. If the line-configuration is similar to the
one in Figure 2.1-52, the user is only required to think of the coordination between the
settings TZ3(X), TZ2(X), and TZ2(Y).
Busbar A Busbar B Busbar C
X Y
Line AB Line BC
Busbar E
Line BE
CTI
Zone3(X)
TZ3(X)
Zone3(Y)
TZ3(Y)
Zone2(X)
Zone2(Y)
Zone1(X) Zone1(Y)
TZ1
X Y Reach
Figure 2.1-54 Zone3 setting when the line BC is shorter than the line BE
Figure 2.1-54 illustrates that the adjacent line BC is shorter than the adjacent line BE.
For the CTI between the adjacent lines BC and BE, if it is difficult to achieve the coordination
by using only the reach settings, the user may be required to set the TZ3(X) longer than the
TZ2(Y).
(iv) Setting for backward lines (Zones4 and 5 serviced as backup relays)
If backward adjacent lines are required to protect by the relay(X), the zone4(X) or the zone5(X) is
suitable to protect. For example, as shown in Figure 2.1-52, if setting the reach of the zone4(X)
can be performed in the reverse to cover the busbar and the transformer, the zone4(X) will
operate as a back-up relays.
(v) Extra setting for the primary zone (Zone1X with autoreclosing)
The user should notice that disadvantages exist in the CTI schemes, because a fault occurred
a bit beyond the zone1 may be cleared in delay by the zone2. That is, the zone1 plus the zone2
cannot clear speedily for any fault on the line AB†. Thus, the extra zone1 (zone1X) is designed
to clear the fault occurred near the busbar B; its operation is taken together with the
operation of the autoreclose function (ARC‡).
Zone5(X)
TZ5
Zone4(X)
TZ4
1
Zone3(X)
TZ3
Zone2(X) Zone2(Y)
TZ2
Zone1X(X)
TZ1 Zone1(X) Zone1(Y)
X Y Q Reach
As shown in Figure 2.1-55, the reach of the zone1X should be set to overreach the
protected line AB. Once a fault occurs near busbar B, the ARC function must operate to follow
the trip command issued by the zone1X. The user must know that the zone1X is just effective
about the transient fault for which the ARC operation§ can recover the power transmission.
If evolving faults occur, the zone1X will issue one-more trip command successively to
follow a CB reclose command issued by the ARC function. If the permanent fault occurs, the
zone1X will issue no trip command respond to a reclose-on-to-fault condition.
†Note:The command distance protection (DISCAR) is provided for the speedy protection
when the telecommunication is provided. See chapter Relay application: Command
distance protection.
‡Note:For more information about the ARC function, see chapter Relay application:
Autoreclosing function.
§Note:For the transient fault, the power transmission could be recovered transiently by
the operation of the ARC function, whereas the zone1X cannot operate effectively
for the permanent fault (i.e., more of the network will be lost than necessary). We
recommend one to use the DISCAR function when the DISCAR function is
available.
Line JK
O
CTI
TZ3 Zone3(S)
Zone2(S)
TZ2
exist behind busbar B. Accordingly, as for the fault on the line AB, the user should have
underreach setting in enough to the zone1(S).
Busbar A Busbar B
Line AJ J Line BJ CTI
S U
TZ3
Fault
Line CJ X TZ2
O TZ1 Zone1(S)
Busbar C
S
TZR1
Figure 2.1-57 Line CJ tapped at junction J
(iii) Setting for the primary zone (Zone1 and a shot tapped line)
Suppose the busbar C is tapped at the junction J on the line AB, as shown in Figure 2.1-58. It
is required to have the reach setting in both the zone1(S) and the zone1(U) so as to hold a part
of the entire length of the line as shown in the long-dashed-short-dashed -circle line to avoid
unwanted operations for external faults at busbar C. Consequently, clearing faults by a
delayed zone2 are performed mostly, as shown in the broken-circle line that is operated at an
end of the line AB†.
Busbar A Busbar B
Line FJ J Line AJ
S U
Line JK
O
Busbar C
Busbar A Busbar B
S U
O
Busbar C
long-dashed-short-dashed-circle line
broken-circle line
dotted-circle line
2.1.10 Setting
Default setting
Test Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
2.1.11 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
ZS ZG Common (Function ID: 432001)
Element ID Name Description
8300001C27 EFL Earth fault relay element operated
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.2-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
The SOTF-OC function is active when On is set for the setting [SOTFOC-EN]. Setting
[SOTF-test] is used for the mandatory condition of cold load when testing. When wishing to
add another condition into the logic for the SOTF operation, the user can inject the signal
using PLC connection point “ADD.SOTF.EN”.
To DISCAR
800000EBB1 OC-RTP.EN
OC-RETRIP
From ARC & To TRC
SHOT_MULTI ≥1 SOTFOC-TRIP
8000001B60
≥1
SOTFOC-ARC-BLOCK
≥1
8000011C20
A & 8800011B62
&
8100011C21 & SOTFOC-OPT-A
OCSOTF B & & 8900011B63
8200011C22 & SOTFOC-OPT-B
C & & 8A00011B64
& SOTFOC-OPT-C
From ICD
ICD-A & ≥1
ICD-B & ≥1
To Recording
ICD-C & ≥1
SOTFOC-TRIP
≥1
&
Block-3P
OCSOTF-2PBlk
Block-PerP
SOTFOC-EN On
DEAD_LINE_DETECT
≥1 To ZS,ZG
800000EBB2 ADD.SOTF_EN 0 t
SOTF_EN_COND
SOTF-Test On 0.5s
2.2.2 Setting
Setting of SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
U Default setting
Range
n value
Note
Setting item i Contents
1A 5A s
1A rating 5A rating t
rating rating
s
SOTF-OC SOTFOC-EN Off / On - SOTF-OC protection enable Off
OCSOTF 0.02 - 3.00 0.10 - 15.00 A OC relay for SOTF threshold 1.20 6.00
Non / Block-3P /
OCSOTF-2fBlk - OCSOTF operation block by 2f-detection Non
Block-PerP
Forcibly establishing the cold load
SOTF-Test Off / On - Off
condition
2.2.3 Data ID
Monitoring point for operation
SOTF-OC(Function ID: 454001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001BB2 ADD.SOFT_EN Additional SOFTOC enable
The function of autoreclose (ARC) can be operated speedy using these protections above;
and these can issue either a single-pole trip signal or three-poles trip signal in accordance
with DISCAR settings and the states of faults.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.3-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
The trip permission signal is not sent until it is observed that the fault exists in the
protection zone of Z1S/Z1G; hence, PUP can provide excellent security., but PUP cannot
provide sufficient dependability if faults exist on the line including open terminals or weak
infeed terminals. This is because Z1S/Z1G cannot operate for this case‡.
†Note: The trip permission signal yielded by the underreaching element is transmitted
only; hence, respective terminals can share a telecommunication channel; and a
simplex channel can be used.
‡Note: At remote terminals, Z1X/ Z2 have a delay timer. Thus, they can remove the faults.
When the opposite terminal receives the trip permission signal, PUP at the opposite
terminal also issues a trip signal instantly when either ZCSF/ZCGF have been operated.
Receipt of the trip permission signals are found at PLC connection points (INT.DISCAR-R*).
PUP can operate when PUP is set for scheme switch [Dis-CAR]. If PUP requires
operating ARC, set scheme switch [DisCAR-ARCBlk] Non. (For more information of ARC, see
chapter Relay application: Autoreclose.)
To carrier
send circuit
From Z1S/Z1G in local Terminal
Z1G-AX OP DISCAR-CS-A_PUP
Z1G-BX OP DISCAR-CS-B_PUP
Z1G-CX OP DISCAR-CS-C_PUP
Z1S-ABX OP DISCAR-CS-S_PUP
≥1
Z1S-BCX OP
8000001B73
Z1S-CAX OP
DISCAR-OPT-A
8100001B74
DISCAR-OPT-B
8200001B75
DISCAR-OPT-C
8300001B76
From ZG in local Terminal 8000001B68 DISCAR-OPT-S
ZCGF-AX 8000001B20
& ≥1 ≥1 8100001B69 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-A
≥1
ZCGF-BX 8100001B21
≥1
& ≥1 ≥1 8200001B6A ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-B
ZCGF-CX 8200001B22
& ≥1 ≥1 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-C
≥1
From ZS in local Terminal
ZCSF-ABX ≥1
≥1 &
-CX
ZCSF-BCX &
&
-CX
ZCSF-CAX
&
-CX
& ≥1
& ≥1
Receipt of trip permission signals
From Terminal 1 & DISCAR_TPMD
800000EB55 INT.DISCAR-R1-A 3P
≥1
810000EB56 INT.DISCAR-R1-B ≥1 8100001B77
≥1 & DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK
820000EB57 INT.DISCAR-R1-C
≥1
830000EB58 INT.DISCAR-R1-S DISCAR-ARCBlk To TRC
≥1 ≥1
Block
EXT.DISCAR-R1
From Terminal 2
DISCAR_PERM1-A
840000EB59 INT.DISCAR-R2-A DISCAR_PERM1-B
DISCAR_PERM1-C
850000EB5A INT.DISCAR-R2-B
DISCAR_PERM
860000EB5B INT.DISCAR-R2-C
870000EB5C INT.DISCAR-R2-S ≥1
DISCAR_PERM2-A
EXT.DISCAR-R2 DISCAR_PERM2-B
DISCAR_PERM2-C
From CARRIER-COMMON
CAR_BLOCK DISCAR_PERM
≥1
1 To ECHO
800000EBB0 DISCAR_BLK
8000001BB0
800000EBBF DISCAR_3PTP
810000EBC0 DISCAR_ARCBLOCK
ECHO logic
8000001B78
DISCAR-CS-A_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-A
8100001B79
DISCAR-CS-B_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-B
8200001B7A
DISCAR-CS-C_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-C
8300001B7B
DISCAR-CS-S_PUP ≥1 INT.DISCAR-S-S
≥1
& ≥1 &
8F00001B7C
1
DISCAR-S
800000EB55 DISCAR_F.BLOCK
810000EB56 DISCAR_PERMIT
Dis-CAR
PUP
In other words, POP can determines whether the fault exists inside the protected line
based on the overlapping operation of the forward overreaching elements at both terminals.
ZCSF/ZCGF elements are used for the forward overreaching element.
†Note:POP sends a trip permission signal when the forward overreaching element
operates. Thus, multiplex signaling channels or one channel for each direction is
required in POP. This is because that the terminal sending signals shall not trip
erroneously due to reception of its own sending signal if an external fault occurs in
the zone of forward overreaching element.
To carrier
send circuit
DISCAR-CS-AB_POUP
DISCAR-CS-BC_POUP
DISCAR-CS-CA_POUP
DISCAR-CS-A_POUP
DISCAR-CS-B_POUP
DISCAR-CS-C_POUP
DISCAR-CS-S_POUP
8000001B73
ZCSF-CAX &
-CX
≥1
DISCAR_TPMD
&
& 3P
≥1
& 8100001B77
& & DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK
≥1
& &
1
DISCAR-ARCBlk
To TRC
Block
EXT.DISCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
840000EB59 INT.DISCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1
850000EB5A INT.DISCAR-R2-B =1 ≥1
860000EB5B INT.DISCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1
870000EB5C INT.DISCAR-R2-S =1 ≥1 ≥1
EXT.DISCAR-R2 =1
Dis-CAR UOP
POP
From CARRIER-COMMON
CH1-USE 1
CH2-USE 1
8000001BB0
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBB0 DISCAR_BLK
800000EBBF DISCAR_3PTP
800000EBBF DISCAR_ARCBLOCK
Transmission of the trip permission signal continues for setting [TSBCT-dis] even after
the local terminal issues a trip signal.
In many cases, at both ends of the line, the overreaching elements operate at the same
time. However, there may be some cases where they cannot operate simultaneously because
fault currents do not flows symmetrically. That is, the overreaching elements far from a fault
cannot operate by the fault, but the overreaching elements far from the fault will be operated
indirectly if the other terminals are induced to trip. To avoid this case, transmission of the trip
permission signal continues for a while set by [TSBCT-dis] after reset of ZCSF/ZCSG
operation. Consequently, the overreaching elements far from the fault can also generate a trip
signal because the trip permission signal is picked up delayed.
Thus, this command protection ensures its operation at the remote terminal.
TSBCT-DIS
DISCAR-OPT-A t 0
≥1
DISCAR-OPT-B t 0
≥1
DISCAR-OPT-C t 0
≥1
t 0
& ≥1
From Z1G 0.00 to 1.00s
Z1G-TRIP-A
Z1G-TRIP-B
Z1G-TRIP-C
Z1S-OPT
From SOTF-OC
OCH-RETRIP
≥1
ECHO logic 1
& ≥1 &
≥1 8F00001B7C
1
DISCAR-S
≥1 & &
800000EB55 DISCAR_F.BLOCK 1
810000EB56 DISCAR_PERMIT
POP
Dis-CAR
UOP
through the transmission line because that the transmission line includes a fault; the fault
may reduce the power of the signal and then PUP and POP may fail to operate. Unblocking
overreach protection (UOP) is introduced in order to negate this issue.
We can regard a transmitted signal as a trip block signal; and the trip block signal is
transmitted continuously except for the fault conditions. When the forward overreaching
element operates, signal transmission is stopped; hence, a trip block signal is not reached at
an opposite terminal. Consequently, the opposite terminal is allowed to trip; and CB tripping
is carried out when the forward overreaching element on its own operates.
ZCSF/ZCGF elements are used for the forward overreaching element. On the other hand,
ZCSR/ZCGR elements are used for the reverse looking element.
In UOP, the signal is required to send except for the occurrence of internal faults.
Therefore, a failure to operate or false operation due to attenuation of the signal will be
removed even if the power line carrier is used to exchange operation information.
UOP does not send a trip block signal when one of the following conditions are observed:
The forward overreaching element operates and the current reversal is not
occurred.
When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-ECHO], CB is open and the trip block signal
The trip block signals are given at PLCs signal monitoring point (INT.DISCAR-S-*). The
selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the three-phase trip (3P) is carried out using
scheme switch [DisCAR-TPMD].
UOP issues single-phase tripping signal or three-phase trip signal locally when the
following conditions are established:
Trip block signal is not received from the opposite terminals.
Current reversal is not observed
One of the following conditions are observed:
The forward overreaching element operates.
When On is set for scheme switch [Dis-WIKT], the undervoltage element UVL
(UVLS or UVLG) operates and the forward overreaching element (ZCSF/ZCGF)
and the reverse looking element (ZCSR/ZCGR) have not operated.
BOP does not send a trip block signal normally; and a trip block signal is sent only when
the reverse looking element operates. In BOP, a trip block signal is required to send in the
event of an external fault. Hence, failure operation or false operation can be removed when
the communication is performed by power line carrier,
BOP does not receive a trip block signal except for the occurrence of internal fault. If an
external fault occurs in forward, the forward overreaching element at a local terminal issues a
trip signal instantly. However, if an internal fault occurs, the reverse looking element at an
opposite terminal can operate and it transmits a trip block signal. At the local terminal, the
trip block signal will receive in the delay due to the propagation of communication channel.
Therefore, a short delay is required for CB tripping to check for the reception of a trip block
signal.
BOP can trip for any fault along the whole length of the protected line even if an open
terminal exists. A strong infeed terminal operates for all internal faults even if a weak infeed
terminal exists; therefore, ECHO is not required in BOP. WIKT is not applicable in BOP;
hence, the weak infeed terminal cannot operate.
In BOP, a trip block signal is not transmitted. If the reverse overreaching element
operates while the forward overreaching element does not operate, a trip block signal is
transmitted.
A trip block signal is not sent for setting [TREBK-dis] even after the local terminal
issues a trip signal so that command tripping at the remote terminal is secured.
The selection of either the single-phase trip (1P) or the three-phase trip (3P) is carried
out when the trip block signal is not received.
The delayed pick-up timer [TCHD-dis] is provided to allow for the transmission delay for
receipt of the trip block signal from the remote terminal in the event of a forward external
fault.
To carrier
send circuit
DISCAR-CS-A_BOP
DISCAR-CS-B_BOP
DISCAR-CS-C_BOP
DISCAR-CS-S_BOP
8000001B73
DISCAR-OPT-A
8100001B74
TCHD-Dis DISCAR-OPT-C
8300001B76
t 0 & 8000001B68 DISCAR-OPT-
ZCGF-AX ≥1
1 &
8000001B20
t 0
≥1 ≥1 8100001B69 ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-A
& ≥1
ZCGF-BX 1 & 8100001B21
≥1 ≥1 ≥1 8200001B6A ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-B
t 0 8200001B22
ZCGF-CX & & ≥1 DISCAR-TRIP-C
1 ≥1
≥1
ZCSF-ABX t 0
≥1
& ≥1
& &
t 0
ZCSF-BCX
&
t 0 &
ZCSF-CAX
&
1 &
0.000 to 0.100s
≥1
8000001B64
& DISCAR_TPMD
8100001B65 ≥1 1
&
≥1
ZCGR-AX Current 8200001B66 & 3P
1
-CX reversal &
ZCGR-BX 8100001B77
logic 8300001B67 &
-CX
ZCGR-CX 1 & ≥1 DISCAR-ARC-BLOCK
(CRL)
-CX &
ZCSF-X & DISCAR-ARCBlk
-CX 1 To TRC
ZCSR-X
-CX Block
1 &
1 &
1 &
1 &
EXT.DISCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
840000EB59 INT.DISCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1
850000EB5A INT.DISCAR-R2-B =1 ≥1
860000EB5B INT.DISCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1
870000EB5C INT.DISCAR-R2-S =1 ≥1 ≥1
EXT.DISCAR-R2 =1
Dis-CAR
BOP
From CARRIER-COMMON
CH1-USE 1
CH2-USE 1
8000001BB0
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBB0 DISCAR_BLK
800000EBBF DISCAR_3PTP
800000EBBF DISCAR_ARCBLOCK
TSCT-Dis To opposite
t 0 terminal
DISCAR-OPT-A & ≥1 8000001B78
t 0 & INT.DISCAR-S-A
DISCAR-OPT-B & ≥1
1
8100001B79
& INT.DISCAR-S-B
DISCAR-OPT-C & t 0 1 8200001B7A
≥1
& INT.DISCAR-S-C
t 0 1 8300001B7B
& ≥1
& INT.DISCAR-S-S
From Z1G 1
0.00 to 1.00s
Z1G-TRIP-A
≥1
Z1G-TRIP-B
Z1G-TRIP-C
Z1S-OPT 8F00001B7C
From SOTF-OC ≥1 & & DISCAR-S
OCH-RETRIP
1
DISCAR-CS-A_BOP
DISCAR-CS-B_BOP
DISCAR-CS-C_BOP
DISCAR-CS-S_BOP
800000EB55 DISCAR_F.BLOCK
810000EB56 DISCAR_PERMIT
Dis-CAR
BOP
With regard to UOP, if a terminal receives a block signal when neither forward
overreaching element nor reverse looking element have operated, ECHO stops sending the
block signal to the opposite terminal.
When CB is open, ECHO sends back the trip permission signal or stops sending the trip
block signal. User can set the time from CB opened to ECHO enabled using setting
[TCARECCB].
The terminal on which the forward overreaching element has operated can issue a trip
signal speedy by using the signal by ECHO.
Once the forward overreaching element or reverse looking element have operated,
transmission of the echo signal is inhibited for 250 ms by delayed drop-off timer T1 even after
these elements are reset.
To prevent any spurious echo signal from looping round between the terminals in a
healthy state, the echo signal is restricted to last for 200 ms by delayed pickup timer T2.
Figure 2.3-7 and Figure 2.3-8 shows ECHO logic. User can enable ECHO operation
using scheme switch [Dis-ECHO] Off.
From ZS and ZG
ZCGF-AX ≥1
ZCGF-BX
ZCGF-CX T1
0 t
1 & ECHO1_CONDITION
ZCGR-AX
0.25s
ZCGR-BX
ZCGR-CX
ZCSF-ABX
ZCSF-BCX
ZCSF-CAX
ZCSR-ABX
ZCSR-BCX
ZCSR-CAX
From PROT-COMMON
CB_ANYPH_CLOSE
TCARECCB
t 0 ECHO2_CONDITION
CB_ANYPH_OPEN
0.00 to 200.00s
DISCAR=UOP+BOP
ECHO1_CONDITION
&
Dis-ECHO On
& ≥1
DISECHO=ON ≥1
&
& ≥1
& ≥1
&
&
&
&
ECHO2_CONDITION &
0 t
UVLG-A
≥1 & WKIT-A_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-B
≥1 & WKIT-B_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-C
≥1 & WKIT-C_CONDITION
≥1
≥1 1
UVLS-AB
UVLS-BC TWICOORD
UVLS-CA t 0
&
DEAD_LINE_DEDTECT
1 0.000 to 0.100 s
DISCAR_PARM1-A
& ≥1
DISCAR_PARM1-B
& ≥1
DISCAR_PARM1-C
&
≥1
DISCAR_PARM1 &
From CARRIER-COMMON ≥1
CH2-USE 1
ECHO1_CONDITION &
DIS-WKIT On
From CARRIER-COMMON
WKIT-A_CONDITION
WKIT-B_CONDITION
WKIT-C_CONDITION
POP
Dis-CAR UOP ≥1
From Z1G
Figure 2.3-11(a) shows the arrangement of parallel lines, as an example. Suppose that a
fault occurs at location F on line L1 at time t1. CBA1 is tripped at time t2; and later, CBB1 is
tripped at time t3. The current direction on line L2 can be reversed at time t2. That is, the
current ( ) from terminal B to terminal A is found from time t1 to t2. However, the
current ( ) from terminal A to terminal B is found from time t2 to t3. The current
reversal may be found when an external looped circuit exists if not for parallel lines.
B1
A1 F L1
A B
L2 B2
A2
CRL
TREBK setting
CRL
TREBK setting
(b) Sequence diagram
Figure 2.3-11 (b) shows sequentially the operation of the forward looking element, the
reverse looking element, and CRL on line L2 before and after the occurrence of the current
reversal.
At terminal A2, the forward looking element does not run, but the reverse looking
element runs when the current reversal is yielded. At terminal B2, the forward looking
element runs, but the reverse looking element does not run.
Provided that the forward looking element runs at terminal A2 before the forward
looking element does not run at terminal B2. This may cause false operation of POP, UOP and
BOP on line L2.
Figure shows CRL logic. CRL logic can determine the current reversal when the reverse
looking element runs and the forward looking element does not run. If the current reversal is
found, CRL declares for the opposite terminal to block the trip operation immediately. At the
same time, CRL blocks CB tripping at its own terminal. If the condition of current reversal
continues longer than 20ms, CRL lasts to run for setting [TREBK-Dis] even after the current
reversal ceases.
TREBK-Dis 8000001B64
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in phase A & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in phase A 0.02s 0.0s
TREBK-Dis 8000001B64
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in phase B & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in phase B 0.02s 0.0s
TREBK-Dis 8000001B64
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in phase C & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in phase C 0.02s 0.0s
TREBK-Dis 8000001B64
t 0 t 0
Forward looking element in three-phase & DIS-REVBLK-A
≥1
1 -CX
Reverse looking element in three-phase 0.02s 0.0s
The operation of CRL and its effect in the current reversal are follows:
CRL at terminal A2 runs immediately after the fault occurs.
The operation of CRL lasts for setting [TREBK-dis] even after the reverse looking
element does not run and the forward looking element runs; CRL continuously
blocks the local tripping and transmitting a trip block signal to terminal B2.
Even if operation overlap of the forward looking elements between terminal A2 and
terminal B2 arises due to the current reversal, the operation overlap will disappear during
the operation of CRL. Thus, the false operation on the healthy line of parallel lines can be
removed. When the current reversal occurs in the direction opposite to the above, CRL at
terminal B2 will respond similarly.
CRL does not pick up for internal faults; thus, high-speed operation of any protection
scheme is not obstructed.
2.3.8 Setting
Setting of CARCOM(Function ID: 438001)
Default setting
Range
value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating
CAR-CHNUM 2-TERM/3-TERM – Carrier scheme terminal number 2-TERM
TCARECCB 0.00 to 200.00 s Echo enable timer from CB opened 0.10
TWICOORD 0.000-0.100 s Time coordination for UV relay operation 0.000
2.3.9 Data ID
Connection point on PLC logic
CARCOM(Function ID: 438001)
Element ID Name Description
800000EBB0 CAR_BLOCK Carrier block signal
8000001B61 LOSS-DISCAR1
8100001B62 EXT.DISCAR-R2
8100001B63 LOSS-DISCAR2
8000001B64 DIS-REVBLK-A
8100001B65 DIS-REVBLK-B
8200001B66 DIS-REVBLK-C
8300001B67 DIS-REVBLK-S
8000001B6B ECHO_CS-A
8100001B6C ECHO_CS-B
8200001B6D ECHO_CS-C
8300001B6E ECHO_CS
8300001B72 DISCAR_WITRIP
8000001B78 INT.DISCAR-S-A
8100001B79 INT.DISCAR-S-B
8200001B7A INT.DISCAR-S-C
8300001B7B INT.DISCAR-S-S
8F00001B7C DISCAR-S
8000001BB1 DISCAR-R1
8000001BB2 DISCAR-R1-2
8100001BB3 DISCAR-R2
8100001BB4 DISCAR-R2-2
800000EBB1 DISCAR-R1
800000EBB2 DISCAR-R1-2
810000EBB3 DISCAR-R2
810000EBB4 DISCAR-R2-2
800000EBB5 INT.DISCAR-R1-A
810000EBB6 INT.DISCAR-R1-B
820000EBB7 INT.DISCAR-R1-C
830000EBB8 INT.DISCAR-R1-S
840000EBB9 INT.DISCAR-R2-A
850000EBBA INT.DISCAR-R2-B
860000EBBB INT.DISCAR-R2-C
870000EBBC INT.DISCAR-R2-S
800000EBC1 DISCAR_F.BLOCK
810000EBC2 DISCAR_F.PERMIT
†Note:When both DISCAR and DEFCAR are used mutually for the command protection,
user should coordinate the technique between DISCAR and DEFCAR. For the
selection of the techniques in DEFCAR, see section 2.3.
‡Note:In DEFCAR, EF1 is used for a forward element (DEFCF); EF2 is used for a reverse
element (DEFCR). Both EF1 and EF2 are the function of earth fault protection
(EF). For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Earth fault protection.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: Several IED models do not have carrier features. To determine whether the features
are implemented in the IED or not, locate the IED ordering number; and check the order
number at “G&T position” referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see
Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.4-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
When POP receives a trip permission signal, POP issues a trip signal on condition that
DEFCF has operated. To assure issuing a trip signal at the opposite terminal, POP continues
to send a trip permission signal for setting [TSBCT-DEF] after DEFCF stops. (Figure 2.4-2)
DEFCR is used for CRL as a revers looking element; DEFCF is used as a forward
looking element, as shown in Figure 2.4-3. (For more information of CRL, see section 2.3.6)
When DEFCR runs but DEFCF continues to stop for 20 ms or more—even if DEFCF starts to
run or DEFCR stops later—tripping CB at local terminal or transmission of the trip
permission signal is blocked for setting [TREBK-DEF].
In POP, users can delay the DEFCAR sending using settings [TDEFCF] and [TDEFCB].
Users can also delay the DEFCAR tripping using setting [TDEFC]. Thus, if users wish to carry
out the DEFCAR sending and the DEFCAR tripping separately, users should set a value for
the setting [TDEFCF] and another value for the setting [TDEFC]. For example, when 0 ms set
for the [TDEFCF] and 50 ms set for the [TDEFC], the DEFCAR sending is performed faster
than the DEFCAR tripping. (See section 2.4.4 for more information)
POP can provide ECHO and WKIT functions, which are used for the line having weak
infeed terminals. ECHO allows fast CB tripping at the terminal on which DEFCF has
operated when applied to the line having an open terminal or a weak infeed earth fault
current terminal. (Figure 2.4-4 to Figure 2.4-7) (For more information of ECHO and WKIT,
see section 2.3.5)
When a trip permission signal is received if neither DEFCF nor DEFCR operates, ECHO
sends back the received signal to the opposite terminal. When CB is open, ECHO also sends
back the trip permission signal.
Once DEFCF or DEFCR operates, ECHO inhibits to send the echo signal for 250 ms by
delayed drop-off timer T1 even after DEFCF and DEFCR stop to operate.
In order to prevent any spurious echo signal from looping round between terminals in a
healthy state, sending ECHO signal is restricted for 200 ms by delayed pick-up timer T2.
Echo can operate using scheme switch [DEF-ECHO] On.
To CRL
TDEFCB 8400001B68
From EF (EF2)
t 0 DEFCR-X
DEFCR &
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s
8300001B67
≥1 DEFCF-X
From VTF
≥1 To carrier send circuit
VTF_DETECT
From PROT COMMON 1 DEFCAR-CS-A_POUP
CB_LOSS_PHASE DEFCAR-CS-B_POUP
DEFCAR-CS-C_POUP
8000001B74
& DEFCAR-OPT-AR
8100001B75
& DEFCAR-OPT-BR
8200001B76
& DEFCAR-OPT-CR
TDEFCF TDEFC 8300001B77
DEFCF t 0 0 8000001B6A DEFCAR-OPT-S
& & &
t
-CX &
From PROT-COMMON ≥1 8000001B20
& &
t 0 t 0 8100001B6B ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-A
OCD-AT S & & ≥1 8100001B21
& 8200001B6C
-CX R ≥1 t 0 ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-B
≥1 & t 0
≥1 8200001B22
OCT-BT & &
S ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-C
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s 0.00 to 0.30s
R ≥1 ≥1
OCT-CT S Week infeed ≥1
-CX R ≥1 ≥1 trip logic &
(WIKT)
1 ≥1 1
Current
800000EBBB EFF PHSEL-A Reversal 1
Logic ≥1
800000EBBC EFF PHSEL-B (CRL)
DEFCAR_TPMD
800000EBBD EFF PHSEL-C 3P
1P DEFCAR-TPMD=1P
8100001B77
& DEFCAR-ARC-BLOCK
Permission signals received: ≥1
From Terminal 1
DEFCAR-ARCBlk
800000EBB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A =1 To TRC
≥1 ≥1
& Block
810000EBB6 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B =1 ≥1 ≥1
&
820000EBB7 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 ≥1 &
EZT.DISCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
DEFCAR_PERM1-A
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1 ≥1 DEFCAR_PERM1-B
DEFCAR_PERM1-C
850000EBB9 INT.DEFCAR-R2-B =1 ≥1 ≥1
860000EBBA INT.DEFCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1 ≥1
DEFCAR_PERM2-A
EZT.DISCAR-R2
=1 DEFCAR_PERM2-B
DEFCAR UOP
DEFCAR_PERM2-C
POP
CH2-USE 1
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBB0 DEFCAR_BLK
810000EBC1 DEFCAR_3PTP
800000EBC0 DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK
TSBCT-DEF
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-A
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-B
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-C
0.00 to 1.00s
8000001B79
DEFCAR-CS-A_POUP ≥1 =1 INT.DEFCAR-S-A
8100001B7A
DEFCAR-CS-B_POUP ≥1 =1 INT.DEFCAR-S-B
8200001B7B
DEFCAR-CS-C_POUP INT.DEFCAR-S-C
≥1 =1
≥1
ECHO logic =1
& ≥1 &
≥1 8F00001B7C
1
DEFCAR-S
≥1 & &
800000EBC2 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK
1
810000EBC3 DEFCAR_PERMIT
DEFCAR UOP
POP
TREBK-DEF 8000001B69
t 0 t 0
DEFCF-X & DEF-REVBLK
≥1
-CX 1 -CX
DEFCR-X 0.02s 0.0s
-CX
0 t
UVLG-A
≥1 & WKIT-A_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-B
≥1 & WKIT-B_CONDITION
0 t
UVLG-C
≥1 & WKIT-C_CONDITION
≥1
≥1 1
UVLS-AB
UVLS-BC TWICOORD
UVLS-CA t 0
&
DEAL_LINE_DEDTECT
1 0.000 to 0.100 s
DEFCAR_PARM1-A
& ≥1
DEFCAR_PARM1-B
& ≥1
DEFCAR_PARM1-C
&
≥1
From CARRIER-COMMON
CH2-USE 1
ECHO1_CONDITION &
DEF-WKIT On
CAR
From CARRIER-COMMON
WKIT-A_CONDITION
WKIT-B_CONDITION
WKIT-C_CONDITION
POP
≥1
UOP
DEFCAR BOP
From CARRIER_COMMON
T1
DEFCFX
≥1 0 t
1 & ECHO1_CONDITION
DEFCRX
0.25s
From PROT-COMMON
CB_ANYPH_CLOSE
TCARECCB
t 0 ECHO2_CONDITION
CB_ANYPH_OPEN
0.00 to 200.00s
0.05s 0.2s
8000001B6F
& DEF-ECHO_CS-C
From Terminal 2 ≥1
0 t t 0
& 1
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A =1
0.05s 0.2s
850000EBB9 INT.DEFCAR-R2-B =1 &
POP
DEFCAR ≥1
UOP
ECHO1_CONDITION &
DEF-ECHO On
& ≥1
≥1
&
& ≥1
&
&
&
ECHO2_CONDITION &
The delayed pick-up timer [TCHD-DEF] is provided to allow for the transmission delay of the
trip block signal from the opposite terminal. Therefore, user should set a time depending on
the delay of communication channel.
Setting [TCHD-DEF] = maximum signal transmission delay time†+ 5ms
†Note: Including operation time of circuits of Binary IO modules; these circuits are used
to send/receive a trip blocking signal.
To CRL
TDEFCB 8400001B68
From EF (EF2) DEFCR-X
t 0
DEFCR &
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s
From VTF 8300001B67
≥1 ≥1 DEFCF-X
VTF_DETECT
From PROT COMMON 1
CB_LOSS_PHASE
From EF (EF1)
TDEFCF 8000001B64
DEFCF t 0 DEFCF-AX
& &
-CX
From PROT-COMMON 8100001B65
& t 0 DEFCF-BX
&
OCD-AT S
& t 0 8200001B66
-CX R ≥1 &
≥1
DEFCF-CX
OCT-BT S
-CX 0.00 to 0.30s
R ≥1 ≥1
OCT-C S
-CX R ≥1 ≥1
1 ≥1 1
8000001B74
& DEFCAR-OPT-A
8100001B75
& DEFCAR-OPT-B
8200001B76
& DEFCAR-OPT-C
TCHD-DEF TDEFC
t 0 8000001B6A
DEFCF-AX & t 0
& 8000001B20
t 0 8100001B6B ≥1
DEFCF-BX t 0 ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-A
& & ≥1 8100001B21
8200001B6C
DEFCF-CX t 0 ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-B
t 0 8200001B22
& ≥1
& ≥1 DEFCAR-TRIP-C
0.00 to 0.100s
0.00 to 0.30s
Week infeed ≥1
trip logic &
Current
Reversal 1
detection ≥1
logic
DEFCAR_TPMD
3P
1P
8100001B77
Permission signals received: ≥1 & DEFCAR-ARC-BLOCK
From Terminal 1
=1 DEFCAR-ARCBlk
800000EBB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A ≥1 ≥1 To TRC
& Block
850000EBB6 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B =1 ≥1 ≥1
&
820000EBB7 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C =1 ≥1 ≥1 &
800000EBB1 DEFCAR-R1 =1
From Terminal 2
DEFCAR_PERM1-A
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A =1 ≥1 ≥1 DEFCAR_PERM1-B
DEFCAR_PERM1-C
850000EBB9 INT.DEFCAR-R2-B =1 ≥1 ≥1
860000EBBA INT.DEFCAR-R2-C =1 ≥1 ≥1
DEFCAR_PERM2-A
810000EBB3 DEFCAR-R2 DEFCAR_PERM2-B
=1
DEFCAR DEFCAR_PERM2-C
BOP To ECHO/EIKT
From Terminal 2
CH1-USE 1
CH2-USE
CAR_BLOCK
≥1
1
800000EBB0 DEFCAR_BLK
810000EBC1 DEFCAR_3PTP
800000EBC0 DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK
DEF-REVBLK
& 8000001B79
& INT.DEFCAR-S-A
& 1
8100001B7A
& INT.DEFCAR-S-B
& 1 8200001B7B
& INT.DEFCAR-S-C
1
TSBCT-DEF
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-A
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-B ≥1
t 0
DEFCAR-OPT-C
8F00001B7C
800000EB55 DEFCAR_F.BLOCK ≥1 &
& DEFCAR-S
810000EB56 DEFCAR_PERMIT
1
DEFCAR BOP
DEFCAR pickup
BO Off delay
[TDEFCF]=0ms
Communication delay
signal after the reception of the DEFCAR signal that is prolonged by the setting [TDEFCF].
Figure 2.4-12 shows the relationship of sending-signal, receiving-signal, and tripping in the
DEFCAR function.
DEFCAR pickup
Communication delay
2.4.6 Setting
Setting of CARDEF (Function ID: 437001)
Default setting
Range
value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating
DEF-CAR Off/POP/UOP/BOP DEF carrier scheme enable Off
DEF-ECHO Off/On Echo function enable Off
DEF-WKIT Off/On Weak infeed trip function enable Off
DEFCAR-CHSEL Single/And/Guard Carrier channel configuration Single
TDEFCF 0.00 – 0.30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0.15
TDEFCB 0.00 – 0.30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0.15
TDEFC 0.00 – 0.30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0.00
TREBK-DEF 0-10 s Current reverse blocking time 0.1
TCHD-DEF 0-0.1 s Coordination timer in BOP function 0.012
TSBCT-DEF 0-1 s SBCNT timer 0.1
DEF carrier trip mode, phase
DEFCAR-TPMD 1P/3P 3P
segregated trip or 3-phase trip
DEFCAR-ARCBlk Non/Block Autoreclose block by DEF carrier trip Block
2.4.7 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
DEFCAR (Function ID: 437001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001B60 EXT.DEFCAR-R1 External DEF carrier received from remote 1
8000001B69 DEF-REVBLK
800000EBB5 INT.DEFCAR-R1-A DEF carrier of A phase received from remote 1 (Integral type)
810000EBB6 INT.DEFCAR-R1-B DEF carrier of B phase received from remote 1 (Integral type)
820000EBB7 INT.DEFCAR-R1-C DEF carrier of C phase received from remote 1 (Integral type)
840000EBB8 INT.DEFCAR-R2-A DEF carrier of A phase received from remote 2 (Integral type)
850000EBB9 INT.DEFCAR-R2-B DEF carrier of B phase received from remote 2 (Integral type)
860000EBBA INT.DEFCAR-R2-C DEF carrier of C phase received from remote 2 (Integral type)
To simplify the description, only OC1 is discussed but is applicable to the other OCs;
hence, read the expression for OC1 as OC2, OC3, and OC4 at each stage unless a special
explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.5-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– DT characteristic ✓ ✓
– IDMT characteristic ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Reference voltage or
θ1 Polarizing voltage2 (Vpol)
directional OC element for phase-A (OC-A) uses the phase-B-to-phase-C voltage rotated by
90° (VBC90°) in the leading direction, this reference signal is illustrated in Figure 2.5-2. The
direction of the current in the protected circuit, in this case the phase-A current (IA), is
determined from the angle measured for IA against VBC90°. The purpose of using VBC in the
90° leading position is so that the reference voltage (VBC90°) takes the same direction as the
phase-A voltage (VA) because the directional-sensing element requires a reference quantity
that is reasonably constant against which the current in the protected circuit can be compared.
As a result, when a fault occurs, the fault current IA will lag VBC90°. Similarly, for the
phase-B directional OC element (OC-B) where the object current is (IB) the reference voltage
(VCA90°) is adopted. The phase-C directional element (OC-C) uses the same approach as the
OC-A and OC-B elements. Table 2.5-2 shows the relationship between each current and its
respective reference voltage.
VBC90°
Leading 90°
VA
VBC
VBC
For a close-in three-phase fault, the three reference voltages VBC90°, VCA90° and
VAB90° may fall below the minimum threshold voltage for the directional OC element. In
order to cover this case, a voltage memory function is used to provide a polarizing signal. The
polarizing signals are provided during three-phase faults so that the OC element is able to
determine the direction of the fault. In addition, the directional element function determines
its output based on the loss of voltage memory and is effective while the fault current flows in
Amplitude calculation
|Vpol| Set voltage (OV-Vpol)
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional OC element, provide the
settings for the directional OC element: for example, the user can set the threshold value of
the OC at stage 1 with the setting [OC1-DT] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch
[OC1-Dir]. Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [OC1-Angle] with the
value of θ set in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.5-4 shows an example of an angle and a
characteristic set with θ.
Reverse
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OC element
by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switch later.
With inverse time operation, provided that the fault current has the magnitude required
to enable the determination of the location of the fault and provided that the fluctuation in the
impedance of the power source does not affect the correct determination, an inverse time OC
function provides an effective protection. With regard to the inverse time characteristic, for
example, the function can provide a fast trip for close-in faults, but will enable a delayed trip
for remote faults. The characteristic curve of the inverse time element can be selected from
among 10 characteristic curves† in conformance with IEC, IEEE, US, and UK standards.
†Note: A user-defined ‘Original’ curve can also be applied in addition to the 10 predefined
characteristics provided.
With dependent time resetting selected, if during the resetting period the energizing
current exceeds the threshold current of the OC element, then the OC element will pick-up.
The OC element will reset later in a period determined by the characteristics of dependent
time resetting. In other words, the user can choose the behavior of the OC element for either
faults that are repetitive intermittent or faults that occur in rapid succession. The
characteristic for dependent time resetting is selectable from five dependent time
characteristics in conformance with IEEE and US standards.
When definite time resetting is selected with the operation of the inverse time OC
selection and the reset time set to zero (instantaneous), no intentional delay is added for the
resetting: that is, when the energizing current falls below the reset threshold of the OC
element, the OC element returns to its reset condition. If a value is set to the reset time in
seconds, the resetting of the OC element is delayed by the reset time.
The operating time of the definite time OC element is set depending on the distance
from the power source and should be set shorter for relays furthest from the power source.
Definite time OC protection provides selectivity dependent on the difference between relay
operating times. It is limited to use in networks with a power source at one side only i.e. in
radial networks. The threshold values can be set identically at each terminal, but preferably,
the threshold value is reduced, little-by-little to provide a margin in terms of the current
sensitivity of the OC element. Moreover, a higher sensitivity of threshold current is required
for a protective relay that is located remote from the power source, that is, the threshold of the
definite time OC element is required to be lower than the ordinary threshold.
The operate time of the definite time OC element is constant irrespective of the
magnitude of the fault current and the threshold level of operation of the definite time OC
element with an on-delay timer provides a selective protection. As a result, the circuit breaker
(CB) at the remote terminal far from the power source can be tripped in the shortest time. The
on-delay timer, which generates a delay in starting the operation of the OC element, provides
a time grading margin (Tc); Tc is discussed later.
Definite time resetting as well as the on-delay starting setting of the definite time OC
element is provided. The operate time for the on-delay timer for starting and for the resetting
time is set using the OC element settings.
(ii) DT characteristic
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the
level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in in sections (vi) and (vii).
k
t(I) = TMS × {[ α ] + 𝑐} (2.5-1)
(𝐼⁄𝐼 ) − 1
𝑠
where:
t = operate time with constant current I (seconds),
I = operate (energizing) current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting number,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 2.5-3. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each OC stage. Figure 2.5-5 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switch [OC1-Timer]. (“IEC-NI" is for IEC Normal Inverse
characteristic; “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse; “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse; “UK-LTI” for
UK Long Time Inverse; “IEEE-MI” for IEEE Moderately Inverse; “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very
Inverse; “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse; “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse; “US-CO2” for
US CO2 Short Time Inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT, the user can also program the characteristic using time-multiplier-setting
(TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC characteristic is selected, the
user can set the TMS value using the setting [OC1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the default value
for the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [OC1-TMS-UK],
[OC1-TMS-IEEE], [OC1-TMS-US] and [OC1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.5-3 Constants for IDMT
Curve type k c
Curve Description α
(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Instantaneous activation
The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOC1],
but the instantaneous one can also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)’ is programmed to
be injected at PLC connection point “OC1_INST_OP”.
kr
t(I) = RTMS × [ β
] (2.5-2)
1 − (𝐼⁄𝐼 )
𝑠
where,
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting,
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero (seconds),
β = constants defining curve.
For setting the RTMS for the IEEE standard, the user can use the setting
[OC1-RTMS-IEEE] (incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, setting [OC1-RTMS-US]
and setting [OC1-RTMS-ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original, respectively
(For more information w.r.t the value for kr and β, see Table 2.5-4; Figure 2.5-6 shows the
characteristic curves).
Table 2.5-4 Constants for inverse-time-reset characteristics
Curve Type kr
Curve Description β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) N/A N/A
Curve Type kr
Curve Description β
IEC 60255-151 sec
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2
†Note:The user can set DEF for the scheme switch [OC1-Rtimer] when the
definite-time-reset characteristic is preferred. The definite-time-reset is available
in all IDMTs (see Table 2.5-5). After that, the user should set an intentional delay
reset time for the setting [TOC1R].
‡Note:DEF is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Rtimer] when the IEC and the UK
standards are selected.
Figure 2.5-7 illustrates the effect of inverse-time-reset on the internal time delay counter.
An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (Is) provides an energizing quantity for
the function which continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the operation of the
function. If the operating quantity falls below the Is setting, the function will return to its
reset state after the time t(I). The time t(I) is calculated using Equation (2.5-2).
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)
DT
IEC-NI ✓
Scheme switch [OC1-Timer]
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[OC1-Rtimer]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
in two or more phases, 2OUTOF3 (a fault occurs in two or more phases) is set for the scheme
switch [OC1-OPMD].
Table 2.5-6 Fault type and tripping mode
Fault type Setting [OC1-OPMD]
Phase-A Phase-B Phase-C 3POR 2OUTOF3
X – – ✓ No trip
– X – ✓ No trip
– – X ✓ No trip
X X – ✓ ✓
– X X ✓ ✓
X – X ✓ ✓
X X X ✓ ✓
Note: A tick (✓) indicates that a trip is issued when faults are detected.
A mark (X) indicates the occurrence of a fault on a particular phase. A mark
shown thus (–) indicates that no fault has occurred on that particular phase.
for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor]. Trip is set for the scheme switch [OC1-UseFor] for
the normal trip operation.
≥1
IEEE-VI OC1-ARCBlk Block
&
IEEE-EI
US-C02
Block-3P US-C08
OC1-2PBlk
Block-PerP
ORIGINAL
OC1-EN On
From VTF
VTF_DETECT
OC1-VTFBlk Block &
≥1
8000011BB0
800001EBB0 OC1_BLOCK
8000011BB1
800001EBB4 OC1_INST_OP
Table 2.5-7 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points ‘OC1-OR’ and ‘OC1PU-OR’
Setting [OC1_Timer]
PLC monitoring points
DT IEC-NT,VI,EI, UK-LTI, IEET-MI,VI,EI, US-CO2,CO8, ORIGINAL
OC1-OR ○
1 ○
3
OC1PU-OR ○
2 ○
4
1 :
○ A pick-up signal is generated instantly when the element operates.
2 :
○ No signal due that the PU element is killed. Use ‘OC1-OR’ in place of this.
3 :
○ A pick-up signal is generated, but delayed with the IDMT characteristic.
4 :
○ A pick-up signal is generated instantly.
OC1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OC-OPT-ALARM
OC2-OPT- ALARM
OC3-OPT- ALARM
OC4-OPT- ALARM
OC1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OC-ARC-BLOCK
OC2- ARC-BLOCK
OC3- ARC-BLOCK
OC4- ARC-BLOCK
OC1-OPT-AR ≥1 OC-OPT-AR
OC1-OPT-BR OC-OPT-BR
OC1-OPT-CR OC-OPT-CR
OC2-OPT-AR
≥1
OC2-OPT-BR
OC2-OPT-CR
OC3-OPT-AR
≥1
OC3-OPT-BR
OC3-OPT-CR
OC4-OPT-AR
OC4-OPT-BR
OC4-OPT-CR
To Recording
OC1-OPT OC1-OPT
OC2-OPT OC2-OPT
OC3-OPT OC3-OPT
OC4-OPT OC4-OPT
2.5.7 Setting
Setting of OC (Function ID: 440001)
Default setting
Range
value
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection enable Off
OCN2-EN Off / On - OCN2 protection enable Off
OCN3-EN Off / On - OCN3 protection enable Off
OCN4-EN Off / On - OCN4 protection enable Off
OC1 OC1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OC1-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC1-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OC1 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC1 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC1-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OC1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OC1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOC1R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OC1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in IEEE
OC1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
OC1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OC1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OC1-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OC1-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OC1-OPMD Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OC1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OC1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
OC2 OC2-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OC2-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC2-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OC2 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC2 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC2-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOC2 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OC2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OC2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OC2-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OC2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OC2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OC2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOC2R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OC2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OC2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in IEEE
OC2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
OC2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OC2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OC2-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OC2-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OC2-OPMD Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OC2-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OC2-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
OC3 OC3-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OC3-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC3-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OC3 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC3 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC3-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOC3 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OC3-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OC3-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OC3-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OC3-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OC3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OC3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOC3R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OC3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OC3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in IEEE
OC3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Dependent reset time multiplier in US 1.000
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OC3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OC3-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OC3-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OC3-OPMD Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OC3-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OC3-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
OC4 OC4-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OC4-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC4-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OC4 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC4 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OC4-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOC4 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OC4-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OC4-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OC4-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OC4-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OC4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OC4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOC4R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OC4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OC4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OC4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in IEEE
OC4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
OC4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OC4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OC4-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OC4-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OC4-OPMD Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OC4-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OC4-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
2.5.8 Data ID
Signal monitoring points
OC(Function ID: 440001)
Element ID Name Description
8500001B62 OC-ARC-BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by OC protection operation
To simplify the description, only EF1 is discussed but is applicable to the other EFs;
hence, read the expression for EF1 as EF2, EF3 and EF4 at each EF stage unless a special
explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.6-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– DT characteristic ✓ ✓
– IDMT characteristic ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Reference voltage or
θ Polarizing voltage (−3Vo)
φ
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional EF element, provide the
settings for the directional EF element: for example, the user can set the threshold value (IEF)
for stage 1 with the setting [EF1-DT] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir].
Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [EF1-Angle] with the value of θ set
in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.6-2 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic using
the θ. The operation of the EF element is based upon the following equation.
3𝐼0 ≥ 𝐼𝐸𝐹 (2.6-1)
3𝐼0 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (2.6-2)
3𝑉0 ≥ 𝐸𝐹_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (2.6-3)
where
3Io = residual current
3Vo = residual voltage
−3Vo = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
φ= lagging angle
θ = EF setting angle
IEF = Setting value of the EF element ([EF1-DT] and the others)
EF_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([EF1-Vpol])
Note: In the case of an internal fault, the phase angle is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system, in a directly-earthed system this value is
in the range of approximately 50° to 90°. The sensing angle θ of the EF element can
be set between 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to maintain
directionality can be set from 0.5 to 100.0 V.
Reverse
θ=30°
θ=90°
Angle line
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
Forward Reverse
Reverse
−3Vo −3Vo
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the EF
element by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switches later.
(i) DT characteristic
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the
level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in section (iv).
k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (2.6-4)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are defined in Table 2.6-2. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each EF stage. Figure 2.6-3 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switches [EF1-Timer]. (That is, “IEC-NI” is for IEC Normal
Inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK
Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse,
“IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8”
for US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT operation, the user can also program the characteristic using
time-multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, the IEC
characteristic is selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [EF1-TMS-IEC]
(incidentally, the default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the
[EF1-TMS-UK], [EF1-TMS-IEEE], [EF1-TMS-US] and [EF1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.6-2 Constants for IDMT
Curve type
Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151)
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [EF1-Timer]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
Instantaneous activation
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEF1], but the
instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)” is programmed to be
injected at the PLC connection point “EF1_INST_OP”.
defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
𝑡(I) = 𝑅𝑇𝑀𝑆 × [ β
] (2.6-2)
I
1 − ( ⁄I )
s
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
β = constants defining curve.
For setting the RTMS for the IEEE standard, the user can use setting [EF1-RTMS-IEEE]
(incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings [EF1-RTMS-US] and
[EF1-RTMS-ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original, respectively (For more
information w.r.t the values for the kr and β, see Table 2.6-3; Figure 2.6-4 shows the
characteristic curves).
Figure 2.6-5 illustrates the effect of invers-time-reset on the internal time delay counter.
An object current (I), where I is greater than a setting (IS) provides an energizing quantity for
the function which continues to flow for a cumulative period causing the operation of the
function. If the operating quantity falls below the value of IS setting, the function will return
to its reset state after time t(I). Time t(I) is calculated using equation (2.6-2).
start time disengaging time
Energizing
quantity I > Is
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)
DT
✓
Scheme switch [EF1-Timer]
IEC-NI
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[EF1-Rtimer]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
is energized. For example, for the EF1 element, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is provided,
and Block should be set when the user wishes to block the EF1 element when the second
harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present. Non is set for the scheme switch
[EF1-2fBlk] as the default setting. For more information about the ICD function, see Chapter
Relay application: Inrush current detection function.
8000011C23
EF1†
8000011C27
EF1 TEF1
&
8000011B60 To Grouping logic
& &
t 0
EF1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 EF-OPT-ALARM
EF2-OPT- ALARM
EF3-OPT- ALARM
EF4-OPT- ALARM
EF1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 EF-ARC-BLOCK
EF2- ARC-BLOCK
EF3- ARC-BLOCK
EF4- ARC-BLOCK
To Recording
EF1-OPT EF1-OPT
EF2-OPT EF2-OPT
EF3-OPT EF3-OPT
EF4-OPT EF4OPT
2.6.7 Setting
Setting of EF(Function ID:441001)
Default setting
Range
value
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection enable Off
OCN2-EN Off / On - OCN2 protection enable Off
OCN3-EN Off / On - OCN3 protection enable Off
OCN4-EN Off / On - OCN4 protection enable Off
EF1 EF1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
EF1-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF1-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
EF1-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
EF1 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
EF1 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
EF1-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
EF1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
EF1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
EF1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
EF1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
EF1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
EF1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TEF1R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
EF1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
EF1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
EF1-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
EF1-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
EF1-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
EF1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
EF1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
EF2 EF2-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
EF2-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF2-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
EF2-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
EF2 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40
EF2 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40
EF2-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
TEF2 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
EF2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
EF2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
EF2-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
EF2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
EF2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
EF2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TEF2R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
EF2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
EF2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
EF2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
EF2-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
EF2-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
EF2-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
EF2-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
EF2-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
EF3 EF3-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
EF3-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF3-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
EF3-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
EF3 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40
EF3 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40
EF3-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TEF3 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
EF3-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
EF3-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
EF3-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
EF3-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
EF3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
EF3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TEF3R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
EF3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
EF3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
EF3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
EF3-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
EF3-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
EF3-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
EF3-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
EF3-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
EF4 EF4-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
EF4-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF4-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
EF4-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
EF4 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40
EF4 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40
EF4-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TEF4 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
EF4-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
EF4-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
EF4-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
EF4-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
EF4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
EF4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TEF4R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
EF4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
EF4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
EF4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
EF4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
EF4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
EF4-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
EF4-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
EF4-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
EF4-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
EF4-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
2.6.8 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
EF(Function ID: 441001)
Element ID Name Description
8500001B62 EF-ARC-BLOCK Block for issuing autoreclose signal in the EF function
8200011B62 EF1-ARC-BLOCK Block for issuing autoreclose signal in the EF1 element
8200021B62 EF2-ARC-BLOCK Block for issuing autoreclose signal in the EF2 element
8200031B62 EF3-ARC-BLOCK Block for issuing autoreclose signal in the EF3 element
8200041B62 EF4-ARC-BLOCK Block for issuing autoreclose signal in the EF4 element
To simplify the description, only OCN1 is discussed but is applicable to the other OCNs;
hence, read the expression for OCN1 as OCN2, OCN3, and OCN4 at each stage unless a
special explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.7-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Reference voltage or
θ Polarizing voltage (−V2)
φ
I2
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional OCN element, provide the
settings for the directional OCN element: for example, the user can set the threshold value
(IOCN) for stage 1 with the setting [OCN1-DT] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch
[OCN1-Dir]. Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [OCN1-Angle] with
the value of θ in the range of 0–180°. Figure 2.7-2 shows an example of an angle and a
characteristic using the θ.
The operation decision of OCN uses the following equation:
𝐼2 ≥ 𝐼𝑂𝐶𝑁 (2.7-1)
𝐼2 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (2.7-2)
𝑉2 ≥ 𝑂𝐶𝑁_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (2.7-3)
where
I2 = Negative phase sequence current
V2 = Negative phase sequence voltage
−V2 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
Φ = lagging angle
θ = OCN setting angle ([OCN1-Angle])
IOCN = Setting value of OCN ([OCN1-DT] and the others])
OCN_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([OCN1-Vpol])
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the
zero-sequence impedance of the system; this value ranges approximately from 50°
to 90°. The θ of OCN can be set from 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to
maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 180 V.
Reverse
θ=30°
θ=90°
Angle line
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
For the reset time delay in the IDMT, either inverse (dependent)-time-reset or
definite(independent)-time-reset is characterized by the setting.
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OCN
element using scheme switches. We shall see the scheme switches later.
(i) DT characteristic
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time; it is not affected by the level
of the negative-sequence current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed
immediately. The user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in sections (iv).
pre-installed characteristic curves and one user-original characteristic carver where the user
can set the equation parameters. The inverse-time-reset curve equation and parameters will
be discussed in section (v).
k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (2.7-4)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are tabulated in Table 2.7-2;
additionally, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen
for each OCN stage by setting. Figure 2.7-3 illustrates these characteristic curves. For
example, the user should set one for the scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]: “IEC-NI” for IEC
Normal Inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI”
for UK Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very
Inverse, “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse,
“US-CO8” for US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.
In the IDMT operation, the user can also program the characteristic using
time-multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC
characteristic is selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [OCN1-TMS-IEC]
(incidentally, the default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the
[OCN1-TMS-UK], [OCN1-TMS-IEEE], [OCN1-TMS-US] and [OCN1-TMS-ORG].
Table 2.7-2 Constants for IDMT
Curve type
Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151)
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]. The value of the required
operate time is set for the setting [TOCN1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
Instantaneous activation
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOCN1], but
the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal “1 (High)” is programmed to
be injected at PLC connection point “OCN1_INST_OP”.
equation defines the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
𝑡(I) = 𝑅𝑇𝑀𝑆 × [ β
] (2.7-2)
I
1 − ( ⁄I )
s
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
β = constants defining curve.
For setting the RTMS for the IEEE standard, the user can use setting
[OCN1-RTMS-IEEE] (incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings
[OCN1-RTMS-US] and [OCN1-RTMS-ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original,
respectively (For more information w.r.t the values for kr and β, see Table 2.7-3; Figure 2.7-4
shows the characteristic curves).
Start (pick-up)
signal
Operate signal
Operate level of
the integrator
Value of internal
time delay counter
(integrator)
DT
✓
Scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]
IEC-NI
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
[OCN1-Rtimer]
N.A
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
when a transformer is energized. For example, for the OCN1 element, the scheme switch
[OCN1-2fBlk] is provided, and Block should be set when the user wishes to block the OCN1
element when the second harmonic associated with magnetizing inrush is present. Non is set
for the scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] as the default setting. For more information about the
ICD function, see Chapter Relay application: Inrush current detection function.
8000011C23
OCN1†
8000011C27
For DT characteristic OCN1PU†
OCN1 TOCN1
&
8000011B60 To Grouping logic
& &
t 0
8000011BB0
ORIGINAL
800001EBB0 OCN1_BLOCK
8000011BB1
800001EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP
OCN1-OPT-ALARM ≥1 OCN-OPT-ALARM
OCN2-OPT- ALARM
OCN3-OPT- ALARM
OCN4-OPT- ALARM
OCN1-ARC-BLOCK ≥1 OCN-ARC-BLEFK
OCN2- ARC-BLOCK
OCN3- ARC-BLOCK
OCN4- ARC-BLOCK To Recording
OCN1-OPT OCN1-OPT
OCN2-OPT OCN2-OPT
OCN3-OPT OCN3-OPT
OCN4-OPT OCN4OPT
2.7.7 Setting
Setting of OCN(Function ID:443001)
Default setting
Range
value
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection enable Off
OCN2-EN Off / On - OCN2 protection enable Off
OCN3-EN Off / On - OCN3 protection enable Off
OCN4-EN Off / On - OCN4 protection enable Off
OCN1 OCN1-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OCN1-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OCN1-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OCN1-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
OCN1 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN1 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN1-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOCN1 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OCN1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OCN1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OCN1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OCN1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OCN1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OCN1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOCN1R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OCN1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OCN1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
OCN1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OCN1-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OCN1-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OCN1-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OCN1-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OCN1-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
OCN2 OCN2-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OCN2-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OCN2-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OCN2-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
OCN2 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN2 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN2-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
TOCN2 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OCN2-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OCN2-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OCN2-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OCN2-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OCN2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OCN2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOCN2R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OCN2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN2-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN2-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OCN2-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
OCN2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OCN2-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OCN2-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OCN2-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OCN2-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OCN2-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
OCN3 OCN3-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OCN3-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OCN3-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OCN3-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
OCN3 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN3 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN3-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOCN3 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OCN3-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OCN3-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OCN3-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OCN3-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OCN3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OCN3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOCN3R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OCN3-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN3-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN3-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OCN3-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Notes
Un
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
OCN3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OCN3-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OCN3-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OCN3-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OCN3-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OCN3-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
OCN4 OCN4-Dir NonDir / Forward / Reverse - Directional characteristic NonDir
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI /
UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI /
OCN4-Timer - Delay type DT
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OCN4-Angle 0 - 180 deg Directional characteristic angle 45
OCN4-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V Polarizing voltage level 3.0
OCN4 0.02 - 50.00 0.10 - 250.00 A Threshold (in DT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN4 0.02 - 5.00 0.10 - 25.00 A Threshold (in IDMT mode) 0.40 2.00
OCN4-DPR 10 - 100 % Drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOCN4 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time 1.00
OCN4-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEC inverse curve 1.000
OCN4-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in UK inverse curve 1.000
OCN4-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in IEEE inverse curve 1.000
OCN4-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in US inverse curve 1.000
OCN4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - Time multiplier in custom inverse curve 1.000
OCN4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in IEEE DEF
TOCN4R 0.00 - 300.00 s Definite time reset delay 0.00
OCN4-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN4-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN4-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN4-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OCN4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in US DEF
OCN4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - Reset delay type in ORG DEF
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
IEEE inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in US
OCN4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
inverse curve
Dependent reset time multiplier in
OCN4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000
Original inverse curve
OCN4-2fBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for detection of 2f Non
OCN4-VTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for VTF Non
OCN4-CTFBlk Non / Block - Blocking operation for CTF Non
OCN4-UseFor Trip / Alarm - Signal issued for tripping or alarming Trip
OCN4-ARCBlk Non / Block - Blocking autoreclose Block
2.7.8 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
OCN(Function ID: 443001)
Element ID Name Description
OCN-ARC-BLOCK 8500001B62 Autoreclose block signal by OCN protection
THM has an exponential characteristics in accordance with the IEC 60255-149 standard.
THM determines both the I2R loss and the cooling effect of the coolant simultaneously; THM
also determines the pre-load condition and signals a trip signal when an overload condition
arises.
THM issues a trip signal in accordance with an alarm stage that reflects the
temperature of the thermal overload condition. The alarm stage is configured using a setting;
hence, the user should determine the appropriate setting so that a trip signal can be issued
before the apparatus is overheated
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.8-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Thermal state 0% is the cold state, whereas 100% reflects the thermal limit—which is
the point at which no further temperature rise can be tolerated safely and the system should
be disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is subject to setting [THM], which
determines the value of overload current. The THM signals a trip when the value of θ is at
100%.
where,
q: Unbalance factor; the unbalance factor is used for motor/generator protection; the
user should set q=0 when setting [THM-q] except when it is applied to
motor/generator protection.
†Note:If the user prefers to use the thermal characteristic for the THM function specified
in IEC 60255-8, set Max phase for the scheme switch [THM-Itype]. In this case,
THM is determined using the largest of the three-phase currents.
The period of time for a trip to occur depends not only on the degree of overload, but also
on the degree of load current as far as reaching the overload state. The period of the trip, that
is, depends on whether the overload is applied from ‘cold’ or ‘hot’. THM has thresholds for
alarm and trip; hence, the two thresholds exist independently.
In Equation (2.8-3), cold curves are special versions of the hot curves where Ip is zero,
catering for the situation where a cold system is switched onto an immediate overload.
Figure 2.8-1.a shows the cold state where an overload has been switched onto a
previously un-loaded system. Figure 2.8-1.b shows the hot state where an overload is switched
onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity. The figures are in
conformity with the IEC 60255-149 curves, and these curves are drawn in a range of settings
of the time constant ().
a.Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no prior load) b. Thermal Curves (Hot Curve - 90% prior load))
100
50
20
10
5
The threshold level for the alarm is set using setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the
tripping threshold. The alarm signal is disabled when Off is set for scheme switch [THMA-EN].
The trip signal is prevented when Off is set for scheme switch [THMT-EN]. PLC signals
THMA_BLOCK and THMT_BLOCK are used to block the operation of THM.
≥1 THM-OPT-TRIP
A 8100021C23 & & 8100021B60
THM 8400011B23
B THM-OPT-ALARM
&
& &
THMA-EN ON
& THM-ARC-BLOCK
THMT-EN ON
800001EBB0 THMA_BLOCK 1
810002EBB0 THMT_BLOCK 1
Trip
THMA-UseFor
Alarm
2.8.4 Setting
Setting of THM(Function ID: 451001)
Default setting
Range
Un value Note
Setting item Contents
its 1A 5A s
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Thermal setting THM-EN Off / On - Thermal protection enable Off
THM 0.4 – 2.0 2.0 – 10.0 A Thermal overload current 1.0 5.0
mi
TTHM 0.5 – 500.0 Thermal time constant 10.0
n
mi
TTHM-rad 0.5 – 500.0 Thermal time constant 10.0
n
THMA-EN Off / On - Thermal alarm enable Off
THMT-EN Off / On - Thermal protection enable Off
THM-Itype Max phase/ Equivalent - Selection of THM equations Equivalent
THM unbalance factor multiplied by
Equivalent THM-q 0 – 10 - 0
I2
Output TFM-UseFor Trip / Alarm - THM used for trip or alarm Trip
Thermal alarm level multiplier
Alarm THM-Alarm 50 – 100 % 80
(Percentage of [THM] setting)
To utilize the setting[THM-IP], and
Test setting THM-Test Off / On - To change the reset delay to Off
instantaneous reset
Previous load current for thermal
THM-IP 0.00 - 1.00 0.00 - 5.00 A 0.00/0.00
testing
2.8.5 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
THM(Function ID: 451001)
Element ID Name Description
8000011C23 THM-A THM relay element operated (Alarm)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.9-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
k1 1– k1
I1F I1F
k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
E1A
E1B
Zero sequence
I1F
k1Z1 k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
E1A Z0 E1B
The series fault results in positive sequence current (I1F), negative sequence current (I2F)
and zero phase sequence current (I0F) in the single-phase. These are given by
𝐼1𝐹 + 𝐼2𝐹 + 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (2.9-1)
𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 ∙ 𝑍0𝐹 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (2.9-2)
𝐸1𝐴 ∙ 𝐸1𝐵 = 𝑍1𝐹 𝐼1𝐹 ∙ 𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 (2.9-3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From Equation (2.9-1), (2.9-2), and (2.9-3), the following equations are derived:
𝑍2 + 𝑍0
𝐼1𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (2.9-4)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍0
𝐼2𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (2.9-5)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍2
𝐼0𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (2.9-6)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the impedance across the system, the
difference in phase angle, and the magnitude between the power source voltages behind both
ends.
As noted earlier, the BCD element detects the presence of a fault by measuring the ratio
between the negative sequence current and the positive sequence current (I2F/I1F). The ratio is
obtained from the negative sequence impedance (Z2) and the zero sequence impedance (Z0);
hence, the equation of the ratio is expressed as follows:
𝐼2𝐹 |𝐼2𝐹 | 𝑍0
= = (2.9-7)
𝐼1𝐹 |𝐼1𝐹 | 𝑍2 + 𝑍0
A ratio value of 0.5 or higher is obtained when the zero sequence impedance is larger
than the negative sequence impedance. The ratio, thus, is close to 1.0 if the system is
high-impedance earthed or a single-end earthed system.
I2
|𝐼2 |
|𝐼1 | ≥ 𝐵𝐶𝐷 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
BCD
|𝐼1 | ≥ 0.04 × 𝐼𝑛 &
|𝐼2 | ≥ 0.01 × 𝐼𝑛
0.01×In
o I1
0.04×In
Normal power system levels of negative phase sequence restrict the setting value of
[BCD]. The BCD function continuously determines the ratio (I2F/I1F). User can check the
present ratio along with the maximum value (I21 max) that has been examined for 15 minutes
ago. We recommend that user should distinguish the present ratio against the value on
commissioning stage; and user should set a value for [BCD] from 130% to 150% of the ratio
has been checked.
Note: The ratio (I2F/ I1F) is displayed only when the current in positive-sequence (or load
current) on the secondary circuit is larger than 2% of the rated current on
secondary circuit.
2.9.5 Setting
Setting of BCD(Function ID: 452001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
2.9.6 Data ID
Although a trip signal will have been issued by other protection functions, CBF
protection has relay elements and timers that are used to detect the continuing presence of a
fault following the issuance of a trip signal. The relay elements are termed OCCBF† and
EFCBF†, which run as protection functions within CBF.
†Note:The CBF function consists of two stages and their stages are operated
independently. Thus, the settings/switches/logics for two stages are provided
separately. To simply the description, only settings/switches/logics for the stage 1
are discussed as a representative, but the ones for the stage 2 are applicable in the
CBF function; hence the user can read the expression for the stage 1 as for the
stage 2 unless a special explanation or instructions has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.10-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
The operation of these elements is reset if the threshold values of currents, applied by
the setting of [OCCBF1] and [EFCBF1], are below 80% of their setting value.
To enable the “re-trip” feature, set On-AftRe for scheme switch [CBF1-Trip]. There are
two operation modes (internal and external mode) for “re-trip”; the user can select the desired
mode using scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip]:
Internal mode
If On is set for scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip] the CBF function is armed for issuing a
“re-trip” command. OCCBF and EFCBF control the “re-trip” signal along with trip
signals coming from other functions.
External mode
When On-T is set for scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], the CBF function is armed
forissuing a “re-trip” following tripping by external protection functions only. The
external protection functions can operate using PLC connection points in the TRC
function. If external mode is selected, an external CBF start signal must be present
continuously for as long as the fault is present.
For the re-trip operation, On should be set for both scheme switches [OCCBF1] and
[EFCBF1]. When a delay timer is needed for “re-trip”, a setting [TCBF1-RE] is available. A
setting time can be chosen between 0 and 300.000sec, the time setting to be applied must be
determined in accordance with the response time of the CB. The setting time is addressed
One of the benefits of the “re-trip” function is that it can used to avoid accidental
tripping of an adjacent CB or an upstream CB. This is particularly requisite during
maintenance and testing of the system.
Retrip
2.10.3 Backup feature Normal trip
trip again. If “re-trip” cannot remove the fault, CBF will issue a “back-trip” command.
Back-tripping is used as a last resort to remove the fault.
On
Trip signal
Off Trip signal Trip signal Off
Normal trip Re-trip
Target CB Closed
Toc Tcb
Run
OCCBF element Stop Toc Toc Stop
Timer#1
Start TCBF-RE
Timer#1 (TCBF-RE) Off
On
Operation of Re-trip Off Off
Timer#2
Start TCBF-TP
Timer#2 (TCBF-TP) Off
On
CBF trip signal Off Off
Figure 2.10-1 Timing chart for re-trip and back trip during CBF operation
Figure 2.10-1 is a sequence diagram for the CBF function; the overall sequence
illustrated shows a target CB failing to remove a fault with the consequence that back
tripping of the adjacent CB(s) is required following operation of the CBF protection to finally
clear the fault. The CBF function is initiated via a signal from other protection functions.
If the target CB is tripped normally on receipt of a trip signal so that the fault is
removed, both OCCBF and EFCBF will reset before the time settings of timer #1 and timer #2
have elapsed.
Following the issue of the first trip signal, if either OCCBF or EFCBF were to continue
to operate and if timer #1 were to time out according to the timer setting value [TCBF1-RE], a
“re-trip” command would be issued to the target CB. If the target CB were to open to clear the
fault in response to the “re-trip” command, OCCBF and EFCBF would reset and the CBF
sequence is stopped.
If the target CB were to fail to remove the fault with the “re-trip” command, and if
OCCBF or EFCBF continued to operate and if the timer #2 were to time out in accordance
with the setting time applied [TCBF1-TP], CBF will issue a trip signal to the adjacent CB(s) to
clear the fault, as a last resort.
CBF issues trip signals (CBF1-RETRIP) when OCCBF1 and EFCBF1 operate
continuously until expiration of timer settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP]. Setting
[TCBF1-RE] is overridden when On is set for scheme switch [CBF1-TRIP].
Figure 2.10-2 shows that the CBF will operate with OCCBF1, EFCBF1, and PLC signal
“EXT.CBF-START” (internal mode).
CBF1_START-B
CBF1_START-C
8000011C20
TCBF1-RE
OCCBF1 A
t 0
& CBF1_RETRIP-A
8100011C21 ≥1 & & ≥1 ≥1 ○
1
B
t 0 CBF1_RETRIP-B
8200011C22 & ≥1 & & ≥1 ≥1
C
t 0
& CBF1_RETRIP-C
≥1 & & ≥1 ≥1
OCCBF-EN ON 0.000-300.000s
8400011C27
& ≥1 CBF1_RETRIP
EFCBF1
&
OCCBF-EN &
ON
& To TRC
From 8000011B20
TRC GEN.TRIP-A &
≥1 CBF1_RETRIP-A
TRC 8100011B21
GEN.TRIP-B
≥1 & CBF1_RETRIP-B
GEN.TRIP-C 8200011B22
≥1 & CBF1_RETRIP-C
OFF 8300011B23
800001EBB0 EXT.CBF1_START-A ON
CBF1-Retrip & CBF1_RETRIP
810001EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-B ON-
T &
820001EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-C
CBF-EN ON
CBF-EN-ON
830001EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START
810001EBB5 CBF1-RE_INST
8800011B24
TCBF1-TP
CBF1_START-A t 0
CBF1_TRIP-A
& ≥1 ≥1 8900011B25
CBF1_START-B t 0
CBF1_TRIP-B
& ≥1 ≥1 8A00011B26
CBF1_START-C t 0
CBF1_TRIP-C
& ≥1 ≥1 8B00011B27
0.000-300.000s
○
1
CBF1_TRIP
CBF1-RETRIP-A ≥1
& &
CBF1-RETRIP-B
& &
CBF1-RETRIP-C
& & To TRC
≥1 CBF1_ARC-BLOCK
CBF1-RETRIP
OFF
ON &
CBF1-Trip ON-AftRe
&
CBF-EN-ON
CBF1-NON_BLOCK
820001EBB6 CBF1-TP_INST
The time settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP] are determined in relation to the
opening time of the target CB and the reset time of the OCCBF or EFCBF elements (see Toc
and Tcb in Figure 2.10-1). The following description illustrates a setting calculation example
when “re-trip” is used:
Setting of TCBF-TP =TCBF-RE + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
OCCBF/EFCBF reset time + Margin
=70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
=140ms
If “re-trip” were to be unused, the setting of [TCBF1-TP] should be the same as the
setting for [TCBF1-RE].
2.10.6 Setting
Setting of CBF(Function ID: 453001)
Un Default setting
Setting item Range Contents Notes
its value
2.10.7 Data ID
Signal monitoring points
CBF(Function ID: 453001)
Element ID Name Description
8000011C20 OCCBF1-A OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-A)
For the 1.5CB arrangement, a voltage transformer (VT) is generally installed along the
line GH. The figure shows that the line GH is taken out of service because of the DS being
open; hence, a distance relay in the IED_G cannot detect a fault when a fault occurs in the
‘stub’ zone. This is because a faulted voltage cannot be measured correctly using the VTG.
Thereby, an overcurrent relay (OC) is provided to protect the ‘stub’ zone and the OC relay
operates speedy upon occurrence of the fault.
CT1G CT1H
CB1G CB1H
Fault
Line GH
DS
CB CB
Terminal-G Terminal-H
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware
and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To
determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the
IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “G&T position” referring to the
comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.11-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
0 I
To TRC
8000001B60
OCSTUB-OR
≥1
8000011C20
A 8000001B20
& & STUBOC-TRIP-A
8100011C21
OCSTUB B
8100001B21
& & STUBOC-TRIP-B
8200011C22
8200001B22
C & & STUBOC-TRIP-C
ICD-B & ≥1
STUBOC-ARC-BLOCK
ICD-C & ≥1
STUBOC-OPT-A
≥1
& STUBOC-OPT-B
STUBOC-OPT-C
Block-3P
STUBOC-2PBlk
Block-PerP
STUBOC-EN On
&
To Recording
800000EBB0 STUBOC_BLOCK 1 STUBOC-TRIP
&
From PROT COMMON
DS_OPEN
≥1
STUB-Test On
Scheme switch [OCSTUB-2fBlk] is provided in order that the OCSTBU element should
be blocked when second-harmonic frequency components (2f) are detected on the flowing
currents. Either Block-3P or Block-PerP should be set for the scheme switch
[OCSTUB-2fBlk]: the Block-3P is used when the trip signal should be blocked when the 2f is
observed in three-phase; whereas the Block-PerP is used when the trip signal should be
blocked when 2f is observed in a phase. The user can program a block signal using PLC
connection point “STUBOC_BLOCK”.
2.11.3 Setting
Setting of STUBOC(Function ID: 455001)
U Default setting
Range
n value
Setting item i Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
t
rating rating rating rating
s
STUBOC-EN Off/On Stub-OC protection enable Off
OCSTUB 0.02-3.00 0.10-15.00 A OC relay for stub threshold 1.20 6.00
Non/Block-3P/Block-Per OCSTUB operation block by
OCSTUB-2fBlk Non
P 2f-detection
2.11.4 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
STUB_OC(Function ID: 455001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001C20 OCSTUB-A STUBOC relay element operated (phase-A)
To simplify the description, only OV1 is discussed, but the expression is applicable to the
OV2; hence, read the expression for OV1 as the OV2 unless a special explanation or
instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.12-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Pick-up characteristic
The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to
the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.12-2 shows the invers time characteristic of the OV
element when a multiplier setting [OV1-TMS] is used. The OV element uses Equation (2.12-1)
to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (2.12-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 2.12-2.
For example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OV1 element will be acquired
when Original is set for the scheme switch [OV1-Timer], and when values of respective
constants are set for [OV1-k], [OV1-a], and [OV1-C].
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Reset feature
The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 2.12-3 shows that examples of the pick-up
and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of
the time counter furnished in the OV1 element is incremented if faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OV1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOV1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time
counter reaches at trip level, the OV1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay.
After issuing the trip command, if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip
command, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOV1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OV1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TOV1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset
threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OV1 element is reset promptly.
Condition fault occurrence
Intermittent fault Series faults
T3
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T1: Resetting time set by the user counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation Value maintenance of time counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 2.12-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied
†Note:For more information about the trip circuit, see Chapter Relay application: Trip
circuit.
OV1-EN On
To Grouping logic
8000011C20 TOV1 8000011B62
A & &
t 0
8100011C21 & OV1-OPT-A
≥1 8100011B63
OV1 B & t 0
8200011C22 & & OV1-OPT-B
≥1
C 8200011B64
& & &
t 0
≥1 OV1-OPT-C
8000011B60
0.00 to 300.00s
≥1
8000011C24 8000011B65
A & OV1-OPT
8100011C25 ≥1
OV1 PU B &
8200011C26
8000011B23
C & OV1-OPT-TRIP
&
8100011B66
8000011B61 & OV1-OPT-ALARM
≥1
800001EBB0 OV1_BLOCK ≥1 1
OV1-VTFBlk Block
& Trip
From VTF OV1-UseFor
Alarm
VTF_DETECT
≥1
OV1-OPT-ALARM OV-OPT-ALARM
OV2-OPT- ALARM
≥1
OV1-ARC-BLOCK OV-ARC-BLOCK
OV2- ARC-BLOCK
OV1-OPT-AR ≥1 OV-OPT-AR
OV1-OPT-BR OV-OPT-BR
OV1-OPT-CR OV-OPT-CR
≥1
OV2-OPT-AR
OV2-OPT-BR
OV2-OPT-CR
≥1
To Recording
OV1-OPT OV1-OPT
OV2-OPT OV2-OPT
2.12.7 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
OV(Function ID: 460101)
Element ID Name Description
8800001B62 OV-OPT-A OV protection operated (phase-A)
To simplify the description, only OVS1 is discussed, but the expression is applicable to
OVS2; hence, read the expression for OVS1 as the OVS2 stage unless a special explanation or
instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.13-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (2.13-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 2.13-2.
For example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OVS1 element will be acquired
when Original is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-Timer], and when values of respective
constants are set for [OVS1-k], [OVS1-a], and [OVS1-C].
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Reset feature
The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 2.13-3 shows that examples of the pick-up
and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of
the time counter furnished in the OVS1 element is incremented if faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVS1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOVS1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time
counter reaches at trip level, the OVS1 element will issue a trip command after a certain
delay. After issuing the trip command, if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing
the trip command, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOVS1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVS1 element immediately,
setting zero for the settings [TOVS1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the
reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OVS1 element is reset promptly.
Intermittent fault
Condition fault occurrence Series faults
T3
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
T1: Resetting time set by the user Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time Value maintenance of time counter
Figure 2.13-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied
failure.
8000011B65
8000011C24 & OVS1-OPT
≥1
AB
8100011C25 & OVS2-OPT
OVS1 PU BC
8200011C26
& & OVS-OPT-TRIP
CA ≥1
& ≥1 OVS-OPT-ALARM
≥1 8000011B61
OVS-OPT-BLOCK
OVS1-EN On
Block
OVS1-VTFBlk & ≥1 1
800001EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
Original ≥1
OVS1-Timer
Trip
Alarm
OVS1-UseFor
OVS2-OPT-AB
OVS2-EN On
OVS2-OPT-BC
Block & The logics of OVS2 and OVS2 PU are the same as the
OVS2-VTFBlk logics of OVS1 and OVS2 PU. OVS2-OPT-CA
OVS2-OPT-ALAR
OVS2-Timer
M
OVS2-UseFor OVS2-OPT
From VTF
VTF_DETECT
2.13.7 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
OVS(Function ID: 461101)
Element ID Name Description
8C00001B62 OVS-OPT-AB OVS protection operated (phase-AB)
The low voltage setting, which may be applied for an OVG element, is susceptible to any
third harmonic component that may be superimposed on an input signal. Therefore, the
function incorporates the filter to suppress the third harmonic component.
To simplify the description, only OVG1 is discussed but is applicable to OVG2; hence,
read the expression for OVG1 as OVG2 for the OVG 2nd stage unless a special explanation or
instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.14-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
For example, with regard to the OVG1 element, suppose the user sets a pick-up value in
P.U for setting [OVG1]. Then the user should set a drop-off value using setting [OVG1-DPR],
which configures the ratio of the PU to the DO.
Operation feature
The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to
the level of the voltage condition. Figure 2.14-1 shows the invers time characteristic of the
OVG element when a multiplier setting is used. The OVG element uses (2.14-1) to be in
conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (2.14-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 2.14-2.
For example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OVG1 element will be acquired
when Original is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-Timer], and when values of respective
constants are set for [OVG1-k], [OVG1-a], and [OVG1-C].
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVG1 element is paralyzed in the reset
time set by [TOVG1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time
counter reaches at trip level, the OVG1 element will issue a trip command after a certain
delay. After issuing the trip command, if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing
the trip command, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time
[TOVG1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVG1 element immediately,
setting zero for the settings [TOVG1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the
reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OVG1 element is reset promptly.
Intermittent fault Series faults
Condition fault occurrence
T3
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
T1: Resetting time set by the user Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time Value maintenance of time counter
Figure 2.14-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied
OVG1
& TOVG1 8000011B60
& t 0
8000011C27 & ≥1 OVG1-OPT
OVG1 PU
0.00-300.00s
OVG1-EN On &
VTF_DETECT
&
≥1 1
OVG1-VTFBlk
OV1-VTFBlk
CB_LOSS_PHASE
OVG1-BLOCK 8000011B23
8300011B23
DT &
IDMT ≥1 OVG-OPT-TRIP
OVG1-Time
Original Trip 8100021B61
≥1
OVG1-UseFor 8400001B61
Alarm &
≥1 OVG-OPT-ALARM
OVG2-OPT-TRIP
OVG-ARC-BLOCK
8100021B61
OVG2-OPT-ALARM
8100021B60
OVG2-OPT
2.14.6 Setting
Setting of OVG(Function ID: 462101)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
OVG1-EN Off / On – Enabling OVG1 protection Off
OVG2-EN Off / On – Enabling OVG2 protection Off
OVG1 OVG1-Timer DT / IDMT / Original – Selection of delay type DT
OVG1 1.0 - 220.0 V Threshold setting 20.0
OVG1-DPR 10 - 100 % Setting drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOVG1 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
OVG1-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 – Time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TOVG1R 0.0 - 300.0 – Definite time reset delay 0.0
OVG1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 – User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVG1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 – User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVG1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 – User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVG1 OVG1-VTFBlk Non / Block – Blocking OVG1 operation during VTF Non
Output OVG1-UseFor Trip / Alarm – Signal issued for trip or alarm Trip
OVG2 OVG2-Timer DT / IDMT / Original – Selection of delay type DT
OVG2 1.0 - 220.0 V Threshold setting 20.0
OVG2-DPR 10 - 100 % Setting drop-out/pick-up ratio 100
TOVG2 0.00 - 300.00 s Operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00
OVG2-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 – Time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000
TOVG2R 0.0 - 300.0 – Definite time reset delay 0.0
OVG2-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 – User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVG2-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 – User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVG2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 – User original curve coefficient 0.00000
OVG2 OVG2-VTFBlk Non / Block Blocking OVG2 operation during VTF Non
Output OVG2-UseFor Trip / Alarm Signal issued for trip or alarm Trip
2.14.7 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
OVG(Function ID: 462101)
Element ID Name Description
8400001B61 OVG-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG protection
Each UV stage (element) detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-earth. The user
can set a threshold and the ratio of a drip-out voltage (DO) to a pick-up voltage (PU) in the UV
element. To simplify the description, only the UV1 element is described, but the expression is
applicable to the UV2; hence, read the expression for the UV1 element as the UV2 unless a
special explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.15-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
The inner circle shows the area in which the UV function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVBLK]. Setting [TUVBLK] is also provided so that the user can
delay blocking the UV1 and UV2 elements using the setting.
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎] + 𝑐} (2.15-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach
the trip level. In the other word, the UV1 element will be paralyzed in the reset time [TUV1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration of
series faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UV1 element issues a trip
signal after a certain delay. After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault disappears
completely, the operation of the UV1 element is expired after the reset time [TUV1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the UV1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TUV1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the
reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the UV1 element is reset promptly.
Intermittent fault A series fault
Condition fault occurrence T3
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
T1: Resetting time set by the user Increment process in time
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time Value maintenance of time counter Reset of time counter
Figure 2.15-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied
†Note:For more information about tripping, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.
8000011B20 TUV1
8000011B62
A & t 0 To TRC
8100011B21
& &
≥1 8100011B63 ≥1 UV-OPT-A
UV1 B & t 0
8200011B22 & &
≥1
8200011B64 ≥1 UV-OPT-B
C & t 0
& & ≥1 ≥1 UV-OPT-C
≥1 8000011B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8000011B65
8000011B24 & UV1-OPT
≥1
A
8100011B25 & UV2-OPT
UV1 PU B
8200011B26
& & UV-OPT-TRIP
C ≥1
& ≥1 UV-OPT-ALARM
≥1 8000011B61
UV-ARC-BLOCK
UV1-EN On Trip
UV1-UseFor
Alarm
8000011B60
A ≥1
8100011B61 TUVBLK
UVBLK B t 0
8200011B62
1 ≥1
C
0.00 to
300.00s
UVBLK-EN On
UV-Test On
800001EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN 1
810001EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN 1
8400021C20 &
A
8500021C25 &
UV2 PU B
8600021C26
&
C
≥1 8100021B61
UV2-EN On
800001EBB0 UV1_BLOCK ≥1
1
UV1-VTFBlk Block
&
≥1 1
810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK
UV2-VTFBlk Block
DT
IDMT
Original ≥1
UV2-Timer
2.15.5 Setting
Setting of UV(Function ID: 470101)
Default
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
setting value
2.15.6 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
UV(Function ID: 470101)
Element ID Name Description
8000011C20 UV1-A UV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
Each UVS element detects the under-voltage condition of phase-to-phase. The user can
set a threshold and the ratio of a drip-out voltage (DO) to a pick-up voltage (PU) in the UVS
element. To simplify the description, only the UVS1 element is described, but the expression
is applicable to the UVS2; hence, read the expression for the UVS1 element as the UVS2
unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.16-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
The inner circle shows the area in which the UVS function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVSBLK]. Setting [TUVSBLK] is also provided so that the user can
delay blocking the UVS1 and UVS2 elements using the setting.
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UVS block
Pick-up characteristic
The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UVS1 element is required
inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is
illustrated in Figure 2.16-2 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed
to Equation (2.16-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎] + 𝑐} (2.16-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Drop-off characteristic
The user should set the time for resetting in the IDMT characteristic. Figure 2.16-3 shows
examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the
operation time. The UVS1 element has a time counter that increases in response to the fault
occurrence and duration. This figure also shows the increment degree of the time counter for
the fault occurrences.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach
the trip level. In the other word, the UVS1 element will be paralyzed in the reset time
[TUVS1R]. If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration
of series faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UVS1 element issues a
trip signal after a certain delay. After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault disappears
completely, the operation of the UVS1 element is expired after the reset time [TUVS1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the UVS1 element immediately,
setting zero for the settings [TUVS1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered
over the reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the UVS1 element is reset promptly.
Condition fault occurrence Intermittent fault A series fault
T3
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
T1: Resetting time set by the user Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time Value maintenance of time counter
Figure 2.16-3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when DT being applied
†Note:For more information about tripping, see Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit.
8000011B20 TUVS1
8000011B62
AB & t 0 To TRC
8100011B21
& &
≥1 8100011B63 ≥1 UVS-OPT-AB
UVS1 BC & t 0
8200011B22 & &
≥1
8200011B64 ≥1 UVS-OPT-BC
CA & t 0
& & ≥1 ≥1 UVS-OPT-CA
≥1 8000011B60
0.00 to 300.00s
8000011B65
8000011B24 & UVS1-OPT
≥1
AB
8100011B25 & UVS2-OPT
V
UVS1 PU BC
8200011B26
& & UVS-OPT-TRIP
CA ≥1
& ≥1 UVS-OPT-ALAR
≥1 8000011B61 M
UVS-ARC-BLOCK
UV1-EN On Trip
UVS1-UseFor
Alarm
8000011B60
AB ≥1
8100011B61 TUVBLK
UVSBLK BC t 0
8200011B62
1 ≥1
CA
0.00 to
300.00s
UVSBLK-EN On
UVS-Test On
800001EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN 1
810001EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN 1
8400021C20 &
AB
8500021C25 &
UVS2 PU BC
8600021C26
&
CA
≥1 8100021B61
UVS2-EN On
800001EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK ≥1
1
UVS1-VTFBlk Block
&
≥1 1
810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK
UVS2-VTFBlk Block
DT
IDMT
Original ≥1
UVS2-Timer
2.16.5 Setting
Setting of UVS(Function ID: 471101)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
2.16.6 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
UVS(Function ID: 471101)
Element ID Name Description
8000001BB0 CB_APH_OPEN A phase CB open
To simplify the description, only stage 1 is discussed, but is applicable to the other
stages; hence, read the express for stage 1 as the other stages unless a special explanation or
instruction has been produced.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.17-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
The user can select the stage 1 to detect either over-frequency state or under-frequency
state using scheme switch [FRQ1-Chara]. For example, If OverFrq is set for the scheme switch
[FRQ1-Chara], the stage 1 determines the over-frequency state when an over frequency is
observed (Figure 2.17-1(a)); the user can set the threshold value into [FRQ1]. Conversely, if
UnderFrq is set for the scheme switch, the stage 1 determines the under-frequency state when
an under frequency is observed (Figure 2.17-1(b)).
The UF or OF element issues a trip signal when the under or over-frequency state is
observed for 16 consecutive times. To adjust the trip signal issuing, the user can use a delay
timer to postpone the trip signal using setting [TFRQ1].
Hz Hz
OF stage 1
operation zone
frequency
Pickup
frequency
Pickup
UF stage 1
operation zone
o o
V V
Pickup voltage (FRQBLK) Pickup voltage (FRQBLK)
a. Over frequency element at Stage 1 b. Under frequency element at Stage 1
Regarding the operation of the UF and OF elements, the user should notice the element
not to pick-up when the measured voltage is below the threshold value set with the [FRQBLK]
in positive sequence. Any operation of the FRQ function is blocked when an acquired voltage
is smaller than the pickup voltage to be set.
user do not require the FRQ operation, Off should be set for the scheme switch.
The under-voltage block (FRQBLK) element is used to block the FRQ operation, as
mentioned earlier (section 2.17.1(i)).
To DFRQ
8700001C23
FRQBLK
(UVBLK)
1 NON FRQBLK
8000011BB1
8000011C23 TFRQ1 8000011B60
& ≥1 t 0
OF & & 800001EBB1 FRQ-S1-OPT FRQ-S1-OPT
FRQ1 1
0.00 - 300.00s To TRC
Trip
UF & ≥1
FRQ1-UseFor
& Alarm FRQ-OPT-TRIP
OverFrq &
UnderFrq
FRQ1-Chara
FRQ-OPT-ALARM
8100021C23 8100021B60 8100021BB1
TFRQ2
& ≥1 t 0 FRQ-OPT-BLOCK
OF & & 810002EBB1 FRQ-S2-OPT FRQ-S2-OPT
FRQ2 1
0.00 - 300.00s
Trip
UF &
FRQ2-UseFor
& Alarm
OverFrq &
UnderFrq
FRQ2-Chara
8500061BB1
8500061C23 TFRQ6 8500061B60
& ≥1 t 0
OF & & 850006EBB1 FRQ-S6-OPT FRQ-S6-OPT
FRQ6 1
0.00 - 300.00s
Trip
UF &
FRQ6-UseFor
& Alarm
OverFrq & ≥1
UnderFrq
FRQ6-Chara
On
FRQ1-EN
On
FRQ2-EN
On
FRQ6-EN
800001EBB0 FRQ1-BLOCK 1
810002EBB0 FRQ2-BLOCK 1
850006EBB0 FRQ6-BLOCK 1
The user can set the state 1 to detect whether a frequency to be rising or to be
descending using scheme switch [DFRQ1-Chara]. For example, when Rise is set for the
scheme switch [DFRQ1-Chara], the DFRQ examines the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt)
in up. Conversely, when Down is set for the scheme switch, the DFRQ examines the gradient
of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) in down. Setting [DFREQ1] is used to configure an operation
threshold; the operation threshold is configured with Hertz per second.
The operation of the RISE/DOWN elements is blocked when the FRQBLK element runs.
That is, if an obtained voltage is below the setting [FRQBLK], any operation of the DFRQ
function is blocked. The FRQBLK element is discussed in section 2.17.1(i).
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
The signal of the under-voltage block (FRQBLK) element is provided from the FRQ logic.
From FRQ
NON FRQBLK
8000111BB1
8000111C23 8000111B60
& ≥1 & & 800011EBB1 FRQ-S1-OPT DFRQ-S1-OPT
RISE
DFRQ1 1
Trip To TRC
DOWN & ≥1
DFRQ1-UseFor
& Alarm DFRQ-OPT-TRIP
OverFrq &
UnderFrq
FFRQ1-Chara
DFRQ-OPT-ALARM
8100121C23 8100121B60 8100121BB1
& ≥1 & & 810012EBB1 FRQ-S2-OPT DFRQ-S2-OPT DFRQ-OPT-BLOCK
RISE
DFRQ2 1
Trip
DOWN &
DFRQ2-UseFor
& Alarm
OverFrq &
UnderFrq
DFRQ2-Chara
8500161BB1
8500161C23 8500161B60
RISE & ≥1 & & 850016EBB1 FRQ-S6-OPT DFRQ-S6-OPT
DFRQ6 1
Trip
DOWN &
DFRQ6-UseFor
& Alarm
OverFrq & ≥1
UnderFrq
DFRQ6-Chara
On
DFRQ1-EN
On
DFRQ2-EN
On
DFRQ6-EN
800011EBB0 DFRQ1-BLOCK 1
810012EBB0 DFRQ2-BLOCK 1
850016EBB0 DFRQ6-BLOCK 1
2.17.3 Setting
Setting of FRQ(Function ID: 475001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
Common FRQBLK 40.0 to 100.0 V Voltage level of FRQ protection blocking 40.0
FRQ1 FRQ1-EN Off/On – FRQ1 protection enable Off
FRQ1-Chara OverFrq/UnderFrq – The selection of FRQ1 character UnderFrq
FRQ1 -10.00 to 10.00 Hz FRQ1 threshold -1.00
TFRQ1 0.00 to 300.00 S FRQ1 operating delay time 1.00
FRQ1-UseFor Trip/Alarm – FRQ1 used for trip or alarm Trip
FRQ2 FRQ2-EN Off/On – FRQ2 protection enable Off
FRQ2-Chara OverFrq/UnderFrq – The selection of FRQ2 character UnderFrq
FRQ2 -10.00 to 10.00 Hz FRQ2 threshold -1.00
TFRQ2 0.00 to 300.00 S FRQ2 operating delay time 1.00
FRQ2-UseFor Trip/Alarm – FRQ2 used for trip or alarm Trip
FRQ3 FRQ3-EN Off/On – FRQ3 protection enable Off
FRQ3-Chara OverFrq/UnderFrq – The selection of FRQ3 character UnderFrq
FRQ3 -10.00 to 10.00 Hz FRQ3 threshold -1.00
TFRQ3 0.00 to 300.00 S FRQ3 operating delay time 1.00
FRQ3-UseFor Trip/Alarm – FRQ3 used for trip or alarm Trip
FRQ4 FRQ4-EN Off/On – FRQ4 protection enable Off
FRQ4-Chara OverFrq/UnderFrq – The selection of FRQ4 character UnderFrq
FRQ4 -10.00 to 10.00 Hz FRQ4 threshold -1.00
TFRQ4 0.00 to 300.00 S FRQ4 operating delay time 1.00
FRQ4-UseFor Trip/Alarm – FRQ4 used for trip or alarm Trip
FRQ5 FRQ5-EN Off/On – FRQ5 protection enable Off
FRQ5-Chara OverFrq/UnderFrq – The selection of FRQ5 character UnderFrq
FRQ5 -10.00 to 10.00 Hz FRQ5 threshold -1.00
TFRQ5 0.00 to 300.00 S FRQ5 operating delay time 1.00
FRQ5-UseFor Trip/Alarm – FRQ5 used for trip or alarm Trip
FRQ6 FRQ6-EN Off/On – FRQ6 protection enable Off
FRQ6-Chara OverFrq/UnderFrq – The selection of FRQ6 character UnderFrq
FRQ6 -10.00 to 10.00 Hz FRQ6 threshold -1.00
TFRQ6 0.00 to 300.00 S FRQ6 operating delay time 1.00
FRQ6-UseFor Trip/Alarm – FRQ6 used for trip or alarm Trip
DFRQ1 DFRQ1-EN Off/On – DFRQ1 protection enable Off
DFRQ1-Chara Rise/Down – The selection of DFRQ1 character Down
DFRQ1 0.1 to 15.0 Hz / s DFRQ1 threshold 0.5
DFRQ1-UseFor Trip/Alarm – DFRQ1 used for trip or alarm Trip
DFRQ2 DFRQ2-EN Off/On – DFRQ2 protection enable Off
DFRQ2-Chara Rise/Down – The selection of DFRQ2 character Down
DFRQ2 0.1 to 15.0 Hz / s DFRQ2 threshold 0.5
DFRQ2-UseFor Trip/Alarm – DFRQ2 used for trip or alarm Trip
DFRQ3 DFRQ3-EN Off/On – DFRQ3 protection enable Off
DFRQ3-Chara Rise/Down – The selection of DFRQ3 character Down
DFRQ3 0.1 to 15.0 Hz / s DFRQ3 threshold 0.5
DFRQ3-UseFor Trip/Alarm – DFRQ3 used for trip or alarm Trip
DFRQ4 DFRQ4-EN Off/On – DFRQ4 protection enable Off
DFRQ4-Chara Rise/Down – The selection of DFRQ4 character Down
DFRQ4 0.1 to 15.0 Hz / s DFRQ4 threshold 0.5
DFRQ4-UseFor Trip/Alarm – DFRQ4 used for trip or alarm Trip
DFRQ5 DFRQ5-EN Off/On – DFRQ5 protection enable Off
DFRQ5-Chara Rise/Down – The selection of DFRQ5 character Down
DFRQ5 0.1 to 15.0 Hz / s DFRQ5 threshold 0.5
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
2.17.4 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
FRQ(Function ID: 475001)
Element ID Name Description
8400101B61 DFRQ-OPT-ALARM Alarm signal by DFRQ protection
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.18-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
Electrical
Bus G center Bus H
VS CB1 CB2 VR
Relay A Relay B
During the early stage of out-of-step, it is assumed that the electrical center loses
synchronism, but two terminals do not lost synchronism. Thereby, the OSTZ can disconnect
the power sources from the system, and each power source can keep operating steadily and
independently.
R
Load Area
Figure 2.18-2 Impedance locus during out-of-step condition seeing from distance relay
The user should notice that the OSTZ function does not operate except the out-of-step.
Figure 2.18-3 shows another impedance locus when transient power swing occurs; the OSTZ
function does not detect the out-of-step condition when this impedance locus is observed†.
Impedance locus
R
Load Area
where,
X: measured reactance
R: measured resistance
XB: reactive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-XB]
XF: reactive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-XF]
R1: resistive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-R1]
R2: resistive reach configured by setting [OSTZ-R2]
OSTZ-ZN OSTZ-ZM
OSTZ-XF
75
R
−OSTZ-R2 OSTZ-R1
−OSTZ-XB
The user should set scheme switch [OSTZ-EN] On in order to operate the OSTZ function.
The user should set scheme switch [OSTZ-Output] Trip to issue a trip command for the trip
circuit (TRC2). When the user requires outputting the trip command for the binary output
circuit (BO3) instead of the TRC, the user should set BO the scheme switch [OSTZ-Output].
1Note: The OSTZ function also issues a trip command when the motion of the locus from
Zone C to Zone B, Zone A.
2Note: Trip circuit is discussed separately. See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit
function.
3Note: Binary output circuit is furnished on Binary IO module. See Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module: Binary output circuit.
4Note: For more information, see Chapter PLC function.
8000001C20 8200001B6A
AB & & ≥1 ≥1 OSTZ-OPT
8100001C21 Decision logic
OSTZ-ZM for phase-AB 8000001B69
BC & To TRC
8200001C22 & 8300001B23
0 t
CA &
& & OSTZ-OPT-TRIP
0.1s
8000001C24 OSTZ-ARC-BLOCK
AB 8100001C25 & & &
Decision logic
OSTZ-ZN BC
8200001C26 & for phase-BC
&
CA & &
Trip
OSTZ-Output
BO
From FS
OCMFS_OP_SEP
TOSTZ1
& ≥1 t 0
&
1 0.01 to 1.00s
&
&
TOSTZ2
& ≥1 t 0
1 0.01 to 1.00s
&
&
≥1
2.18.5 Setting
Setting of OSTZ(Function ID: 478001)
U Default setting
Range
n value
Setting item i Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
t
rating rating rating rating
s
OSTZ-EN Off/On OSTZ protection enable Off
OSTZ-R1 15.00-150.00 3.000- 30.000 Ω OSTZ resistive reach (at Right side) 25.50 5.100
OSTZ-R2 5.00- 50.00 1.000–10.000 Ω OSTZ resistive reach (at Left side) 12.50 2.500
OSTZ-XF 5.00-250.00 1.000–50.000 Ω OSTZ reactive reach (at Forward side) 30.00 60.00
OSTZ-XB 1.00- 50.00 0.200–10.000 Ω OSTZ reactive reach (at Backward side) 5.00 1.00
TOSTZ1 0.01-1.00 s OSTZ out-of-step timer 0.04
TOSTZ2 0.01-1.00 s OSTZ out-of-step timer 0.04
OSTZ-Output Trip/BO OSTZ trip signal output position Trip
(2.55a)
2.18.6 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
OSTZ(Function ID: 478001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001B69 OSTZ OSTZ-AB or OSTZ-BC or OSTZ-CA
†Note:The second harmonic current is present all inrush currents in three-phases. The
proportion of the second harmonic current varies with the degree of the energizing,
but the ratio of the second harmonic current to the fundamental current can be
about 20% or greater during energizing.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.19-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
|I1f|ICD–OC
I1f
0 ICD–OC
As shown in Figure 2.19-1, the user should set both the [ICD-2f] and [ICD-OC] when the
second harmonic inrush current should be detected. The user should set On for the scheme
switch [ICD-EN] to enable the ICD operation.
2.19.3 Setting
Setting of ICD(Function ID: 480001)
Default setting
Range
value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A 5A
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
ICD-EN On /Off – ICD function enable Off
ICD-2f 10 – 50 % Second harmonic detection 15
ICD-OC 0.10 – 5.00 0.50 – 25.00 A ICD threshold setting 0.10 2.50
(2.57a)
2.19.4 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
ICD(Function ID: 480001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001C20 ICD-A ICD relay element operated (phase-A)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.20-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
IN
Is
IM
|𝐼𝑀 − 𝐼𝑁 | ≥ 𝐼𝑆 (2.20-1)
where,
IM = present current
IN = current one cycle before
Is = setting [OCDFS]
The setting of the OCDFS is set by setting [OCDFS]; the OCDFS can operate by setting On for
the scheme switch [OCDFS-EN]. Additionally, the OCDFS has off-delay timers and setting
[TOCDFS] is provided to adjust the timers.
If the earth fault current is significant, because of unbalance in the network, the scheme
LD7
LD6
LD5
LD4
LD3
LD2
LD1
I
0
D.O./P.U.=0.8
As shown in Figure 2.20-2, the OCMFS has seven current level detectors (LDs). The
Table 2.20-2 shows the threshold between operation and resetting of seven detectors, and
these thresholds are fixed. The overcurrent elements (level detector LD1 to LD7) operate
when a current exceeds operation threshold and resets when the current falls below 80% of
the operation threshold.
The OCMFS operates in five seconds when any of the level detectors operate and reset
without time delay when all the level detectors reset, as shown in the Figure 2.20-4.
8C00011C20
A
8D00011C21 ≥1
OCFS B OCFS_OP
8E00011C22 &
C
OCFS-EN On
TOCDFS
8800021C20 0 t
A
8900021C21 ≥1 OCDFS_OP
OCDFS B
0 t &
8A00021C22 0 t
C
0.00-300.00s
OCDFS-EN On
8000051C20
A
8100051C21 ≥1 UVFS_OP
UVFS B &
8200051C22
C
UVFS-EN On
8400061C20
A
8500061C21 ≥1
& UVSFS_OP
UVSFS B
8600061C22
C
UVSFS-EN On
TUVDFS
8800071C20
0 t
A
8900071C21 ≥1 UVDFS_OP
UVDFS B 0 t &
8A00071C22
C 0 t
0.00-300.00s
UVDFS-EN On
8300041B60
8000041C60
L1 &
≥1 OCMFS_OP
&
8100041C61 &
L2
8200041C62 &
L3 & 8000041B61 To OSTZ
OCM
8300041C63 ≥1 OCMFS_OP_SEP
FS L4 &
8400041C64
L5 &
8500041C65
L6 &
L7 8600041C66
&
5s
On-T
On-S
OCMFS-EN
Off
FS-EN=OFF
8F00031C23
EFFS
& EFFS-OP
EFFS-EN On
-EN
To TRC
OCFS-OP 8000001B23
FSRY_OP
OCDFS_OP
UVFS-OP
UVSFS-OP
≥1
UVDFS-OP
OCMFS_OP
EFFS-OP
2.20.9 Setting
Setting of FS(Function ID: 48B001)
Default setting
Range
value Note
Setting item Units Contents
1A 5A s
1A rating 5A rating
rating rating
Failsafe FS-EN Off / On - Fail safe enable Off
OCFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe OCFS enable On
OCFS 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OCFS relay operating value 1.00 5.00
OCDFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe OCDFS enable On
OCDFS 0.05 - 0.20 0.25 - 1.00 A OCDFS relay operating value 0.10 0.50
TOCDFS 0.00 - 300.00 s Extended time of OCDFS operating 10.10
EFFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe EFFS enable On
EFFS 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A EFFS relay operating value 0.20 1.00
OCMFS-EN Off / On-T / On-S - Fail safe OCMFS enable On-T
UVFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVFS enable On
UVFS 5.0 - 130.0 V UVFS relay operating value 46.0
UVSFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe UVSFS enable On
UVSFS 5.0 - 130.0 V UVSFS relay operating value 80.0
DUVFS-EN Off / On - Fail safe DUVFS enable On
DUVFS 1 - 20 V DUVFS relay operating value 5
TDUVFS 0.00 - 300.00 s Extended time of DUVFS operating 10.10
After the disappearance of the VT failure, the VTF function can take account of the VT
secondary circuit being in healthy condition in the three-phase; the operation of the VTF
function is reset2. Thus, the blocked relays are allowed to operate again. Incidentally, issuing
the VTF alarm is automatically removed and then the user can find resetting the VTF alarm.
1Note: The VTF function can block the operation in several relays, but it does not block
the operation in other relays. To know the blocking, refer sections of the respective
protection functions.
2Note: The user can programmable the operation using the setting and the PLC signals.
(2.62.0)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.21-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
However, nonetheless the OCD/EFVTF relay is still running after the VTF detection,
issuing the VTF_DETECT signal is cleared, provided OPT-On is set for the settings [VTF1-EN]
and the [VTF2EN].
When issuing the VTF_DETECT signal continues longer than ten seconds, the signal
VTF_DETCT clears to generate the VTF_ALARM signal.
The user can select either the VTF1 or VTF2 criteria using the using the scheme switch
[VTF1EN] or [VTF2EN].
VTF1 DETECT
8000001C20
A &
8100011C60 8000001B61
≥1 ≥1 t 0
8100001C21 VTF1_ALARM
UVVTF B t 0
1 S
C 8200001C22 1 10.0s
t 0
0.015s ≥1
1 R
From PROT-CCOMMON1
0.1s
OCD-AT ≥1 S
OCD-BT
≥1
&
OCD-CT R
& 1
t 0
1 &
10.0s
On ≥1
VTF1-EN OPT-On
VTF2 DETECT
8800001C27
OVGVTF & 8200021C60 8200021C60
≥1 t 0 VTF2_ALARM
1 t 0
1 S 10.0s
8400001C28
t 0
0.015s ≥1
EFVTF 1 R
≥1 0.1s ≥1
S
800000B62
≥1 &
R VTF_ALARM
&
To OC3
On ≥1 To EF3
VTF2-EN OPT-On To UV3
To UVS3
To OV3
From PROT-COMMON1 To OVS3
To OVG3
To OVP3
CB_ALLPH_CLOSE 1 To OVN3
0. 2s To UVP3
1 To OCN3
From DISTANSE-ZS2 To CARRIER_DEF3
8000001B61 To DISTANCE-COMMON3
PSBS-VTF-BLK ≥1 ≥1
VTF_DETECT
From DISTANSE-ZG2
PSBG-VTF-BLK
From test
AMF_OFF 1
800000EBB0 VTF_BLOCK
8100001BB1
810000EBB1 EXTERNAL_VTF
the ZS/ZG protections, see Chapter Relay application: Distance protection, when
available.
3Note: Output signals are provided for respective relays when the relays are available.
See Appendix: Ordering whether the relays are supplied into the IED.
4Note: AMF feature is used for the test. To generate the AMF signal, see chapter User
interface: test-submenu.
If a PLC signal is injected at the PLC connection point “VTF_BLOCK”, the operation of
the VTF function is blocked. The user can program to inject an external signal for the failure
detection using the PLC connection point EXTERNAL_VTF; the VTF_DETECT signal is
generated when the signal is injected at the EXTERNAL_VTF. (2.62.1)
2.21.4 Setting
Setting of VTF(Function ID: 490001)
Default
Range Un Note
Setting item Contents setting value
its s
1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A
VTF1 VTF1-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF1 enable On
Phase under voltage revel for VTF1
UVVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
detection
VTF2 VTF2-EN Off / On / OPT-On - VTF2 enable On
Zero phase over voltage revel for VTF2
OVGVTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
detection
Zero phase over current revel for VTF2
EFVTF 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A 0.20 1.00
detection block
2.21.5 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
VTF(Function ID: 490001)
Element ID Name Description
8400001C2B EFVTF EFVTF relay element operated
After the disappearance of the CT failure, the CTF function can take account of the CT
secondary circuit being in healthy condition in the three-phase; the operation of the CTF
function is reset2. Thus, the blocked relays are allowed to operate again. Incidentally, issuing
the CTF alarm is automatically removed and then the user can find resetting the CTF alarm.
1Note: The CTF function can block the operation in several relays, but it does not block
the operation in other relays. To know the blocking, refer sections of the respective
protection functions.
2Note: The user can programmable the operation using the setting and the PLC signals.
(2.63.0)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.22-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
However, nonetheless the OVGCTF relay is still running after the CTF detection,
issuing the CTF_DETECT signal is cleared, provided OPT-On is set for the scheme switch
[CTF-EN].
When issuing the CTF_DETECT signal continues longer than ten seconds, the signal
CTF_DETECT clears to generate the CTF_ALARM signal.
8000001C23
EFCTF
&
1 8100001B60 8000001B61
≥1 t 0
CTF_ALARM
t 0
S
10.0s To Automatic supervision
t 0
10.0s ≥1
8100001C27 1 R
OVGCTF & 0.1s
On ≥1
CTF-EN OPT-On
&
From PROT-CCOMMON1
CB_ALLPH_CLOSE 1 To EF3
0.02s To BCD3
To OCN3
From DISTANSE-ZS2
8000001B62
To UC3
PSBS-VCTF-BLK ≥1
1 ≥1
CTF_DETECT
From DISTANSE-ZG2
PSBG-VCTF-BLK
From test4
AMF_OFF 1
800000EBB0 CTF_BLOCK
8100001BB1
810000EBB1 EXTERNAL_CTF
If a PLC signal is injected at the PLC connection point “CTF_BLOCK”, the operation of
the CTF function is blocked. The user can program to inject an external signal for the failure
detection using the PLC connection point EXTERNAL_CTF; the CTF_DETECT signal is
generated when the signal is injected at the EXTERNAL_CTF. (2.63.1)
2.22.4 Setting
Setting of CTF(Function ID: 491001)
U Default
Range
n setting value
Note
Setting item i Contents
s
1A rating 5A rating t 1A 5A
s
CTF CTF-EN Off / On / OPT-On - CTF enable On
0.50 -
EFCTF 0.10 - 50.00 A Zero-sequence phase over current level for CTF detection 0.20 1.00
250.00
Zero-sequence phase over voltage level for CTF2
OVGCTF 1.0 - 220.0 V 20.0
detection block
2.22.5 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
CTF(Function ID: 491001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001B61 CTF ALARM CTF alarm operated
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.23-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
The accuracy† of the FL calculation is influenced by both the line impedance (Z) and the
fault current (If). Thus, the user should note that the FL computation maintains an accuracy
of better than ± 2.5 km (1.6 mile) for the distance GF shown in Figure 1.1-1 for up to 100km
(62 mile)‡ of the length of the line regardless of the setting of the length of the line GH ( 0 to
500 km (310 mile)). The accuracy of the FL calculation is better than ± 2.5% when the fault is
located 100 km to 500 km from the FL function, provided that the length of the line GH is
between 100 km to 500 km.
The FL calculation runs separately for phase-to-phase faults and earth-faults. Hence,
the selection of algorithm depends upon the type of fault that occurs.
†Note: Both line impedance and rated-current affect the accuracy of the FL computation.
If the VCT is set for 1 ampere rated-current operation, the accuracy of the FL
computation can be maintained provided that the ratio of the reactance of the
series-impedance per unit-length is greater than 0.05, provided that the fault
current that flows is greater than 2 ampere on the secondary side of the CT circuit.
For the VCT being set for 5 ampere rated-current, the same FL accuracy can be
kept when the ratio of the reactance of the series-impedance per-unit-length is
greater than 0.01, provided that the fault current that flows is greater than 10
ampere. For more information on the rated-current of the VCT, see chapter
Technical description: Transformer module .
‡Note:In order to maintain the accuracy of the FL computation, the user can use
compensation factors when unbalanced impedances are occurred in the
transmission line. (2.66.1.0)
Line GH
t
Distance GF
TT
t
Bus G If Bus H
Line 1
Fault F TT
FL TT t IL
t t
Source Load/Source
Line 2
G’ TT H’
t
Figure 2.23-1 Relationship between fault location and local IED in parallel line
2Ia − Ib – Ic
Iα = (2.23-1)
3
(2.23-3)
where,
Vα: Fault voltage (=Va0)
Iα: Fault current
Iα": Current change before and after fault occurrence
Ia, Ib, Ic: Fault currents in phase-‘a’, phase-‘b’, and phase-‘c’
ILa, ILb, ILc: Load currents in phase-‘a’, phase-‘b’, and phase-‘c’
I0s: Zero-sequence current on the local line i.e. ‘Line 1’
R 1: Resistance component of positive-sequence self-impedance (Z1),
[FL_R1]
X1: Reactance component of positive-sequence self-impedance (Z1), [FL_X1]
R 0: Resistance component of zero-sequence self-impedance (Z0), [FL_R0]
X0: Reactance component of zero-sequence self-impedance (Z0), [FL_X0]
Ka: Compensation factor for phase-‘a’ in an unbalanced 3-phase line,
[FL_Ka]
Im( ): Imaginary part when a value is placed in parentheses
Re( ): Real part when a value is placed in parentheses
L: Length of line GH in kilometers or miles, [FL_line_km] / [FL_line_mile]
Equation (2.23-3) is used generally when the transmission lines are treated as having
lumped constants. The user should consider the influence of the distributed capacitance of the
transmission line. Therefore, when the distance to the fault (GF) is greater than 100km (62
mile), the FL computation introduces another fault distance (GF = χ") using Equation (2.23-4).
χ3
χ" = χ − k 2 × (2.23-4)
3
where,
k: Propagation constant is pre-fixed by the manufacturer of the transmission line.
(k=0.001𝑘𝑚−1). (2.66.1.4)
Ibc = Ib − Ic (2.23-5)
Vbc = Vb − Vc (2.23-6)
Im (Vbc ∙ If ) × L
χ= (2.23-8)
{𝑅𝑒(R1 ∙ Ibc ∙ If ) + 𝐼𝑚(X1 ∙ Ibc ∙ If )} × K bc
where,
Ibc: Fault current in phase-‘b’-to-phase-‘c’
Vbc: Fault voltage in phase-‘b’-to-phase-‘c’
ILb, ILc: Load currents in phase-‘b’ and phase-‘c’ before fault occurrence
Kbc: Compensation factor for phase-bc in an unbalanced 3-phase line, [FL_Kbc]
Equation (2.23-8) is a general expression used when the transmission lines are treated
as having lumped constants; Equation (2.23-8) is sufficient to compute the fault distance
(GF = χ) for faults that occur within 100km (62 mile) of the length of the transmission line.
When the fault distance is greater than 100km (62 mile), Equation (2.23-4) is used to obtain a
compensated value for the fault distance (GF = χ"). (2.66.1.2)
FL ****.*km
***% OB / NC
c. Fault information
b. Fault distance in percent
†Note:The user should note that the fault distance is based on the location of the local
IED (see Figure 2.23-1). Figure 2.23-2 is shown in kilometers, but the user can
change that so that the fault distance is expressed in miles. The setting is
discussed later. (See section 2.23.3(iv))
‡Note:We shall discuss the trigger signal in the succeeding section.
As shown in Figure 2.23-1, a single IED is located near Bus G. When a fault (F) occurs
on the line GH, the fault distance (GF) is calculated in percent using the following equation.
Distance to fault F
Fault distance (%) = × 100 (2.23-9)
Length of Line GH
†Note:For impedance settings, the user should convert the primary values to secondary
values with regard to the line VT and CT. Set impedances as total-impedances; do
not set impedances as impedance per distance-unit.
where,
Z1: Positive-sequence series-impedance
Z0: Zero-sequence series-impedance
Zaa, Zbb, Zcc: Self-impedances for each phase conductor
Zab, Zbc, Zca: Mutual-impedances between phases
Zaa + Zbb
− Zab
K ab = 2 (2.23-12)
Z1
Zbb + Zcc
− Zbc
K bc = 2 (2.23-13)
Z1
Zcc + Zaa
− Zca
K ca = 2 (2.23-14)
Z1
Zab + Zca
Zaa −
Ka = 2 (2.23-15)
Z1
Zbc + Zab
Zbb −
Kb = 2 (2.23-16)
Z1
Zca + Zbc
Zcc −
Kc = 2 (2.23-17)
Z1
where,
Zaa: Phase-‘a’ self-impedance on line GH (=Zbb=Zcc)
Zab: Mutual-impedances between phase-‘a’ and phase-‘b’ on line GH (=Zbc=Zca)
Setting self-impedances
With regard to the self-impedances, the user should set the resistance of the
self-impedances for settings [FL_Raa], [FL_Rbb] and [FL_Rcc] and set the reactance
of the self-impedances for settings [FL_Xaa], [FL_Xbb] and [FL_Xcc].
Setting mutual-impedances
With regard to setting the mutual-impedances, the user should set the resistance of
the mutual-impedance for settings [FL_Rab], [FL_Rbc] and [FL_Rca] and set the
reactance of the mutual-impedances for settings [FL_Xab], [FL_Xbc], and [FL_Xca].
Figure 2.23-3 illustrates the relationship between the location of faults relative to the
direction of FL computations. The user should set the scheme switch [FL_Dir] Forward if the
fault location computation is required for faults that occur in the forward direction.
Conversely, set [FL_Dir] Reverse if the fault location computation is required for faults that
occur in the reverse direction.
Bus G Bus G
Fault Fault If
If
IED IED
IEF
IEF
Table 2.23-3 Setting [FL_DIR] corresponding to the setting of OC and other relay elements
Direction of the relay (OC element etc) Scheme switch [FL_DIR]
Forward Forward
Reverse Reverse
Non-dir Forward / Reverse
We recommend that the input current be compensated using the residual current from
the adjacent line; compensation using the residual current improves the accuracy of the FL
computation. (Set scheme switch [FL-Z0B] to Off)
If the residual current of the adjacent line is not available, the user should set the
scheme switch [FL-Z0B] On so that the FL result is compensated using the zero-sequence
source-impedances for an earth fault. Table 2.23-4 summarizes the compensation methods
provided together with a brief description of each method and the settings necessary for an
earth fault.
Table 2.23-4 Method and setting of earth fault compensation
Required setting objects Required power
Compensation Switch Impedance Description of the compensation system quantities
method [FL-Z0B] setting method for respective
operation
†Note: For a single line circuit, the local IED computes the residual current (3I0) using
the AC analog input currents internally, FL compensation is executed
automatically within the IED. Therefore, the user is not required to set the scheme
switch [FL-Z0B] Off.
With regard to the signals of the external protection function, user is allowed to program
the trigger of data-saving and calculation with Data IDs. The following Data IDs (PLC
connection points) are provided as the trigger to start the FL calculation.
Data ID “FL_RecF” and “FL_RecR”: Trigger for data save
Data ID “FL_LocF” and “FL_LocR”: Trigger for of calculation
Data recording
Figure 2.23-4 shows logic that consists of elements of protection function; and these elements
output a trigger signal to data recording. These elements are sorted into the FL are from the
function of distance protection (ZS/ZG and ZCS/ZCG) and overcurrent protection (OC). When
these elements are operated, operation signals are outputted. In the FL, the respective
operation signals are summarized by the “OR” logic of Figure 2.23-4. This logic has selection
scheme that is prescribed by scheme switch [FL-Dir]. As a result, the FL can record the
current and voltage data if the fault occurs in either the forward direction or the reverse
direction.
Note: For the FL calculation, it is required to fit the direction of the FL calculation
between the FL and other protection function. For example, if Forward is set for
the scheme switch [FL-Dir], user should set Forward for the respective scheme
switches [Z*S-DIR], [Z*G-DIR] and [OC*]. If the contradiction is found in the
direction, the FL does not run. Additionally, it is required to check that the
IR
respective settings of the protection functions are placed properly. For further
information, see section 2.23.3(iii).
Forward
Z1S DIR Reverse The data
Z1S
≥1 (current and
Forward
Z1XS DIR Reverse ≥1 voltage) saved
Z1XS Forward
Forward
by the
&
Reverse
operation of
Z2S Z2S DIR
elements of
Forward
protection
Z3S DIR Reverse
Z3S functions.
≥1
Operation signal of ZS elements
≥1
Forward The data
Z1G DIR Reverse Reverse (current and
Z1G
≥1 voltage) saved
Forward
Z1XG DIR Reverse & by the
Z1XG
operation of
Forward
elements of
Z2G DIR Reverse
Z2G protection
Forward
functions.
Z3G DIR Reverse
Z3G
≥1
Operation signal of ZG elements
Forward
OC1-Dir Reverse ≥1
OC1
Forward
OC2-Dir Reverse
OC2 Forward
FL-DIR Reverse
Operation signal of OC elements ≥1
ZC
DIFL
RDIF ≥1
DIFG
RDIFG
310022EC65 FLAZ_RecR
PLC signals
Figure 2.23-4 Data recording start (Current and voltage data saved)
FL calculation start
Figure 2.23-5 shows logic for the FL calculation. In this logic, starting signals from the
respective protection functions are provided for the FL. Note that the operation resultants of
DIR
respective functions are used to start the FL calculation. The operation resultants are not the
same as the operation signals of the protection elements, as in Figure 2.23-4.
Forward
Z1S DIR Reverse FL calculation
Z1S
≥1 started by the
Forward
Z1XS DIR Reverse ≥1 result signals
Z1XS Forward
Forward
of respective
&
Reverse functions.
Z2S Z2S DIR
Forward
Z3S DIR Reverse
Z3S
≥1
Result signal of ZS elements
≥1
Forward FL calculation
Z1G DIR Reverse Reverse started by the
Z1G
≥1 result signals
Forward
Z1XG DIR Reverse & of respective
Z1XG
functions.
Forward
Z2G DIR Reverse
Z2G
Forward
Z3G DIR Reverse
Z3G
≥1
Result signal of ZG elements
Forward
OC1-Dir Reverse ≥1
OC1
Forward
OC2-Dir Reverse
OC2 Forward
FL-DIR Reverse
Result signal of OC elements ≥1
ZC
DIFL
RDIF ≥1
DIFG
RDIFG
310022EC65 FLAZ_RecR
PLC signals
(2.66.4)
2.23.4 Setting
Setting of FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
Default setting
Range
value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
rating rating rating rating
Switch FL_EN Off / On — Fault locator enable On
Selection of the direction for fault
FL_Dir Forward / Reverse — Forward
location
Selection in the setting mode for
FL_ImpSet Symmetrical / Matrix — Symmetrical
impedance
FL_Unit km / mile — Selection of line length unit km
FL_AllZone Off / On — Enabling displaying data for OB Off
Line1_Element FL_Line_km 0.0 – 500.0 km Line length (km) 50.0
FL_line_mile 0.0 – 310.0 mi Line length (mile) 0
0.00– 0.00– Reactance component of line
FL_Xaa Ω 10.5 2.1
1000.00 200.00 (Xaa)
0.00– 0.00– Reactance component of line
FL_Xbb Ω 10.5 2.1
1000.00 200.00 (Xbb)
0.00– 0.00–
FL_Xcc Ω Reactance component of line (Xcc) 10.5 2.1
1000.00 200.00
0.00– 0.00– Reactance component of line
FL_Xab Ω 0.5 0.1
1000.00 200.00 (Xab)
0.00– 0.00– Reactance component of line
FL_Xbc Ω 0.5 0.1
1000.00 200.00 (Xbc)
0.00– 0.00– Reactance component of line
FL_Xca Ω 0.5 0.1
1000.00 200.00 (Xac)
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line
FL_Raa Ω 1.1 0.21
1000.00 200.00 (Raa)
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line
FL_Rbb Ω 1.1 0.21
1000.00 200.00 (Rbb)
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line
FL_Rcc Ω 1.1 0.21
1000.00 200.00 (Rcc)
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line
FL_Rab Ω 0.1 0.01
1000.00 200.00 (Rab)
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line
FL_Rbc Ω 0.1 0.01
1000.00 200.00 (Rbc)
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line
FL_Rca Ω 0.1 0.01
1000.00 200.00 (Rac)
0.00– 0.00– Reactance component of line
FL_X1 Ω 10 2
1000.00 200.00 positive sequence impedance
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line
FL_R1 Ω 1 0.2
1000.00 200.00 positive sequence impedance
0.00– 0.00– Reactance component of line zero
FL_X0 Ω 34 6.8
1000.00 200.00 sequence impedance
0.00– 0.00– Resistance component of line zero
FL_R0 Ω 3.5 0.7
1000.00 200.00 sequence impedance
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kab 50–150 % 100
compensation factors
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kbc 50–150 % 100
compensation factors
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kca 50–150 % 100
compensation factors
Impedance imbalance
FL_Ka 50–150 % 100
compensation factors
Impedance imbalance
FL_Kb 50–150 % 100
compensation factors
(2.66a)
2.23.5 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
FL-Z (Function ID: 495001)
Element ID Name Description
8000101349 FLTFLAG Fault locator update flag
Autoreclose (ARC)
The basic objective of auto-reclosing is to restore automatically the transmission line back
into service, after being tripped by line protection relays, without depending on the operator
action. The use of auto-reclosing will improve the system stability and reliability. The choice
of the auto-reclosing type, such as, one or more reclosing shots, high speed or delayed,
single-phase or multi-phase depends on the characteristics of the transmission and protective
system together with the utility practice. The suitability of a particular auto-reclosing scheme
may also be established by conducting a transient analysis study of the interconnected
electrical network.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.24-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
2.24.1 Outline
Table 2.24-2 summarizes the reclosing operations and the modes in the ARC function. The
ARC function can operate for both a single CB arrangement and double CBs (1.5CB)
arrangement; hence, the ARC function is grouped into two logics: ARC1 for CB#1 and ARC2
for CB#2. Note that multi-shots scheme is only available for 1CB arrangement (CB#1). The
‘ORIGINAL’ is provided for the user’s programing.
Table 2.24-2 ARC operation modes and shot numbers
1CB or 1.5CB arrangement
Reclosing
Shot number 1CB 1.5CB
mode
ARC1 ARC2 ARC1&2
SPAR X (N.A) x
ARC1 SHOT1
TPAR X (N.A) x
or/and
SPAR&TPAR X (N.A) x
ARC2 SHOT
ORIGINAL X (N.A) x
ARC1 SHOT2 X (N.A) (N.A)
ARC1 SHOT3 X (N.A) (N.A)
ARC1 SHOT4 X (N.A) (N.A)
ARC1 SHOT5 X (N.A) (N.A)
x: Operation is applicable N.A: Operation is not applicable
CB#1
Line Busbar G
Line VT Bus VT
CB#1 Reclosing for CB#1
Relay(G)
Bus VT VCHK1(G) VCHK1(G)
Line VT
ARC1(G)
VCHK2(G)
ARC1(G) ARC2(G)
Reclosing CB#1
Line1
Busbar G
CB#2
Reclosing for CB#2
Line VT
Line2
†Note:VCHK are automatically applied in the TPAR mode (for ARC1 SHOT1 and ARC2
SHOT). For more information, see Chapter Relay application: Voltage check for
auto reclose.
For the TPAR mode in the 1.5CB arrangement, synchronism check and voltage check
(VCHH) between the bus bar (for bus CB#1) and the line or between the two lines (for center
CB#2) are required. The reclosing order between CB#1 and CB#2 can be selected using
setting [ARC-ORDER]; that is, CB#1 recloses first followed by CB#2 (i.e.,
[ARC-ORDER]=CB1)or vice versa (i.e., [ARC-ORDER]=CB2). Simultaneous closure of CB#1
stage, which the ARC issues a three-phase trip command (CB1_94TT or CB2_94TT) for the
TRC function; the ARC function abandons to reclose the CB#1 and CB#2 (ARC1 FT or ARC2
FT).
CB is not ready for ARC operation
Failure to issue ARC shot
ARC block command has come through PLC connection points
Multi-phase trip in SPAR mode
Evolving fault (single phase to multiphase) in SPAR and TPAR mode
Final trip selected for 3-phase fault (user settable)
ARC close fail
Shot number over
2.24.2 Terminology
The terminology and signals outlined below are applicable for single CB#1 system. Signals
applicable for CB#2 in a two (2) CB system are similar and are not included for clarity.
The dead times for sequential operation of the autoreclose scheme ‘ARC1 SHOT2’ to
‘ARC1 SHOT5’, are provided by delay timers [TD_MS2]–[TD_MS5], respectively.
†Note:delay timer [TTPAR] is available when the ARC function operates in TPAR mode.
For the operation in other SPAR and ORGAR modes, the user should also set
values for delay timers [TSPAR1] and [TORGAR1].
(ix) Final trip stage to abandon CB reclosure (Signal ‘ARC1 FT’ and
setting TRR1, TRR_MS2–5)
TRR1 is the time from the ARC1 initiation to abandoning issuing the ‘ARC1 SHOT1’. In
TPAR† mode the permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ must be issued by the VCHK function
within the time interval of TRR1 at the end of the dead time (i.e., TRR1 has not timed out),
otherwise the ARC function abandons the reclosure of CB#1. That is, if TTPAR1 has timed out
and ‘ARC1-VCHK’ permissive has not been issued within TRR1 time, TRR1 signal yielded in
the TPAR mode ends up ‘Final Trip (ARC1 FT)’. Note that the timer setting of the [TRR1]
timer should be set greater than that applied to the dead time delay timer [TTPAR1] to ensure
that the dead time has fully expired.
Likewise, for shots 2–5 the timers [TRR_MS2] and others issue the signal for ‘Final Trip
(ARC1 FT)’ if the respective shots are not issued within the set time.
†Note:We can see similar ARC behavior in the other SPAR, MPAR, and ORGAR modes.
(x) Reset for tripping failure (Signal ‘ARC1 RESET’ and setting TRESET)
Subsequent to the reception of the ‘GEN.TRIP’ signal, a check is required to determine
whether the CB#1 has opened. If the CB#1 has not opened within the time setting of timer
[TRESET], then “CB#1 failing to be opened” is judeged by the ‘ARC1 RESET’ signal, which
also resets the reclose operation of the CB#1. The duration of the setting applied to the
[TRESET] timer must be less than the setting applied to the ARC dead time delay timers (e.g.
[TTPAR] etc.).
If the CB fails to close within the setting of timer [TARCSUC],an ‘ARC1 CLOSE FAIL’ signal
is issued and the ARC1 function moves to the ‘Final trip (ARC1 FT)’ stage.
Note: a CB failure to close condition cannot be detected; the user shall incorporate the
check scheme externally.
Another consideration required for this setting is that after the CB has gone through a
successful ARC cycle; the maximum allowable successive close-open operations are achieved
with the setting. In this case, the minimum time delay required before the CB is ready for the
next ARC cycle becomes the setting criteria for the [TREADY] timer.
Where the incidence of recurrent lightning strikes is experienced, a shorter reclaim time
will prevent the ARC function going into an unnecessary lock out. On the other hand, caution
is required when considering the exposure of the CB to an excessive number of ARC cycles
caused by recurrent faults which will result in an increase in the frequency of the
maintenance cycle.
In summary, the time required for the CB to be ready for the next cycle of ARC is the
minimum setting that can be applied to the reclaim timer [TREADY] in the ARC function.
Each functional block diagram is grouped into a number of logic blocks; four typical functional
block diagrams are illustrated below:
(i) Issuing ‘ARC SHOT1’ and ‘ARC SHOT2’ in 1 CB of the SPAR mode
(ii) Issuing ‘ARC SHOT1’ and ‘ARC SHOT2’ in 1 CB of the TPAR mode
(iii) Issuing ‘ARC SHOT1’ and ‘ARC SHOT2’ in 1 CB of the SPAR and TPAR mode
Start
Multi-phase Trip in SPAR1
GEN.TRIP-A 3
&
GEN.TRIP-B &
GEN.TRIP-C
Condition as to CB#1
800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A ARC1 IN-PROG OR To TRC
6 ARC1 FT
TRIP-MPH
800000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B
TRIP-1PH CB1_94TT
TRIP-1PH C
ARC1 SPAR_COND
800000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START-C B SPAR
ARC START ARC1-S1 IN-PROG ≥1
≥1
CONSTANT_1
TRESET1
≥1 & t 0
810001EBC9 ARC1-S2 COND
Figure 2.24-2 ARC SHOT1 and SHOT2’ in SPAR mode of 1CB system
- 328 -
6F2S1935 (0.04)
ARC1 SHOT2
8
ARC1-S2 TRR
ARC1-Mode input ARC-SucChk
1
ON
TPAR B Shot Counter
≥1
820001EBB2 ARC1_MODE-TPAR
5 Reclose sequence
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG
11 TPAR1_START
Shot number ARC-ORDER
From PROT_COMM ARC1 SHOT1 SHOT_1ST D
2 CB1
ARC-NUM
CB-System ARC1 SHOT2 SHOT-2ND
CB-SYSTEM=1CB 1CB A
1CB S2
Figure 2.24-3 ARC SHOT1 and SHOT2 in TPAR mode of 1CB system
- 330 -
6F2S1935 (0.04)
ARC1 SHOT2
8
ARC1-Mode input ARC1-S2 TRR
ARC-SucChk
1
SPAR&TPAR Shot Counter ON
B
≥1
800001EBB7 ARC1_MODE-S&T 5 Reclose sequence
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF ARC1 NOT_IN-PROG 11
TPAR1_START
Shot number ARC-ORDER
From PROT_COMM ARC1 SHOT1 SHOT_1ST E
2 CB1
ARC-NUM
CB-System ARC1 SHOT2 SHOT-2ND
CB-SYSTEM=1CB 1CB A
1CB S2
Figure 2.24-4 ARC SHOT1 and SHOT2 in SPAR&TPAR mode of 1CB system
- 332 -
6F2S1935 (0.04)
Closed
CB#1 status
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
ARC1 FT
Figure 2.24-5 Single shot scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for an Arcing fault; operation is successful
Note: The permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ is required in the TPAR mode, but is omitted
here for the sake of clarity. The pulse width of the ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’
signal is defined using the setting [TCCW1].
(ii) Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault; CB#1 fails to reclose
Figure 2.24-6 also shows the single shot scheme. However, the CB#1 fails to reclose on
receiving the ‘ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND’ so that the ARC function initiates the ‘ARC1
CLOSE FAIL’ signal within the setting time [TARCDSUC]. Consequently, the ARC function
goes to the final trip (ARC1 FT) stage so that the ARC will not issue another ‘ARC1 CLOSE
COMMAND’ signal hereafter.
Fault current
Closed
CB#1 Status CB fails to be closed.
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
Figure 2.24-6 Single shot scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for an Arcing fault; CB#1 fails to reclose
Note: The permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ is required in the TPAR mode for the ARC1
SHOT1 operation, but is omitted here for the sake of clarity.
Closed
CB#1 Status
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
ARC1 FT
Figure 2.24-7 Single shot ARC scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for Permanent fault
Note: The permissive signal ‘ARC1-VCHK’ is required for the ARC SHOT1 operation, but
is omitted here for the sake of clarity.
(iv) Single shot scheme for an Arcing fault; fault removed by a backup CB
Figure 2.24-8 shows the single shot scheme for an Arcing fault, but tripping is not executed
due to the failure of the CB#1. Therefore, the operation of the ARC function is reset in the
setting time [TRESET] before the duration of dead timer [TTPAR1] expires. Consequently, the
ARC function determines that the local CB#1 cannot be tripped to clear the fault.
Fault current
Fault cleared by tripping the backup CB at the remote end†
Closed
CB#1 Status CB at the local end fails to open
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT2
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
ARC1 SHOT3
ARC1 CLOSE
COMMAND
ARC1 FT
Reset
ARC RESET [TRESET]
)
Figure 2.24-8 Single shot scheme [ARC-NUM]=S1 for an Arcing fault; remote CB† tripped
†Note:the fault is removed by the tripping of the CB at the remote end; hence, the fault
current will no longer flow.
Fault current
Closed
CB#1 Status
Open
Operated
Relay operation
Issued
GEN.TRIP
ARC1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
ARC1-S2 IN-PROG
ARC1-S3 IN-PROG
Closed
CB1 ALLPH
Open
CLOSE
&
≥1
&
≥1
Condition
&
ARC1-MODE=SPAR
≥1
&
OFF ARC1-MODE=TPAR
≥1
FT
SPAR &
TPAR ≥1 ARC1-MODE=S&T
SPAR&TPAR &
ARC1-MODE MPAR ≥1
≥1 ARC1-MODE=SPAR+S&T
ORIGINAL
& ARC1-MODE=MPAR
≥1
Start
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF
≥1
800001EBB0 ARC1_MODE-OFF &
≥1 Initiation
820001EBB2 ARC1_MODE-SPAR
& ARC1-MODE=ON
ARC1-MODE=OFF
800001EBB7 ARC1_MODE-S&T &
Original
To CB#
850001EBB5
800001EBB7 ARC1-MODE-MPAR & ARC1-MODE=ORG
860001EBB6
800001EBB7 ARC1_MODE-ORG &
8800011B62 To TRC
≥1
Signal ‘1’ is generated when there is no contradiction between the CB1_BRIDGE
various signals, that is only one signal is picking up.
CB
800001EBB8 CB1 F.BRIDGE
READY
When TPAR is selected, the TRC and the ARC functions operate by the rule that the CB
is tripped in three-phases and can be reclosed. That is, ‘CB1_BRIDGE’ signal is sent for the
TRC function so that the CB will be tripped in three-phases forcibly even if a GEN.TRIP-A
(TRIP COMMAND-A) signal is only generated in the TRC function (as well as GEN.TRIP-B
and GEN.TRIP-C). Note the CB will be tripped in three-phases forcibly, even if a single-phase
fault is detected and instructed a single-phase tripping by the relay applications.
&
≥1 &
&
≥1 &
&
≥1 & ARC2-MODE=SPAR
& Condition
OFF
≥1 & ARC2-MODE=TPAR
FT
SPAR &
TPAR ≥1 & ARC2-MODE=S&T
SPAR&TPAR &
ARC2-MODE MPAR ≥1 & ≥1 ARC2-MODE=SPAR+S&T
ORIGINAL
&
ARC2-MODE=MPAR
≥1 &
Start
ARC2-MODE=NO-OFF
800002EBB0 ARC2_MODE-OFF ≥1
&
≥1 ARC2-MODE=OFF
800002EBB7 ARC2_MODE-S&T &
Original
850002EBB5
800001EBB7 ARC2-MODE-MPAR & ARC2-MODE=ORG
860002EBB6
800001EBB7 ARC2_MODE-ORG &
CB-SYSTEM=1CB
8800021B62 To TRC
≥1 CB2_BRIDGE
810002EBB9 CB2 F.BRIDGE
READY
& ARC-NUM=S2
S1
& ARC-NUM=S3
S2
S3
S4 & ARC-NUM=S4
ARC-NUM
S5
& ARC-NUM=S5
From PROT-COMMON
CB-SYSTEM=1 CB
CB-SYSTEM=2 CB
1
800000EBB5 RYOP-A 8500001B6C
≥1 ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
&
0 t
800001EBCF ARC1_BLOCK ≥1 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
&
0.1s
810002EBB7 ARC2_BLOCK
0 t ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
≥1
820000EBB4 ARC_BLOCK
&
0.1s 8300001B64
From TRC
GEN.ARC-BLOCK & EXT.ARC_START
≥1
8400001B65 Initiation
GEN.TRIP-A
≥1 & 1 ARC START
≥1
GEN.TRIP-B
≥1 & 1
GEN.TRIP-C
≥1 & 1
0.01s
800000EBB0 EXT.ARC_START-A Condition
8000001B66
810000EBB1 EXT.ARC_START-B S
TRIP-ANYPH
≥1
820000EBB2 EXT.ARC_START-C R
To Multiphase
S 8100001B67 trip in SPAR
R & TRIP-1PH
ARC1-MODE input 1 ≥1
S
ARC1-MODE=NO-OFF 1
≥1
R
ARC2-MODE input
ARC2-MODE=NO-OFF &
&
1
800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT 1
1
&
1
To Evolving fault
8200001B68 logic
&
≥1 TRIP-MPH
&
Initiation
&
ARC1 IN-PROG OR
8300001B69
& TRIP-3PH
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG MPAR judgment
≥1
Reclose sequence
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG 1 NON ARC-S1_ IN-PROG
If the scheme switch [FT-3P FAULT] is set to On, ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals are
generated and introduce the three-phase tripping (final trip) for the TRC function during the
ARC1 and ARC2 functions being generating ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’ or ‘ARC2-S1 IN-PROG’
signals. The switch [FT-3P FAULT] requires signals of the external relay; PLC connection
points ‘RYOP-A, RYOP-B, and RYOP-C’ are used to get the signals.
Note that the ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals are generated when ‘ARC BLOCK’
signals are injected, provided ‘ARC1 IN-PROG OR’ or ‘ARC2-S1 IN-PROG’ signals is being
generated.
If, with regard to the tripped poles of CBs, there is not consistency between the CB#1
and the CB#2, the ARC function can generate the ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals when
an external device is able to detect the consistency; use PLC connection points ‘F.CB1_94TT’
and ‘F.CB2_94TT’ for the operation of the inconsistency.
The Start logic can receive a stop signal not to operate the ARC function; use PLC
connection point ‘ARC NO ACT’.
S ARC1-S5 IN-PROG
SHOT_5TH &
R
Shot1–Shot5 logics for CB#1
Done issuing
ARC1 SHOT1 TRESET
&
≥1 t 0
A
ARC1 SHOT2 & &
0.0-300.0s
ARC1 SHOT3 &
8800021B62 To TRC
CB2_BRIDGE
8000021B69
& FT ARC2 UNREADY ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
From PROT-COMMON
TREADY2
CB2_ALLPH_CLOSE 8000021B60
& t 0
ARC2 READY
810002EBB8 CB2-ARC READY
1 To CB#2 bridge, Final trip logic
0.0-600.0s &
ARC2-MODE input logic
ARC2 UNREADY
ARC2-MODE=ON
To Start
& ARC2-S1 IN-PROG
8200021B61
S
To Shot logic for CB#2
& R
S ARC2-S1 IN-PROG
800000EBB3 ARC NO ACT
1 ≥1
R
Success check
≥1 8700011B70 Initiation for CB#2
ARC1 RS
ARC2 RS TRESET
8700021B6C t 0
A ARC1 RESET ≥1 B
&
B ARC2 RESET
0.0-300.0s
ARC2 SHOT
If the ‘ARC1 UNREADY’ signal is present, Initiation logic abandons to reclose the CB#1;
then, the status of the ARC function reaches the Final Trip stage (FT); three-phase trip signal
(CB1_94TT) is generated transferred for the TRC function.
The ‘CB1-BRIDGE’ signal is used to combine any ‘per-phase trip signal’ into the
three-phase trip signal in the TRC function. Thus, the CB will be tripped in three-phases
forcibly even if a GEN.TRIP-A (TRIP COMMAND-A) signal is only generated in the TRC
function during the ‘ARC1 UNREADY’ being decided (as well as GEN.TRIP-B or
GEN.TRIP-C).
Shot number
8000001B81 To Fault record
ARC-NUM=S1
OFF
S1
S2
S3
S4
SHOTNUM-TEST S5
S6
& TPAR
&
≥1 ARC1_TPAR_COND
TRIP-ANYPH ARC2_TPAR_COND
&
&
TRIP-MPH
&
&
&
&
≥1
To TRC
8200
CB1_94TT
&
& CB2_94TT
ARC1-MODE input
OFF
MPH-TRIP
FT &
ARC1-MODE=SPAR IN SPAR1 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
MPAR
ORIGINAL ARC1-MODE=TPAR MP
SPAR
ARC1-MODE=S&T ARC
ARC1-MODE TPAR
SPAR&TPAR ≥1 ARC1-MODE=SPAR+S&T
ARC2
ARC2-MODE input
OFF
MPH-TRIP
FT &
ARC2-MODE=SPAR IN SPAR2 ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
MPAR
ORIGINAL ARC2-MODE=TPAR
SPAR ARC2-MODE=S&T
ARC2-MODE TPAR
SPAR&TPAR ARC2-MODE=SPAR+S&T
≥1
&
EVOLV_FAULT
8200001B6A & TIME OVER1 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
&
TEVLV
t 0 & EVOLV_FAULT
TIME OVER2 ARC2 FT CB2_94TT
&
0.01-300.00s
Note that the ‘CB1_94TT’ and ‘CB2_94TT’ signals are unconditionally generated when a
single phase tripping occurs in TPAR.
Condition of CB#1
800001EBBA SPAR1_COND
ARC1_SPAR_COND
TSPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
800001EBBB SPAR1_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s &
800001EBBC SPAR1_SUB_COND
Always ‘1’
TSPAR2
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG t 0 8000021B63
& ARC2_SPAR
&
800002EBB9 SPAR2_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
Condition of CB#2
800002EBBA SPAR2_COND
ARC2_SPAR_COND
TSPAR2_SUB
For iss
t 0
&
800002EBBB SPAR2_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s &
800002EBBC SPAR2_SUB_COND I
TRR1
To TRC
t 0
ARC1-S1 TRR ARC1-FT CB1_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
TRR2
t 0
ARC2 TRR ARC2-FT CB2_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
ARC1-VCHK
ARC2-VCHK
For Issuing for CB
From Initiation TTPAR1
8000011B63
t 0
& ARC1_TPAR
ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
&
810001EBBD TPAR1_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
From Condition in CB#1
ARC1_TPAR_COND
810001EBBE TPAR1_COND
TTPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
&
810001EBBF TPAR1_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s
810001EBC0 TPAR1_SUB_COND
TPAR2_START
TRR1 To TRC
t 0 ARC1-S1 TRR CB1_94TT
ARC1-FT
0.01 – 310.00 s
TRR2
t 0 ARC2 TRR ARC2-FT CB2_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
ARC1-VCHK
ARC2-VCHK Issuing for CB#1
TSPAR1
Condition in CB#1 t 0 8000011B63
ARC1_SPAR_COND & ARC1_SPAR
&
ARC1_TPAR_COND 800001EBB9 SPAR1_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
From Initiation
ARC1 IN-PROG
800001EBBA SPAR1_COND
ARC1-S1 IN-PROG
TSPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
800001EBBB SPAR1_SUB_START 0.01 – 300.00 s &
800001EBBC SPAR1_SUB_COND
TTPAR1
8000011B63
t 0
& & ARC1_TPAR
810001EBBD TPAR1_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
810001EBBE TPAR1_COND
TTPAR1_SUB
t 0
&
&
810001EBBF TPAR1_SUB_START
Condition in CB#2 0.01 – 300.00 s
ARC2_SPAR_COND
810001EBC0 TPAR1_SUB_COND
ARC2_TPAR_COND Issuing for CB#2
TSPAR2
t 0 8000021B63
& ARC2_SPAR
From Initiation &
800001EBB9 SPAR2_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
ARC2-S1 IN-PROG & ≥1
800001EBBA SPAR2_COND
TSPAR2_SUB
t 0
&
800001EBBB SPAR2_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s &
ARC1-S1
800001EBBC SPAR2_SUB_COND
TTPAR2
8000021B64
t 0
& & ARC2_TPAR
S1 IN-PROG 810002EBBE TPAR2_START 0.01 – 300.00 s
& ≥1
810002EBBF TPAR2_COND
TTPAR2_SUB
t 0
&
From Reclose sequence &
TPAR1_START 810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_START
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
(xi) Shot2 to Shot5 for CB#1 –settings (TD_MS2, TRR2 and others)
The ARC1 logic for shot 2-shot5 is illustrated in Figure 2.24-20. Shots 2-5 are applicable for a
CB#1 only. For example, two shots (Shot2 and Shot3, i.e., [ARC_NUM]=S3) are required
following the Shot1, the user should set the [TS_MS2]/[TS_MS3] and [TRR2]/[TRR3]. The user
should program to inject a permission signal for the Shot2 and Shot3 at PLC connection
points ‘ARC1-S2 COND’ and ‘ARC1-S3 COND’, as shown in Figure 2.24-20. Note that the CB
will be tripped in three-phases forcibly even if a GEN.TRIP-A (TRIP COMMAND-A) signal is
only generated, because the ‘CB1_BRIDGE’ signal is generated during the Shot 2-Shot5.
Initiation
TD_MS2
ARC1 IN-PROG ARC1-S2 Issuing
S t 0 8100011B67
& IN-PROG
& ARC1 SHOT2
R
0.01 – 300.00 s
TD_MS3 A
ARC1-S3
& S
IN-PROG t 0 8200011B68
R
& ARC1 SHOT3
0.01 – 300.00 s
& S B
ARC1-S4 TD_MS4
R IN-PROG t 0 8300011B69
Shot counter & ARC1 SHOT4
& S 0.01 – 300.00 s
SHOT_2ND
R C
SHOT_3RD ARC1-S5 TD_MS5
SHOT_4TH IN-PROG t 0 8400011B6A
SHOT_5TH & ARC1 SHOT5
0.01 – 300.00 s
≥1 D
Shot number
TRR2
ARC-NUM To TRC
t 0
ARC1-S2 TRR ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
A Done issuing ARC1 SHOT2
0.01 – 310.00 s
B Done issuing ARC1 SHOT3
TRR3
C Done issuing ARC1 SHOT4
t 0 ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
ARC1-S3 TRR
D Done issuing ARC1 SHOT5
8100011B67 0.01 – 310.00 s
810001EBC9 ARC1-S2 COND
TRR 4
8100011B68
t 0 ARC1-S4 TRR ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
810001EBCA ARC1-S3 COND
8100011B69
810001EBCB ARC1-S4 COND 0.01 – 310.00 s
8100011B6A TRR 5
810001EBCC ARC1-S5 COND t 0 ARC1-S5 TRR ARC1 FT CB1_94TT
0.01 – 310.00 s
8800011B62
CB1_BRIDGE
Shot2–Shot5 for CB#1
800001EBCD CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE
0.01-10.00s
810002EBCA CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE
0.1s
CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE
ARC-SUCCHK=OFF
CB2_ALLPH_CLOSE Initiation
ARC1 SHOT RS ARC1 RS
Initiation
FT ARC1 UNREADY S 8800011B74 For user’s programming
≥1
R ARC1-SUB_INIT
2.24.6 Setting
ARC Setting (Function ID: 4A6001)
Default
Setting item Range Units Contents setting Notes
value
ARC1-EN Off / On - Enabling the ARC1 scheme Off
Off / FT / SPAR /
TPAR /
Auto reclose ARC1-MODE - ARC mode in 1CB-system Off
SPAR&TPAR /
Original
ARC2-EN Off / On Enabling the ARC1 scheme Off
Off / FT / SPAR /
TPAR /
ARC2-MODE - ARC mode of Center-CB in 2CB-system Off
SPAR&TPAR /
Original
SIMUL / CB1 /
ARC-ORDER - Order of the 3-phase auto-reclosing start SIMUL
CB2
S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 /
ARC-NUM - ARC maximum shot number S1
S5
ARC1 TREADY1 0.0 - 600.0 s ARC1 ready check time 60.0
TSPAR1 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 SPAR dead time 0.80
TSPAR1_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 sub-SPAR dead time 300.00
TTPAR1 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 TPAR dead time 0.60
TTPAR1_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 sub-TPAR dead time 300.00
TORGAR1 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 user original ARC dead time 300.00
TORGAR1_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC1 sub user original ARC dead time 300.00
TRR1 0.01 - 310.00 s ARC1 reset time 2.00
TCCW1 0.01 - 10.00 s ARC1 ARC command pulse width 0.20
Multi-shot Multi Shot-EN Off / On - Enabling multi-shots scheme Off
TD_MS2 0.01 - 300.00 s 2nd shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS2 0.01 - 310.00 s 2nd shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS3 0.01 - 300.00 s 3rd shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS3 0.01 - 310.00 s 3rd shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS4 0.01 - 300.00 s 4th shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS4 0.01 - 310.00 s 4th shot ARC reset time 30.00
TD_MS5 0.01 - 300.00 s 5th shot ARC dead time 20.00
TRR_MS5 0.01 - 310.00 s 5th shot ARC reset time 30.00
ARC2 TREADY2 0.0 - 600.0 s ARC2 ready check time 60.0
TSPAR2 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 SPAR dead time 0.80
TSPAR2_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 sub-SPAR dead time 300.00
TTPAR2 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 TPAR dead time 0.60
TTPAR2_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 sub-TPAR dead time 300.00
TORGAR2 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 user original ARC dead time 300.00
TORGAR2_SUB 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC2 sub user original ARC dead time 300.00
TRR2 0.01 - 310.00 s ARC2 reset time 2.00
TCCW2 0.01 - 10.00 s ARC2 ARC command pulse width 0.20
ARC-SucChk Off / On - ARC success checking enable On
TARCSUC 0.10 - 100.00 s ARC success checking time 0.30
FT-3pFault Off / On - Execute final trip in 3-phase fault mode Off
TRESET 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC reset time under CB closed 0.30
TEVLV 0.01 - 300.00 s Evolving fault waiting time 0.30
Off / S1 / S2 / S3 /
SHOTNUM-TEST - ARC test shot number Off
S4 / S5 / S6
2.24.7 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
ARC(Function ID: 4A6001)
Element ID Name Description
8200001B6A EVOLV-FAULT TIME OVER Time over of evolved fault under S&T mode
8000001B84 SHOT_MULTI Signal of the second and the following ARC shots
(2.69a)
CB (CB#1)
Line
CB#1(Busbar CB)
ARC1 with
ARC1 with VCHK1 Line
VCHK1
CB#2(Center CB)
ARC2 with
VCHK2 Line2
As discussed above, the implementation of VCHK is subjected to the ARC. Thus, the
setting of VCHK should be in corresponding to the setting of the ARC. The ARC is discussed
separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Autoreclose function)
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.25-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Check zone A1 B1 C1 D1
A1, C1, D1: Voltage check A2, C2, D2: Voltage check
a. VCHK1 check zone B1: Synchronism check b. VCHK2 check zone B2: Synchronism check
S = SYN1-Angle S =SYN2-A n g l e
VL VL
s VB s VL2
1 2
V1 V2
VCHK-OVB or VCHK-O V L
2or
VCHK-OVL V C H -O
K VL
a. SYN1 b .S Y N
2
This function performs three checks: (1) checking voltage difference, (2) checking
frequency difference, and (3) checking phase difference. The following variables represent
algebraic expression used in these checking:
VB = Bus-bar voltage
VL1 = Line voltage
VL2 = Line2 voltage
ΔV1 = Voltage difference between Bus-bar and Line
ΔV2 = Voltage difference between Line2 and Line
fVB = frequency of VB
fVL = frequency of VL
fVL2 = frequency of VL2
f= slip cycle
Δf1 = frequency difference between Bus-bar and Line
Δf2 = frequency difference between Line2 and Line1
θ1= phase difference between VB and VL
θ2 = phase difference between VL2 and VL
SYN1-dV = Voltage difference setting [SYN1-dV]
SYN2-dV = another voltage difference setting [SYN2-dV]
VCHK-OVB = voltage setting for Bus-bar [VCHK-OVB]
VCHK-OVL = voltage setting for Line [VCHK-OVL]
VCHK-OVL2 =voltage setting for Line2 [VCHK-OVL2]
The VCHK can have the decision of synchronism between the running voltage and the
incoming voltage when the following items (i) to (iv) are satisfied:
(i) Voltage magnitudes
The magnitude of the running voltage and the incoming voltage are greater than
the SYN1 and SYN2 settings:
For SYN1 setting: VB ≥ [VCHK-OVB] and VL ≥ [VCHK-OVL]
For SYN2 setting: VL2 ≥ [VCHK-OVL2] and VL ≥ [VCHK-OVL]
Note: The VCHK calculation should be achieved correctly even if respective rating
voltages in VB, VL, and VL2 are not identical. Thus, the VCHK function has
a matching factor (K) designed to adjust the respective rating voltages when
they are not identical. The matching factor (K) is calculated automatically
using the setting values of VCT ratios; the K is generated based on the
VT ratio at Line
K = VT ratio at busbar
whereas, ‘VT ratio at Line’ is obtained from the actual value in VCT
ratio setting corresponding with scheme switch [SYN-VLine], and ‘VT ratio
at busbar’ is obtained from the actual one corresponding with the scheme
switch [SYN-VBus]. We shall see the scheme switches in the succeeding
section.
Note: When Off is set for the scheme switch [SYN1-dfEN], the VCHK abandons
the frequency difference condition from synchronism requirements.
Similarly, the frequency difference condition is not valid when [SYN2-dfEN]
= Off.
Setting [SYN1-Angle]
∆f > (2.25-1)
180° × Setting [T_SYN1]
where,
Δf= Frequency-difference (or cycle-slip in Hertz)
2 × Setting [SYN1-Angle] 1
Time = × (2.25-3)
360° ∆f[Hz]
2 × Setting [SYN1-Angle] 1
Setting [T_SYN1] < × (2.25-4)
360° ∆f[Hz]
Equations rearrangements:
Setting [SYN1-Angle] 1
Setting [T_SYN1] < × (2.25-5)
180° ∆f[Hz]
1 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [T_SYN1] 1
> ÷ (2.25-6)
∆𝑓[𝐻𝑧] Setting [SYN1-Angle] 180°
𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [SYN1-Angle] 1
𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [T_SYN1] < × (2.25-7)
180° ∆𝑓[𝐻𝑧]
VL : fVL=50.02Hz
VB : fVB=50.00Hz
time
Δf Δf Δf
VL
50s SYN1-Angle
VB Synchronism zone
1Note: For more information on VCT, see Chapter Technical description: Transfer module.
For external connection, see Appendix: Typical external connection.
V3 / V4
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3
V-L12 / V-L23 / V-L31
Selection of Line voltage
SYN-VLine V2-L1 / V2-L2 / V2-L3
(Incoming Voltage) for SYN1
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V2-L31
V3 / V4
Line
VCT1
Line VT
(Phase-A)
Va
Va (VL1)
Vb (VL2)
Bus-bar VT
Bus-bar
(Three Phase)
Vc Vb
Vc (VL3)
a. Phasor diagram in Line
Vs (V3)
Vs
V Line (Vs)2
VBus-bar (Va)3
Figure 2.25-6 Example 1: Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for SYN1
1Note: The structure of VCT is dependent on the VCT type. (See chapter Technical
description: Transformer module)
2 Note: VBus-bar is Running voltage.
3Note: VLine is Incoming voltage.
Figure 2.25-6 shows the VCT input voltages and phases from Bus-bar and Line, and
shows the phase relationship between the running voltage and the incoming voltage. In this
case, configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2.25-6 and Table 2.25-7.
Table 2.25-7 Setting for example 1
Output voltage at VT Bus-bar VT= Three phase
Line VT= Phase-A
Input voltage at VCHK Running voltage (Va)= Phase-A (Bus-bar VT)
Incoming voltage (Vs)= Phase-A (Line VT)
VCHK Setting4 [SYN-VBus] = V-L1
[SYN-VLine]= V3
4Note: Set V3 for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is because V3 and V-L1 are in the
same phase.
Line VCT
Line VT
(Phase B-C)
Va
Va (VL1)
Vb (VL2)
Bus-bar VT Vc
Bus-bar
(Three Phase)
Vb
Vc (VL3) Vbc
a. Phasor diagram in Bus-bar
Vs (V3) Vs
VLine (Vs)1
VBus-bar (Vbc)2
Figure 2.25-7 Example 2: Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for SYN1
1 Note: VBus-bar is Running voltage.
2Note: VLine is Incoming voltage.
Similarly, Figure 2.25-7 shows the VCT input voltages and phases from Bus-bar and
Line. In this case, configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2.25-7 and Table 2.25-8.
Table 2.25-8 Setting for example 2
Output voltage at VT Bus-bar VT= Three phase
Line VT= Phase-BC
Input voltage at VCHK Running voltage(Vb and c)= Phase-B and C (Bus-bar VT)
Incoming voltage (Vs)= Phase-BC (Line VT)
VCHK Setting3 [SYN-VBus] = V-L23
[SYN-VLine]= V3
3Note: V3 is set for the scheme switch [SYN-VLine]. This is because the resultant phase of
V-L2, V-L3 and V3 is same.
Line
VCT
Line VT
(Three phase)
Va (VL1) Va
Vb (VL2)
Bus-bar VT
Bus-bar
(Phase C)
Vc Vb
Vc (VL3)
a. Phasor diagram in line
Vs (V3) Vs
VLine (Vc)1
VBus-bar (Vs)2
Figure 2.25-8 Example 3: Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for SYN1
1 Note: VBus-bar is Running voltage.
2Note: VLine is Incoming voltage.
The configuration of inputs voltages and phases is done as shown in Figure 2.25-8. In
this case, configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2.25-8 and Table 2.25-9.
Bus-bar
VCT
Bus-bar VT
(Phase-B)
Line Va (V-L1) Va
Line VT
(Three-phase) Vb (V-L2)
Vc Vb
Vc (V-L3)
a. Phasor diagram in Line
Line2
Vs (V3) Vs
Line2 VT
(Phase-B) b. Phasor diagram in Bus
Vs2 (V4)
Vs2
VBus-bar (Vs)
VLine2 (Vs2)
Figure 2.25-9 Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for SYN1 and SYN2
1Note: V
Bus-bar is Running voltage. VLine is Incoming voltage.
2Note: V
Line2 is Running voltage. VLine is Incoming voltage.
When VCHK1 and VCHK2 are used in 1.5CB system, set the scheme switches
[SYN-VBus], [SYN-VLine], and [SYN-VLine2]. For example, the settings in Figure 2.25-9 are
applied when VCHK 1 and VCHK2 are applied in the 1.5CB system.
T_DB_DL
8100011B61 UVL 8200011B70
& t 0
UVL &
0.01-100.00S
ARC1-DB_DL ON
8300011B71
OVB
T_SYN1 8300011B72
&
t 0 &
OVL
0.01-100.00S ARC1-SYN1 ON
8400011B64
SYN1-dƟ
8500011B65 ARC1-NOVCHK ON
SYN1-dV
8600011B66
SYN1-df
≥1
SYN1-dfEN OFF
OVL
T_DL2_DL
UVL 8200021B6A
& t 0
&
0.01-100.00S
ARC2-DL2_DL ON
8300021B6B
OVL2
T_SYN2 8300021B6C
&
t 0 &
OVL
0.01-100.00S ARC2-SYN2 ON
8400021B62
SYN2-dƟ
8500021B63 ARC2-NOVCHK ON
SYN2-dV
8600021B64
SYN2-df
≥1
SYN2-dfEN OFF
2.25.7 Setting
Setting of VCHK (Function ID: 4A8001)
Default setting value
1CB system 1CB system 2CB system
V-Bus :Input from V-Bus :Input from V-Line:Input from
No
Units
Setting items Range Contents three-phase voltage representative phase three-phase voltage
voltage V-Bus & V-Line2: tes
V-Line:Input from Input from
representative phase V-Line:Input from representative phase
voltage three-phase voltage voltage (Fixed)
ARC1-VCHK-
Off / On – Enabling ARC1 operation Off Off Off
EN
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3
/ V-L12 / V-L23 / Selection of Bus Select either V-L1,
V-L31 / V2-L1 /
SYN-VBus V2-L2 / V2-L3 / - voltage(Running Voltage) V-L2, V-L3, V-L12, V3 (Fixed setting) V3 (Fixed setting)
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / for SYN V-L23, or V-L31
V2-L31 / V3 / V4
V-L1 / V-L2 / V-L3
/ V-L12 / V-L23 / Select either V-L1, Select either V-L1,
V-L31 / V2-L1 / Selection of Line voltage
SYN-VLine V2-L2 / V2-L3 / - V3 (Fixed setting) V-L2, V-L3, V-L12, V-L2, V-L3, V-L12,
(Incoming Voltage) for SYN
V2-L12 / V2-L23 / V-L23, or V-L31 V-L23, or V-L31
V2-L31 / V3 / V4
Voltage for the checking
VCHK-OVB 10 - 150 V 51
Live-Bus
Voltage for the checking
VCHK-UVB 10 - 150 V 13
Dead-Bus
Voltage for the checking
VCHK-OVL 10 - 150 V 51
Live-Line
Voltage for the checking
VCHK-UVL 10 - 150 V 13
Dead-Line
Difference angle for the
SYN1-Angle 0 - 75 deg 30
checking SYN1
Difference voltage for the
SYN1-dV 0 - 150 V 150
checking SYN1
ARC1 Voltage check
Units
Setting items Range Contents three-phase voltage representative phase three-phase voltage
voltage V-Bus & V-Line2: tes
V-Line:Input from Input from
representative phase V-Line:Input from representative phase
voltage three-phase voltage voltage (Fixed)
Voltage check time
T_OVL3P 0.01 - 100.00 s 0.05
"Live-line"
ARC2-VCHK-
Off / On – Enabling ARC2 operation Off Off
EN
2.25.8 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
VCHK(Function ID: 4A8001)
Element ID Name Description
8000011B23 ARC1-VCHK Voltage check for autoreclose 1
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.26-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
Figure 2.26-1 shows that the function is made with following logics:
Collection: The signals, received from the various protection functions (shown as
‘FC18’ and others; see Table 2.26-2 and Table 2.26-6), are gathered in the Trip-signal
collection logic.
Generation: CB trip signal generation, Sub-signal generation for blocking ARC§, and
Alarm-signal generation logics are provided.
A binary output (BO†) circuit must be selected in order to energize the trip coil of the
CB#1 and CB#2. That is, the BOs should be made the connection with the CB#1 and CB#2
trip coils; the drive signal should be outputted (i.e., ‘TRIP-COMMAND1-A,-B,-C’ and
‘TRIP-COMMAND2-A,-B,-C’†). The Alarm-signal generation logic operates to provide a
trigger signal for the recording function‡.
†Note:The internal connection between the TRC function and the BIO module should be
performed using the BIO settings or the PLC programming. The user can program
the connection the PLC monitoring point ‘TRIP-COMMAND1-A (8000001B20) etc.’
with preferred BO circuits using the settings [Input signal1] etc. of each BO on the
BIO module. The externally wired connection between the BIO module and trip
coil circuit is made at the IED terminals. For more information with regard to the
BO circuit concerning the Element ID (Data ID), see Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module.
§Note: Autoreclose (ARC) and other protection functions are discussed separately. See
Chapter Relay application, respectively.
‡Note: For information on recording, see Chapter Recording function.
FC2-OPT-TRIP-B
OPT-TRIP B
FC2-OPT-TRIP-C Protection
GEN.TRIP
FC2-OPT-TRIP functions
GEN.TRIP-A
FC2-ARC-BLOCK
FC2 GEN.TRIP-B ZG
FC2-OPT-ALARM GEN.TRIP-C
Sub-signal
FC2-OPT-AR CBF
generation
FC2-OPT-BR GEN.ARC-BLOCK ARC
FC2-OPT-CR
FC2-OPT-ABR GEN.TRIP_ALARM
FC2-OPT-BCR
FC2-OPT-CAR Alarm signal OPT.PHASE-A Recording
generation OPT.PHASE-B function
OPT.PHASE-C
FC40-OPT-TRIP-A etc.
FC40 OPT.PHASE-N
CBF1_RETRIP
CBF CBF1_ARC-BLOCK
CB1_BRIDGE B
CB2_BRIDGE
ARC
CB1_94TT A
CB2_94TT
Table 2.26-3 and Table 2.26-4 summarize the operation results in the TRC function.
Table 2.26-3, shows the correspondents between the input signals (which are signals provided
from the protection functions) and their reasons (that is, types of faults). For example, if a
fault (1LG in phase A) occurs, ‘FC*_OPT_TRIP-A’ signal may be provided for the TRC function
from a protection function; the TRC function may generates ‘TRIP-COMMAN1-A’ and
‘TRIP-COMMAND2-A’ signals when the scheme switch [TP-MODE]=PER-PHASE (see Table
2.26-4). Note that Table 2.26-3 illustrates generic operation rules concernin g fault types;
the inputs depend on the practical operation of relay functions. Hence, the user should figure
out actual inputs using Table 2.26-2 together with the characteristics of respective protection
functions.
Note the TRC outputs will be influenced by the signals generated in the ARC function.
That is, when a CB1_BRIDGE or a CB1_94TT signal is generated and it is injected into the
TRC function, the TRC function is instructed to output a three-phase tripping (i.e., issuing
CB1_94TT following ARC1 FT or TPAR) or the TRC function is instructed to operate
unconditionally in three-phase tripping mode (i.e., issuing CB1_BRIDGE following ARC1
UNREADT). We shall see a number of operation settings [ARC1-MODE] and [ARC2-MODE] in
the ARC function.
Table 2.26-3 Trip command and its correspondent fault
Trip phase Inputs (See Table 2.26-2) Outputs
(Fault type) Trip signals coming from protection functions (FC*) Trip commands
Phase A (1LG) FC*_OPT_TRIP-A
Table 2.26-5 illustrates CBF function can generate a re-trip signal and an ARC-BLOCK
signal.
Table 2.26-5 Signals coming from CBF function
Signals issued in the CBF
Protection function Note
CBF1_RETRIP CBF1_ARC-BLOCK
CBF X X
Note: ‘X’ represents a valid signal for the TRC’. The ‘CBF1_ARC-BLOCK’ signal is
grouped with the ‘FC*_OPT_ARC-BLOCK’ signal in the Sub-signal generation
scheme.
The TRC logic has PLC connection points, which the user can program for issuing the
trip command. For example, if the user wishes to trip the CBs using signals generated by
external relays, the signals can be connected to the TRC logic using the following PLC
connection points: TRIP-A_ADD, TRIP-B_ADD, TRIP-C_ADD and TRIP_ADD.
Protection 8000001B60
functions FC*-OPT-TRIP_A
OPT-TRIP-A
≥1
FC01
800000EBB3 TRIP-A_ADD
FC02
8100001B61
FC*-OPT-TRIP_B
OPT-TRIP-B
≥1
810000EBB4 TRIP-B_ADD
FC40
8200001B62
FC*-OPT-TRIP_C OPT-TRIP-C
≥1
820000EBB5 TRIP-C_ADD
8300001B63
OPT-TRIP
FC*-OPT-TRIP
≥1
830000EBB6 TRIP_ADD
The TRC function has a scheme switch [TP-MODE] to determine a trip mode; hence, the
user can select either single-phase trip mode (1-PHASE) or three-phase trip mode (3-PHASE)
or per-phase trip mode (PER-PHASE) for the CB tripping. Table 2.26-4 has shown the output
signals when the TRC function receives the trip signals from the protection functions. Note
that the scheme switch [TP-MODE] is only applicable when a phase trip mode (1P) is set in a
protection function (i.e., the user should set trip-phase selectors using [TPMD] settings, which
some protection functions have. If single-phase trip signals are not generated in the protection
The “GEN.TRIP-A,-B,-C” signals are transferred to the ARC function to initiate the
reclose operation of the CBs.
To ARC
8200001BB2 GEN.TRIP-A
820000EBB2 ADD_OPT_COM GEN.TRIP-B
GEN.TRIP-C
Trip-command To ZG
≥1
collection scheme GEN.TRIP
OPT-TRIP-A ≥1
& 8000001B6C
8014281001 To CB#1
≥1
OPT-TRIP-B ≥1
≥1 8100001B6D
≥1 TRIP COMMAND1-A
&
8014291001
≥1
OPT-TRIP-C ≥1 TRIP COMMAND1-B
≥1 8200001B6E ≥1
& 80142A1001
OPT-TRIP ≥1 ≥1
≥1 TRIP COMMAND1-C
≥1 & ≥1
& 80142C1001 To CB#2
&
≥1 TRIP COMMAND2-A
80142D1001
& &
≥1 ≥1 TRIP COMMAND2-B
& 80142E1001
& & ≥1 TRIP COMMAND2-C
&
1-PHASE
TP-MODE 3-PHASE
PER-PHASE
≥1
8000001BB0
800000EBB0 TPMODE_3PH
CBF2_RETRIP-A
CBF2_RETRIP-B
CBF2_RETRIP-C
From ARC
CB1_BRIDGE
CB2_BRIDGE
CB1_94TT
CB2_94TT
From PROT-COMMON
CB-SYSTEM=1CB
CB-SYSTEM=2CB
8500001B65
Protection
functions FC*-ARC-BLOCK
FC01 To ARC function
≥1 8500001B79
FC02
GEN.ARC-BLOCK
≥1
FC40
From CBF function
CBF1 CBF1-ARC-BLOCK
CBF2 CBF2-ARC-BLOCK
FC*-OPT-BR ≥1 8000001B72
OPT-BR &
≥1 OPT-PHASE-B
890000EBB9 OPT-P-B_ADD
8200001B68
FC40
8000001B73
FC*-OPT-CR OPT-CR ≥1 &
OPT-PHASE-C
≥1
8A0000EBBA OPT-P-C_ADD
8000001B74
8400001B69 &
OPT-PHASE-N
FC*-OPT-ABR OPT-ABR
≥1
FC*-OPT-BCR OPT-BCR
≥1
8D0000EBBC OPT-P-BC_ADD
8600001B6B
FC*-OPT-CAR OPT-CAR
≥1
8E0000EBBD OPT-P-CA_ADD
8400001B64
FC*_OPT-ALARM GEN-ALARM ≥1
≥1
840000EBB7 OPT-ALARM_ADD
800000EBBE OPT-P-N_ADD
When an alarm signal indicating a Line-to-Line (LL) fault and others is provided
externally, the user can also record it as the alarm by the use of PLC connection points
‘OPT-P-A_ADD’ and others. If the additional relay being designed to operate for a ground fault
is available, use the alternative PLC connection point ‘OPT-P-N_ADD’.
2.26.4 Setting
Setting of TRC(Function ID: 4A0001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
2.26.5 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
TRC(Function ID: 4A0001)
Element ID Name Description
8100001BB1 ADD_FS Additional fail-safe command
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.27-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable)
†Note:When the IED operates for the 1.5CB arrangement (i.e., two CBs are connected
with the IED), the user should set the scheme switches [CB1-Contact] and
[CB2-Contact] both.
The user should set On for the scheme switch [CB-SV] when the operation of the contact
supervision feature is required; set the time for the setting [TCBSV] to define the monitoring
period, which the user can have an option among 0 to 100 sec.
For the operation, the user should inject signals of CB states for the following PLC
connection points: ‘CB1-A NO CONT’, ‘CB1-A NC CONT’ and others. Note that a common
point is ready for the CB designed to three-phase tripping: CB1-NO CONT’ and ‘CB1-NC
CONT’.
8000001BB0
8300001BBE ≥1
TCBSV
8000001B93
=1 1 t 0
8000001B87 & CB1-A_FAIL
8300001BBF ≥1
0–100S
8100001BB1
8300001BBE ≥1 TCBSV
8100001B94
8100001B88 =1 1 t 0
&
8300001BBF ≥1 CB1-B_FAIL
0–100S
8200001BB2
8300001BBE ≥1 TCBSV
t 0 8200001B95
8200001B89 =1 1
& CB1-C_FAIL
8300001BBF ≥1
0–100S 8300001B96
& ≥1 CB1-FAIL
8400001BB3 8500001B98
CB2-B_FAIL CB2-B_FAIL
8400001B8A
8500001BB4 8600001B99
CB2-C_FAIL CB2-C_FAIL
8500001B8B
8700001B9A
8600001BB5
CB2-FAIL CB2-FAIL
8600001B8C
To ARC
840000EBB3 CB2-A_NO_CONT
CB2-A_CLOSE CB1-ALLPH_CLOSE
840000EBBA CB2-A_NC_CONT CB2-B_CLOSE CB2-ALLPH_CLOSE
CB2-C_CLOSE CB-SYSTEM=1CB
≥1 &
To OVG, OVN, UVP, DEFCAR
NO &
≥1 TCBLOSPH 8900001B91
NC ≥1 & ≥1 t 0 CB-LOSS_PHASE
Both 1 0.00 to 0.10s
CB2-Contact
&
CB2-CONTACT=BOTH
1CB
2CB
CB-System
(iii) Logic
Figure 2.27-2 shows the logic used to determine DS status and generates the output signal of
the DS state: DS_CLOSE or DS_OPEN. The supervision scheme logic to supervise the status
of the DS auxiliary switch contacts. This scheme logic is applied when BOTH is set for the
scheme switch [DS-Contact]. For the operation, the user should inject signals of DS states for
the following PLC connection points: ‘DS-NO CONT’, ‘DS NC CONT’ and others.
1 DS_OPEN
≥1
NO
NC ≥1
Both
DS-Contact &
Both
DS-SV
UVLG-AB
UVLG-BC
UVLG-CA
8000001B60 DEAD_LINE_DETECT
A & TDLD
8100001B61 & t 0
UVLG 8000001B9C To SOTF-OC
B ≥1
8200001B62 DEAD_LINE_DETECT
t 0
C
0.00 to 3000.00s
≥1
UVLG-OR
& UVLG-AND
8400001B63
AB
8500001B64
UVLS BC
8600001B65
CA
≥1
UVLS-OR
&
UVLS-AND
DLDbyUV On
From
DLDbyCB On
CB decision logic &
CB_ALLPH_OPEN
Figure 2.27-3 Dead line detection logic with under voltage relays
The pick-up threshold is defined using setting [OCD], which is from 0.05 A to 0.20 A at 1 A
rating†. At 5 A rating, 0.25 A to 1.00 A is applied.
IM
IS
IN
0.1s
Figure 2.27-5 Scheme logic for current change check
(2.84.4)
2.27.7 Setting
Setting of PROT_COMMON (Function ID: 48A001)
Range Default setting value
Setting item Units Contents Notes
1A rating 5A rating 1A rating 5A rating
UVLS 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-phase relay operating value 77.0
UVLG 5.0 - 130.0 V UV phase-ground relay operating value 45.0
OCD 0.05 - 0.20 0.25 - 1.00 A OCD relay operating value 0.10 0.50
2.27.8 Data ID
Signal monitoring point
PROT_COMMON(48A001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001B88 CB-A_CLOSE Main contact closed in phase-A of CB1 and CB2
In the steady state operation, the load current through a transmission-line is smaller
than the total of the rated loads that connected to the transmission-line. The load current can
reach as high as times of the maximum load current for a moment when the entire loads are
energized after a long interruption, but the load current can decreases within three or four
seconds. It is accounted that the load current at the energizing time is 1.5 times larger than a
normal peak load. Thus, it is necessary for some protective functions to have a few setting
groups that discriminate between the inrush current on cold load restoration and the fault
current. For instance, the function of overcurrent protection (OC) with the CLP is immune
during the inrush period. The OC is discussed separately. (See chapter Relay application:
Overcurrent protection)
The CLP can have eight setting groups for cold load state in order that the CLP can
follows the transition from one state to another state. Thus, the CLP can make some
protective functions switch to another higher setting group including time delay. The CLP also
can halt with setting. The group selection of the CLP is performed with scheme switch
[CLP-SG].
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.28-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Under the normal operation, where the CB is closed, the CLP stays in STATE 0, and the
OC operates with a normal setting group.
When the CB opens, the scheme moves into STATE_1, then Cold-load-enable-timer
(TCLP) runs. If the CB closes again while the TCLP is running, the scheme will re-enter into
STATE_0. If the TCLP expires and the load is in cold, the scheme moves into STATE_2. When
the CB closes again, the scheme moves into STATE_3.
At STATE_2 and STATE_3, the setting group of the CLP is applied. The operation of the
CLP is forbidden by placing set of OFF for the scheme switch [CLP-EN].
Accelerated reset of the CLP is also possible. As being at STATE_3, poly-phase currents
are monitored by the function of inrush current detection (ICD). If poly-phase currents plunge
below the setting of ICD threshold, and when the duration of the plunge is longer than setting
[TCLP_DO], then the scheme automatically reverts into STATE_0. By placing set of ON for
scheme switch [CLP-DOEN], it is possible for the reset function to accelerate.
STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings: Normal
Monitor CB status
CB opens CB closes
within
T CLE time
STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings: Normal
From PROT_COMM
CB-DS_CONDITION
CB_ALLPH_OPEN
CB_ANYPH_CLOSE
STATE CONDITION
8000001B60 Change to
& & STATE 1
STATE 0
TCLP_EN
8100001B61 t 0 Change to
& 1 STATE 2
STATE 1 &
0 - 10000s 1
& Change to
& Change to
1 STATE 0
Setting Group1
8200001B62
STATE 2 & Change to
& Change to
& Setting Group2
STATE 3
+
"ON" 0 - 10000s TCLP_DO & Change to
Setting Group5
t 0
& Group1
8000001C20
A 0.00 - 100.00s
Group2 & Change to
1 1 Group3 Setting Group6
OCCLP 8100001C21
B Group4
8200001022 Group5 & Change to
C CLP-Test Group6 Setting Group7
+ CLP-SG Group7
[CLP-DOEN] Group8 & Change to
+ Setting Group8
+
"ON"
2.28.2 Setting
Setting of CLP(Function ID: 481001)
Default
Note
Setting item Range Units Contents setting
s
value
CLP CLP-EN Off / On - Cold load protection enable Off
Group1 / Group2 / Group3 /
Applied setting group at cold load
CLP-SG Group4 / Group5 / Group6 / - Group1
mode
Group7 / Group8
TCLP_EN 0 - 10000 s Cold load enable time 100
TCLP_RESET 0 - 10000 s Cold load reset time 100
CLP-DOEN Off / On - Cold load drop-out enable Off
OCCLP 0.02 - 3.00 / 0.10-15.00 A Cold load drop-out current threshold 0.50 / 2.50
TCLP_DO 0.00 - 100.00 s Cold load drop-out time 0.00
Test CLP-Test Off / STATE0 / STATE3 - Forcibly changing to CLP state Off
2.28.3 Data ID
PLC monitoring point
CLP(Function ID: 481001)
Element ID Name Description
8000001C20 OCCLP-A OCCLP relay element operated (phase-A)
Control scheme
Figure 3.1-1 shows the control overview for the control function; there are two control stages:
“Wait for a command” and “Receiving commands”. The function will wait for a command from
the server in the first stage. During the receiving stage, the function will respond to “Select”,
“Cancel”, and “Operate” commands. Specific logic is provided for each command for each
receiving stage. A decision is required from each logic block to move to the next step (i.e.,
‘Failed’ or ‘Success’). When a ‘success’ decision is determined in the operate logic, the
respective command is issued to the relevant device; the device commences with its operation
(for example, a 43-switch is changed to “ON” from “OFF”). The waiting and receiving stages
loop around at the receipt of every command.
Waiting stage
The type of control can be categorized in accordance with its origin, (Remote/Local/PLC)
and modes (SBO/DIR). That is, the respective control scheme should respond to the respective
origin and mode. The user should be aware of the context of the control action, “On (or
Closing) control” and “Off (or Open) control” in relationship to its origin and mode†.
†Note:The “On control” and “Off control” can be found in the SPOS, DPSY and other
functions. For more information on these functions, see the explanations provided
for each respective function.
Control mode
Either Select-Before-operation (SBO) or Direct-Operate-control (DIR) is provided as a control
mode for the device. The user can select the preferred control mode.
SBOw
Selection Command
Answer#1 Response
Oper. Command
Operation
Answer#2 Response
Selection SBOw
Command
Answer Response
Oper.
Operation
Command
Answer
Response
Oper.
Operation Command
Answer#1 Response
Device status changed
Answer#2 Command
termination
Result
SAS IED
Process (Server) Control function Target device
Operation
Control
Command
Answer#1
Response
Control hierarchy
It is important that the user understand the meaning of the terms ‘control-right’ and
‘control-hierarchy’ in connection with the functioning of the control and monitoring
applications in the sub-station automation system (SAS) and the sub-station control and
monitoring system (SCMS). For instance, when we wish to operate a device (such as a piece of
switchgear or others), the system has the device forbidden to operate if the system is unable to
give a ‘control-right’ for the device using the ‘control-hierarchy’. Figure 3.3-1 depicts the
control-hierarchy; the control-hierarchy is made of three control-levels, two selector-switches,
and three control-points. Either control command of three control-points is permitted so that
the other commands will be forbidden in the system. On this account, no collision of
control-points exists within the system.
Control-point in RCC
Network level
Control-point in OWS/EWS
Communication
EWS OWS
Selector switch
(43R) RCC EWS/OWS
Station level
Control-point on LCD(MIMIC)
ON/OFF operation on LCD
Bay level
Control-right
Switchgear and others
Control levels Selector switches Control points and positions of selector switches
The part ○
1 and ○
2 logics are programmed so that, the control-right signal can be
distributed to the respective control applications. With regard to the DPSY01 function, PLC
connection point “DPSY01IN_TMP_28” has been programmed using DOUT_BOOL feature
(for example). Therefore, the control-right signal is transferred to the select and
operate-condition logic‡ when the user connects the control-hierarchy with the DPSY01
function using “DPSY01IN_TMP_28”.
‡Note:The select-condition and operate-condition logic are used to decide upon the
execution of a select command or an operate command in the DPSY01 function. For
more detail, see chapter Control and monitoring application: DPSY function:
Operate condition and Select condition. As per the DPSY function, other functions,
such as SPOS, DPOS, and TOPS, have the same logic; the user is required to do
the connection.
○
1 Checking the bay level ○
2 Distribution of the control-right
RemoteLocalKey_43BCU
From LOCMT
DIN_UNIT UNIT_TO_BOOL SPOS01_CTRL_RIGHT
LRSW01_LR_ST FID DO
DTYPE ST DOUT_BOOL
(530001 3109001001) FID ST
DID
DTYPE
DID
DI
To SPOS01
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
SPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL
Operate
FID ST
condition logic
DTYPE
DID
DI
To SPOS02
510001 820102ED50 SPOS02IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
Operate
condition logic
DPSY01_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL
FID ST
DTYPE
DID
DI
To DPSY01
511001 820201ED50 DPSY01IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
DPSY02_CTRL_RIGHT Operate
DOUT_BOOL condition logic
FID ST
DTYPE
DID
DI
To DPSY02
511001 820202ED50 DPSY02IN_TMP_28 Select
condition logic
TPOS02_CTRL_RIGHT Operate
DOUT_BOOL condition logic
FID ST
DTYPE
DID
DI
To TPOS02
513001 810402EE57 TPOS02IN_TMP_21 Select
condition logic
Operate
condition logic
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 3.4-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
SPOS20 function
SPOS20_STD_RPT
DPOS function
≥1
Reception of “DCB”
DPOS01 function
DPOS72 function
DPOS72_STD_RPT
DPSY function
TPOS function
SOFTSW function
ASEQ function later. (See Chapter Control and monitoring application: Automatic
sequence controlling function)
In Figure 3.4-1, the CMNCTRL1 function generates a message denoted with the number
1; Figure 3.4-2 exemplifies that the IED-1 generates the “stVal” message 1. In addition,
IEDs-2 to -10 are also required to receive message 1, this is denoted with the number 2. For
IEC61850 communication, the “stVal” messages 1 and 2 are carried by GOOSE publish
and GOOSE subscribe. Thus, for all IEDs (i.e., IED-1 to IED-10 of Figure 3.4-2), it is required
to set the GOOSE publish destination corresponding to the message.
1 2 2 2
Figure 3.4-3 demonstrates how the GOOSE publish destination is set with regard to the
DCB message. The user is required to set the destination for each respective IED by selecting
the signal “DCB SND OR”, corresponding to the GOOSE publish, this must be performed at
the respective screens in GR-TIEMS†. That is, the user should select the “stVal” item for each
IED. After setting, the user should write the setting date for each respective IED.
○
1 Selected IED
○2 Required settings in
the respective IEDs.
CMNCTRL2
function
PLC_O_BIT_0201 For
・Event record function
5A0101 800200EF40 PLC_BIT_0201 (5A0101 8002001F40)
・Communication (required mapping)
Information ・LEDs
cascaded§ ・IED screen display
・Binary output module
etc…
†Note:The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for
operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba.
2. Return value: When the number of the counter reaches its maximum value (in
case of the default setting, 999,999), it can return and begin
incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set with
[CNTRV].
3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made, but the control operation
of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined time
limit, the selection is canceled. The time limit can be set using
[TSC]; the range is between 30 and 300sec. having a 1sec. step.
4. Time out: When the selection of the target device and its control execution is
made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting
time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from
the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300sec. in 1
sec. steps.
5. Counter limit: The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and
2,147,483,647 using [CNTVALMAX]. The default setting is 999,999.
3.4.5 Setting
CMNCTRL setting list (FunctionID:5A0001)
Default
Units
3.4.6 Signal
Connection points
CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001)
Element ID Name Description
800800EF40 PLC_I_001 PLC event information 1
Connection points
CMNCTRL2 (Function ID: 5A0101)
Element ID Name Description
320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal1
Local to remote
&
1≥
If the user does not touch the
operation/function keys on the front panel &
within 35 min. in the local control, the IED
will be changed for the remote control
unconditionally.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 3.5-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
†Note:As a rule, the control commands have parameters. For example, the “Off to On”
and “On to Off” control directions that are used in commands are pre-configured as
parameters in the communication protocol. Note that the parameters vary
depending upon the respective protocol used, such as IEC61850, Modbus and
others. For IEC61850, Table 3.5-2 shows the parameters defined: the rule for
control direction can be found in “ctlVal”, the command publisher is recognized
using the parameter “origin”. For more information about the parameters, see
Appendix IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS.
Figure 3.5-2 Example of user-preferred control scheme using PLC user logic
Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in
the DIR mode.
3.5.5 Signal
Signal monitoring points
LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
Element ID Name Description
3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST S43BCU state
1Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Outline. Note that pressing the
“CLEAR” key causes the Reset of the LEDs.
2Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 3.6-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Operate logic
0 t
Failed
0.3s
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function
(AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Table 3.6-3 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LED Reset control hierarchy M
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Failed Do nothing
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Operate condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§”
in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
From KEYINPUT
240001 31000E1730
LEDR_KEY_CLEAR
CLEAR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 3.6-9 Settings for LED-03 circuit provided by “Setting I/O menu” of GR-TIEMS
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Table 3.6-6 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check CO 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs sboClass sboClass CF
3.6.6 Setting
Setting of TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
LEDDR1-EN Off / On - LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off
3.6.7 Signal
Signal monitoring points
TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001)
Element ID Name Description
8007011D53 LEDR01_SC Select command
Mapping point
TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001)
Element ID Name Description
7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Dev01 control request
Closed/Open signals
GCNT01_CNT_VAL
Inputs 320E011D20
Changes in device status
(e.g., operations of 43S) BI 540001 800E01EDE0 GCNT01_PLC_SGNL GCNT01
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 3.7-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
– Number of counters 32 32
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the
acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are
provided in the GCNT functions. Thirty-two independent GCNT counters† are available. That
is, counters GCNT01 to GCNT32† can operate simultaneously. The values counted are stored
in the non-volatile memory so that they are not erased if the power supply to the IED is
interrupted.
For simplicity, only the GCNT01 function is discussed; the features in the remaining
GCNT02–GCNT32 functions are identical to the GCNT01 function.
a. On (Closed) signals
Counter 1 2 … n …
Counter 1 2 … n …
Counter 1 2 … n …
[GCNT01-CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum
number from 9 to 2147483647.
Counter
10 10 10
5 5 5
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Complete” signal at the output point
“GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”, when the GCNT01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Reset-Control” is true. If the GCNT01 function determines that the
“Remote-Reset-Control” is not true, the GCNTS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Table 3.7-4 PLC Connection point (Input signals from the control hierarchy logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 Control hierarchy for GCNT01–32 M
Table 3.7-5 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “select complete/ failed” for BIO)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
540001 8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E021E76 GCNT02_SLD_CSCN GCNT02 Selection completed (Mapping)
540001 8A0E031E76 GCNT03_SLD_CSCN GCNT03 Selection completed (Mapping)
… … …
540001 8A0E201E76 GCNT32_SLD_CSCN GCNT32 Selection completed (Mapping)
5400018B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select failed
5400018B0E021E7B GCNT02_SLF_CSCN GCNT02 select failed
5400018B0E031E7B GCNT03_SLF_CSCN GCNT03 select failed
…. … …
5400018B0E201E7B GCNT32_SLF_CSCN GCNT32 select failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”, when the GCNT01 function has determined that the signal
“Remote-cancel” is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued if the function is able to
determine that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.
Input Cancel logic in GCNT01 Output
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Failed Do nothing
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function, in Figure 3.7-11, can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”,
when the GCNT01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Reset-Control” is true.
Input Operate logic in GCNT01 Output
Operate condition‡
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Statics-counter
Failed Do nothing
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
COUNT2 (No Assign) +
0
COUNT3 (No Assign) +
0
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”, when the new
value applied from the sub-menu is appropriate.
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Oper
Origin
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Table 3.7-10 Mapping signals required for GIGO3302 object in GCNT01 function
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 540001300e011D23 GCNT01_CNT_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5400016A0e011FA7 GCNT01_CNT_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 540001320e011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 540001000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Table 3.7-11 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Check “Input”
3.7.6 Setting
Setting list for the GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
Default setting
Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
Note: The number of counters in the GCNT depends on IED model. We omit the setting
tables of GCNT03 etc. because the setting items are the same except the device
number.
3.7.7 Signal
Connection points in PLC logics in GCNT01
GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
Element ID Name Description
800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 GCNT00IN_TMP_51
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the GCNT function. We
have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN” point
for the 2nd device, use the description of “GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” in place of
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 3.8-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
3.8.1 Function
(i) Mode sensor
The MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED.
To use this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to
operation. During the operation, a select signal and an operate signal are provided for the
TEST-FB when the SAS provides a test command for the IED; hence, the MDCTRL function
comes with two time-out timers. Setting [MDCTRL-SELRST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling a select command; setting [MDCTRL-EXERST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling an operate command.
Table 3.8-3 PLC connection point (Input signal for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
550001 821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL control hierarchy condition M
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Table 3.8-5 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Check Check CO 5500017013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod ctlModel ctlModel CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboTimeout INT32U CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboClass sboClass CF
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control” and
“CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
3.8.3 Setting
Setting of MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
3.8.4 Signal
Signal monitoring point
MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
Element ID Name Description
8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8313011E89 MODE01_OEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command fail condition signal
Mapping point
MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
Element ID Name Description
7013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL01 correction request from cmm
A number of devices can be controlled separately, i.e. the SPOS function has separate
sets of logic for control (i.e., SPOS01, SPOS02 etc. functions). For simplicity, only the SPOS01
function is discussed here; the features in the SPOS02 etc. functions are identical to the
SPOS01 function.
†Note:A binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits
(BOs); the user makes the connection between the SPOS01 function and the binary
IO module using a signal number (is made of a function ID and an “Element
ID”).The signal name and number of the SPOS01 function are listed later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the SPOS function quickly, go to sections 4.1.4 and 4.1.5,
where setting of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signals for IEC 61850
communication is described.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.1-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
– Number of functions NA 20
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Cancel logic
Select command Off from remote-end
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function can issue an output “Selection success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-ON-Control” signal received is true. If the SPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-ON-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
Cancel logic
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” when the SPOS01 function determines that the “Select command
Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is true. If the SPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-OFF-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from remote-end
0.6s
[SPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the SPOS01 function can issue a “Selection success”
signal at the output-point “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”.
Note: The signal “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.1-2. If the “Local-ON-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to
the “Wait for a command” stage.
Cancel logic
Cancel logic
Select command On from front panel
0.6s
[SPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
defined by the ILK function itself (i.e., the user cannot set the condition).
‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.1-13.
§Note:An Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for
automatic control. The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it
is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
††Note: To identify the output signals of the other SPOS logics, see Table 4.1-9.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the SPOS01 function can issue a “Selection success”
signal at the output-point “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”.
1Note: The signal “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.1-4. If the “Local-OFF-Control” signal is not true, the SPOS01 function returns to
the “Wait for a command” stage.
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from remote-end
Operate logic
Select command On by PLC
Failed Operate command
function
1≥ &
ON-control command requiring ILK checking† To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC#1 connection point) command”
Operate command
To BO connection
510001 800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK with ILK† condition
& “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(510001_8601011DC6)
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed DIR
SPOS01-On 0 t Selection “success”
0.1s
ON-control command requiring no ILK checking† For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point) 0 t
Operate command Selection “Failed”
510001 800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
DIR
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The signal “SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same as that shown in Figure 4.1-2.
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from remote-end
Operate logic
Select command On by the PLC
function Operate command
1≥ &
OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation
(PLC#1 connection point)
510001 800101EE31 Operate command with To BO connection
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK
ILK† condition & “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed (510001_8601011DC6)
SPOS01-Off 0 t Selection “success”
0.1s
OFF-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point)
0 t
Operate command Selection “Failed”
510001 800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND &
without ILK† condition 0.6s
Select condition‡
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The output point “SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure
4.1-4.
Unmatched co
Command “ON control” received &
Command “OFF control” received &
received
SPOS01_STATE
(510001 0001011001)
[SCDEN]*8 Same Directional
Controlling Event
OFF
Additional condition (PLC#1 connection point)
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31
[SPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC #2connection point)
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EE62 SPOS01IN_TMP_32 &
[SPOS01-CTREN]
On
4Note: If the issue of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is
blocked until the trip operation is completed. If an IED includes a relay application,
the trip command is issued at the output point “GEN_TRIP” in Table 4.1-6.
5Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in a command
is not identical to “IED test status”.
6Note: The “Event suppression” function can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See section
4.1.4(i)-2)
7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits.
8Note: The common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘On’ and ‘Off”
operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch
(SCDEN), the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same
operation- direction compared with the previous operation direction. (i.e., when On
(Off) is performed sequentially). On the other hand, if On is set for the scheme
switch, the logic is not blocked.
9Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition” The
user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic
using the connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see
chapter “Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy” see PLC#3 of
Table 4.1-7.
10Note: To identify the input point of the other SPOS, see Table 4.1-7 for PLC#1 and
PLC#2.
Table 4.1-2 PLC connection points (Input points for command ‘On’)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
510001 800101EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND SPOS01 PLC On-control without checking O
510001 800102EE32 DEV02_CL_COMMAND SPOS02 PLC On-control without checking O
510001 800103EE32 DEV03_CL_COMMAND SPOS03 PLC On-control without checking O
…. …. ….
510001 800114EE32 DEV20_CL_COMMAND SPOS20 PLC On-control without checking O
510001 800101EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK SPOS01 PLC On-control checking with interlock O
510001 800102EE33 DEV02_CL_INTERLOCK SPOS02 PLC On-control checking with interlock O
510001 800103EE33 DEV03_CL_INTERLOCK SPOS03 PLC On-control checking with interlock O
Table 4.1-3 PLC connection points (Input points for command ‘Off’)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
510001 800101EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK SPOS01 PLC Off-control checking with interlock O
510001 800102EE31 DEV02_OP_INTERLOCK SPOS02 PLC Off-control checking with interlock O
510001 800103EE31 DEV03_OP_INTERLOCK SPOS03 PLC Off-control checking with interlock O
…. …. ….
510001 800114EE31 DEV20_OP_INTERLOCK SPOS20 PLC Off-control checking with interlock O
510001 800101EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND SPOS01 PLC Off-control without checking O
510001 800102EE30 DEV02_OP_COMMAND SPOS02 PLC Off-control without checking O
510001 800103EE30 DEV03_OP_COMMAND SPOS03 PLC Off-control without checking O
…. …. ….
510001 800114EE30 DEV20_OP_COMMAND SPOS20 PLC Off-control without checking O
Table 4.1-7 PLC connection points (Input signal for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31 SPOS01 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
510001 800102EE61 SPOS02IN_TMP_31 SPOS02 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
510001 800103EE61 SPOS03IN_TMP_31 SPOS03 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
…. …. ….
510001 800114EE61 SPOS20IN_TMP_31 SPOS20 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
510001 810101EE62 SPOS01IN_TMP_32 SPOS01 user configurable select condition (PLC#2) O
510001 810102EE62 SPOS02IN_TMP_32 SPOS02 user configurable select condition (PLC#2) O
510001 810103EE62 SPOS03IN_TMP_32 SPOS03 user configurable select condition (PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
510001 810114EE62 SPOS20IN_TMP_32 SPOS20 user configurable select condition (PLC#2) O
510001 820101ED50 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 SPOS01 control hierarchy condition (PLC#3) M
510001 820102ED50 SPOS02IN_TMP_28 SPOS02 control hierarchy condition (PLC#3) M
510001 820103ED50 SPOS03IN_TMP_28 SPOS03 control hierarchy condition (PLC#3) M
…. …. ….
510001 820114ED50 SPOS20IN_TMP_28 SPOS20 control hierarchy condition (PLC#3) M
Table 4.1-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
510001 8001011F54 SPOS01_SC_ST_ERR SPOS01 select command mode is invalid.
510001 8001021F54 SPOS02_SC_ST_ERR SPOS02 select command mode is invalid.
510001 8001031F54 SPOS03_SC_ST_ERR SPOS03 select command mode is invalid.
…. …. ….
510001 8001141F54 SPOS20_SC_ST_ERR SPOS20 select command mode is invalid.
510001 8101011F59 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS01)
510001 8101021F59 SPOS02_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS02)
510001 8101031F59 SPOS03_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS03)
…. …. ….
510001 81010A1F59 SPOS20_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS20)
510001 8201011F5A SPOS01_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(SPOS01)
510001 8201021F5A SPOS02_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(SPOS02)
510001 8201031F5A SPOS03_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(SPOS03)
…. …. ….
510001 8201141F5A SPOS20_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(SPOS20)
considered, the “xx” is equal to “03”. The suffix “xx” can be represented from “01” to
“20”.)
Operate logic
“Do nothing”
Cancel condition† &
“SPOS01_CC_FS” (510001_8701011E96)
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function can issue an output signal “Success to cancel” at the monitoring point
“SPOS01_CC_SS”, when the SPOS01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel”
signal is true. Another “Operation failed” signal is issued at the monitoring point
“SPOS01_CC_FS” if the SPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal
is not true.
Operate logic
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 4.1-17, is able to issue a “Select to cancel” signal at
the monitoring point “SPOS01_CC_SS”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the
“Local-Cancel” signal is true.
[SPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC connection point)
Fixedlogic
510001 800101EE69 SPOS01IN_TMP_46 &
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, it can be replaced
with another logic using the connection point “User Configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic with the “SPOS01IN_TMP_46”.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.
Table 4.1-12 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
510001 8601011E95 SPOS01_CC_SS Cancel succeed in SPOS01
SPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition in SPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from front panel Off control from front-panel
“SPOS01-OEC_OK_CSF”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (510001_8001011E7F)
[SPOS01-CPW]
510001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User configurable condition
(PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ function§” is in progress PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[SPOS01-PLSM]*
Var To “Wait for a command”
Fix
Latch “SPOS01_EX_FFL”
[SPOS01-RST]
0 t (510001_8601011E91) ††
“SPOS01-EX_CMP”
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
“SPOS01-FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
§§Note: The “SPOS01_OEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed “signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user, in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.1-20. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”,
hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point # 2 “user-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-20, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Remote-On-Control” is true.
Failed Do nothing
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed S
&
SPOS01-Off R
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User Configurable condition
(PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ§ function is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
To “Wait for a command”
[SPOS01-PLSM]*
“SPOS01_EX_FFL” † †
Var [SPOS01-RST] (510001_8601011E91)
Fix
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP
(5A0101_8001011E93) 1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “Off”.
‡Note:An “operate condition” is generated in the operate-condition logic( see Figure
4.1-29) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch[SPOS01-LGCTRCON], If an
alternative “Operate-condition” is required, it can be programmed by the user and
used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic. The
alternative ”Operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point #3 ”User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use SPOS01IN_TMP_34.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected when
the time set by [SPOS01-RST] has been reached.
§§Note: The signal “SPOS01_OEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]. The “Operate completed “signal can also be issued from
logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.1-20. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “Operate completed”.
Hence, this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point # 2 “user-configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT] to PLC and use “SPOS01IN_TMP_42”.
§Note:The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
*Note:The user can set the type of the output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[SPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[SPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
When Latch is set, the output signal is kept issuing until the reception of
“Command Off”.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other SPOS logics, see Table
4.1-14, Table 4.1-15, Table 4.1-19, and Table 4.1-20.
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the signal
“Remote-Off-Control” is true.
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
“SPOS01-OEC_OK_CSF”
(510001_8001011E7F)
Operate Cmd.
Command “Local-On-Control” [SPOS01-CPW]
with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed
SPOS01-On
S
&
ILK† bypassing ( Bypass) 1≥
R
ICB_STATE
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User configurable condition (PLC#2 connection point) & Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
ASEQ function§” is in progress PLC#2
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-24, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the signal
“Local-On-Control” is true.
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
[SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
User configurable condition (PLC#2 connection point)
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42
To PLC
& logic
PLC#2
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
0 t
“SPOS01-EX_CMP
(5A0101_8001011E93)
1.0s- 100.0s Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The SPOS01 function, in Figure 4.1-26, can issue a signal “Operate” at the output point
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the SPOS01 function determines that the input signal
“Local-Off-Control” is true.
Select command Off from remote-end Operate command Off control from remote-end
Select command On from front panel Operate command On control from front-panel
Select command Off from front panel Operate command Off control from front-panel
Failed Do nothing
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.1-28 depicts the operate logic when a signal “Operate Command Off
(PLC-Off-Control)” is generated by the PLC function. There are two input points for reception
of this command signal, unlike the signal “Operate Command On (PLC-On-Control)”. That is,
if an inter-lock check is required, apply the signal at connection point (PLC#3; i.e.,
DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK). If, on the other hand an interlock check is not required, apply the
signal at connection point (PLC#4; i.e., DEV01_OP_COMMAND).
PLC#1 an PLC#2 shown in Table 4.1-3 should be treated as PLC#3 and PLC#4 here.
Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch [SPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
4.1-17.
2. Set scheme switch [SPOS01-LGEXFFCT] to Fixedlogic.
Note: The user must program PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control
hierarchy condition to be provided with the user-programmed PLC logic may be
43R/L; it may be connected using PLC connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28” in
Figure 4.1-29.
Note: The output of the operate condition logic is provided separately for On-execution
and for Off-execution. To see the outputs, refer to Table 4.1-18.
SPOS01 function (Function ID: 510001)
Command blocking*1
CBK_STATE
1≥ & 1≥ &
Double Command Blocking detected*2
DCB RCV OR
To selection logic
Other devices traveling detected*3
Operate condition
Traveling OR
Unmatched condition detected *5
Function “Automatic sequence control” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Event suppression detected *6
= SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP
Tripping *4 (“General trip”)
(510001 810101F59)
GEN. TRIP
BI board connection error detected*7
= SPOS01_F_BI_ERR
(510001 820101F5A)
[SPOS01-CTREN]
On
Chapter Control and monitoring application: Software switch controller. See the
signal “CBK_STATE in Table 4.1-6.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used to
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling signifies that other operators are changing
the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED should be
inhibited whilst ever the events is detected. The detection signal is donated as
“Travelling OR” in Table 4.1-6.
4Note: If an IED is in the process of issuing a trip command, all control operation is
blocked until the trip operation has been completed. If the IED has a relay
application, the trip command is issued at the output point.
5Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a
“GEN_TRIP” in Table 4.1-6 command is not identical to “IED test status”.
6Note: The function “Event suppression” can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See section
4.1.4(i)-2)
7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits.
8Note: The common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the operation –
direction of logic. When the user sets off for scheme switch (SCDEN), operation of
the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation – direction
compared with the previous operation direction. Alternatively, if On is set for the
scheme switch, the logic is not blocked.
9Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition” The user
must connect the “Control hierarchy condition” to the select condition logic using
the connection point “SPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see chapter
“Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy” see PLC#3 of Table 4.1-7.
Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for both the On and the Off.
Table 4.1-14 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 user a configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
510001 830101EE5B SPOS01IN_TMP_38 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
510001 830102EE5B SPOS02IN_TMP_38 SPOS02 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
510001 830103EE5B SPOS03IN_TMP_38 SPOS03 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
Table 4.1-15 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#2 user configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
510001 810101EDDA SPOS01IN_TMP_42 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
510001 810102EDDA SPOS02IN_TMP_42 SPOS02 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
510001 810103EDDA SPOS03IN_TMP_42 SPOS03 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
510001 810114EDDA SPOS20IN_TMP_42 SPOS20 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
Table 4.1-16 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#3 user configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
510001 800101EE56 SPOS01IN_TMP_34 SPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
510001 800102EE56 SPOS02IN_TMP_34 SPOS02 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
510001 800103EE56 SPOS03IN_TMP_34 SPOS03 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
…. …. ….
510001 800114EE56 SPOS20IN_TMP_34 SPOS20 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
Table 4.1-17 PLC connection points (Input point PLC#1/#2 of additional and operate conditions)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31 SPOS01 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
510001 800102EE61 SPOS02IN_TMP_31 SPOS02 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
510001 800103EE61 SPOS03IN_TMP_31 SPOS03 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
… … …
510001 800114EE61 SPOS20IN_TMP_31 SPOS20 additional failure condition (PLC#1) O
510001 810101EE66 SPOS01IN_TMP_41 SPOS01 user configurable operate condition (PLC#2) O
510001 810102EE66 SPOS02IN_TMP_41 SPOS02 user configurable operate condition (PLC#2) O
510001 810103EE66 SPOS03IN_TMP_41 SPOS03 user configurable operate condition (PLC#2) O
… … …
510001 810114EE66 SPOS20IN_TMP_41 SPOS20 user configurable operate condition (PLC#2) O
510001 8101141DD0 SPOS20_FEX_BO SPOS20 operate (OFF) command for Binary Output.
Note that the SPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [SPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
“SPOS01_STATE”
Event suppression detector (510001_0001011001)
BI signal connected by
setting [SPOS01-NOPSG]
& 1≥
&
[SPOS01-EN] Status before chattering S
R “SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP”
On
(510001_8101011F59)
On
& To select and operate
condition logics
[SPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
from device On On On On On On On
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[SPOS-TELD] [SPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 4.1-31 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been
suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the
seventh signal (at Time B). This is because the function can count the iterative number of
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time A, the setting [SPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time B. The setting [SPOS-TELD] is pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time A (e.g., Time A to Time C).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [SPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time D to E).
To initiate event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch
[SPOS01-SPPEN].
Terminal and
Selection logic in SPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”
(510001_8501011F76)
“SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
Terminal and
Operate logic in SPOS01 BO2 and BO3 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
“BO2”
Signal designated by Operate
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112) command
“Operate command On
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO2
On” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO2-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO2_CPL] On &
Connected by (200B01_8102011113)
Off
“Programming” [Input signal 5]
To contact health To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Figure 4.1-33 Example of operate commands connected with BO2 and BO3 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.1-27 shows the remaining signals excepting “SPOS01_OEX_BO” and
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”.
†Note:Table 4.1-29 shows settings for the health check feature in the other SPOS
functions.
Result of contact
BO1 circuit at & health check in SPOS01 selection
IO_SLOT1
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Signal connected by
setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]
Figure 4.1-34 Example of connection of “Select command On” for the health check feature
Operate logic in
SPOS01
Result of contact
BO2 circuit at & Health check
IO_#1
“BO2-RB”
“200B01_8102011113”
Signal designated by
setting [SPOS01-OEXBORD]
Figure 4.1-35 Example connection of “Operate Command On” for the health check
Result of contact
BO3 circuit at & health check
IO_#1
“BO3-RB”
“200B01_8102021113”
Signal designated by
setting [SPOS01-FEXBORD]
Figure 4.1-36 Example connection of “Operate command off” for the health check feature
Proper setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 4.1-37 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1, BO2 and BO3 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is
working correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table
4.1-22, to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
“SPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO3” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [SPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Remote/Local-end Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG”
(510001_8501011F76) SW1 driven with
BO1 at IO_SLOT1
Select BO1 SW 1
command ON/OFF
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113) SW 2 On
Command
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW 3 Off
Operate-On BO2 SW2 driven with Command
command BO2 at IO_SLOT1
“BO2-RB”
Minus (−)
(200B01_8102011113)
“SPOS01_FEX_BO”
(510001_8101011DD0)
BO3 SW3 driven with
Operate-Off BO3 at IO_SLOT1
command “BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
Figure 4.1-37 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example #1
Setting for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 4.1-38 shows a setting example for an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The
settings are implemented incorrectly, as shown in Table 4.1-23. BO1-RB is not chosen,
instead BO1 is actually chosen. In this case, the setting [SPOS01-SLBORD] is meaningless;
hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.
“SPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO3” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [SPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
43SW
Remote/Local-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB) Plus (+)
“SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” mistakenly chosen with
(510001_8501011F76) “200B01_8002001112” SW1 driven with
BO1at IO_SLOT1
Select BO1 SW 1
Command
ON/OFF
SW 2 On
“SPOS01_OEX_BO” Command
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW 3 Off
Operate-On BO2 SW2 driven with Command
command BO2 at IO_SLOT1
“BO2-RB” designated with Minus (−)
“SPOS01_FEX_BO” “200B01_8102011113”
(510001_8101011DD0)
Figure 4.1-38 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #2
Setting for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 4.1-39 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [SPOS01-SLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special example
can issue a select command; which is called “operated by internal select function”. The user
does not need to consider of a BO circuit for a select command, when there are no BO circuits
available.
Table 4.1-24 Extra setting example for contact health check
Example #3 Setting for example #3
“SPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO3” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [SPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
43SW
Remote/Local end “SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG” Plus (+)
SW1 is not driven with
(510001_8501011F76) Plus (+)
any BO1
SW 1
Select
command Physical BO is
ON/OFF
virtualized.
“SPOS01_OEX_BO”
(510001_8201011DD3)
SW2 is driven with
BO2 at IO#1
Operate-On BO2 SW 2 On
command Command
“BO2-RB”
“SPOS01_FEX_BO” (200B01_8102011113) SW3 is driven with SW 3 Off
(510001_8101011DD0) BO3 at IO#1 Command
Figure 4.1-39 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #3
Table 4.1-25 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in SPOSxx)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
510001 0001011001 SPOS01_STATE Status of SPOS01
510001 0001021001 SPOS02_STATE Status of SPOS02
510001 0001031001 SPOS03_STATE Status of SPOS03
…. …. ….
510001 0001141001 SPOS20_STATE Status of SPOS20
510001 8101011F59 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS01)
510001 8101021F59 SPOS02_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS02)
510001 8101031F59 SPOS03_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS03)
…. …. ….
510001 8101141F59 SPOS20_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (SPOS20)
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
Table 4.1-31 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object for GIG01501
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
5100017 001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO1501$SPCSO sboClass sboClass CF
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control” and
“CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
4.1.6 Setting
Common settings list for the SPOS(FunctionID:510001)
Default setting
Units
Setting item Range Contents Notes
value
Units
Setting item Range Contents Notes
value
Note: The SPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have omitted
the others because their setting tables are the same as the 1st device table with the
exception of the device number.
4.1.7 Signal
Signal monitoring points in SPOS01
SPOS(FunctionID:510001)
Element ID Name Description
8001011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL
8001011D51 SPOS01_SC_OWS SPOS01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D52 SPOS01_SC_RCC SPOS01 select command by RCC
8001011D53 SPOS01_SC_RMT SPOS01 select command by Remote
8001011D54 SPOS01_SC_LCD SPOS01 select command by LCD
8001011D55 SPOS01_EC_OWS SPOS01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D56 SPOS01_EC_RCC SPOS01 execute command by RCC
8001011D57 SPOS01_EC_RMT SPOS01 execute command by Remote
8001011D58 SPOS01_EC_LCD SPOS01 execute command by LCD
8001011D59 SPOS01_EC_PLC SPOS01 execute command by PLC
8701011E98 SPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS SPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8B01011EA2 SPOS01_CTR_SGU SPOS01 control logic stage(under selection)
8301011E9D SPOS01_CTR_SGN SPOS01 control logic stage(unselected)
8101011E9A SPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS SPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8001011F55 SPOS01_EC_ST_ERR SPOS01 execute command mode err
8001011E93 SPOS01_EX_CMP SPOS01 execute complete signal
8901011F6C SPOS01_EX_CS01 SPOS01 execute condition signal 01
8A01011F6D SPOS01_EX_CS02 SPOS01 execute condition signal 02
8B01011F6E SPOS01_EX_CS03 SPOS01 execute condition signal 03
8E01011F67 SPOS01_EX_CS04 SPOS01 execute condition signal 04
8B01011F68 SPOS01_EX_CS05 SPOS01 execute condition signal 05
8601011E91 SPOS01_EX_FFL SPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8501011E8F SPOS01_EX_SFL SPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8001011F56 SPOS01_NSL_CS06 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 06
8601011F5E SPOS01_NSL_CS07 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 07
8201011F5F SPOS01_NSL_CS10 SPOS01 no direction select condition signal 10
8101011E7B SPOS01_SLF_CS SPOS01 no direction select fail condition signal
8101011DD0 SPOS01_FEX_BO SPOS01 off direction execute binary output signal
8001011E81 SPOS01_FEC_OK_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal
8001011E7E SPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8201011E88 SPOS01_FEC_F_CS SPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal
8101011E85 SPOS01_FEC_F_CSF SPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8A01011DC4 SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 off direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8501011F60 SPOS01_FSL_CS19 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 19
8A01011F61 SPOS01_FSL_CS20 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 20
8101011F64 SPOS01_FSL_CS21 SPOS01 off direction select condition signal 21
8201011DD3 SPOS01_OEX_BO SPOS01 on direction execute binary output signal
8101011E82 SPOS01_OEC_OK_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal
8001011E7F SPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8301011E89 SPOS01_OEC_F_CS SPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal
8101011E86 SPOS01_OEC_F_CSF SPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8601011DC6 SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 on direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8501011F65 SPOS01_OSL_CS40 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 40
8801011F5D SPOS01_OSL_CS41 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 41
8501011F5B SPOS01_OSL_CS42 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 42
8601011F5C SPOS01_OSL_CS43 SPOS01 on direction select condition signal 43
8401011F77 SPOS01_OFEX_BO SPOS01 on/off direction execute binary output signal
8901011DC0 SPOS01_NSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8501011F76 SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG SPOS01 select binary output signal by fixedlogic
8001011F54 SPOS01_SC_ST_ERR SPOS01 select command mode err
8601011F62 SPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 SPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SPOS function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “SPOS01_SC_OWS” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “SPOS02_SC_OWS” in place of
“SPOS01_SC_OWS”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for SPOS01_SC_OWS (i.e.,
“8001011D51”)
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8001021D51” of
“SPOS02_SC_OWS”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal
notation. Thus, the user must change the device number
from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.
†Note:The DPSY function is similar to the DPOS function; the DPSY function is required
to operate together with the synchronizing function (SYNDIF), which has relay
elements corresponding to voltages, and can coordinate the timing for closing or
opening. For more detailed information with regard to the SYNDIF function, see
Chapter Control and monitoring application: Synchronizing check for different
network.
The BO circuits are used for issuing commands; the BI circuits are used for receiving
responses; hence, the user should set the BIO† together with the DPSY function. The DPSY
function includes three logic groups: 1. Selection logic, 2. Cancel logic, and 3. Operate logic.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the DPSY function quickly, go to sections 4.2.6 and 4.2.7,
where setting of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signals for IEC61850
communication is described.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.2-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Two devices can be controlled separately; i.e., the DPSY function has two separate sets of logic
for control (i.e., DPSY01 and DPSY02 functions). For simplicity, only the DPSY01 function is
discussed here; the features in the DPSY02 function are identical to the DPSY01 function.
Cancel logic
Select command Open from the remote-end
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
§§Note: A timer is provided to determine an operation failure. The maximum value of the
settings [SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI] or [SYNC01_TDRDI] is used as the decision time.
For more information on settings, see the SYNDIF function.
This logic has the input-point “DEV01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception of a select
command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for communication. The function will fail
to operate if mapping is not performed correctly. We will discuss how to map the input-points
for IEC61850 communication in section 4.2.7.
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function can issue an output signal “Selection success” at the output point
“DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the
“Remote-Closing-Control” signal received is true. If the DPSY01 function determines that the
“Remote-Closing-Control” signal is not true, the DPSY01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
The user should note that the operation decision of the SYNDIF01 function is required
for the DPSY01 function; the operation decision is determined by the measurement of running
voltage and incoming voltage. Table 4.2-2 shows the relay-elements used in the SYNDIF01
function.
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
is in operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control
and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
††Note: To know the input and output points of the DPSY02 logic, see Table 4.2-6 and
Table 4.2-10.
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG” when the DPSY01 function determines that the “Selection
command Open (Remote-Open-Control)” signal is true. If the DPSY01 function determines
that the “Remote-Open-Control” signal is not true, the DPSY01 function returns to the “Wait
for a command” stage.
SYNC01-SLD_VCS‡‡
(560001 840B011F58)
1≥ Timer§§ To “Wait for a command”
SYNC‡‡ bypassing 0 t 0 t
Selection “Failed”
SCB_STATE
0.0 to 5.0 s 0.6s
[DPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
When the signal “select condition” is true, the DPSY01 function can issue a “Selection success”
signal at the output-point “DPSY01_OSL_BO_CSF”.
Note: The signal “DPSY01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.2-2. If the “Local-Closing-Control” signal is not true, the DPSY01 function
returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
0.6s
[DPSY01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (ASEQ§)” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
††Note: To identify the output signals of the DPSY02 logic, see Table 4.2-10.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the DPSY01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The signal “DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.2-4. If the signal “Local-Open-Control” is not true, the DPSY01 function returns
to the “Wait for a command” stage.
Select condition‡
ILK condition (“Closing”) passed
DPSY01-Close
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“DPSY01_OSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The signal “DPSY01_OSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as that shown in Figure
4.2-2.
Select “Failed”
Select condition
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPSY01_FSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The output point “DPSY01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as shown in Figure
4.2-4.
Unmatched con
Command “Open control” received &
Command “Closing control” received &
received
DPSY01_3PH_STATE
(511001 3102011001)
[SCDEN]*8 Same Directional
Controlling Event
OFF
Additional condition (PLC#1 connection point)
511001 800201EE61 DPSY01IN_TMP_31
[DPOS01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC#2 connection point)
Fixedlogic
511001 810201EE62 DPSY01IN_TMP_32 &
[DPSY01-CTREN]
On
7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits.
8Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘Opening’ and
‘Closing’ operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme
switch [SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the
same operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction (i.e.,
when closing (opening) is performed sequentially). On the other hand, if On is set
for the scheme switch, the logic is not blocked.
9Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic
using the connection point “DPSY01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see
Chapter Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy. See PLC#3 of
Table 4.2-8.
10Note: To identify the input points of the DPSY02, see Table 4.2-8.
Table 4.2-3 PLC connection points (Input points for Command ‘Closing’)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
5A0101 800527EF40 DEV01_CL_SYNC_INTER DPSY01 PLC Close-control checking with interlock & Sync (PLC#1) O
5A0101 800551EF40 DEV02_CL_SYNC_INTER DPSY02 PLC Close-control checking with interlock & Sync (PLC#1) O
5A0101 800526EF40 DEV01_CL_SYNC DPSY01 PLC Close-control with Sync (PLC#2) O
5A0101 800550EF40 DEV02_CL_SYNC DPSY02 PLC Close-control with Sync (PLC#2) O
5A0101 800525EF40 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK DPSY01 PLC Close-control checking with interlock(PLC#3) O
5A0101 800549EF40 DEV02_CL_INTERLOCK DPSY02 PLC Close-control checking with interlock(PLC#3) O
5A0101 800524EF40 DEV01_CL_COMMAND DPSY01 PLC Close-control none checking (PLC#4) O
5A0101 800548EF40 DEV02_CL_COMMAND DPSY02 PLC Close-control none checking (PLC#4) O
Table 4.2-4 PLC connection points (Input points for Command ‘Open’)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
5A0101 800523EF40 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK DPSY01 PLC Open-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
5A0101 800547EF40 DEV02_OP_INTERLOCK DPSY02 PLC Open-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
5A0101 800522EF40 DEV01_OP_COMMAND DPSY01 PLC Open-control without checking(PLC#2) O
5A0101 800546EF40 DEV02_OP_COMMAND DPSY02 PLC Open-control without checking(PLC#2) O
Table 4.2-8 PLC connection points (Input signals for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
511001 800531EF40 DPSY01IN_TMP_31 DPSY01 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
511001 800554EF40 DPSY02IN_TMP_31 DPSY02 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
511001 800532EF40 DPSY01IN_TMP_32 DPSY01 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
511001 800555EF40 DPSY02IN_TMP_32 DPSY02 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
511001 800516EF40 DPSY01IN_TMP_28 DPSY01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
511001 800519EF40 DPSY02IN_TMP_28 DPSY02 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
Table 4.2-9 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
511001 8002011F5A DPSY01_SC_ST_ERR DPSY01 Unmatched condition.
511001 8002021F5A DPSY02_SC_ST_ERR DPSY02 Unmatched condition.
511001 8102011F5F DPSY01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPSY01)
511001 8102021F5F DPSY02_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPSY02)
511001 8202011F60 DPSY01_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPSY01)
511001 8202021F60 DPSY02_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPSY02)
Table 4.2-10 PLC monitoring points (Closing/Open output signals for BIO)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
511001 8602011DC6 DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG DPSY01 select (Closing) command for Binary Output.
511001 8602021DC6 DPSY02_OSL_BO_FLG DPSY02 select (Closing) command for Binary Output.
511001 8A02011DC4 DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG DPSY01 select (Open) command for Binary Output.
511001 8A02021DC4 DPSY02_FSL_BO_FLG DPSY02 select (Open) command for Binary Output.
Select command Closing from the remote-end Cancel from the remote-end
Success
Operate logic
“Do nothing”
“DPSY01_CC_FS”
(511001 8702011E96)
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“DPSY01_CC_SS”, when the DPSY01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel”
signal is true. Another “Operation failed” signal is issued at monitoring point DPSY01_CC_FS”
“if the DPSY01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal is not true.
Operate logic
Cancel command
Command “Local-cancel”
& To “Wait for a command”
“DPSY01_ CC_SS”
(511001 8602011E95)
Cancel condition &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
“DPSY01_CC_FS”
(511001 8702011E96)
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, illustrated in Figure 4.2-17, is able to issue a “Select to cancel” signal
at the monitoring point “DPSY01_CC_SS”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the
“Local-Cancel” signal is true.
[DPSY01-LGSLFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC connection point)
Fixedlogic
511001 800201EE69 DPSY01IN_TMP_46 &
PLC#1
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, it can be replaced
using the connection point “User configurable condition”:
1. Connect the user-customized logic with the “DPSY01IN_TMP_46”, which is
listed in Table 4.2-12.
2. Set scheme switch [DPSY01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.
Table 4.2-12 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
511001 800201EE69 DPSY01IN_TMP_46 DPSY01 user configurable cancel condition O
Table 4.2-13 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
Failed Do nothing
Select command Open from the remote-end Operate command Open from the remote-end
Select command Closing from the local-end Operate command Closing from the local-end
Select command Open from the local-end Operate command Open from the local-end
Select command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Closing by the PLC function
Select command Open by the PLC function Operate command Open by the PLC function
“DPSY01_OEC_OK_CSF”
DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) (511001 8002011E7F)
“DPSY01_OEC_OK_CS”
(511001 8102011E82)
Command “Remote-Closing-Control”
[DPSY01-CPW]
511001_7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Command with ILK†
condition & synchro-checking & 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
SYNC01-SYN_CLC
(560001 850B011F59)
Operate Command with ILK†
condition &
[DPSY01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ§ function” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPSY01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPSY01_EX_CMP”
(511001 8002011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
*Note:The user can set the type of the output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[DPSY01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[DPSY01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the DPSY02 logic, see Table
4.2-15 for PLC#1, Table 4.2-16 for PLC#2, Table 4.2-20, and Table 4.2-21 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected when
the time set by the [DPSY01-RST] has been reached.
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-20, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPSY01_OEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the received signal
“Remote-Closing-Control” is true.
Select command Closing from the remote-end Operate command Closing from the remote-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command Closing from the local-end Operate command Closing l from the local-end
Select command Open from the local-end Operate command Open from the local-end
Select command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Closing by the PLC function
Select command Open by the PLC function Operate command Open by the PLC function
“DPSY01_FEC_OK_CSF” “DPYS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (511001 8002011E7E) (511001 8002011E7E)
[DPSY01-CPW]
511001_7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[DPSY01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPSY01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPSY01_EX_CMP”
(511001 8002011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
PLC#2, Table 4.2-17 for PLC#3, Table 4.2-19, and Table 4.2-21 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“DPSY01_FEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Open-Control” is true.
Select command Closing from the remote-end Operate command Closing from the remote-end
Select command Open from the remote-end Operate command Open from the remote-end
Select command Closing from the local-end Operate command Closing l from the local-end Success
Operation
Signal reception from Operate logic Signal output
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Select command Open from the local-end Operate command Open from the local-end
Select command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Closing by the PLC function
Select command Open by the PLC function Operate command Open by the PLC function
“DPSY01_OEC_OK_CSF” “DPSY01_OEC_OK_CS”
(511001 8002011E7F) (511001 8102011E82)
Command “Local-Closing-Control”
[DPSY01-CPW]
511001_7002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Command with ILK
condition & synchro-checking & 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
ILK condition (“Closing”) passed
DPSY01-Close
ILK bypassing 1≥ S
&
ICB_STATE
R
From SYNCHK
SYNC01-SYN_CLC
(560001 850B011F59)
1≥
SYNC‡‡ bypassing
SCB_STATE
[DPSY01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPSY01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPSY01_EX_CMP”
(511001 8002011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[DPSY01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[DPSY01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the DPSY02 logic, see Table
4.2-15 for PLC#1, Table 4.2-16 for PLC#2, Table 4.2-20, and Table 4.2-21 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the [DPSY01-RST].
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-24, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPSY01_OEX_BO”, if the DPSY01 function determines that the signal
“Local-Closing-Control” is true.
Select command Closing from the remote-end Operate command Closing from the remote-end
Select command Open from the remote-end Operate command Open from the remote-end
Select command Closing from the local-end Operate command Closing l from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Closing by the PLC function
Select command Open by the PLC function Operate command Open by the PLC function
“DPSY01_FEC_OK_CSF”
DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) (511001 8002011E7E)
“DPSY01_FEC_OK_CS”
(511001 8002011E7E)
Operate Cmd.
Command “Local-Open-Control” [DPSY01-CPW]
with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK condition (“Open”) passed
DPSY01--Open
S
&
ILK bypassing 1≥
R
ICB_STATE
[DPSY01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
ASEQ§ function” is in progress Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPSY01_EX_CMP”
(511001 8002011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
PLC#2, Table 4.2-17 for PLC#3, Table 4.2-19, and Table 4.2-21 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-31, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPSY01_FEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the signal
“Local-Open-Control” is true.
Select command Closing from the remote-end Operate command Closing from the remote-end
Select command Open from the remote-end Operate command Open from the remote-end
Select command Closing from the local-end Operate command Closing l from the local-end
Select command Open from the local-end Operate command Open from the local-end
Select command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Closing by the PLC function Success
Operation
Signal reception from Operate logic Signal output
decision
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Select command Open by the PLC function Operate command Open by the PLC function
“DPSY01_OEC_OK_CSF”
DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001) (511001 8002011E7F)
“DPSY01_OEC_OK_CS”
Closing control command with ILK† and synchro checks (511001 8102011E82)
(PLC#1 connection point) [DPSY01-CPW]
511001 800201EE35 DEV01_CL_SYNC_INTER Operate Command with ILK†
condition & synchro-checking & 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Closing control command with synchro check
(PLC#2 connection point)
Operate Command with
511001 800201EE34 DEV01_CL_SYNC
synchro-checking &
ILK condition (“Closing”) passed S
&
DPSY01-Close R
From SYNCHK
Closing control command SYNC01-SYN_CLC
with interlock check (560001 850B011F59)
(PLC#3 connection point)
Operate Command with ILK†
511001 800201EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK &
condition
Closing control command with no check
(PLC#4 connection point) Operate Command without
511001 800201EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND condition
User configurable condition
(PLC#1 connection point)
511001 810201EE57 DPSY01IN_TMP_35
[DPSY01-LGCTRCON] &
Fixedlogic To BO connection
“DPSY01_OEX_BO” §§
Operate condition‡
(511001 8202011DD3)
[DPSY01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPSY01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPSY01_EX_CMP”
(511001 8002011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
[DPSY01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied to
[DPSY01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the DPSY02 logic, see Table 4.2-3
and Table 4.2-4 for PLC#1 to PLC#4, Table 4.2-15 and Table 4.2-16 for PLC#1/#2
for user configurable conditions, Table 4.2-20, and Table 4.2-21 for the outputs.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected
following expiration of the setting applied to timer [DPSY01-RST].
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-28, can issue an “Operate” signal at output point
“DPSY01_OEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the “PLC-Closing-Control”
signal is true.
Select command Closing from the remote-end Operate command Closing from the remote-end
Select command Open from the remote-end Operate command Open from the remote-end
Select command Closing from the local-end Operate command Closing from the local-end
Select command Open from the local-end Operate command Open from the local-end
Select command Closing with the PLC Operate command Closing with the PLC function
function
Operate command Open with the PLC function Success
Operation
Signal reception from Operate logic Signal output
decision
Select command Open with the PLC function the front panel
Failed Do nothing
“DPSY01_FEC_OK_CSF”
(511001 8002011E7E)
DPSY01 function (Function ID: 511001)
“DPSY01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “PLC-Open-Control” with ILK†
(511001 8002011E7E)
(PLC#4 connection point) [DPSY01-CPW]
511001 800201EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-Open-Control” without ILK† 0.1 – 50.0 s
(PLC#5 connection point)
511001 800201EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
S
ILK† condition (“Open”) passed &
DPSY01-Open R
User configurable condition
(PLC#3 connection point)
[DPSY01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPSY01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPSY01_EX_CMP”
(511001 8002011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
4.2-16 for PLC#2, Table 4.2-17 for PLC#3, Table 4.2-19, and Table 4.2-21 for the
outputs.
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function, in Figure 4.2-30, can issue an “Operate” signal at output-point
“DPSY01_FEX_BO”, when the DPSY01 function determines that the “PLC-Open-Control”
signal is true.
Note: The user must program PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The Control
hierarchy condition to be provided with the user-programmed PLC logic may be
43R/L; it may be connected using PLC connection point “DPSY01IN_TMP_28” in
Figure 4.2-31.
Note: The output of the operate condition logic is provided separately for
Closing-execution and for Open-execution. To see the outputs, refer to Table 4.2-19.
On
4.2.6(i)-3)
7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits.
8Note: The “Common control” (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the
operation-direction of logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch [SCDEN],
operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same
operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction. Alternatively,
if On is set for the scheme switch, the logic is not blocked.
9Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition”. The user
must connect the “Control hierarchy condition” to the select condition logic using
the connection point “DPSY01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy. See PLC#3 of Table 4.2-8.
Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for both the Closing-execution
and the Open-execution.
Table 4.2-15 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 user a configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
511001 810201EE57 DPSY01IN_TMP_35 DPSY01 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
511001 810202EE57 DPSY02IN_TMP_35 DPSY02 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
Table 4.2-16 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#2 operate command Closing)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
511001 820201EE5E DPSY01IN_TMP_44 DPSY01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
511001 820202EE5E DPSY02IN_TMP_44 DPSY02 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
Table 4.2-17 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#3 operate command Closing)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
511001 800201EE56 DPSY01IN_TMP_34 DPSY01 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
511001 800202EE56 DPSY02IN_TMP_34 DPSY02 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
Table 4.2-18 PLC connection points (Input point for operate condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
511001 800201EE65 DPSY01IN_TMP_40 DPSY01 user additional condition(PLC#1) O
Closed
Open
The user can change the value of the operation-counter from either the front panel or
remotely. For example, in the sub-menu for “Operation Counter, the user can set a
user-preferred value for the operation-counter. See Chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu on how to operate the sub-menu.
(i) Receiving “change value for counter” from the remote end
Mapping of Input point required
Figure 4.2-34 depicts the logic when a “change value for counter” command is received at the
DPSY01 logic. With regard to a three-phase counter, the input-point
“DEV01_3PH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. With regard to a phase-A counter, the input-point
“DEV01_APH_CONTROL_REQ” is used. For phase-B and phase-C, the input-points
“DEV01_BPH_CONTROL_REQ” and “DEV01_CPH_CONTROL_REQ” are used.
“DPSY01_SLD_CSCN”
(511001 8A02011F88)
Command “change value for counter”
511001_7002016D09 DEV01_3PH_REQ Operate Command
&
Operate condition‡
Figure 4.2-34 Change counter value for three-phase† with operation from the remote-end in
DPSY01
‡Note: The “operate condition” signal is provided from the operate condition logic shown
in Figure 4.2-36.
†Note: The user can apply other counter change commands for phase-A, -B, and –C as
shown in Table 4.2-24. The resultant signals for the DPSY02 logic are shown in
Table 4.2-25.
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “DPSY01_SLD_CSCN”. The
counter values are issued at points “DPSY01_CNT_VAL", “DPSY01A_CNT_VAL",
“DPSY01B_CNT_VAL", and “DPSY01C_CNT_VAL".
Figure 4.2-35 Changing counter value by operation from the front panel in DPSY01
Output signal to BO
The DPSY01 function can issue a “Result” signal at the output point “DPSY01_SLD_CSCN”.
Figure 4.2-36 Operate condition logic for changing the counter in DPSY01
1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; the “Command
Blocking” function is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch
controller (SOTFSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “Command Blocking”
function as “CmdBlk”. For more information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and
monitoring application: Software switch controller. See the signal ““S4301_STATE”
of Table 4.2-7.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking” (DCB) is an operation philosophy. It can be used to
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB
operating signal is denoted as “DCB RCV OR) in Table 4.2-7.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any
device for the duration that the event is detected. The detecting signal is denoted
as “Travelling OR” in Table 4.2-7.
4Note: If the issue of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is
blocked until the trip operation is completed. If an IED includes a relay application,
the trip command is issued at the output-point “GEN.TRIP” in Table 4.2-7.
Signal “DPSY01_FEX_BO”
Signal “DPSY01_OEX_BO”
Un sensed period
Open Intermediate Closed
The user can clear the operation interval (OT1 to OT4) by key-operation of the
“Operation time” sub-menu (Figure 4.2-39) or operation from the remote-end. See chapter
Note that the DPSY01 function commences operation when the scheme switch
[DPSY01-EN] is set to On.
DPSY01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPSY01_3PH_STATE”
(511001 3102011001)
Phase-A signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPSY01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
&
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPSY01A-NCLSG]
“DPSY01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (511001 8102011F5F)
&
Phase-B signals
BI signal selected by & Faulty
N/O contact setting [DPSY01B-NOPSG]
signal &
Phase-C signals
BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPSY01C-NOPSG]
signal & &
Close
BI signal selected by
N/C contact setting [DPSY01C-NCLSG]
signal &
[DPSY01-EN]
On &
[DPSY01-DEVTYPE]
3-Pole
[DPSY01-OPC]
And
&
[DPSY01-CLC]
And
DPSY01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPSY01_3PH_STATE”
(511001 3102011001)
Single phase signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPSY01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPSY01A-NCLSG]
“DPSY01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (511001 8102011F5F)
&
Faulty
&
Intermediate
&
Close
[DPSY01-EN]
On &
[DPSY01-DEVTYPE]
1-Pole
Event suppression
If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the DPSY function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the DPSY function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created.
[DPSY-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
from device
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
signal
[DPSY-TELD] [DPSY-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 4.2-42 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been
suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the
seventh signal (at Time ‘B’). This is because the function can count the iterative number of
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time ‘A’, the setting [DPSY-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time B. The setting [DPSY-TELD] is pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time ‘A’ (e.g., Time ‘A’ to Time ‘C’).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [DPSY-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time ‘D’ to ‘E’).
To initiate event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch
[DPSY01-SPPEN].
Terminal and
Select logic in DPSY01 BO1 circuit at IO#1(Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG”
(5110018602011DC6)
Select logic for Select Command “BO1” Select
Signal captured by Command
Closing in DPSY01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
Closing
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
To contact health & ≥1
check [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On &
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
Select logic for Select Command check
Open in DPSY01 [Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Terminal and
BO2 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG”
(511001 8A02011DC4)
“BO2” Select
Signal captured by Command
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112)
Open
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO2
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO2-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO2_CPL] On &
(200B01_8102011113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Figure 4.2-43 Example for select commands connection with BO1 & BO2 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.2-10 shows the remaining signals with the excepting
“DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG” and “DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
command Open”. Suppose that connection with the BOs is achieved by the PLC function using
connection points “DPSY01_OEX_BO” and “DPSY01_FEX_BO”; as a result, the “Operate
command Closing” and the “Operate command Open” signals are issued at BO3 and BO4
respectively.
Terminal and
Operate logic in DPSY01 BO3 and BO4 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPSY01_OEX_BO”
(511001 8202011DD3)
Operate
“BO3” command
Signal captured by
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8202021112) Closing to
the device
“Operate command [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO3
Closing” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO3-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO3_CPL] On &
Connected by (200B01_8202021113)
Off
“Programming” [Input signal 5]
To contact health To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Figure 4.2-44 Example of operate commands connected with BO2 and BO3 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.2-36 shows the remaining signals excepting “DPSY01_OEX_BO” and
“DPSY01_FEX_BO”.
†Note:Table 4.2-38 shows settings for the health check feature in the DPSY02 function.
Selection logic in
DPSY01
Result of contact
BO1 circuit at & health check
IO#1
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPSY01-OSLBORD]
Figure 4.2-45 Example connection of “Select command Closing” for the health check feature
Result of contact
BO1 circuit at & health check
IO#1
“BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPSY01-FSLBORD]
Figure 4.2-46 Example connection of “Select command Open” for the health check feature
Selection logic in
DPSY01
Result of contact
BO3circuit at & health check
IO#1
“BO3-RB”
“200B01_8202021113”
Signal designated by
setting [DPSY01-OEXBORD]
Figure 4.2-47 Example connection of “Operate command Closing” for the health check feature
Result of contact
BO4 circuit at & health check
IO#1
“BO4-RB”
“200B01_8302031113”
Signal designated by
setting [DPSY01-FEXBORD]
Figure 4.2-48 Example connection of “Operate command Open” for the health check feature
BIO module
Remote/Local-end Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
“DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG”
(511001 8602011DC6) SW1 is driven with
BO1 at IO#1
Select-Closing BO1 SW 1
command
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113) SW 3 Closing
“DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG”
SW2 is driven with
(511001 8A02011DC4)
BO2 at IO#1
Select-Open BO2 SW 2
command
“BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102011113) SW 4 Open
“DPSY01_OEX_BO”
SW3 is driven with
(511001 8202011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
Operate-Closing BO3
Minus (−)
command
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPSY01_FEX_BO”
(511001 8102011DD0) SW4 is driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate-Open
command “BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 4.2-49 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #1
Settings for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 4.2-50 shows a setting example an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The settings
are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.2-32, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead BO1 is
actually chosen, which is incorrect. In this case, the setting [DPSY01-OSLBORD] is
meaningless; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.
BIO module
Local/remote-end “BO1” (not BO1-RB) Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
“DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG” mistakenly chosen with
“200B01_8002001112”
(511001 8602011DC6) SW1 is driven with
BO1 at IO#1
Select command BO1 SW 1
Closing
SW 3 Closing
“DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG” command
SW2 is driven with
(511001 8A02011DC4)
BO2 at IO#1
Select command BO2 SW 2
Open
“BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102011113) SW 4 Open
“DPSY01_OEX_BO” command
(511001 8202011DD3) SW3 is driven with
BO3 at IO#1
Operate command BO3
Minus (−)
Closing
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPSY01_FEX_BO”
(511001 8102011DD0) SW4 is driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command
Open “BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 4.2-50 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #2
Settings for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 4.2-51 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [DPSY01-OSLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special
example can issue a select command, which is called “operated by internal select function”.
The user does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there
are no BO circuits available.
Table 4.2-33 Extra setting example for contact health check
Example #3 Setting for example #3
BIO module
Local/Remote-end Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
“DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG”
(511001 8602011DC6)
SW1 is not driven with
Select command any BO
SW 1
Closing
Physical BOs
SW 3 Closing
are virtualized. command
“DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG”
(511001 8A02011DC4) SW2 is not driven with
any BO
Select command
SW 2
Open
SW 4 Open
“DPSY01_OEX_BO” command
(511001 8202011DD3) SW3 is driven with
BO3 at IO#1
Operate command BO3
Closing Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPSY01_FEX_BO”
(511001 8102011DD0) SW4 is driven with
Operate command BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Open “BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 4.2-51 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example #3
Table 4.2-34 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in DPSY)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
511001 3102011001 DPSY01_3PH_STATE DPSY01 3ph_state
511001 3102021001 DPSY02_3PH_STATE DPSY02 3ph_state
511001 8102011F5F DPSY01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPSY01)
511001 8102021F5F DPSY02_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPSY02)
511001 8202011DD3 DPSY01_OEX_BO DPSY01 operate (CLOSE) command for Binary Output.
511001 8202021DD3 DPSY02_OEX_BO DPSY02 operate (CLOSE) command for Binary Output.
511001 8102011DD0 DPSY01_FEX_BO DPSY01 operate (OPEN) command for Binary Output.
511001 8102021DD0 DPSY02_FEX_BO DPSY2 operate (OPEN) command for Binary Output.
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” in the
functional constraint (FC).
Table 4.2-40 Mapping signals required for DPC object for CSWI1
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
5110017002016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI1$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Check “Input”
4.2.8 Setting
Common settings list for the DPSY(FunctionID:511001)
Un Default setting
Setting items Range Contents Notes
its value
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents Notes
value
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents Notes
value
DPSY01-LGEXFFCT FixedLogic/PLC – Change logic for execute command fail factor FixedLogic
DPSY01-LGCNFFCT FixedLogic/PLC – Change logic for cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
Note: The DPSY function is also available for the second device; hence, the table for 2nd
device is available, but we have omitted the 2nd table because it is similar to the
table for the 1st device with the exception of the device number.
4.2.9 Signal
Common Signal monitoring points
DPSY(Function ID: 511001)
Element ID Name Description
8002001D5B DPSY00_CH_SC_OWS DPSY00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
8002001D5C DPSY00_CH_SC_RCC DPSY00 count change select command by RCC
8002001D5D DPSY00_CH_SC_RMT DPSY00 count change select command by Remote
8002001F98 DPSY00_CH_SC_LCD DPSY00 count change select command by LCD
8002001D5E DPSY00_CH_EC_OWS DPSY00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
8002001D5F DPSY00_CH_EC_RCC DPSY00 count change execute command by RCC
8002001D60 DPSY00_CH_EC_RMT DPSY00 count change execute command by Remote
8002001F99 DPSY00_CH_EC_LCD DPSY00 count change execute command by LCD
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the DPSY function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “DPSY01_SC_OWS” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “DPSY02_SC_OWS” in place of
“DPSY01_SC_OWS”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“DPSY02_SC_OWS” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for DPSY01_SC_OWS (i.e.,
“8002011D51”).
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”).
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e. pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device).
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8002021D51” of
“DPSY02_SC_OWS”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal
notation. Thus, the user must change the device number
from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.3-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
– CBK, ICB, SCB features NA ✓
– Number of programmable switches (S43) NA 61
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Figure 4.3-1 shows the eight switches and their controller functions. The statuses of the S43
switches are stored in the IED non-volatile memory; hence, the IED can retrieve their status
while power is not being supplied to the IED.
Switches for
CMDBLK ILKBYP SCBYP special purposes
(CBK) (ICB) (SCB)
The SOFTSW function can control a number of S43 software switches separately. To
simplify the explanation provided below only the SOFTSW1 function is discussed. The
features provided in CBK, ICB, SCB and SOFTSW2–61 switches are similar to the SOFTSW1
switch.
Tips: The user can operate CBK, ICB and SCB without user programming. Jump to
section 4.3.5 where we discuss how to map their signals for IEC61850
communication. When the user wishes to program the SOFTSW functions using
the S43-01–S43-61 switches, the user is required to read from section 4.3.2
onwards.
0 t Select “success”
0.1s
Figure 4.3-6 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.3-6 and Table 4.3-9.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided from select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.3-12.
§Note:An Automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for
automatic control. The SOFTSW1 function is blocked for the ASEQ function when
it is in operation. For more information of the ASEQ function, see Chapter Control
and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
*Note:The SOFTSW1 function can run on either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode”. The
user can use the signal “ctlmodel” in the IEC61850 communication.
(ii) Receiving “select command for Off operation” from the remote end
Input point required mapping
Figure 4.3-7 shows the logic when a “Select command (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is
applied at the SOFTSW1 function. The input-point “S4301_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the select command (Remote-OFF-Control).
Input Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.3-7 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation from remote end in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the input and output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.3-6 and Table 4.3-9.
‡Note:“Select condition” signal is provided in Figure 4.3-12.
(iii) Receiving “Selection command for On operation” from the front panel
Input signal
Figure 4.3-8 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-ON-Control)” signal is applied to
the SOFTSW1 function. The input signal is provided when “On” key is pressed on the IED
front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped. Note that the user should set
scheme switch [S4301-CTRAHMI] to SBO when the operation from the IED front panel is
performed; chapter User interface: Control sub-menu discusses how to operate.
Input Select logic in SOFTSW1 Output
0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.3-8 Select logic for ‘ON’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: To identify the output points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.3-9.
‡Note:Signal “select condition” is provided. See Figure 4.3-12.
§Note:The SOFTSW1 function is blocked when the ASEQ function is in operation.
(iv) Receiving “Select command for Off operation” from the front panel
Input signal
Figure 4.3-9 shows the logic when a “Select command (Local-OFF-Control)” signal is applied
to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is provided when the user presses “OFF” key on the
IED front panel; the input-point is not required to be mapped.
& “S4301_FSD_CSF”
(522001_8D0A041F45)
DIR
0 t
Select “success”
0.1s
0.6s
[S4301-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.3-9 Select logic for ‘OFF’ operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1†
†Note: Figure 4.3-9 is used for the discussion of SOFTSW1 logic. To identify the output
points of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table 4.3-9.
‡Note:Signal “select condition” is provided. See Figure 4.3-12.
(v) Receiving “Select command for On operation” using the PLC function
Input signal required to connect
Figure 4.3-10 shows that the select logic when a “Select command (PLC-ON-Control)” signal
is applied to the SOFTSW1 logic. The input signal is generated using the user-programmed
PLC logic; the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point
“S4301_CHG_TO_ON”.
& “S4301_OSD_CSF”
(522001_8F0A411F49)
0 t Select “success”
0.1s
(vi) Receiving “Select command for Off operation” using PLC function
Input signal required to connect
Figure 4.3-11 shows the SOFTSW1 logic for a “Select command (PLC-OFF-Control)” signal.
The input signal is generated using the user-programmed PLC logic; the user can connect the
signal for the PLC connection point “S4301_CHG_TO_OFF”.
510001 7001016D08
& “S4301_FSD_CSF”
(522001_8D0A411F45)
0 t Select “success”
0.1s
[S4301-EN]
On
5Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when “Test-bit status” in command is
not identical to “IED test status”.
6Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
Control hierarchy condition provided by the user-programmed PLC logic may be
43R/L; the user can connect it at PLC connection point “S4301_CTRL_RIGHT” of
Table 4.3-5.
Table 4.3-4 PLC connection point #2 (Input points for ‘Off’ control)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
522001 860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for CBK O
522001 860A02EDE0 ICB_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for ICB O
522001 860A03EDE0 SCB_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for SCB O
522001 860A04EDE0 S4301_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for SOFTSW1 (S43-01) O
522001 860A05EDE0 S4302_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for SOFTSW2 (S43-02) O
522001 860A06EDE0 S4303_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for SOFTSW3 (S43-03) O
…. ….. ….
522001 860A40EDE0 S4361_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for SOFTSW61 (S43-61) O
Table 4.3-5 PLC connection point #3 (Input points on select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
522001 820A01ED50 CBK_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in CBK M
522001 820A02ED50 ICB_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in ICB M
522001 820A03ED50 SCB_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in SCB M
522001 820A04ED50 S4301_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in SOFTSW1 (S43-01) M
522001 820A05ED50 S4302_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in SOFTSW2 (S43-02) M
522001 820A06ED50 S4303_CTRL_RIGHT Control hierarchy condition in SOFTSW3 (S43-03) M
…. ….. ….
Table 4.3-9 PLC monitoring points (ON and OFF selection completion)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
522001 8F0A011F49 CBK_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in CBK
522001 8F0A021F49 ICB_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in ICB
522001 8F0A031F49 SCB_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in SCB
522001 8F0A041F49 S4301_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
522001 8F0A051F49 S4302_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in SOFTSW2 (S43-02)
522001 8F0A061F49 S4303_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in SOFTSW3 (S43-03)
…. …. …..
522001 8F0A401F49 S4361_OSD_CSF On Selection completed in SOFTSW61 (S43-61)
522001 8D0A011F45 CBK_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in CBK
522001 8D0A021F45 ICB_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in ICB
522001 8D0A031F45 SCB_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in SCB
522001 8D0A041F45 S4301_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in SOFTSW1 (S43-01)
522001 8D0A051F45 S4302_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in SOFTSW2 (S43-02)
522001 8D0A061F45 S4303_FSD_CSF Off Selection completed in SOFTSW3 (S43-03)
Operation Failed
Unmatched condition &
detected†
Figure 4.3-13 Cancel logic by the reception of the command from the remote end
†Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
Cancel command
Command “Local-cancel”
Successes to cancel
&
Unmatched condition
& Operation Failed
detected†
Figure 4.3-14 Cancel logic by the reception of the command at local end
†Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
the ‘cancel’ command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (522001_890A041F5A)
Operate condition‡
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL “S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
Command “Remote-OFF-Control” (522001_8A0A041F5B)
Operate condition‡
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL “S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
“S4301_OEC_CHG”
(522001_890A041F5A)
Operate Command
Command “Local-On-Control”
& OFF to ON
Operate condition‡
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL “S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
“S4301_FEC_CHG”
(522001_8A0A041F5B)
Operate condition‡
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL “S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t
Operate failed
& d
1.0s
†Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other SOFTSW logics, see Table
4.3-12, Table 4.3-13, and Table 4.3-14.
‡Note: “operate condition” signal is provided from operate condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.3-21.
§Note: The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
Operate condition‡
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
522001_810A041D03 Operate completed
S4301_ST_ON &
“S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
Operate condition‡
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
“S4301_EX_SS”
(522001_870A041F62)
522001_830A041D02 Operate completed
S4301_ST_OFF &
“S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL”
(522001_870A041F62)
0 t Operate failed
& d
1.0s
[S4301-EN]
On
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Table 4.3-19 shows the required mapping signals in SOFTSW1 function to the IEC
61850 communications. Figure 4.3-25 shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
Table 4.3-20 Mapping signals required for SPCSO object in SOFTSW1 function
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
522001 700A046D08 S4301_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO701$SPCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Check “Input”
4.3.6 Setting
Settings list for the SOTFSW(FunctionID:522001)
Default
Un
Setting device Range Contents setting Notes
its
value
CBK CBK-EN Off / On - Enabling control command block Off
CBK-CTRMENU Off / On - Enabling control menu Off
CBK-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - Selection of control mode on the screen DIR
ICB ICB-EN Off / On - Enabling interlock check bypass Off
ICB-CTRMENU Off / On - Enabling control menu Off
ICB-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - Selection of control mode on the screen DIR
SYNCBYP SCB-EN Off / On - Enabling synchronizing check bypass Off
SCB-CTRMENU Off / On - Enabling control menu in Off
SCB-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - Selection of control mode on the screen DIR
Switch1 S4301-EN Off / On - Enabling the function in SOFTSW1 Off
(S43-01) S4301-CTRMENU Off / On - Enabling control menu in SOTFSW1 Off
S4301-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - Selection of control mode on the screen in SOTFSW1 DIR
Switch2 S4302-EN Off / On - Enabling the function in SOFTSW2 Off
(S43-02) S4302-CTRMENU Off / On - Enabling control menu in SOTFSW2 Off
S4302-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - Selection of control mode on the screen in SOTFSW2 DIR
Switch3 S4303-EN Off / On - Enabling the function in SOFTSW3 Off
(S43-03) S4303-CTRMENU Off / On - Enabling control menu in SOTFSW3 Off
S4303-CTRAHMI DIR / SBO - Selection of control mode on the screen in SOTFSW3 DIR
… … …. … … ….
4.3.7 Signal
Connection points in PLC logic for CBK
SOFTSW(Function ID:522001)
Element ID Name Description
860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF CBK change to off
8100011E85 CBK_ECF_FCT_EIS CBK off direction execute command fail factor signal
8500011E24 CBK_FEC_RCV_LCD CBK off direction execute command received from LCD
8300011E10 CBK_FEC_RCV_RMT CBK off direction execute command received from remote
8400011E21 CBK_FSC_RCV_LCD CBK off direction select command received from LCD
8000011E01 CBK_FSC_RCV_RMT CBK off direction select command received from remote
8200011E44 CBK_FSE_RCV CBK off direction select and execute command received
8E00011E78 CBK_FSF_CSF CBK off direction select fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8F00011E0A CBK_SBO_RMT CBK select before operate control setting received by remote
8100021E85 ICB_ECF_FCT_EIS ICB off direction execute command fail factor signal
8500021E24 ICB_FEC_RCV_LCD ICB off direction execute command received from LCD
8300021E10 ICB_FEC_RCV_RMT ICB off direction execute command received from remote
8400021E21 ICB_FSC_RCV_LCD ICB off direction select command received from LCD
8000021E01 ICB_FSC_RCV_RMT ICB off direction select command received from remote
8200021E44 ICB_FSE_RCV ICB off direction select and execute command received
8E00021E78 ICB_FSF_CSF ICB off direction select fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8F00021E0A ICB_SBO_RMT ICB select before operate control setting received by remote
8100031E85 SCB_ECF_FCT_EIS SCB off direction execute command fail factor signal
8500031E24 SCB_FEC_RCV_LCD SCB off direction execute command received from LCD
8300031E10 SCB_FEC_RCV_RMT SCB off direction execute command received from remote
8400031E21 SCB_FSC_RCV_LCD SCB off direction select command received from LCD
8000031E01 SCB_FSC_RCV_RMT SCB off direction select command received from remote
8200031E44 SCB_FSE_RCV SCB off direction select and execute command received
8E00031E78 SCB_FSF_CSF SCB off direction select fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8F00031E0A SCB_SBO_RMT SCB select before operate control setting received by remote
8100041E85 S4301_ECF_FCT_EIS S43-01 off direction execute command fail factor signal
8500041E24 S4301_FEC_RCV_LCD S43-01 off direction execute command received from LCD
8300041E10 S4301_FEC_RCV_RMT S43-01 off direction execute command received from remote
8400041E21 S4301_FSC_RCV_LCD S43-01 off direction select command received from LCD
8000041E01 S4301_FSC_RCV_RMT S43-01 off direction select command received from remote
8200041E44 S4301_FSE_RCV S43-01 off direction select and execute command received
8E00041E78 S4301_FSF_CSF S43-01 off direction select fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8F00041E0A S4301_SBO_RMT S43-01 select before operate control setting received by remote
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SOFTSW function. We
have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “S4301_EC_LCD” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “S4302_EC_LCD” in place of
“S4301_EC_LCD”. The user can obtain the ID value of “S4302_EC_LCD” by
TPOS01 function
Clearing measured time-intervals
“OT1”, “OT2”, “OT3” and “OT4”
‡Note:The measurements in the DPOS and the DPSY functions are grouped into four
intervals in each respective device. Measurement is possible by sensing the device
events. The measured intervals are accumulated; they are grouped into four
intervals (OT1–OT4), which the user can monitor from the IED screen. Figure
4.4-2 and Figure 4.4-3 exemplify the four intervals upon occurrence of On
(Closing)-control event and Off (Open)-control event, provided that the DPOS
function operates.
Sensing
intermediate state On Intermediate Off
Figure 4.4-2 Two intervals (OT1 and OT2) for Off-control event
Issuing On control
Sensing
intermediate state Off Intermediate On
Figure 4.4-3 Two intervals (OT3 and OT4) for On-control event
Tips: If the user wishes to implement the OPTIM function quickly, go to section 4.4.4,
which discusses how to map signal-points for the IEC 61850 communication.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.4-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Operate logic
0 t
Failed
0.3s
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function
(AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
*Note:The OPTIM function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a
signal “ctlmodel” when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
[OPTR1_EN]
On
Table 4.4-3 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
529001 820C01ED50 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT OPTIM control hierarchy M
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Failed Do nothing
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 4.4-9 Outline of operate command for resetting intervals OT1 to OT4
OPTR01_RST_CMD
Command “Operating reset”
529001 310C011EA1
529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Operate command
& Reset all OTs
≥
Operate condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§”
in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Reset All
[OPTR1_EN]
On
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
map the input-point to the Object references having attributes CO and CF†. Figure 4.4-16 shows
how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
4.4.5 Setting
Setting list of OPTIMRSTCTRL (Function ID: 529001)
Default setting
Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
4.4.6 Signal
Signal monitoring points
OPTIMRSTCTRL (Function ID: 529001)
Element ID Name Description
310C011EA1 OPTR01_RST_CMD Select command output
800C011D53 OPTR01_SC Select command
800C011D51 OPTR01_SC_OWS Select command by OWS(HMI)
800C011D52 OPTR01_SC_RCC Select command by RCC
000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD Controllable data is in the status selected
800C011D57 OPTR01_EC Execute command
800C011D55 OPTR01_EC_OWS Execute command by OWS(HMI)
800C011D56 OPTR01_EC_RCC Execute command by RCC
8B0C011F44 OPTR01_CTR_SGU Signal before KC_OPTR_SC001
8F0C011F49 OPTR01_EX_CMP_TM0 Signal after MCTOPTR_SC002
800C011F42 OPTR01_FSE_RCV Signal before LC_OPTR_SA002
830C011F41 OPTR01_NSD_CSF Signal after KC_OPTR_SA001
860C011F46 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 Signal before MCTOPTR_SC001
8E0C011F47 OPTR01_SLD_TM0 Signal after MCTOPTR_SC001
820C011F40 OPTR01_TMP1 Signal before KC_OPTR_SA001
860C011F43 OPTR01_TMP2 Signal after KC_OPTR_SA002
860C011F45 OPTR01_TMP3 Signal after KC_OPTR_SC001
870C011F48 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 Signal before MCTOPTR_SC002
Mapping point
OPTIMRSTCTRL (Function ID: 529001)
Element ID Name Description
700C016D08 OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT Control command
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.5-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
– Number of functions NA 12
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
864,000,000sec
60sec
Operation time
0sec The TOTALTIM function
checks the state of the
operation signal every
second. If the operation
signal is in the “On” state,
TOTALTIM accumulates
TOTALTIM process the “On” time.
Figure 4.5-2 illustrates that 12 signals can be accommodated from external devices
using BIs. For example, when binary input circuit BI1 receives operating signal1, provided
signal-monitoring point “BI1” is applied for the acquisition of the signal, the user can make
the logic to connect “BI1” with TT01 of the TOTALTIM function using the PLC function.
IED TOTALTIM
Device
TOTAL12_PLC_SGNL
TT12
PLC
SAS
Device #12 BI12-NC BI12 BI12-CPL
Photo- Filter CPL
Operating signal #12
coupler
TOTAL02_PLC_SGNL
TT02
PLC
Operating signal #1
Photo- Filter CPL
coupler
Contact-switch Binary IO module (BIO)
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns”)
Note: “Status (ST)” and “Measurement (MX)” are defined in the function constraint (FC)
of the IEC 61850 standard.
Table 4.5-5 Mapping signals required for GGIO1301 object in TTIM01 function
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
5410017015016D08 TOTAL01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO1301$ISCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
4.5.4 Setting
Setting list for TOTALTIM(Function ID: 541001)
Default setting
Units
Setting device Range Contents Notes
value
4.5.5 Signal
Signal monitoring points in TTIM01
TOTALTIM(Function ID: 541001)
Element ID Name Description
0015011D91 TTIM01_TMP_01 TTIM01 total time change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the TOTALTIM function.
We have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “TTIM02_SLF_CS” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “TTIM01_SLF_CS in place of
“TTIM02_SLF_CS ”. The user can obtain the ID value of “TTIM02_SLF_CS”
by using the following steps:
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.6-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
– Number of functions – 2
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
OVr relay (59r) for running line Verification of voltage Permission signal
conditions and issued to DPSY
OVi relay (59i) for incoming line synchronization between logics
Issue CB closing
command
operating area of OV characteristic. The OVr1 element is used to check for the presence of
voltage on the running-line; similarly, the OVi1 element is used to check for the presence of
voltage on the incoming-line. The user can set pick-up thresholds using the settings [OVR1]
and [OVI1].
Vr†, Vi‡
0 V
Pickup Voltage
Vr†, Vi‡
0 V
Drop-off Voltage
Settings [OVR1]
and [OVI1]
Setting [SyncRy1-Angle]
Vi
Δ
Vr
V
Setting [SyncRy1-dV]
The provision of a signal for CB closure between two networks may be required subject
to the variance of the two voltages, phase-angles and frequencies being small. Therefore, the
SYNCHK function continuously monitors the Δθ, ΔV and Δf; subsequently the SYNCHK
function issues an operate-permission signal to the DPSY function when the variance is less
than the permissible range. For this purpose, synchronism-relays (SyncRy1-dV, SyncRy1-df,
SyncRy1-dθ) are provided; the user can set them in accordance with their specific
requirements.
Figure 4.6-4 shows the angle-variance between Vi and Vr; the increment or decrement of
the angle-variance (Δθ) is shown based upon the running voltage Vr.
Δ increasing
Vi
Vi‡ Δ reducing
Δ near
Vi zero
Δ Vi
Vr†
Frequency-variance (Δf)
The frequency-variance of Vr and Vi (Δf) is measured by the frequency-variance relay having
the setting [SyncRy1-df]. If the following equations are satisfied, the SyncRy1-df relay
determines that the frequency-variance is inside the permissible range.
where,
fVr Frequency of Vr
fVi Frequency of Vi
Δf Frequency-variance between Vr and Vi
Setting [SyncR1-Angle]
∆f > (4.6-7)
180° × Setting [SYNC01_TSYN]
where,
Δf= Frequency-variance (or cycle-slip in Hertz)
2 × Setting [SyncR1-Angle] 1
Time = × (4.6-9)
360° ∆f[Hz]
2 × Setting [SyncR1-Angle] 1
Setting [SYNC01_TSYN] < × (4.6-10)
360° ∆f[Hz]
Equations rearrangements:
Setting [SyncR1-Angle] 1
Setting [SYNC01_TSYN] < × (4.6-11)
180° ∆f[Hz]
1 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [SYNC01_TSYN] 1
> ÷ (4.6-12)
∆𝑓[𝐻𝑧] Setting [SyncR1-Angle] 180°
𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [SyncR1-Angle] 1
𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [SYNC01_TSYN] < × (4.6-13)
180° ∆𝑓[𝐻𝑧]
Vr :Frequency: f1
Vi :Frequency: f2
time
Δf Δf Δf
Vi
50s SyncR1-Angle
Vr Synchronism zone
Advance time
The user shall consider the actual device operation time. For an asynchronous network, the
issue of the CB closure command should be initiated such that it is coordinated with the
actual closing. Figure 4.6-6 shows the advancing time; it is introduced with setting
[SyncRy1-TCB], closing time (Tcb) and compensation time:
where,
α: Operation time of the element
β: Compensation (i.e., tolerance) time
Tcb: Closing time of CB
Vr
Vi
Vr − Vi
Δθ
Start to close CB
End of closing CB
Time
α TCB β
Setting
CB closing command
Tolerance for synchronism
CB contact
DRLI LRLI
Setting [OVI1]
Setting [UVI1]
DRDI LRDI
Vr on the running line
Setting [UVR1] Setting [OVR1]
For example, “DRLI” zone covers the case when the running-line is out-of-service (DR)
and the incoming-line is in-service (LI). Table 4.6-4 exemplifies the areas in accordance with
the voltage conditions.
Table 4.6-4 Four voltage conditions and zones
Voltage condition 1 2 3 4
Area D○
R L○
I L○
R L○
I D○
R D○
I L○
R D○
I
○
R unning line (Vr) (Dead) (Live) (Dead) (Live)
○
I ncoming line (Vi) (Live) (Live) (Dead) (Dead)
Figure 4.6-8 and Figure 4.6-9 show the voltage-presence (or voltage-absence) check logic
used in the SYNCHK_Ry1 and Ry2 functions.
511001 8002011E45
Close command (Select)
DPSY01_OSE_RCV
DRLI1
UVi &
DRDI1 LRDI1 SYNCHK1 (Function ID: 560001)
On
SYNC01-LRDIEN
On
SYNC01-DRLIEN
On
SYNC01-DRDIEN
511001 8002021E45
DRLI1
UVi &
DRDI1 LRDI1 SYNCHK2 (Function ID: 560001)
On
SYNC02-LRDIEN
On
SYNC02-DRLIEN
On
SYNC02-DRDIEN
For example, if the DPSY01 function is required to operate when the voltage condition
“LRDI” is confirmed (Table 4.6-4.(4)), just set On for the scheme switch [SYNCHK01-LRDIEN].
User programmable pick-up delay timers are available for the conditions “LRDI” and
“DRLI” (Table 4.6-4.(1 and 4)); hence the user can set a desired value for the setting
[SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI]; similarly, a desired value can be applied for the setting
[SYNC01_TDRDI] for the condition “DRDI” (Table 4.6-4.(3)).
†Note:This signal is required for CB closing in the select logic. For more information, see
separate section DPSY: Control logics.
561001 8602001B66
SyncRy2
-df Δf2: Frequency-variance of Running and Incoming
561001 8402001B64
SyncRy2
-dƟ ΔƟ2: Phase-variance of Running and Incoming
Figure 4.6-14 shows the synchronization check logic in the SYNCHK1 function. The user
should note that the logic has been separated for (1) the synchronous condition and (2) the
asynchronous condition; the synchronization check logic is initiated when the
“DPSY01_OEC_RCV” signal is received, which is identical to an operate-command in the
On-direction.
SYNC01_SYN_CLC
Off SYNC01_SBP
560001 800B01EDE1 SYNC01_SBP_SSP Bypassing condition
SYNC01-SYNCHK1EN Sync bypass
SYNC02_SYN_CLC
560001 800B021F54
560001 800B02EDE5 SYNC02_SPS_CL_ECP
Off SYNC02_SBP
SYNC02-SYNCHK2EN Sync bypass
560001 800B02EDE1 SYNC02_SBP_SSP Bypassing condition
Running
Busbar#1 ✔Selection of SYNCHK_Ry1
Busbar#2 DS1 closed SYNCHK_Ry1_selection
&
line
✔ SYNC01_RY1_USE_STS ✔
DS1 DS2 DS3 closed
V3 V4
V1
Relay selection logic programmed by the user
SYNCHK01 function
using the PLC function
✔
Ry2
Ry1 Line
In Figure 4.6-16 , two signals are used for relay selection, but the user should note that
the selection-signals are provided in accordance with the actual line and bus-bar arrangement.
Figure 4.6-17 shows the overall logic used for the selection. The user can program the
selection-signals using the PLC function.
&
&
&
&
&
≥
& To DPSY02
& ≥ 560001 850B021F59
SYNCHK2
SYNC02_SYN_CLC
& ≥ (Function ID: 560001) Sync success
&
& ≥
Signal Setting
V2a →
names names SYNCHK_Ry1
Va →V-L1 V2b →
Relays for
incoming voltage
Vs →V3
Relays for
running voltage
Relays for
incoming voltage
VCT
Figure 4.6-18 illustrates that the signals injected are distributed using scheme switches:
[SyncRy1-VR], [SyncRy1-VI], [SyncRy1-VR], and [SyncRy1-VI]. Examples below show how to
apply a voltage signal for the required relay-element.
Busbar#1
Busbar#2 ✔
DS1 closed
& SYNC01_RY1_USE_STS
DS2 closed
V1 V2 DS1 DS2
S43P logic programmed Selection of SYNCHK_Ry1
CB1 by the user
4.6.7 Setting
Main settings for SYNDIF (Function ID: 560001)
Default
Setting item Range Units Contents setting Notes
value
SYNC01_SYNCHK1EN On / Off – SYNC DEV1 synchronism check mode enable Off
V check timer(Live Running & Dead Incoming
SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI 0.00–5.00 s 5
Dead Running & Live Incoming)
SYNC01_TDRDI 0.00–5.00 s V check timer (Dead Running & Dead Incoming) 5
SYNC01_TSYN 0.00–100.00 s synchronism check timer (Loop) 10
SYNC01_TSYN2 30.0–1800.0 s Synchronism check time up 60
4.6.8 Signal
Signal monitoring points
SYNDIF (Function ID: 560001)
Element ID Name Description
8D0B011F51 SYNC01_SPS_CLC SYNC DEV1 split synchronism close command
800B011F80 SYNC01_SS_VCS_PLC SYNC DEV1 successful voltage condition signal from PLC
800B011F81 SYNC01_RY1_USE_STS SYNC DEV1 Relay Module1 use status from PLC
800B021F80 SYNC02_SS_VCS_PLC SYNC DEV2 successful voltage condition signal from PLC
800B021F81 SYNC02_RY1_USE_STS SYNC DEV2 Relay Module1 use status from PLC
800B01EDE0 SYNC01_SBP_ECP SYNC DEV1 synchronism bypass enable condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE1 SYNC01_SBP_SSP SYNC DEV1 synchronism bypass success condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE2 SYNC01_SCL_F_ECP SYNC DEV1 synchronism close fail condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE3 SYNC01_SCL_SSP SYNC DEV1 synchronism close success condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE4 SYNC01_SCL_CSP SYNC DEV1 synchronism close condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE5 SYNC01_SPS_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 split SYNC. close enable condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE6 SYNC01_LPS_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 loop synchronism close enable condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE7 SYNC01_LLV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 84Vr & 84Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE8 SYNC01_LDV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 84Vr & 27Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B01EDE9 SYNC01_DLV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 27Vr & 84Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B01EDEA SYNC01_DDV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 27Vr & 27Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B01EDEB SYNC01_SBK_CSP SYNC DEV1 synchronism block condition signal from PLC
800B01EDEC SYNC01_SS_VCS_PLC SYNC DEV1 successful voltage condition signal from PLC
800B01EDED SYNC01_RY1_USE_STS SYNC DEV1 Relay Module1 use status from PLC
800B01EDEE SYNC01_RY2_USE_STS SYNC DEV1 Relay Module2 use status from PLC
800B02EDE0 SYNC02_SBP_ECP SYNC DEV2 synchronism bypath enable condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE1 SYNC02_SBP_SSP SYNC DEV2 synchronism bypath success condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE2 SYNC02_SCL_F_ECP SYNC DEV2 synchronism close fail condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE3 SYNC02_SCL_SSP SYNC DEV2 synchronism close success condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE4 SYNC02_SCL_CSP SYNC DEV2 synchronism close condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE5 SYNC02_SPS_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 split SYNC. close enable condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE6 SYNC02_LPS_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 loop synchronism close enable condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE7 SYNC02_LLV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 84Vr & 84Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE8 SYNC02_LDV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 84Vr & 27Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B02EDE9 SYNC02_DLV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 27Vr & 84Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B02EDEA SYNC02_DDV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 27Vr & 27Vi close enable condition signal from PLC
800B02EDEB SYNC02_SBK_CSP SYNC DEV2 synchronism block condition signal from PLC
800B02EDEC SYNC02_SS_VCS_PLC SYNC DEV2 successful voltage condition signal from PLC
800B02EDED SYNC02_RY1_USE_STS SYNC DEV2 Relay Module1 use status from PLC
8000012A61 SYNC01_RY1_USE_STS SYNC DEV1 Relay Module1 use status from PLC
8000012A62 SYNC01_RY2_USE_STS SYNC DEV1 Relay Module2 use status from PLC
8000022A61 SYNC02_RY1_USE_STS SYNC DEV2 Relay Module1 use status from PLC
8000022A62 SYNC02_RY2_USE_STS SYNC DEV2 Relay Module2 use status from PLC
†Note:Details of SPOS, DPSY, and TPOS features are discussed separately elsewhere in
the instruction manual under the Chapter Control and monitoring applications.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.7-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Prior to controlling a device, the interlock-check function is used to determine whether the
control of a device is correct or not. If the interlock-check finds that the conditions for device
control have not been satisfied in accordance with the appropriate interlock condition, control
of the device is forbidden. Figure 4.7-1 provides an overview of the interlock-check process.
Formulae for interlock-check are stored in an ILK database; these formulae are used in order
to enable the interlock-check function to output a decision. If the proposed operation of a
particular device is deemed correct then an “OK-decision” is determined by the formulae, and
device control is allowed. However, if the proposed operation of the device is deemed incorrect
then an “NG-decision” is determined by the formulae, and device control is not allowed.
Device IED
Binary
Circuit input Control
breaker Interlock Control
Device status circuits Device status Functions Device status Function (ILK)
(CB)
SPOS
DPOS
Dis- Binary OK/NG decision Interlock
and
connector Output
others
(DS) circuits
Device control Control Database
Other IEDs
GOOSE GOOSE receiving information
GOOSE subscription
data
transmission
data
PC(GR-TIEMS)
Interlock formulas
Q0 Q0B
Q53
Q9 Q8
Q69
F52VT
F27L
̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅
∙ ((Q1 Q2 ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q9) + ((Q1 + Q2) ∙ Q9)) (4.7-4)
∙ Closing Blocking
̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
Q0(Opening‡ ) = 63QBF 63GBE (4.7-5)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q69 ∙ F27L(No voltage) ∙ F52VT)
Q8 = (Q9 (4.7-6)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q52 = (Q9 Q1 ∙ ̅̅̅̅
Q2) (4.7-7)
̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q1
Q53 = (Q9 ̅̅̅̅ ∙ Q2
̅̅̅̅) (4.7-8)
Q69 = Q8 (4.7-9)
where,
Q0: Circuit breaker (CB)†
Q1, Q2, Q9: Disconnecting switch (DS)
For example in equation (4.7-12), the interlock condition for DS (Q1) is satisfied when
CB (Q0), DS (Q2), ES for the Bus-bar1-A (Q15), ES (Q52) and ES (Q53) are open. In addition,
the interlock condition for DS (Q1) is also satisfied when DS (Q2), CB (Q0), DS (Q9), CB (Q0),
DS (Q1), and DS (Q2) are closed.
Node
stVal OR (+)
Input(A)
stVal
Quality Output
Quality
Input(B) stVal
Quality
Node #1
Node #2 Node #7
OR(+) AND(•)
Input A AND(•)
Input B
Output
Input C
Input D Node #4
Node #3
OR(+)
AND(•)
Input E
Input F
Input G
Node #5 Node #6
AND(•)
OR(+)
Input H
Input I
Input J
We can see that equation (4.7-10) is a representation of Figure 4.7-4. This equation is
computed in accordance with the priority order of the interlock-operators: the first is
parentheses [()], the second is AND [•], followed by OR [+].
Output = ((A+B) •C) + (D+E•F) + (G•(H+I) •J) (4.7-10)
Figure 4.7-5 shows the logic symbol for the interlock operator “AND” with input signals
and an output signal. Figure 4.7-5 can be represented by equations (4.7-11) and (4.7-12).
stVal = stVa(A) • stVa(B) (4.7-11)
Quality=(Quality(A)+Quality(B))•(stVa(A)+ Quality(A))
(4.7-12)
•(stVa(B)+Quality(B))
For example, when the interlock operator “AND” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it
has to generate a signal (0–OK) using the equations (4.7-11) and (4.7-12). This is because the
quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the AND operator; the AND
operator produces zero (0) which is defined as “OK” in ‘Quality’. A note regarding the values
AND (•)
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B)
Quality
OR interlock operator
When quality information (Quality) is applied to the interlock operator “OR”, the quality
information is affected by device status (stVal). Table 4.7-5 shows two-input-signals (A, B) and
the output signal for “OR”
Table 4.7-5 Output signals (stVal–Quality) of OR
Input B (stVal–Quality)
0–OK 0–NG 1–OK 1–NG
0–OK 0–OK – – –
Input A 0–NG 0–NG 0–NG – –
(stVal–Quality) 1–OK 1–OK 1–OK 1–OK –
1–NG 1–NG 1–NG 1–OK 1–NG
As shown in Table 4.7-5, if ‘0’ represents the status value “stVal” for all input signals,
and if the quality information of “NG” is given for an input signal, then the output signal
“Quality” is represented as “NG”. On the other hand, if all input signals “stVal” are
represented by “1”, and if the quality information for the input signals “stVal(1)” is given, then
the representation “OK” can be weighted for the output signal “Quality” . Note that quality
information (OK) for input signals with “stVal(1)” get priority if there are two or more input
signals, which are represented as “stVal(1)”.
Figure 4.7-6 shows the logic symbol for the interlock operator “OR” with input signals and an
output signal, which can be represented by equations (4.7-13) and (4.7-14).
OR (+)
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B) Quality
For example, when the interlock operator “OR” has two input signals (0–NG, 0–OK), it
has to generate a signal (0–NG) using the equations (4.7-13) and (4.7-14). This is because the
quality “NG (i.e., 1)” and the quality “OK (i.e., 0)” are entered into the OR operator; the OR
operator produces one (1) which is defined as “NG” in ‘Quality’. A note regarding the values
used for Quality can be found immediately below Table 4.7-3
Figure 4.7-7 depicts the logic symbol for the interlock operator “NOT” with input signals
and an output signal, which can be represented by equations (4.7-15) and (4.7-16).
NOT(!)
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
stVal
Input(B) Quality
Figure 4.7-8 depicts the logic symbol for the interlock operator “COMP” with input
signals and an output signal, which can be represented by equations (4.7-17) and (4.7-18).
stVal=stVa(A) COMP stVa(B) (4.7-17)
Quality=Quality(A) † (4.7-18)
†Note: Input signal (B) does not have quality information because its signal is a threshold
value.
COMP
Input(A) stVal
Quality
stVal
Output
Quality
Input(B) stVal
4.7.5 Signal
Signal monitoring point
ILK (Function ID: 570001)
Element ID Name Description
3100A11001 ILK_MID_UPDATING interlock conditional expression number middle signal updating
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware
and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To
determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the
IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “G&T position” referring to the
comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.8-1 Comparative table for respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
– Number of operative features‡ – 72
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Cancel logic
Select command Off from the remote-end
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-ON-Control” signal is true. If the DPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-ON-Control” signal is not true, the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Cancel logic
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-4, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” when the DPOS01 function determines that the received “Select
command Off (Remote-OFF-Control)” signal is true. If the DPOS01 function determines that
the “Remote-OFF-Control” signal is not true, the DPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from the remote-end
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”.
Note: The “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.8-2. If the input signal “Local-ON-Control” is not true, the DPOS01 function
returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
0.6s
[DPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Cancel logic
Cancel logic
Select command On from the local-end
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the DPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The signal “DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.8-4. If the signal “Local-OFF-Control” is not true, the DPOS01 function returns
to the “Wait for a command” stage.
0.6s
[DPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from the remote-end
Operate logic
Select command On by PLC function
Failed Operate command
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-10, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF” signal is the same signal as that shown in Figure
4.8-2.
1≥ &
ON-control command requiring ILK† checking To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC #1 connection point) command”
Operate command
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK To BO connection
with ILK† condition
& “DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF”
(512001_8603011DC6)
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed
DPOS01-Close 0 t
Select “success”
0.1s
ON-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point) 0 t
Operate command Select “Failed”
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
Select condition‡
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Select command On from the remote-end
Operate logic
Select command On by the PLC function
Operate command
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-12, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”1.
1Note: The output point “DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF” is the same signal as that shown in
Figure 4.8-4.
1≥ &
OFF-control command requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation
(PLC#1 connection point)
Operate command with To BO connection
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK
ILK† condition & “DPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF”
ILK† condition (“OFF”) passed (512001_8A03011DC4)
DPOS01-Open 0 t
Select “success”
0.1s
OFF-control command requiring no ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC#2 connection point)
0 t
Operate command Select “Failed”
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
Select condition‡
On
6Note: The function “Event suppression” can detect chattering on BI circuits. (See section
4.8.6(i)-3)
7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits.
8Note: The Common control (CMNCTRL) function can test and check the ‘On and Off
operations performed by the logic. When the user sets Off for scheme switch
[SCDEN], the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same
operation-direction compared with the previous operation-direction (i.e., when on
(off) is performed sequentially). On the other hand, if On is set for the scheme
switch, the logic is not blocked.
9Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic
using the connection point “DPOS01IN_TMP_28”. For more information, see
Chapter Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy. See PLC#3 of
Table 4.8-7.
10Note: To identify the input point of the other DPOS, see Table 4.8-7 for PLC#1 and
PLC#2.
Table 4.8-3 PLC Connection points (Input points for Command ‘Off’)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND DPOS01 PLC Off-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
512001 800302EE30 DEV02_OP_COMMAND DPOS02 PLC Off-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
512001 800303EE30 DEV03_OP_COMMAND DPOS03 PLC Off-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
…. …. ….
512001 800348EE30 DEV72_OP_COMMAND DPOS72 PLC Off-control checking with interlock(PLC#1) O
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK DPOS01 PLC Off-control without checking(PLC#2) O
512001 800302EE31 DEV02_OP_INTERLOCK DPOS02 PLC Off-control without checking(PLC#2) O
512001 800303EE31 DEV03_OP_INTERLOCK DPOS03 PLC Off-control without checking(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
512001 800348EE31 DEV72_OP_INTERLOCK DPOS72 PLC Off-control without checking(PLC#2) O
Table 4.8-7 PLC Connection points (Input signals for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
512001 810301EE62 DPOS01IN_TMP_32 DPOS01 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
512001 810302EE62 DPOS02IN_TMP_32 DPOS02 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
512001 810303EE62 DPOS03IN_TMP_32 DPOS03 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
…. …. ….
5A0101 801016EF40 DPOS72IN_TMP_32 DPOS72 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
512001 800301EE61 DPOS01IN_TMP_31 DPOS01 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
512001 800302EE61 DPOS02IN_TMP_31 DPOS02 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
512001 800303EE61 DPOS03IN_TMP_31 DPOS03 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
… … …
512001 800348EE61 DPOS72IN_TMP_31 DPOS72 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
512001 820301ED50 DPOS01IN_TMP_28 DPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
512001 820302ED50 DPOS02IN_TMP_28 DPOS02 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
512001 820303ED50 DPOS03IN_TMP_28 DPOS03 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
…. …. ….
512001 820348ED50 DPOS04IN_TMP_28 DPOS20 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
Table 4.8-8 PLC Monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
512001 8003011F5A DPOS01_SC_ST_ERR DPOS01 select command mode is invalid.
512001 8003021F5A DPOS02_SC_ST_ERR DPOS02 select command mode is invalid.
512001 8003031F5A DPOS03_SC_ST_ERR DPOS03 select command mode is invalid.
…. …. ….
512001 8003481F5A DPOS72_SC_ST_ERR DPOS72 select command mode is invalid.
512001 8103011F5F DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS01)
512001 8103021F5F DPOS02_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS02)
512001 8103031F5F DPOS03_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS03)
…. …. ….
512001 8103481F5F DPOS72_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS72)
512001 8203011F60 DPOS01_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPOS01)
512001 8203021F60 DPOS02_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPOS02)
512001 8203031F60 DPOS03_F_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(DPOS03)
Operate logic
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“DPOS01_CC_SS”, when the DPOS01 function has determined that the signal
“Remote-cancel” is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued at monitoring point
“DPOS01_CC_FS” if the DPOS01 function is able to determine that the signal “Remote-cancel”
is not true.
“DPOS01_CC_FS”
(512001_8703011E96)
Operation Failed
Operate logic
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, illustrated in Figure 4.8-17, is able to issue a “Success of cancel” signal
at the monitoring point “DPOS01_CC_SS”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the
signal “Local-Cancel” is true.
[DPOS01-LGCNFFCT]
PLC#1
User configurable condition (PLC connection point)
Fixedlogic
512001 800301EE69 DPOS01IN_TMP_44 &
If the original logic does not meet with the requirement of the user, it can be relpced
using the connection point “User configurable condition”.
Table 4.8-11 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
512001 800301EE69 DPOS01IN_TMP_44 DPOS01 user configurable cancel condition O
512001 800302EE69 DPOS02IN_TMP_44 DPOS02 user configurable cancel condition O
512001 800303EE69 DPOS03IN_TMP_44 DPOS03 user configurable cancel condition O
… … … O
512001 800348EE69 DPOS72IN_TMP_44 DPOS72 user configurable cancel condition O
Table 4.8-12 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
512001 8603011E95 DPOS01_CC_SS DPOS01 cancel success
512001 8603021E95 DPOS02_CC_SS DPOS02 cancel success
512001 8603031E95 DPOS03_CC_SS DPOS03 cancel success
… … …
512001 8603481E95 DPOS72_CC_SS DPOS72 cancel success
512001 8703011E96 DPOS01_CC_FS DPOS01 cancel failed
512001 8703021E96 DPOS02_CC_FS DPOS02 cancel failed
512001 8703031E96 DPOS03_CC_FS DPOS03 cancel failed
…. … …
512001 8703481E96 DPOS72_CC_FS DPOS72 cancel failed
DPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition in DPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-20, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Remote-On-Control” is true.
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7F)
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-On-Control” (512001 8103011E82)
[DPOS01-CPW]
512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table
4.8-14 for PLC#1, Table 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected when
the time set by the [DPOS01-RST] has been reached.
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On l from the local-end
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-22, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Off-Control” is true.
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7E)
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-Off-Control” (512001 8003011E81)
[DPOS01-CPW]
512001_7001016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF &
1.0s- 100.0s Operate Failed
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table 4.8-15
for PLC#2, Table 4.8-16 for PLC#3, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST].
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-24, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal
“Local-On-Control” is true.
To BO connection
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7F)
DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001)
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS”
(512001 8103011E82)
Operate Cmd.
Command “Local-On-Control” [DPOS01-CPW]
with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operate Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK† condition (“ON”) passed
DPOS01-Close
S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥
R
ICB_STATE
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
ASEQ function§” is in progress Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table
4.8-14 for PLC#1, Table 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST].
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command On by the PLC function Operate command On by the PLC function
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-26, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the input signal
“Local-Off-Control” is true.
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF”
DPOS1 function (Function ID: 512001) (512001 8003011E7E)
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Operate Cmd. (512001 8003011E81)
Command “Local-Off-Control” [DPOS01-CPW]
with ILK† condition
& 1≥ & 1≥
& 0.1 – 50.0 s 1≥
Operate Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK† condition (“Off”) passed
DPOS01-Open
S
&
ILK† bypassing 1≥
R
ICB_STATE
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
ASEQ function§” is in progress Fixedlogic
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other DPOS logics, see Table 4.8-15
for PLC#2, Table 4.8-16 for PLC#3, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST].
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-28, can issue an “Operate” signal at output point
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-On-Control”
is true.
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF”
(512001 8003011E7F)
DPOS01 function (Function ID: 512001)
“DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS”
Command “PLC-On-Control” requiring ILK† check
(512001 8103011E82)
(PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW]
512001 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-On-Control” not requiring ILK† check 0.1 – 50.0 s
(PLC#4 connection point)
512001 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND Operate Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
[DPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43-switch is changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points in the other DPOS logics, see Table
4.8-14 for PLC#1, Table 4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected
following expiration of the setting to timer [DPOS01-RST].
Select command On from the remote-end Operate command On from the remote-end
Select command Off from the remote-end Operate command Off from the remote-end
Select command On from the local-end Operate command On from the local-end
Select command Off from the local-end Operate command Off from the local-end
Failed Do nothing
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function, in Figure 4.8-30, can issue an “Operate” signal at output-point
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”, when the DPOS01 function determines that the signal “PLC-Off-Control”
is true.
“DPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF” “DPOS01_FEC_OK_CS”
Command “PLC-On-Control” with ILK†
(512001 8003011E7E) (512001 8003011E81)
(PLC#3 connection point) [DPOS01-CPW]
512001 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-On-Control” without ILK† 0.1 – 50.0 s
(PLC#4 connection point)
512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[DPOS01-LGCFEXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[DPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“DPOS01_EX_CMP”
(512001 8003011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the other DPOS logics, see Table
4.8-15 for PLC#2, Table 4.8-16 for PLC#3, Table 4.8-18 and Table 4.8-20 for output
signals.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the [DPOS01-RST].
1Note:“Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; “Command Blocking”
is implemented as “CBK” in a software switch controller (SOTFSW). The
IEC61850 standard defines “Command Blocking” as “CmdBlk”. For more
information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Software
switch controller. See the signal ““CBK_STATE” in Table 4.8-6.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking” (DCB) is an operation philosophy in the common
control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation. The user
can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted as “DCB
RCV OR” in Table 4.8-6. For more information see Chapter Control and monitoring
application :Common controls.
3Note: Detection of event “device-travelling” signifies that other operators are changing
the status of one or more devices. Thus, device operation by the IED should be
inhibited whilst ever the event is being detected. The detection signal is denoted as
“Travelling OR” in Table 4.8-6.
4Note: If an IED in the process of issuing a trip command, all control operation is blocked
until the trip operation has been completed. If the IED has a relay application, the
trip command is issued at the output_point “GEN_TRIP” in Table 4.8-7.
5Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a
Table 4.8-14 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 User configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
512001 810301EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35 DPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
512001 810302EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35 DPOS02 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
512001 810303EE57 DPOS01IN_TMP_35 DPOS03 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
…. …. …..
512001 810348EE57 DPOS72IN_TMP_35 DPOS72 user configurable condition(PLC#1) O
Table 4.8-15 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#2 User configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
512001 820301EE5E DPOS01IN_TMP_42 DPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
512001 820302EE5E DPOS02IN_TMP_42 DPOS02 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
512001 820303EE5E DPOS03IN_TMP_42 DPOS03 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
… … …
512001 820348EE5E DPOS72IN_TMP_42 DPOS72 user configurable condition(PLC#2) O
Table 4.8-16 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#3 User configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
512001 800301EE53 DPOS01IN_TMP_34 DPOS01 user configurable condition(PLC#3) O
Table 4.8-17 PLC connection points (Input point for PLC#1 and PLC#2 for additional and
operate condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
512001 800301EE65 DPOS01IN_TMP_38 DPOS01 user additional condition(PLC#1) O
512001 800302EE65 DPOS02IN_TMP_38 DPOS02 user additional condition(PLC#1) O
512001 800303EE65 DPOS03IN_TMP_38 DPOS03 user additional condition(PLC#1) O
… … …
512001 800348EE65 DPOS72IN_TMP_38 DPOS72 user additional condition(PLC#1) O
512001 810302EE66 DPOS01IN_TMP_39 DPOS01 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) O
512001 810303EE66 DPOS01IN_TMP_39 DPOS02 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) O
512001 810304EE66 DPOS01IN_TMP_39 DPOS03 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) O
…. …. ….
512001 810348EE66 DPOS72IN_TMP_39 DPOS72 user configurable operate condition(PLC#2) O
Off state
The user can change the value of the operation-counter from either the front panel or
remotely. For example, in the sub-menu for “Operation counter”, the user can set a
user-preferred value for the operation-counter. See chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu.
“DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(512001 8A03031F86)
Command “change value for counter”
512001_7003016D09 DEV01_3PH_REQ Operate Command
&
Operate condition‡
Figure 4.8-34 Changing counter value for three-phase† with operation from the remote-end in
DPOS01
‡Note:The “operate condition” signal is provided from the operate condition logic of
Figure 4.8-36.
†Note: The user can apply other counter change commands for phase-A, -B, and –C as
shown in Table 4.8-23. The resultant signals for the other DPOS02-72 logics are
shown in Table 4.8-24.
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
Figure 4.8-35 Changing counter value by operation from the front panel in DPOS01
Output signal to BO
The DPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “DPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
Figure 4.8-36 Operate condition logic for changing the counter in DPOS01
1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; the “Command
Blocking” function is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software switch
controller (SOTFSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “Command Blocking”
function as “CmdBlk”. For more information on “CBK”, see Chapter Control and
monitoring application: Software switch controller. See the signal ““CBK_STATE”
of Table 4.8-6.
2Note: “Double Command Blocking” (DCB) is an operation philosophy in the common
control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation. The user
can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted as “DCB
RCV OR” in Table 4.8-6. For more information see Chapter Control and monitoring
application :Common controls.
3Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it indicates
that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should
inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is detected. The
detected signal is denoted by “Travelling OR” in Table 4.8-6.
4Note: If the issuing of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is
blocked until the trip operation is completed. If an IED includes a relay application,
the trip command is issues at the output_point “GEN_TRIP” in Table 4.8-7.
Signal “DPOS01_FEX_BO”
Sensing
intermediate state
On Intermediate Off
Signal POS01_FEX_BO”
Sensing
intermediate state
Off Intermediate On
The user can clear the intervals (OT1 to OT4) by key-operation of the “Operation time”
sub-menu Figure 4.8-39 or operation from the remote-end. See chapter User interface:
Monitoring sub-menu.
512001 7003486D0D DEV48_RESET_REQ DPOS72 operation time reset command received (Mapping Data)
Note that the DPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [DPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
DPOS01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”
(512001 3103011001)
Phase-A signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
&
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPOS01A-NCLSG]
“DPOS01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (512001 8103011F5F)
&
Phase-B signals
BI signal selected by & Faulty
N/O contact setting [DPOS01B-NOPSG]
signal &
Phase-C signals
BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01C-NOPSG]
signal & &
Close
BI signal selected by
N/C contact setting [DPOS01C-NCLSG]
signal &
[DPOS01-EN]
On &
[DPOS01-DEVTYPE]
3-Pole
[DPOS01-OPC]
And
&
[DPOS01-CLC]
And
DPOS01
To select and operate
condition logics
“DPOS01_3PH_STATE”
(512001 3103011001)
Single phase signals BI signal selected by
N/O contact setting [DPOS01A-NOPSG]
Event
signal &
& Suppression
1≥ detector
BI signal selected by Open
N/C contact setting [DPOS01A-NCLSG]
“DPOS01_ F_QLT_SPP”
signal & (512001 8103011F5F)
&
Faulty
&
Intermediate
&
Close
[DPOS01-EN]
On &
[DPOS01-DEVTYPE]
1-Pole
Event suppression
If the status of a device “chatters” for a short time, the DPOS function will receive iterative
signals from the device. Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the DPOS function;
hence, event suppression can be required to reduce additional burden created.
The DPOS function has an event suppression detector. The user should take into
account of the scheme switches [DPOS-NELD], [DPOS-TELD] and [DPOS-TELR]†. Set On for
scheme switch [DPOS01-SPPEN].
[DPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
from device On On On On On On On
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[DPOS-TELD] [DPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 4.8-42 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been
suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the
seventh signal (at Time B). This is because the function can count the iterative number of
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time ‘A’, the setting [DPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time ‘B’. The setting [DPOS-TELD] pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time ‘A’ (e.g., Time ‘A’ to Time ‘C’).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [DPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time ‘D’ to Time ‘E’).
To initiate the event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch
[DPOS01-SPPEN].
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8603011DC6)
Select logic for select command On “BO1” Select
Signal captured by command
in DPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
On to the
DRIVER BO1 device
[Input signal 2]
To contact health & ≥1
check [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On &
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
Select logic for select command check
Off in DPOS01 [Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Terminal and
BO2 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8A03011DC4) Select
“BO2”
Signal captured by command
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112) Off to the
device
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO2
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO2-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO2_CPL] On &
(200B01_8102011113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Figure 4.8-43 Example of select commands connected with BO1 & BO2 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.8-9 shows the remaining signals with the exception of
Terminal and
Operate logic in DPOS01 BO3 and BO4 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
(512001 8203011DD3)
Operate
“BO3” command
Signal captured by
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8202021112) On to the
device
“Operate command [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO3
On” & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO3-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO3_CPL] On &
Connected by Off
(200B01_8202021113)
“Programming” [Input signal 5]
To contact health To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Figure 4.8-44 Example of operate commands connected with BO3 and BO4 at IO#1
†Note:Table 4.8-18 shows the remaining signals with the exception of “DPOS01_OEX_BO”
and “DPOS01_FEX_BO”.
“BO1-RB”
(200B01_8002001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]
Figure 4.8-45 Example connection of “Select command On” for the health check feature
“BO2-RB”
(200B01_8102001113)
Signal connected by
setting [DPOS01-FSLBORD]
Figure 4.8-46 Example connection of “Select command Off” for the health check feature
“BO3-RB”
“200B01_8202021113”
Signal designated by
setting [DPOS01-OEXBORD]
Figure 4.8-47 Example connection of “Operate command On” for the health check feature
“BO4-RB”
“200B01_8302031113”
Signal designated by
setting [DPOS01-FEXBORD]
Figure 4.8-48 Example connection of “Operate command Off” for the health check feature
Setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 4.8-49 shows a setting example for the 43SW scheme. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1 to BO4 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working
correctly, the respective points of the BO-RBs should be connected as shown in Table 4.8-29, to
demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113 (BO2-RB) set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
Figure 4.8-49 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example #1
Settings for erroneous contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 4.8-50 shows a setting example of an improper setting of the 43SW scheme. The
settings are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.8-30, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead
BO1 is actually chosen, which is incorrect. In this case, the setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD] is
meaningless ; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” at IO#1 200B01 8002001112 (BO1) set for [DPOS01-OSLORD] NG
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO2” at IO#1 200B01 8102011113 (BO2-RB) set for [DPOS01-FSLBORD] OK
Figure 4.8-50 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example#2
Settings for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 4.8-51 shows an additional setting example for the 43SW scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [DPOS01-OSLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special setting
can issue a select command, which is called “operated by internal select function”. The user
does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there are no BIO
circuits available.
“DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF” is connected to “BO4” at IO#1 200B01 8202021113 (BO3-RB) set for [DPOS01-FEXBORD] OK
BIO module
Remote/Local-end Drivers 43SW
Plus (+)
“DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8603011DC6)
Select command On SW1 is not driven with any BO
SW 1
On
command
Physical BOs
are virtualized. SW 3
“DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG”
(512001 8A03011DC4) SW2 is not driven with any BO
Select command Off SW 2
Off
command
SW 4
“DPOS01_OEX_BO”
SW3 is driven with
(512001 8203011DD3)
BO3 at IO#1
Operate command On BO3
Minus (−)
“BO3-RB”
(200B01_8202021113)
“DPOS01_FEX_BO”
(512001 8103011DD0) SW4 is driven with
BO4 BO4 at IO#1
Operate command Off
“BO4-RB”
(200B01_8302031113)
Figure 4.8-51 Contact health check setting and 43SW scheme for example#3
Table 4.8-32 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for event suppression function in DPOSxx)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
512001 3103011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE DPOS01 3ph_state
512001 3103021001 DPOS02_3PH_STATE DPOS02 3ph_state
512001 3103031001 DPOS03_3PH_STATE DPOS03 3ph_state
…. …. ….
512001 3103481001 DPOS72_3PH_STATE DPOS72 3ph_state
512001 8103011F5F DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS01)
512001 8103021F5F DPOS02_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS02)
512001 8103031F5F DPOS03_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS03)
…. …. ….
512001 8103481F5F DPOS72_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (DPOS72)
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
Table 4.8-36 Mapping signals required for DPC object for CSWI4
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
512001 7003016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/CSWI4$Pos$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Check “Input”
4.8.8 Setting
Common settings list for the DPOS(Function ID: 512001)
N
U
o
n Default
Setting items Range Contents t
it setting value
e
s
s
select command
select binary output read data(Signal number) for On-direction
DPOS01-OSLBORD –
select command
execute binary output read data(Signal number) for Off-direction
DPOS01-FEXBORD –
execute command
execute binary output read data(Signal number) for On-direction
DPOS01-OEXBORD –
execute command
DPOS01-LGEXFFCT FixedLogic/PLC – Change logic for execute command fail factor FixedLogic
DPOS01-LGCNFFCT FixedLogic/PLC – Change logic for cancel command fail factor FixedLogic
Note: The DPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have omitted
the other tables because this will be the same as the table for the 1st device with
the exception of the device number.
4.8.9 Signal
Common signal monitoring points
DPOS(Function ID: 512001)
Element ID Name Description
8003001D5B DPOS00_CH_SC_OWS DPOS00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
8003001D5C DPOS00_CH_SC_RCC DPOS00 count change select command by RCC
8003001D5D DPOS00_CH_SC_RMT DPOS00 count change select command by Remote
8003001F95 DPOS00_CH_SC_LCD DPOS00 count change select command by LCD
8003001D5E DPOS00_CH_EC_OWS DPOS00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
8003001D5F DPOS00_CH_EC_RCC DPOS00 count change execute command by RCC
8003001D60 DPOS00_CH_EC_RMT DPOS00 count change execute command by Remote
8003001F96 DPOS00_CH_EC_LCD DPOS00 count change execute command by LCD
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the DPOS function. We
have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “DPOS02A_FLT_DET” point
provided for the 2nd device, use the description of “DPOS01A_FLT_DET”.
The user can obtain the ID value of “DPOS02A_FLT_DE” by using the
folloe=wing steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for DPOS01A_FLT_DET (i.e.,
“8303011F49”)
Step 2 Identify the numbers at the fifth and sixth digit from the
ID. (i.e., “01”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device)
Step 4 Replace the sixth and fifth digit numbers with the new
device number. (i.e., get new ID “8303021F49” of
“DPOS02A_FLT_DET”) The ID is expressed in
hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must change the
device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal
notation.
P1 P2 P3
The TPOS function has “Operation counters” and “Operation time measurement”; these
features are used to examine the devices; these features are useful when the user wishes to
assess the operating time of the device; these features are performed by counting the
state-changes for the device. The BO circuits connected with the TPOS function are used for
issuing commands; the BI circuits are used for receiving responses; hence, the user should
connect the BO and BI circuits with the TPOS function†. The TPOS function includes three
logic groups: 1. Select logic, 2. Cancel logic, and 3. Operate logic.
EDS devices (43-switches) can be controlled separately; i.e., the function has a number
of separate sets for control (i.e., TPOS01, TPOS02, etc.). For simplicity, only the TPOS01
function is discussed here; the features in the other TPOS functions are identical to the
TPOS01 function.
†Note:A binary IO module has binary input circuits (BIs) and binary output circuits
(BOs); the user makes the connection between the TPOS01 function and the binary
IO module using a signal number (is made of a “Function_ID” and an
“Element_ID”). The signal numbers and names in the TPOS01 function are listed
later.
Tips: If the user wishes to apply the TPOS function quickly, go to sections 4.9.6 and 4.9.5,
where settings of the BI and BO circuits and the mapping of signal-points for
IEC61850 communication is described.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware
and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To
determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the
IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “G&T position” referring to the
comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.9-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
– Number of functions – 24
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Cancel logic
P2 control from the remote-end
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue an signal “Select success” at the output point
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-P1-Control” received is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-P1-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-5, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FL” when the TPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Select command (Remote-P2-Control)” is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that the
“Remote-P2-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a
command” stage.
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-7, can issue a signal “Select success” at the output point
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FL” when the TPOS01 function determines that the received signal
“Select command P3 (Remote-P3-Control)” is true. If the TPOS01 function determines that
the “Remote-P3-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command”
stage.
Operate logic
P2 control from the local-end
Operate command
P3 control from the local-end
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Figure 4.9-9 Selection logic for P1-control at the IED locally in TPOS01††
†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “P1-control”.
‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.9-20
§Note:An automatic sequence control (ASEQ) function can provide sequential signals for
automatic control. The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it
is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.9-6,
Table 4.9-7 and Table 4.9-10.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL”.
Note: The signal “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FL” is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.9-3. If the input signal “Local-P1-Control” is not true, the TPOS01 function
returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
automatic control. The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it
is in operation. For more information regarding the ASEQ function, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Automatic sequence control function.
‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.9-20.
††Note: To identify the input/output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.9-6,
Table 4.9-7, and Table 4.9-10.
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.9-5. If the “Local-P2-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to
the “Wait for a command” stage.
0.6s
[TPOS01-CTRAHMI]
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode”
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*) SBO
Select condition‡
“Automatic sequence control function (AQEQ)§” in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
Output signal to BO
When the “select condition” signal is true, the TPOS01 function can issue a “Select success”
signal at the output-point “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same signal as shown in Figure 4.9-7.
If the “Local-P3-Control” signal is not true, the TPOS01 function returns to the
“Wait for a command” stage.
Operate logic
P1control by the PLC function
Failed Operate command
510001 7001016D08
1≥ &
P1-control command requiring ILK† check To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation
(PLC connection point #1) command”
Operate command
513001 800401EE31 DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK To BO connection
with ILK† condition
& “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed
TPOS1-P1 0 t Select “success”
0.1s
P1-control command not requiring ILK† checking For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC connection point #2) 0 t
Operate command Select “Failed”
513001 800401EE30 DEV01_P1_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
Select condition‡
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-15, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”1.
1Note: The “TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure
4.9-13.
Operate logic
P1 control by the PLC function
Operate command
Operate logic
PLC logic programmed Select
Selection logic Signal output
by the user decision Success
510001 7001016D08
1≥ &
P2-control command requiring ILK †check
For DIR operation
(PLC connection point #1)
Operate command
513001 800401EE33 DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK To BO connection
with ILK† condition
& “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC6)
ILK† condition (“P2”) passed
TPOS1-P2 0 t Select “success”
0.1s
P2-control command not requiring ILK† check For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC connection point #2) 0 t
Operate command Select “Failed”
513001 800401EE32 DEV01_P2_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
Figure 4.9-17 Select logic ‘P2-control’ using the PLC function in TPOS01††
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.9-3
for PLC#1 and #2, and Table 4.9-10 for the outputs.
†Note:The ILK function provides the operation criteria for “P2-control”.
‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.9-20.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-17, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”1.
1Note: The output point “TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in
Figure 4.9-5.
Operate logic
P1 control by the PLC function
Operate command
P2 control by the PLC function
510001 7001016D08
1≥ &
P3-control command requiring with ILK† check
For DIR operation
(PLC connection point #1)
Operate command
513001 800401EE37 DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK To BO connection
with ILK† condition
& “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC8)
ILK† condition (“P3”) passed
TPOS1-P3 0 t Select “success”
0.1s
P3-control command not requiring without ILK† check For DIR operation To “Wait for a command”
(PLC connection point #2) 0 t
Operate command Select “Failed”
513001 800401EE36 DEV01_P3_COMMAND
without ILK† condition & 0.6s
Select condition‡
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-19, can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”1.
1Note: The output point “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG” is the same as the signal shown in
Figure 4.9-7.
TPOS01_ST_P2
“EDS” never permit to control
P3-control command received from “P1 to P3” and “P3 to P1”.
(513001 8504011D04) &
TPOS01_ST_P3
&
[TPOS01-DEVTYPE]*9
&
EDS
[TPOS01-CTREN]
On
Table 4.9-7 PLC connection points Interlock for P1, P2, and P3-control
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
570001 3104011DA0 TPOS1-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS01. N/A
570001 3104021DA0 TPOS2-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS02 N/A
570001 3104031DA0 TPOS3-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS03 N/A
… … …
570001 3104181DA0 TPOS24-P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS24 N/A
570001 3104011DA2 TPOS1-P2 Interlock condition for P2 control in TPOS01. N/A
570001 3104021DA2 TPOS2-P2 Interlock condition for P2 control in TPOS02 N/A
570001 3104031DA2 TPOS3-P2 Interlock condition for P2 control in TPOS03 N/A
Table 4.9-8 PLC connection points (Input signals for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
513001 800401EE61 TPOS01IN_TMP_24 TPOS01 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
513001 800402EE61 TPOS02IN_TMP_24 TPOS02 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
513001 800403EE61 TPOS03IN_TMP_24 TPOS03 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
… … …
513001 800418EE61 TPOS24IN_TMP_24 TPOS03 additional failure condition(PLC#1) O
513001 810401EE62 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 TPOS01 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
513001 810402EE62 TPOS02IN_TMP_25 TPOS02 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
513001 810403EE62 TPOS03IN_TMP_25 TPOS03 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
… … …
513001 810418EE62 TPOS24IN_TMP_25 TPOS24 user configurable select condition(PLC#2) O
513001 820401ED50 TPOS01IN_TMP_21 TPOS01 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
513001 820402ED50 TPOS02IN_TMP_21 TPOS02 control hierarchy condition(PLC#3) M
Table 4.9-9 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for select condition logic)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
513001 8004011F54 TPOS01_SC_ST_ERR TPOS01 select command mode is invalid.
513001 8004021F54 TPOS02_SC_ST_ERR TPOS02 select command mode is invalid.
513001 8004031F54 TPOS03_SC_ST_ERR TPOS03 select command mode is invalid.
… … …
513001 8004181F54 TPOS24_SC_ST_ERR TPOS24 select command mode is invalid.
513001 8204011F59 TPOS01_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS01)
513001 8204021F59 TPOS02_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS02)
513001 8204031F59 TPOS03_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS03)
… … …
513001 8204181F59 TPOS24_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected (TPOS24)
513001 8604011F5A TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(TPOS01)
513001 8604021F5A TPOS02_QLT_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(TPOS02)
513001 8604031F5A TPOS03_QLT_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(TPOS03)
… … ….
513001 8604181F5A TPOS24_QLT_BI_ERR BI connection error detected(TPOS24)
Operate logic
P3 control by the PLC function
“Do nothing”
“TPOS01_CC_FS”
(513001_8704011E96)
Operation Failed
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring, point
“TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function has determined that the “Remote-cancel”
signal is true. Another “Operate failed” signal is issued at monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_FS”
if the TPOS01 function is able to determine that the “Remote-cancel” signal is not true.
Select stage
Wait for a next command
P1 control from remote-end
Cancel from the remote-end
P2 control from remote-end
Cancel from the local-end
Success
P3 control from remote-end
Operate logic
P3 control by PLC function
Input signal
Figure 4.9-24 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Local-cancel)” signal is
applied to the TPOS01 function. The signal is generated when the “Cancel” key is pressed on
the IED front panel; the user is not required to take account of mapping. When the logic
receives the “Local-cancel” signal, the logic is able to output a result signal, provided that the
“cancel condition” checking is satisfied.
510001 7001016D08
Cancel command
Command “Local-cancel”
& To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_ CC_SS”
(513001_8604011E95)
Cancel condition &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
“TPOS01_CC_FS”
(513001_8704011E96)
Operation Failed
signal at the monitoring point “TPOS01_CC_SS”, when the TPOS01 function determines that
the “Local-Cancel” signal is true.
[TPOS01-LGCNFFCT]
User configurable condition (PLC connection point)
Fixedlogic
513001 800401EE69 TPOS01IN_TMP_40 &
If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user, it can be replaced
using the connection point “User Configurable condition”:
Connect the user-customized logic, with the “TPOS01IN_TMP_40”, which is listed
in Table 4.9-12.
Set scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCNFFCT] to PLC.
Table 4.9-12 PLC connection points (Input signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
513001 800401EE69 TPOS01IN_TMP_40 TPOS1 user configurable cancel condition O
513001 800401EE69 TPOS02IN_TMP_40 TPOS2 user configurable cancel condition O
513001 800401EE69 TPOS03IN_TMP_40 TPOS3 user configurable cancel condition O
… … …
Table 4.9-13 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
TPOSxx-LGCNFFCT Logic selector for cancel condition (TPOS01-24) Fixedlogic Fixedlogic / PLC
Failed Do nothing
“TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-P1-Control” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-27, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the received
“Remote-P1-Control” signal is true.
Failed Do nothing
“TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-P2-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
connection point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
††Note: To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics, see Table 4.9-16
for PLC#2, Table 4.9-17 for PLC#3 and Table 4.9-20 for the outputs.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-29, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determine that the input signal
“Remote-P2-Control” is true.
Failed Do nothing
“TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CS”
Command “Remote-P3-Control” (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the “operate completed” signal,
hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-31, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output-point
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-P3-Control” is true.
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end
Failed Do nothing
“TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P1EC_OK_CS”
Command Local-P1-Control” (513001 8004011E7E) (5130018004011E81)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK† condition (“P1”) passed
S
TPOS1-P1 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
†Note:The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for “P1” control.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic (Figure
4.9-44) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “operate-condition” is required it can be programmed by the user and
used to replace the signal generated by the original operate-condition logic. The
alternative “operate-condition” can be connected to the above logic using
connection point #3 “User configurable condition” That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_28”.
§Note:The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set for scheme switch
[TPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting
[TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the P1-control in the other TPOS
logics, see Table 4.9-15 for PLC#1, Table 4.9-16 for PLC#2 and Table 4.9-20 for the
outputs.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when the state-change is not detected until
after reaching the time set by the setting [TPOS01-RST].
§§Note: The signal “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” is issued when Fixlogic is set for the scheme
switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. The “Operate completed” signal can also be issued
from the logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26.
The user-programmed logic is connected internally to the “operate completed”,
hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-33, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “Local-P1-Control”
signal is true.
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end
Failed Do nothing
“TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS”
Command Local-P2-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operate Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK† condition (“P2”) passed
S
TPOS1-P2 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(513001 8004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-35, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “Local-P2-Control”
signal is true.
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end
Failed Do nothing
“TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS”
Command Local-P3-Control” (513001 8004011E7F) (513001 8304011E82)
[TPOS01-CPW]
513001_7004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Operate Cmd.
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
0.1 – 50.0 s
Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
ILK† condition (“P2”) passed
S
TPOS1-P2 &
ILK† bypassing R
ICB_STATE
1≥
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(513001 8004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
logic programmed by the user in place of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26. The
user-programmed logic is connected internally to the signal “operate completed”,
hence this signal is now generated by the user-programmed logic at connection
point#2 “User configurable condition”. That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-37, can issue an “Operate” signal at the output point
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “Local-P3-Control”
signal is true.
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end
Failed Do nothing
apply the signal at other connection point (PLC#4; i.e., DEV01_P1_COMMAND). We should
assume the PLC#3 and PLC#4 as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.9-2. Note that the user should
set PLC for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP1EXOT].
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operate Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
Figure 4.9-39 Operate P1- control using the PLC function in TPOS01††
†Note:The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for “P1” control.
‡Note:An “operate condition” signal is generated in the operate-condition logic (Figure
4.9-44) when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch [TPOS01-LGCTRCON]. If an
alternative “operate-condition” programmed by the user is required in place of the
signal generated by the original operate-condition logic, connect the alternative
“operate-condition” to the logic shown in Figure 4.9-39 using connection point #1
“User configurable condition” That is, set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGCTRCON] to PLC and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_27”.
§Note:The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control.
*Note:The user can set the type of output signal. When Var is set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-PLSM], the output period of the signal is defined by the setting applied to
[TPOS01-CPW]. When Fix is set, the signal ceases when the 43S or an ES is
changed.
††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the P1-control in the other TPOS
logics, see Table 4.9-15 for PLC#1, Table 4.9-16 for PLC#2 and Table 4.9-20 for the
outputs.
‡‡Note: The “Operate failed” signal is issued when a state-change remains undetected
failing expiration of the setting applied to timer [TPOS01-RST]
§§Note: The “TPOS01-PIEX-BO” signal is issued when Fixlogic is set the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT]. If the signal to be issued from the logic programmed by the
user instead of the logic shown in Figure 4.9-26, connect the “operate completed”
signal generated in the user-programmed logic to connection point#2 “User
configurable condition”. That is, set PLC to the scheme switch
[TPOS01-LGP1EXOT] and use “TPOS01IN_TMP_38”.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-39, can issue a “Operate P1-control” signal at output
point “TPOS01_P1EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the signal
“PLC-P1-Control” is true.
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end
Failed Do nothing
signal at connection point (PLC#4:i.e., DEV01_P2_COMMAND). PLC#3 and PLC#4 here are
to be treated as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.9-3. Note that the user should set PLC for
scheme switch [TPOS01-LGP2EXOT].
[TPOS01-LGP2EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-41, can issue a signal “Operate P2-control” at output
point “TPOS01_P2EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the “PLC-P2-Control”
signal is true.
P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end
Failed Do nothing
and PLC#4 as PLC#1 and PLC#2 in Table 4.9-4. Note that the user should set PLC for scheme
switch [TPOS01-LGP3EXOT].
“TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CSF” “TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CS”
Command “PLC-P3-Control”requiring ILK check (PLC#3
connection point) (5513001 8004011E80) (513001 8404011E83)
[TPOS01-CPW]
Operate Cmd.
513001 800401EE37 DEV01_P3_INTERLOCK
with ILK† condition & 1≥ 1≥
& & 1≥
Command “PLC-P3-Control ”not requiring ILK check 0.1 – 50.0 s
(PLC#4 connection point)
513001 800401EE36 DEV01_P3_COMMAND Operation Cmd.
without ILK† condition
[TPOS01-LGP3EXOT]
& Assign to BOs
Fixedlogic
ASEQ function§” is in progress
ASEQ_MULTI_SEL
[TPOS01-PLSM]*
Var
Fix To “Wait for a command”
“TPOS01_EX_CMP”
(5130018004011E93)
Detection of state-change in a device &
User configurable condition Operation Completed
1≥
(PLC#2 connection point)
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function, in Figure 4.9-43, can issue a signal “Operate P3-control” at output
point “TPOS01_P3EX_BO”, when the TPOS01 function determines that the signal
“PLC-P3-Control” is true.
TPOS01_ST_P2
“EDS” never permit to control
P3-control command received from “P1 to P3” and “P3 to P1”.
(513001 8504011D04) &
TPOS01_ST_P3
&
[TPOS01-DEVTYPE]*9
&
EDS
[TPOS01-CTREN]
On
4.9-6.
*5Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” is determined when “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to “IED test status”.
*6Note: The Function “Event suppression” can detect chattering in BI circuits. (See
4.9.6(i)-3)
*7Note: A supervision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI
circuits.
*8Note: The “Common control” (CMNCTRL) function can test or check the operation –
direction of logic. When the user sets off for scheme switch [SCDEN], operation of
the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation-direction compared
with the previous operation-direction. Alternatively, if On is set for the scheme
switch, the logic is not blocked.
*9Note: The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-DEVTYPE] EDS when the
earth-switch(ES) is applied for the TPOS01 function.
*10Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition” The
user must connect the “Control hierarchy” condition to the select condition logic
using the connection point TPOS01IN_TMP_21” for more information, see chapter
Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy” see PLC#3 of Table 4.9-8.
*11Note: To identify the input points of the other TPOS, see Table 4.9-8 for PLC#1 to #3.
Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for P1, P2 and P3- control.
Table 4.9-15 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#1 user a configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
513001 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#1) O
513001 800402EE56 TPOS02IN_TMP_27 TPOS02 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#1) O
513001 800403EE56 TPOS03IN_TMP_27 TPOS03 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#1) O
… … …
513001 800418EE56 TPOS24IN_TMP_27 TPOS24 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#1) O
Table 4.9-16 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#2 user configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
513001 820401EE5E TPOS01IN_TMP_38 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#2) O
513001 820402EE5E TPOS02IN_TMP_38 TPOS02 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#2) O
Table 4.9-17 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#3 user configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
513001 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#3) O
513001 810402EE57 TPOS02IN_TMP_28 TPOS02 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#3) O
513001 810403EE57 TPOS03IN_TMP_28 TPOS03 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#3) O
…. …. …
513001 810418EE57 TPOS24IN_TMP_28 TPOS24 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#3) O
Table 4.9-18 PLC connection points (Input signal PLC#4 user configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
513001 840401EE58 TPOS01IN_TMP_29 TPOS01 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#4) O
513001 840402EE58 TPOS02IN_TMP_29 TPOS02 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#4) O
513001 840403EE58 TPOS03IN_TMP_29 TPOS03 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#4) O
… … …
513001 840418EE58 TPOS24IN_TMP_29 TPOS24 operate condition configured by the user (for PLC#4) O
Table 4.9-19 PLC connection points (Input point additional, user configurable condition)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
513001 800401EE65 TPOS01IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS01 (for PLC#1) O
513001 800402EE65 TPOS02IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS02 (for PLC#1) O
513001 800403EE65 TPOS03IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS03 (for PLC#1) O
… … …
513001 800418EE65 TPOS24IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS24 (for PLC#1) O
513001 810401EE66 TPOS01IN_TMP_34 Condition added by the user in TPOS01 (for PLC#2) O
513001 810402EE66 TPOS02IN_TMP_34 Condition added by the user in TPOS02 (for PLC#2) O
513001 810403EE66 TPOS03IN_TMP_34 Condition added by the user in TPOS03 (for PLC#2) O
… … …
513001 810418EE66 TPOS24IN_TMP_34 Condition added by the user in TPOS24 (for PLC#2) O
Closed
Open
The user can change the value of the operation-counter from either the front panel or
remotely. For example, in the sub-menu for “Operation counter”, the user can set a
user-preferred value for the operation-counter. See Chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu on how to operate the sub-menu.
“TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”
(513001 8A04011F8B)
Command “change value for counter”
513001_7004016D09 DEV01_ALLCNT_REQ Operate Command
&
Operate condition‡
Figure 4.9-47 Change counter value in net counter† by the remote-end in TPOS01
‡Note:The “operate condition” signal is provided from the operate condition logic shown
in Figure 4.9-49.
†Note: The user can apply the other counter change commands for P1-control, P2-control
and P3-control as shown in Table 4.9-24. The resultant signals for the other
TPOS02-24 logics are shown in Table 4.9-23.
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
Figure 4.9-48 Changing value by the operation of the front panel in TPOS01
Output signal to BO
The TPOS01 function can issue a “Result” signal at output point “TPOS01_SLD_CSCN”.
Figure 4.9-49 Operate condition logic for changing the counter in TPOS01
*1Note: “Command Blocking” disables all operation except for its own; the
“Command blocking” function is initiated by the status of “CBK” in a software
switch controller (SOFTSW). The IEC 61850 standard defines the “Command
Blocking” function as “CmdBlk”. For more information on “CBK”, see Chapter
Control and monitoring application: Software switch control function. See the
signal “CBK_STATE” of Table 4.9-6.
*2Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used
to protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS.
*3Note: If the event “device-travelling is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any
device for the duration that the event is detected. The detecting signal is denoted
as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.9-6.
*4Note: If the issue of a trip command is executed by the IED, any control operation is
blocked until the trip operation is completed. If an IED operates a relay application,
the trip command is issued at the output-point “GEN.TRIP” in Table 4.9-6.
4.9-50 to Figure 4.9-53. The user should set scheme switch [TPOS01-OPETMEN] On.
Signal “TPOS01_P2EX_BO”
Intermediate
P3
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P2”
P2-control
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P3”
OT1 OT2
a. Switch motion (P1 to P2) b. Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion (P1 to P2)
Intermediate
Figure 4.9-50 Two Intervals (OT1 and OT2) for P2 control
Signal “TPOS01_P1EX_BO”
Intermediate
P3
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P2”
P1-control
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P3”
OT3 OT4
a. Switch motion (P2 to P1) b. Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion (P2 to P1)
Intermediate
Figure 4.9-51 Two Intervals (OT3 and OT4) for P1 control
Signal “TPOS01_P2EX_BO”
Intermediate
P3
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P2”
P2-control
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P3”
OT5 OT6
a. Switch motion (P3 to P2) b. Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion (P3 to P2)
Signal “TPOS01_P3EX_BO”
Intermediate
P3
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P2”
P3-control
Signal “TPOS01_PT_P3”
OT5 OT6
a. Switch motion (P2 to P3) b. Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion (P2 to P3)
The user can clear the operation-intervals (OT1 to OT8) by key-operation of the
“Operation time” sub-menu or operation from the remote-end. Figure 4.9-54 shows that the
user can clear the eight operation times using this screen. See chapter User interface:
Monitoring sub-menu for the operation.
Note that the TPOS01 function commences operation when the scheme switch [TPOS01-EN]
is set to On.
“TPOS01_STATE”
Event suppression detector (513001_3104011001)
BI1, BI2, and BI3 signals desig
nated by settings
[TPOS01-P1NOPSG], & 1≥
[TPOS01-P2NOPSG],
and [TPOS01-P3NOPSG] S
Status before chattering
R “TPOS01_ QLT_SPP”
(513001_8204011F59)
On
& To select and operate
condition logics
Figure 4.9-55 BI1, BI2 and BI3 signals provided into TPOS01
†Note:The user should set the actual input- points, see Chapter Technical description:
Binary IO module.
‡Note:In Figure 4.9-55 two signals can be issued: “TPOS01_STATE” and
“TPOS01_QLT_SPP”. The former one is used in the select condition logic and the
operate condition (see Figure 4.9-20 and Figure 4.9-44). The latter is used for an
event suppression detector.
If “On–On–Off” signals are applied to the BI1–BI3 circuits, the decision cannot be made
because the earth switch is still kinetic and is not standstill; thus, the decision is given as
“Intermediate”, the value “3” is given at the connection point ”TPOS01_STATE”.
If “On–On–On” signals are applied to the BI1–BI3 circuits, the decision cannot be made
because the earth-switch may be broken; hence, the value “7” is given.
Table 4.9-30 Decision made by the TPOS01 function
Input signals at IO#1 (200B01) Generated value
Decision by
BI1 BI2 BI3 “TPOS01_STATE”
TPOS01
(8001001110) (8101011110) (8201021110) (513001 3104011001)
Off (0) Off (0) Off (0) Intermediate 0
On (1) Off (0) Off (0) P1 1
Off (0) On (1) Off (0) P2 2
On (1) On (1) Off (0) Intermediate 3
Off (0) Off (0) On (1) P3 4
On (1) Off (0) On (1) Intermediate 5
Off (0) On (1) On (1) Intermediate 6
On (1) On (1) On (1) Faulty 7
Note: When handling the raw information other than the decision, the user can take
respective states of binary input circuits using other monitoring points. That is, the
user can take either state On (1) or state Off (0) corresponding to the BI1 circuit
using the monitoring point “TOPS01_PT_P1”. Likewise, the BI2 and BI3 states can
be taken using the monitoring points “TOPS01_PT_P2” and “TOPS01_PT_P3”.
(See Table 4.9-35)
[TPOS-NELD]
Signal 2 4 6 8
from device On On On On On On On
1 3 5 7
Suppressed
On On On On
signal
[TPOS-TELD] [TPOS-TELR]
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 4.9-56 shows that the iterative signals received from the device have been
suppressed by the event suppression function. The suppression commences on receipt of the
seventh signal (at Time B). This is because the function can count the iterative number of
incoming signals. Detection commences at Time A, the setting [TPOS-NELD] is provided so
that the suppression commences at Time B. The setting [TPOS-TELD] is pertains to the
operation of the detection function from Time A (e.g., Time A to Time C).
The event suppression ceases when the iterative signal stops. The user can adjust the
point at which event suppression stops using the setting [TPOS-TELR]; as a result, no
suppressed signal is output after the end of the iterative signals (e.g., Time D to E).
To initiate event suppression the user should set On for scheme switch
[TPOS01-SPPEN].
Terminal and
Selection logic in TPOS01 BO1 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
Selection logic for select “BO1” Select
Signal captured by command
command P1 in TPOS01 setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
P1
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
To contact health & ≥1
check [Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On &
(200B01_8002001113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
Selection logic for select check
command P2 in TPOS01 [Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Terminal and
Selection logic for select BO2 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”
command P3 in TPOS01
(513001 8A04011DC6)
“BO2” Select
Signal captured by command
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8102011112)
P2
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO2
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO2-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO2_CPL] On &
(200B01_8102011113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Terminal and
BO3 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC8)
“BO3” Select
Signal captured by command
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8202021112)
P3
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO3
& ≥1
To contact health
[Input signal 3]
check “BO3-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO3_CPL] On &
(200B01_8102021113)
Off
Connected by [Input signal 5]
“Programming”
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
Terminal and
Operate logic in TPOS01 BO4–BO6 circuit at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”
(513001_8104011DD0)
“BO4”
Signal designated by Operate
Operate logic for setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8302031112)
command
P1-control P1
[Input signal 2] DRIVER BO4
in TPOS01 & ≥1
[Input signal 3]
“BO4-RB”
[Input signal 4] [BO4_CPL] On &
Connected by (200B01_8302031113)
Off
“Programming” [Input signal 5]
To contact health To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
†Note:Table 4.9-21 shows settings for the health check feature in the other TPOS
functions.
the command, the user can connect point “BO1-RB “ with the contact health check function
using the setting [TPOS01-P1SLBORD]. Do not key the point “TPOS01_P1SL_BO”. Likewise,
BO2-RB and BO3-RB are required to be set.
Contact health check
Selection logic in TPOS01 logic in TPOS01
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO” (513001 8A04011DC4)
Figure 4.9-59 Example contact health check feature for P1–P3 select commands
Figure 4.9-60 Contact health check logic for P1–P3 operate commands
Proper setting for the contact health check (normal setting, example #1)
Figure 4.9-61 shows a setting example for 43S/EDS driving. Select and operate commands
drive the BO1–BO6 contacts. To check that the contact health check function is working
correctly, the respective points of the BO (RBs) should be connected, as shown in Table 4.9-31,
to demonstrate that the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts.
P1-select BO1
command “BO1-RB”
(200B01 8002001113)
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”
(513001 8104011DD0)
P1-operate BO4
command “BO4-RB”
(200B01 8302031113)
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select BO2
command “BO2-RB”
(200B01 8102011113)
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
command “BO5-RB”
(200B01 8402041113)
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select BO3
command “BO3-RB”
(200B01 8202021113)
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” EDS
(513001 8204031DD3) Plus (+)
P3-operate BO6
command “BO6-RB” P1-Selection P2-Selection P3-Selection
(200B01 8502051113)
Minus (−)
Figure 4.9-61 Contact health check setting and EDS scheme for example #1
Setting for erroneous in contact health check (improper setting, example #2)
Figure 4.9-62 shows a setting example for an improper setting of the 43S/EDS scheme. The
settings are implemented incorrectly as shown in Table 4.9-32, BO1-RB is not chosen, instead
BO1 is actually chosen, which is incorrect. In this case, the setting [TPOS01-SLBORD] is
meaningless; hence, the issue of a select command is blocked.
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG” is connected to “BO1” on SLOT1 200B01 8002001112 (BO1) set for [TPOS01-P1SLBORD] NG
P1-select BO1
command
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”
(513001 8104011DD0)
P1-operate BO4
command “BO4-RB”
(200B01 8302031113)
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select BO2
command “BO2-RB”
(200B01 8102011113)
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
command “BO5-RB”
(200B01 8402041113)
“TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select BO3
command “BO3-RB”
(200B01 8202021113)
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO” EDS
(513001 8204031DD3) Plus (+)
P3-operate BO6
command “BO6-RB” P1-Selection P2-Selection P3-Selection
(200B01 8502051113)
Minus (−)
Figure 4.9-62 Contact health check setting and EDS diagram for example #2
Setting for extra contact health check (special setting, example #3)
Figure 4.9-63 shows an additional setting example for the EDS scheme; one of the settings is
made hypothetically. That is, the point “SPO01_P1*SL_BO_FLG” is actually chosen for the
setting [TPOS01-P1*SLBORD]; i.e. BO1-RB is not chosen for this selection. This special
example can issue a select command; which is called “operated by internal select function”.
The user does not need to consider the use of a BO circuit for a select command, when there
are no BO circuits available.
Table 4.9-33 Extra setting example for contact health check
Example #3 Setting for example #3
Remote/Local end
“TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG”
(513001 8A04011DC4)
P1-select
command
“TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG” BOs are not connected but virtualized.
(513001 8A04011DC6)
P2-select
command “TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG”
EDS
(513001 8A04011DC8)
P3-select
command
Plus (+)
SAS/Local IED
BIO module P1-Operate P2-Operate P3-Operate
“TPOS01_P1EX_BO”
(513001 8104011DD0) Drivers
P1-operate BO4
command “BO4-RB”
(200B01 8302031113) Minus (−)
“TPOS01_P2EX_BO”
(513001 8204011DD3)
P2-operate BO5
command “BO5-RB”
(200B01 8402041113)
“TPOS01_P3EX_BO”
(513001 8204031DD3
P3-operate BO6
command “BO6-RB”
(200B01 8502051113)
Figure 4.9-63 Contact health check setting and EDS diagram for example #3
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
Table 4.9-39 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO2701
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
5130017 004016D08 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO2701$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Check “Input”
4.9.8 Setting
Common settings list for the TPOS(FunctionID:513001)
Default setting
Uni
Setting item Range Contents Notes
ts
value
TPOS-NELD 0 - 99 - Number of Event lock detect time 10
common TPOS-TELD 1 - 99 s Timer for detection of event lock 10
TPOS-TELR 1 - 99 s Timer forrecovery from event lock 10
Units
Setting item Range Contents Notes
value
Note: The TPOS function is available for a 2nd Device and other devices. We have omitted
the others because this will be the same as the 1st device with the exception of the
device number.
4.9.9 Signal
Signal monitoring points in TPOS01
TPOS(FunctionID:513001)
Element ID Name Description
8001011DE0 DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL
8001011D51 TPOS01_SC_OWS TPOS01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D52 TPOS01_SC_RCC TPOS01 select command by RCC
8001011D53 TPOS01_SC_RMT TPOS01 select command by Remote
8001011D54 TPOS01_SC_LCD TPOS01 select command by LCD
8001011D55 TPOS01_EC_OWS TPOS01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8001011D56 TPOS01_EC_RCC TPOS01 execute command by RCC
8001011D57 TPOS01_EC_RMT TPOS01 execute command by Remote
8001011D58 TPOS01_EC_LCD TPOS01 execute command by LCD
8001011D59 TPOS01_EC_PLC TPOS01 execute command by PLC
8701011E98 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_EIS TPOS01 select fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8B01011EA2 TPOS01_CTR_SGU TPOS01 control logic stage(under selection)
8301011E9D TPOS01_CTR_SGN TPOS01 control logic stage(unselected)
8101011E9A TPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS TPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock/synchronism check
8001011F55 TPOS01_EC_ST_ERR TPOS01 execute command mode err
8001011E93 TPOS01_EX_CMP TPOS01 execute complete signal
8901011F6C TPOS01_EX_CS01 TPOS01 execute condition signal 01
8A01011F6D TPOS01_EX_CS02 TPOS01 execute condition signal 02
8B01011F6E TPOS01_EX_CS03 TPOS01 execute condition signal 03
8E01011F67 TPOS01_EX_CS04 TPOS01 execute condition signal 04
8B01011F68 TPOS01_EX_CS05 TPOS01 execute condition signal 05
8601011E91 TPOS01_EX_FFL TPOS01 execute fail signal by fixedlogic
8501011E8F TPOS01_EX_SFL TPOS01 execute success signal by fixedlogic
8001011F56 TPOS01_NSL_CS06 TPOS01 no direction select condition signal 06
8601011F5E TPOS01_NSL_CS07 TPOS01 no direction select condition signal 07
8201011F5F TPOS01_NSL_CS10 TPOS01 no direction select condition signal 10
8101011E7B TPOS01_SLF_CS TPOS01 no direction select fail condition signal
8101011DD0 TPOS01_FEX_BO TPOS01 off direction execute binary output signal
8001011E81 TPOS01_FEC_OK_CS TPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal
8001011E7E TPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF TPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8201011E88 TPOS01_FEC_F_CS TPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal
8101011E85 TPOS01_FEC_F_CSF TPOS01 off direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8A01011DC4 TPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF TPOS01 off direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8501011F60 TPOS01_FSL_CS19 TPOS01 off direction select condition signal 19
8A01011F61 TPOS01_FSL_CS20 TPOS01 off direction select condition signal 20
8101011F64 TPOS01_FSL_CS21 TPOS01 off direction select condition signal 21
8201011DD3 TPOS01_OEX_BO TPOS01 on direction execute binary output signal
8101011E82 TPOS01_OEC_OK_CS TPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal
8001011E7F TPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF TPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic
8301011E89 TPOS01_OEC_F_CS TPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal
8101011E86 TPOS01_OEC_F_CSF TPOS01 on direction execute command fail condition signal by fixedlogic
8601011DC6 TPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF TPOS01 on direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8501011F65 TPOS01_OSL_CS40 TPOS01 on direction select condition signal 40
8801011F5D TPOS01_OSL_CS41 TPOS01 on direction select condition signal 41
8501011F5B TPOS01_OSL_CS42 TPOS01 on direction select condition signal 42
8601011F5C TPOS01_OSL_CS43 TPOS01 on direction select condition signal 43
8401011F77 TPOS01_OFEX_BO TPOS01 on/off direction execute binary output signal
8901011DC0 TPOS01_NSL_BO_CSF TPOS01 select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic
8501011F76 TPOS01_SL_BO_FLG TPOS01 select binary output signal by fixedlogic
8001011F54 TPOS01_SC_ST_ERR TPOS01 select command mode err
8601011F62 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 TPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the TPOS function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “TPOS01_SC_OWS” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “TPOS02_SC_OWS” in place of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“TPOS01_SC_OWS” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for TPOS01_SC_OWS (i.e.,
“8001011D51”)
Step 2 identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “8001021D51” of
“TPOS02_SC_OWS”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal
notation. Thus, the user must change the device number
from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.
Respective
BIO module output signals
Output from BI1 to BIn†
(Slot #n‡) GENBI for slot #n‡
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware
and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To
determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the
IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “G&T position” whilst referring to
the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.10-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
The user needs to apply a signal as a setting so that signal acquisition will be carried out.
Figure 4.10-1 outlines the settings when BI1 circuits at IO#1 are considered. For example,
when a signal is received at BI1, the GENBI function can acquire the signal when the user
has set 200B001 8001001110† for the setting [SLOT1 GB01-SG]. After acquisition, the GENBI
function generates “SLOT1 GBI01_STATE (580001 0010001001)” signal in Boolean form; it
consists of “time stamp information” and “quality information”.
IED
Binary IO module (BIO) Function
IO_SLOT#1 0010001001
SLOT1 GBI01_STATE
[SLOT1 GBI01-SG]
800100111 8001001110† 8001001172
0010011001
BI1 [SLOT1 GBI02-SG SLOT1 GBI02_STATE
BI1-NC Filter BI1 CPL BI1-CPL
Fun
when the GENBI function determines that the signal is being generated repetitively.
Signal
from
On On On On On On On On
device
Event No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
[GBI-TELD] [GBI-TELR]
Event suppression
Time................. A B C D E
Figure 4.10-3 illustrates the case where a device produces repetitive signals. From this
figure, it can be seen that the start of event suppression occurs at the tenth state-change
(point B) because the GENBI function counts the number of state-changes. The GENBI
function detects the commencement of the signal repeated from the signal initiation point ‘A’.
Scheme switch [GBI-NELD] is provided to set the number of state-changes so that this
function will start to suppress the signal from this point. The user can set [GBI-TELD]
pertaining to the detection period of the repetitive signals (point A to point C). For example,
the user can set the value “10” for the scheme switch [GBI-NELD]; period A–C is set for the
setting [GBI-TELD].
The GENBI function should remove event suppressed operation when the repetitive
signals disappear, (that is, the operation of the device is steady); event suppression operation
is cleared when no repetitive signal is found for a set period. The user can set the period using
scheme switch [GBI-TELR]; this reset operation clears the event suppression function at point
E when the last state change is confirmed at point D. Here, the period D–E is set for the
Scheme switch [GBI-TELR].
The event suppression function is provided for every device; the user should set On for
the scheme switch [SLOT1 GBI01-SPPEN], for example.
Table 4.10-2 shows the event list screen. This event list is in response to the signals
shown in Figure 4.10-3. Table 4.10-3 lists the common settings for event suppression. Table
4.10-4 shows the settings for a particular slot.
Table 4.10-5 shows the mapping signals that are required within the GENBI function for
IEC 61850 communications. Figure 4.10-5 shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
Figure 4.10-5 Quality signal being mapped into Ind1 object of GGIO101
4.10.3 Setting
Settings list for GENBI (Function ID: 580001)
Default setting Note
Units
Setting device Range Contents
value s
Units
Setting device Range Contents
value s
Units
Setting device Range Contents
value s
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware
and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain features. To
determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED, identify the
IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” referring to the
comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 4.11-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features NA ✓
– Number of features NA 15
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
IED
ASEQ01_
OUT2 Binary Output
EXEC_STOP circuit4
IED front panel
operation Xxxxxx 8xxxxxxxxx IN2
“Reply Signal” Driver
Open
EMERSTOP_
EXEC_STOP
“Emergency stop”
Table 4.11-4 PLC connection points (Inputs for stopping ASEQ operation)
Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
The scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRMENU] is used for a local operation (e.g., the front
panel operation on the IED). When On is set for the scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRMENU], the
PLC sequence #1 can be instructed locally. The scheme switch [ASEQ01-CTRAHMI] is used to
select either a select-before-operation command (SBO) or a direct command (DIR) when the
t 0 4ASEQ01 in execution
1Start command for ASEQ01 S Q
1s R 5s
S Q t 0 &
Closing Command for Device #2
End of execution of ASEQ01 1s R
≧1 2s 1
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_1
≥1
Temporary signal 001
5Reset of ASEQ01 execution
Temporary signal 002
& t 0
S Q &
Closing Command for Device #3
Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 1s R 2s
1
In selecting device #1 &
In selecting device #2 1
In selecting device #3
In selecting device #2 1
In selecting device #3
1DEV1PLCCTRLFAIL ≥1
6Control failure
1DEV2PLCCTRLFAIL
UTOSEQ01)
1DEV3PLCCTRLFAIL
When a stop command is generated during the selection of Device #3, the control logic
will clear the operation if the control logic can determine that the operation of Device #3 is
complete. Figure 4.11-3 shows that Device #3 unable to operate following reception of the stop
command.
ON
*3The operating state turns to OFF, when the operation of Device#3 finishes
following the reception of a stop command from the ASEQ01 function.
*2The ASEQ01 function generates an operate signal for stopping the control logic.
*1The ASEQ01 function generates a select signal for stopping the control logic.
Figure 4.11-3 Timing chart for an automatic sequence when a stop command is injected during
the operation of Device#3
Figure 4.11-4 depicts the operating sequence when an emergency command is input; the
control logic will cancel the operation in accordance with the execution state given from a
device. If the operation signal is not controlling the device, the control logic will clear the
operation promptly. If the operation signal is controlling the device, the control logic will clear
the operation when the control logic function can determine that the operation of the device is
complete, in this case Device#1.
ON
OFF
Operating state
*4The operation state turns to OFF, when the control logic cancels the
selection of Device#1 following the reception of a stop command from
the ASEQ01 function.
Selection signal for Device #2
Figure 4.11-4 Time chart of automatic sequence when emergency stop command is applied
during the operation of Device#1
Table 4.11-10 PLC monitoring points (Outputs for ASEQ emergency status)
Signal Number Signal Name Description
523001 000D0D1001 EMERSTOP_ACC_EXEC Reception of an emergency signal
523001 800D0D1D58 EMERSTOP_EC_LCD Emergency signal generated on the LCD scream
523001 800D0D1D55 EMERSTOP_EC_OWS Emergency signal generated from OWS(HMI)
523001 800D0D1D56 EMERSTOP_EC_RCC Emergency signal generated from RCC
SBO defined in LN
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down
Oper
Origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns”)
Table 4.11-11 shows the signals in the ASEQ01 function that require mapping to the IEC
61850 communications. Figure 4.11-8 shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
Table 4.11-12 Mapping signals required for SPCSO1 object in ASEQ01 function
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw Check Check CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
523001 700D016D08 ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper Check Check CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GAPC1$SPCSO1 sboClass sboClass CF
Check “Input”
4.11.7 Setting
Settings of ASEQ(Function ID: 523001)
Default
Setting item Range Units Contents setting Notes
value
Dev1 ASEQ01-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ01 Enable Off
ASEQ01-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ01-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev2 ASEQ02-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ02 Enable Off
ASEQ02-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ02-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
Dev3 ASEQ03-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ03 Enable Off
ASEQ03-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ03-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev4 ASEQ04-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ04 Enable Off
ASEQ04-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ04-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev5 ASEQ05-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ05 Enable Off
ASEQ05-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ05-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev6 ASEQ06-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ06 Enable Off
ASEQ06-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ06-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action(Direct or SBO)by HMI SBO
Dev7 ASEQ07-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ07 Enable Off
ASEQ07-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ07-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev8 ASEQ08-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ08 Enable Off
ASEQ08-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ08-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev9 ASEQ09-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ09 Enable Off
ASEQ09-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ09-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev10 ASEQ10-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ10 Enable Off
ASEQ10-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ10-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev11 ASEQ11-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ11 Enable Off
ASEQ11-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ11-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev12 ASEQ12-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ12 Enable Off
ASEQ12-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ12-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev13 ASEQ13-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ13 Enable Off
ASEQ13-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ13-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev14 ASEQ14-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ14 Enable Off
ASEQ14-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ14-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Dev15 ASEQ15-EN Off/On - CTRLSEQ15 Enable Off
ASEQ15-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
ASEQ15-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
Emar EMERSTOP-EN Off/On - CTRL EMERSTOP Enable Off
gency EMERSTOP-CTRMENU Off/On - control by MENU enable Off
EMERSTOP-CTRAHMI DIR/SBO - control action (Direct or SBO) by HMI SBO
4.11.8 Signal
Signal monitoring points in ASEQ01
ASEQ(Function ID: 523001)
Element ID Name Description
000D001F40 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Status flag to not be selected for multiple operations
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the ASEQ function. We have
omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “ASEQ01_EC_LCD” point for the
2nd device, use the description of “ASEQ02_EC_LCD” in place of
“ASEQ01_EC_LCD”. The user can obtain the ID value of
“ASEQ02_EC_LCD” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for ASEQ01_EC_LCD (i.e.,
“800D011D58”)
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “800D021D58” of
“ASEQ02_EC_LCD”) The ID is expressed in hexadecimal
notation. Thus, the user must change the device number
from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation.
5 Technical Description
Contents Pages Pages
Case structure and slot layout 861 CPU 877
-1/1 Case for 19 inch rack 861 -Configuration switch 878
-1/2 Case for 19 inch rack 865 Date and time 936
-3/4 Case for 19 inch rack 863 -Time synchronization 937
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO) 886 -DST(Summer time) 942
-Input circuits 888 -Time zone 941
-Input features 887 Function keys with LEDs 923
-Output circuits 899 Group setting for relays 945
-Output features 897 LED indicators 923
-BI1A module 906 Monitoring jacks 933
-BI2A module 907 Operation keys 935
-BI3A module 906 Power supply module (PWS) 919
-BO1A module 908 Transformer module for AC (VCT) 867
-BO2A module 908 -1CB setting 875
-BIO1A module 909 -1.5CB setting 875
-BIO2A module 909 -Changing rated current 871
-BIO3A module 910 -CT polarity setting 875
-BIO4A module 910 -VCT12B terminals 868
Communication modules 879 -Ratio 870
-100Base-TX/1000Base-T 879 -Residual voltage setting 874
-100Base-FX 879 -Reference voltage setting 874
-1000Base-LX 879
-RS485 879
-Fiber optic 879
-IRIG-B000 879
The IED hardware consists of a case, modules, and a human machine interface (HMI). For
instance, Figure 5-1shows the structure of the GR-series IED which is mounted in 3/4×19”
rack. The user can find that the IED consists of a transformer module (VCT), a signal
processing and communication module (CPU), binary input and output modules (BI, BI, and
BIO, and a power supply module (PWS), which can be mounted in an order from left to right.
The IED case, which is designed for rack mount as shown in Figure 5-1, has two flanges
attached on the IED sides. Figure 5-2 shows hardware block diagram. The module structure
depends on the GR-series models, IED cases, and the customer specification. Therefore, the
user should check and confirm the actual modules with the ordering number in advance.
(The description of IED case helps to understand the IED structure and its functions.
Based on slot reference, terminal block, slot reference, GR-Series selects different cases. VCT,
CPU, BI, BO and BIO modules, PWS and HMI are described sequentially in this chapter. The
user is required to understand information provided in this chapter when wiring between the
IED and external devices and setting of the IED are performed. Hence, the user is required to
read this chapter thoroughly.)
Figure 5-1 Modules in 3/4 19” rack’s chassis (Front view, removed the front panel)
VCT CPU
V VT×m
BO
Auxiliary
relay Binary output
×18
HMI
BI
LCD/MIMIC
Photo coupler Binary input
×18
LEDs
Function Key
Power PWS
For PWS, note that the terminal blocks are placed on the left hand side. The user can
also find alpha-numeric reference “T9” for PWS. The PWS circuits and relevant terminals are
discussed later. (For details, see section 5.5 or later)
The communication modules, which are between the VCT slot and BIO slot, are labeled
“C11” to “C15”. These communication modules are used for LAN, IEC61850 communication,
and external devices.
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1 FG2
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic diagram
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 C13
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic figure
21 21 21
22 22 22
23 23 23
24 24 24
25 25 25 C14
26 26 26
27 27 27
28 28 28
29 29 29
30 30 30
31 31 31
32 32 32
33 33 33
34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35
36 36 36
37 37 37
38 38 38
E
39 39 39
40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 5.2-1 exemplified the ratio setting for respective channels on the VCT. For more
information about the IED operation, see chapter User interface.
5.2.1 VCT12B
VCT12B is for a single circuit breaker arrangement (1CB), as shown in Figure 5.2-2. When
the VCT12B is used in 1.5CB arrangement, the user should have the Paralleling connected
CTs (i.e., summation) at VCT12B.
VCT12B
Three-phase voltages
Va Va
Vb Vb Terminal AC analog
Input Type of Jumper
Vc Vc Screw input
Reference voltage on busbar Number signal(3) input position(2) channel(1)
Vs Vs
Reference voltage on busbar or 1 2 Va Voltage NA Ch1
residual voltage Vs2 Vs2(or Ve)
3 4 Vb Voltage NA Ch2
The three-phase currents in the 1CB
arrangement
5 6 Vc Voltage NA Ch3
Ia
Ia 7 8 Vs(4) Voltage NA Ch4
Ib
Ib 9 10 Vs2(4)/Ve(5) Voltage NA Ch5
Ic
Ic
11 12 Ia Current W6 Ch6
13 14 Ib Current W7 Ch7
Ie
Residual current
15 16 Ic Current W8 Ch8
17 18 Ie Current W13 Ch9
19 20 – – – –
21 22 – – – –
23 24 – – – –
25 26 – – – –
27 28 Iem Current W12 Ch14
The other residual current in the
parallel lines
Iem
VC1
VC1
VCT
Alpha-numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Short-wire1
21
22
FG1 23
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
1
Short-wire
FG1
†Note: For more information, see Chapter User interface: AC analog input.
‡Note:The number of AC analog input channels depends on the configuration of the VCT
type and the VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the value of the VCT ratio
corresponding to a specific auxiliary VT/CT.
W1
W2
Connector
W3 Tr.3 Tr.4
Rating jumpers
W4
W5
Tr.5 Tr.6
W6
W7
W8
W9 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12 Tr.9
W13 Tr.10
W14
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
header header
initialized by the GR-TIEMS; thereby, the user need not have [AI1_Ch*_Rating] settings
respectively,
Note: Channel numbers for rated settings are dependent on VCT type.
1A and 5A are shown above, but neglect them. They are invalid here. Confirm that
all have DEP setting from LCD menu or GR-TIEMS screen.
VCT jumper: Close or open the circuits named W* numbers corresponding to the
currents. The hatched areas are required to close or open.
For changing to 5A rated, insert jumpers at W6, 7, 8, 12, 13.
For changing to 1A rated, remove jumper at W6, 7, 8, 12, 13.
AC
Terminal
Input Type of Jumper analog
Screw
signal input position input
Number
channel LCD screen
1 2 Va Voltage NA Ch1 I/O setting sub-menu
3 4 Vb Voltage NA Ch2 AI#1
10:48 1/2
5 6 Vc Voltage NA Ch3 AI1_Ch6_Ratio +
7 8 Vs Voltage NA Ch4 2000
9 10 Vs2/Ve Voltage NA Ch5 AI1_Ch6_Rating +
DEP
11 12 Ia Current W6 Ch6
13 14 Ib Current W7 Ch7
15 16 Ic Current W8 Ch8
17 18 Ie Current W13 Ch9 VCT circuit board
Front Rear
19 20 – – – –
21 22 – – – – W1
Connector
25 26 – – – W4 Tr.3 Tr.4
–
W5
27 28 Iem Current W12 Ch14 W6
W7 Tr.5 Tr.6
W8
W9
Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12
W13
W14
Tr.12 Tr.13
Configuration switch: Change the CPU to the constrained mode (see Section
Signal processing and communication module).
APPL-VCT
10:48 1/2
APPL-Ves2 +
Vs2
Polarity Change >
Busbar
VT on busbar
CB#1 IED
VCT VCHK function
Vb VL2
Vc VL3
Reference voltage
Vs V3
A B C
Feeder Residual voltage
Vs2/Ve Ve (V0)
Setting [APPL-Ves2]=Ve
Busbar
IED
Vb VL2
Vc VL3
Computation
Zero sequence
CB phase voltage (3V0)
Reference voltage
Vs V3
Reference voltage
Vs2/Ve V4
Feeder#1 A B C Feeder#2
Busbar
Busbar
VTs on busbar
CB#1
IED
VCT Relay application
Vb VL2
Vc VL3
Computation
Zero sequence
phase voltage (3V0)
Reference voltage
Vs V3
A B C
Feeder
Vs2/Ve
Setting [APPL-Ves2]=Off
CT CT
Ia Ia
Ib 1CT Ib 1CT
Ic Ic
CB#1
CB
Ie 1CT-Ie Ie 1CT-Ie
Line1
CB#2
Line2
CB
Iem CT-Iem Iem CT-Iem
For example in 1.5CB arrangement, the user should have Paralleling connected CTs (i.e.,
summation). The user can also change the polarity in ‘Ie’, ‘Iem’, as shown in Table 5.2-1.
Table 5.2-1 VCT settings provided with FEP_COMMON
FEP_COMMON (Function ID: 7F0001)
Settings in
Uni Note
Setting item Range Contents VCT12B†
ts
CPU
CPM2
COM#1
CPU COM#2
COM#3
COM#4
COM#5
BIO#2 COM#3
BIO#3
BIO#4
BIO#5
BIO#6 COM#4
BIO#7
BIO#8
COM#5 IRIG-B
CPU
COM#1
W5
2-1
4-3
COM#2
CPM2
W6
2-1
4-3 COM#3
W7 CPU
2-1
4-3
COM#4
W8
2-1 COM#5
4-3
W6 W6
Jumper Configuration mode
(1-2) (3-4)
2-1 Default (normal) mode(i.e.,
Open Open
4-3 manufacture setting mode )
2-1
Closed Open Constrained mode (1A rated)
4-3
2-1
Open Closed Constrained mode (5A rated)
4-3
Symbol
TX
RX
Table 5.3-2 Communication modules for Miscellaneous and External I/O unit
Module RS485 Fiber optic interface IRIG-B
Connector PCB connector ST type PCB connector
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic(GI) Shielded twist pair
Symbol
RX
B2 B2(Disuse)
COM-B
A3 A3
B3 B3
COMM TX GND
C11
C12
C11 C11
C12 C12
Figure 5.3-5 100Base-FX module (left for single port; right for dual ports)
4. RS485 module
RS485 module has a PCB connector. The module should be connected with a
shielded-twisted-pair cable; it is used for communication in the IEC60870-5-103, Modbus, and
DNP. The terminal arrangement and references are shown below. The cable sheath should be
connected with the frame ground (FG) in the IED case. For the use of the a
shielded-twisted-pair cable, the user should note that the total length should be less than
1200 meter (0.75 miles); the terminal resistor (150 ohms) should be connected when any
connector is not connected. For setting the parameters, see Chapter Communication protocol:
RS485 communication.
Sheath
Top
PCB connector A1 A cable for
A1 B1 B1 an IED
COM-A(+)
A2
A2 B2 Sheath
COM-B(−) B2
A cable for
A3 B3 A3
another
Bottom
COMM(GND) B3
IED
0V
C11
C12
6. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used to receive the digital signal generated with an external clock; the
signal is in conformity to serial IRIG-B000 format. Note that the IRIG-B000 module is able to
receive digital signal (TTL) only (i.e., the reception of AM signal is not applicable). This
module is isolated using a photo coupler; the user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not
used. The peak value of IRIG-B000 signal should be greater than 3.5 volts; the IRIG-B000
module has the input register (about 3k ohm). Thus, the terminal register can be required
when the IRIG-B000 signal is delivered for several devices; the value of the terminal register
depends on the number of deliveries and the performance of the external clocks. For setting of
time synchronization, see Chapter Technical Description: Clock function.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-9 exemplifies IED has a LAN module (100BASE-FX) placed at C11 location.
IRIG-B and RS485 are located at C13 and C15. As shown in Table 5.3-3, RS458 module is
allowed to stay at C11, C13, or C15, but 100BASE-FX module must stay at C11 firstly.
Therefore, RS485 module has to stay at C13. Then, IRIG-B000 stays at C15 at least. Note that
C12 has been occupied by 100BASE-FX circuit (see Figure 5.3-5).
C12
RS485
C12 Blank
Blank C13
C13 •A1
485
•B1• COM-A
•A2
•A3•
B2 COM-B
•B3
• • COMM
C14
C14 Blank
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Figure 5.3-10 illustrates the other structure, which has 100BASE-FXs, IRIG-B000, and
RS485 module.
C12
RS485
C12 100BASE
-FX
Blank C13
C13 •A1
485
•B1• COM-A
•A2
•B2• COM-B
•A3
• •
B3
COMM
C14
C14 Blank
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Single or Double
ports in Single or Double
Comm. 1000Base-LX ports in IRIG
RS485 Fiber
Location
C12 firstly). The sign ‘†’ is weighted secondary so that one of them appear below the sign ‘’
(i.e., RS485 or Fiber module is located under the LAN model. Notice that it can be located at
C11 or C12 when no LAN module exists). The ‘‡’ is weighted lightly so that IRIG module can
be located at the most bottom position. (i.e., > † > ‡; the implementing order is ruled by the
importance from the top location). Sign ‘×’ represents that it is not possible to implement a
module when a LAN module○
2 is selected. It is not allowed to mount both RS485 and Fiber
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
Circuit
Terminal screw
number
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A
Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
7 BIO4A Same as BI2A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 5.4.5.
Table 5.4-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
Table 5.4-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A and BIO4A)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
As an example, Figure 5.4-1 shows the binary input circuit of BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has three
settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
BI2-NC BI2
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI2-CPL] Off
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI3-CPL] Off
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
[THRES_Lvl]
High
R
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to
see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the function
ID “200B001” and Element ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when the signal
“BI2-CPL” on BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should designate that
signal using the function ID “200B002” and Element ID “8001001172”. For more
information with regard to the function ID and the Data ID at IO#1, see sections
5.4.6(i), 5.4.7(i), and others.
Provided that the user uses BI2A, then binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting
[BI1-3_PICKUP] and the user should set the value between 18 to 222V DC2 for this setting.
For the setting [BI4-6_PICKUP], the above mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary
input circuits; similarly the setting [BI7-9_PICKUP] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits;
and finally the setting [BI10-12_PICKUP] is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
On the other hand, when BIO4A is used, the binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the
setting [BI1-3_PICKUP]; and the binary input circuits #4 to #6 follow the setting
[BI4-6_PICKUP]. Since BIO4A has six binary input circuits, the other settings
[BI7-9_PICKUP] and [BI10-12_PICKUP] are not required here.
1Note: The threshold value is fixed for all binary IO module types with the exception of
BI2A and BIO4A. The user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type”
influences these values (see the 1st note in Table 5.4-1). These particular values
are found when 220V dc type is used.
2Note: In the variable type, the user can set the threshold arbitrarily between 18 to 222V
in DC, and can regulate its threshold voltage in a voltage step. Table 5.4-5 shows
the corresponding values with regard to guaranteed and typical thresholds in
response to the setting values. Note that the operation in the variable type is
segmented into ‘Operate’, ‘Intermediate’, ‘and ‘Non-operate’ areas, which are
decided by the guaranteed-pick-up, typical-pick-up, and guaranteed-drop-off levels,
as illustrated in Figure 5.4-2.
Input voltage
Operating area
Non-operating area
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
IO#n
IO#5
IO#3
IO#1
IO#4
IO#2
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out)
Figure 5.4-4 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3
The setting table of section 5.4.6(i)-1 is available for all binary IO modules except for
BI2A and BIO4A; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are
relevant to BI1A. That is, for BI1A the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e.,
binary input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. On the other hand, for BIO1A
the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to #7) from
IO_SLOT3 setting table. The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are shown
section 5.4.6(ii)-1. The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later. (See chapter
User interface: I/O setting sub-menu)
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 5.4-1 and Table 5.4-6. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 5.4.5.
Table 5.4-6 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A at 290Vdc
-OP Time: 3ms (typical) N/O contact
connections BIO4A
37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc N/O
0.2A at 125Vdc 38
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/C
Contact
Unit
Setting items Contents Default
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
…..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs are
listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are summarized
in each slot. (See sections 5.4.8(i) and 5.4.8(ii))
Figure 5.4-5 shows the binary output circuits on BO1A in order to help understand the
settings. BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has timers and switches.
The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
[LOGIC-SW] & ≥1
t 0 0 t BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On &
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BO2
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO2
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
810201113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO2 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310201E11D BO2-SOURCE
820202112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BO3
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO3
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8202021113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO3 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310202E11D BO3-SOURCE
8********* Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BOn
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BOn RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
In Figure 5.4-5 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, with regard to the function
ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see section 5.4.9(i). On the other hand, for IO#2
slot see section 5.4.9(ii).
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
Instant type
When the user uses a binary output signal without the following characteristics, the user
should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting
[Reset signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should
determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal
monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
IO#n
IO#3
IO#5
IO#1
IO#4
IO#2
BO1A BIO1A
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out)
Figure 5.4-6 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3
Figure 5.4-6 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary
output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output
circuits, the setting targets are on BO1A and BIO1A at locations IO#2 and IO#3. The user
should key the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT.
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should
understand and select setting points that are relevant to BO1A and BIO1A. That is, for BO1A
the user should choose the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #18)
from IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary
output circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section
5.4.8(ii).
Note that some input and output circuits have polarity, which is designated with either a
plus sign (+) or a minus sign (−) respectively.
T* T*
Screw
BI1A BI3A
T*
(+) 1 (+) 1 (
1
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (+) BI2 (
(+) 3 (+) 3
3
4 BI2 4 BI3
4 (−) (+) BI4
(+) 5 (+) 5 (
5 BI3 BI5
6 (−) 6 (+) 6 (
7 7 BI6
7 (+) (+) BI7 (
8 BI4 8
8 (−) (+) (
9 9 BI8
9 (+) (+)
10 BI5 10 BI9
10 (−) (+)
11 11 BI10
11 (+) (+) (
12 BI6 12 BI11
12 (−) (+) (
13 13 BI12
13 (+) (+) (
14 BI7 14 BI13
14 (−) (+) (
15 15 BI14
15 (+) (+) BI15
16 BI8 16
16 (−) (+)
17 17 BI16
17 (+) (+) (
18 BI9 18 BI17
18 (−) (+) (
BI18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 (+) 21 (+) 21 (+
22 BI10 22 BI19
22 (−) (+) BI20 (−
23 (+) 23 (+) 23
24 BI11 24 BI21
24 (−) (+)
25 25 BI22
25 (+) (+) (+
26 BI12 26 BI23
26 (−) (+) (−
27 27 BI24
27 (+) (+) (+
28 BI13 28 BI25
28 (−) (+) (−
29 29 BI26
29 (+) (+)
30 BI14 30 BI27
30 (−) (+)
31 31 BI28
31 (+) (+) (+
32 BI15 32 BI29
32 (−) (+) (−
33 33 33 BI30
(+) (+) BI31 (+
34 (−) 34 BI16 34
(+) BI32 (−
35 (+) 35 (−) 35
36 (−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
37 (+) 37 (−) 37 (+
38 (−) 38 BI18 38
(−) (−
39
40
T*
The same terminal screw is denoted with
Screw the same number.
BI2A
T*
(+) 1
1 BI1
(−) 2
2
3
4
5 (+) 5
(−) 6 BI2
6
7 (+) 7
(−) 8 BI3
8
9
10
11 (+) 11
(−) 12 BI4
12
13 (+) 13
(−) 14 BI5
14
15
16
17 (+) 17
18 18 BI6
(−)
19
20
21 (+) 21 BI7
22 (−) 22
23
24
25 (+) 25
26 26 BI8
(−)
27 (+) 27
28 28 BI9
(−)
29
30
31 (+) B31
32 B32 BI10
(−)
33 (+) B33
34 B34 BI11
Cable to Flame (−)
35
ground terminal 36
required 37 (+) B37
BI12
38 (−) B38
39
40
FG
BO1A BO2A
T*
1 1 1
(+)
2 BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
(−)
3 3 3
(+)
4 BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
(−)
5 5 5
(+)
6 BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
(−)
7 7 7
(+)
8 BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
(−)
9 9 9
(+)
10 BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11 11
(+)
12 BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13 13
(+)
14 BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15 15
(+)
16 BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17 17
(+)
18 BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
19
20 The same terminal
screw is denoted
with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
22 BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
24 BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
26 BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
28 BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
30 BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 31 (+)
32 BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 33 (+)
34 BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35 35
36 BO17 36
37 37
38 BO18 38
39
40
T* T*
BIO1A BIO2A
T* (+) 1 1
BI1 (+) BI1
1 (−) 2 (−) 2
2 (+) 3 (+) 3
4 BI2 4 BI2
3 (−) (−)
4 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI3
5 (−) (−)
6 (+) 7 7
BI4 (+) BI4
7 (−) 8 (−) 8
8 (+) 9 (+) 9
9 10 BI5 10 BI5
(−) (−)
10 (+) 11 (+) 11
11 12 BI6 12 BI6
(−) (−)
12 (+) 13 13
BI7 (+) BI7
13 (−) 14 (−) 14
14 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) BI8
15 16 16
17 (−)
16 (+) 17
17 BO2(SF) 18 18 BI9
(−)
18
19
20
BIO3A BIO4A
T* 1 1
1 (+) (+)
2 BI1 2 BI1
2 (−) (−)
(+) 3 (+) 3
3 BI2 BI2
(−) 4 (−) 4
4
(+) 5 (+) 5
5 BI3 BI3
(−) 6 (−) 6
6
(+) 7 (+) 7
7 BI4 BI4
(−) 8 (−) 8
8
(+) 9 (+) 9
9 BI5 BI5
(−) 10 (−) 10
10
(+) 11 (+) 11
11 BI6 BI6
12 (−) 12 (−) 12
13 (+) 13
14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
16 BI8
16 (−) 17 (+)
17 BO1(H) 18 (−)
18
19
20 The same terminal screw
is denoted with the same
number.
21 21 21 (+)
BO1(F) 22 BO2(H) 22
22 (−)
23 23 23 (+)
BO2(F) 24 BO3(H) 24
24 (−)
25 25 25 (+)
BO3(F) 26 BO4(H) 26
26 (−)
27 27 27 (+)
BO4(F) 28 BO5(H) 28
28 (−)
29 29 29 (+)
BO5(F) 30 BO6(H) 30
30 (−)
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
34 BO7 34 BO7 34
35
36 35 35
37 37 37
38 BO8 36 BO8 36
39
40 38 38
Note: PHOENIX CONTACT ® is the manufacturer of the terminal block. The model of
this terminal is described as “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can
connect a cable to this terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the
recommended cables are AWG12–AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm.
Use a cable ferrule made in PHOENIX CONTACT ® when required.
…… …… …… …… ……
…… …… …… …… ……
Units
Setting item Range Contents Notes
value
Upper block
is designated
“1 to 20” T*
PWS
*
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
7
8
4
9
10 FAIL15
11 3
12 Terminal screw
1
13 number
14 Terminal
15 screw
16 number
17 8
18
19 10
20 Lower block
is FAIL25 9
designated
“21 to 40” 7
21
22
23 Terminal screw
number
24
25 29
26 Positive(+) DC
30
27 /
28
29 Negative(−) 31 DC
30 32
31
35
32
33 36
Short wire1 34 Short wire1
35 E 37
36
37 38
38
Short-wire2 39 Short wire2
40
FG
FG
E3
PWS consists of a pair of terminal blocks4 (which are labeled with alpha-numeric
reference “T*”; a number replaces the asterisk “*” to designate the slot numbers.) The left of
Figure 5.5-1 shows the PWS terminal blocks, and the schematic figure for PWS is also shown
on the right.
Terminal screws No. 1 to 4 (FAIL1) and No. 7 to 10 (FAIL2) are provided to output the
failure results of the automatic supervision function5. Terminal screws No. 29(+) and 31(−) are
linked to the power supply. Other terminal screws No. 30(+) and 31(–) are also provided for
the power terminal and are used when bus distribution is required or when the safety
improvement of the cable capacity is required because the power cable is thin. Terminal screw
No. 38 and FG, by default, are linked with a short-wire and also terminal screw No. 35 and
terminal screw No. 37. The user should connect the IED case to the earth with the earth screw.
The other terminal screws are not used.
The actual terminal slot location is also found in external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical External connection)
CAUTION
1Note: The connection (triplet lines) between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw
No. 37 is made with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. Read
Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test carefully and follow the instructions
during testing.
2Note: The connection (double lines) between terminal screw 38 and screw labeled “FG” is
made with a short-wire by the manufacturer.
3Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its
cross-section is AWG9 or larger.
4Note: The terminal block is made by PHOENIX CONTACT®. This model is designated
“FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF 5.08”. The user can connect a cable to this terminal
directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the recommended cables are AWG12 to
AWG24 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI2.5-10BU” ferrule for
AWG14 (cross section 2mm2) or “AI1.5-10BK” ferrule for AWG16 (cross section
1.25mm2) when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by PHOENIX
CONTACT®.
5Note: The PWS module monitors dropping the DC voltages; the supervision function can
issue a power failure (for more information about the power failure, see Chapter
Automatic supervision function). The power failure (Power error) is issued when
the DC voltage is less than 85V (default). However, the user can change the
threshold for 170V by inserting a shunt connecter (1-2) at JP4 on the PWS module
(see Figure 5.5-2).
6Note: We do not guarantee the PWS operation in the AC power source.
JP4 JP4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Figure 5.5-2 Alarm threshold for DC voltage dropping on the PWS module
LED indicators
(#1–#26) Screen
Indicator label
Operation keys
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
The LED indicators‡ (#3 to #26) are also provided as user-programmable indicators.
Figure 5.6-2 shows the schematic diagrams. Each LED indicator can be lit and controlled
using a logic-gate-switch setting and others. For simplicity, we discusses setting the LED
indicator #3 only, but the user can take account that setting the other LED indicators (#4 to
#26) is the same as the #3. Table 5.6-1 shows the LED indicator settings; Table 5.6-2 shows
the signal monitoring points on all LED indicator logics.
‡Note:Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in Chapter User interface:
I/O setting sub-menu.
LED-03
3100031001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
[LOGIC-SW] Dwell & Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-04
3100041001 LED indicator #4
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer]
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2]
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1
[Input signal 3]
& 0 t
&
≥1 OR 0.000-300.000s
[INVERSE-SW] Normal
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-26
31001A100
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #26
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Instant type
When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set
Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator with a delayed characteristic, the user should
set Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires lighting the LED indicator as a one shot pulse, the user
should set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using
setting [Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value
in the setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other
hand, if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width
will be equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator to be removed by a reset signal, the user
should set Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW]; the user should set the Data ID of the reset
signal for setting [Reset signal]. Since lighting the LED indicator is cleared with the Data ID,
the user should determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the
signal monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
Table 5.6-2 Signal monitoring points on all LED indicator (Function ID: 201B01)
Element ID Name Description
3100021001 ERROR Error LED
For testing, the user can also program to generate binary signals when the user presses
the F1 to F7 keys. The F1 to F7 circuits have LEDs; accordingly, the user can also program to
light the LEDs using the settings.
“BO1”
Setting Data ID “F1 Signal designated by
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
SIGNAL” for the Signal to the
device
“FUNC-KEY1” [Input signal 1] [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
& ≥1
Pressing the F1 key (240001_ 3100001730)
[Input signal 3]
“BO1-RB”
F1
& [BO1_CPL] On &
[Input signal 4] (200B01_8002001113)
Off
[Input signal 5]
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
“F1 SIGNAL”
Setting Data ID (240001_ 3100001737) PLC connection point in BO1
“BO1_SOURCE”
&
for the [Signal]† 200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
[Logic] Instant
Toggle
The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using
scheme switch [LOGIC], as shown in Table 5.6-4. Thus, the user can substitute “F1-SIGNAL
(240001 310001737)” for the “FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL (240001 310001730)”, provided the
Toggle mode is preferred. In the Table 5.6-7 the other FUNC-KEY2 to FUNC-KEY7 are
shown.
Table 5.6-4 Signal mode selection using setting [LOGIC]
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Pressing Key
Toggle
Binary signal
Pressing Key
Instant
Binary signal
31001B1001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic
& ≥1
t 0 0 t LED-F1
[Input signal 1] DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 31001C1001 F2 LED logic
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F2
DRIVER
& AND 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
[INVERSE-SW]
&
≥1 OR Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
……….
Screen Jump / Assign Signal /
Function - Operation mode for the F7 key Screen Jump
No Assign
F7
Signal (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the input on F7 key (No Assigned)
Logic Instant / Toggle - Switch for logic-gate operation on F7 Instant
Table 5.6-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F1. (No Assigned)
F1 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F1 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F2 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F2. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F2. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F2. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F2. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F2. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F2. (No Assigned)
F2 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F2. (No Assigned)
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F2 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F2 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F2 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F2 0.00
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
……….
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F8 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F8. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F8. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F8. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F8. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F8. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F8. (No Assigned)
F8 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F8. (No Assigned)
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F8 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F8 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F8 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F8 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F8 0.00
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Table 5.6-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
Element ID Name Description
3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100011737 F2 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F2 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100021737 F3 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F3 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100031737 F4 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F4 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100041737 F5 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F5 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100051737 F6 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F6 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100061737 F7 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F7 referring the setting [LOGIC]
Table 5.6-8 Signal monitoring points for function LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
Element ID Name Description
31001B1001 LED-F1 Signal generated during pressing the F1 key
When the user wishes to test the phase-A element the OC1 relay using an oscilloscope,
for example, set the phase-A monitoring point (44001 8000011C20†) for the setting [Term A],
as shown in Figure 5.6-5. Consequently, the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at
the Term A. The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal. The user can use
to monitor the phase-B and phase-C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the
[Term B] and [Term C]. We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in Chapter User
interface: Setting sub-menu: Signal monitoring screen.
OC function
(Function ID: 440001) Monitoring jack (Function ID: 201301) Jacks and LEDs
Signal designated by
setting [Term A] DRIVER Term Signal to the
440001 8000011C20
A oscilloscope
A
OC1 440001 8100011C21
B “TEST-A”
440001 8200011C22 (201B01_3100221001)
C
Term A LED
Signal designated by
setting [Term B] DRIVER Term Signal to the
B oscilloscope
“TEST-B”
(201B01_3100231001)
Term B LED
Signal designated by
setting [Term C] DRIVER Term Signal to the
C oscilloscope
“TEST-C”
(201B01_3100241001)
Term C LED
Term A (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned)
Term B (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned)
Term C (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term C (No Assigned)
Table 5.6-11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
Element ID Name Description
3100221001 TEST-A TEST-A
Table 5.6-12 Signal monitoring points for L/R LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
Element ID Name Description
3100251001 LOC LED Local
Table 5.6-13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
Element ID Name Description
3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL
Clock function
Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence
of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of
the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the
UTC is selected; the clock can run in accordance with the user’s time zone and summer
time(DST)† by referring the UTC when the time zone and the DST are set. The explanation is
also found in Chapter User interface: Time sub-menu.
†Note:In other words, it is called “daylight saving time (DST)”. For setting, see section
5.7.5.
‡Note:For example, the Internet and World Wide Web standards run in the UTC. For
more information, see section 5.7.4.
LAN
………….
IED_1 IED_2 IED_n
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set SNTP for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [SNTP].
2) Set the address of a time server using settings [Server1]. The settings [Server2],
[Server3], and [Server4] are provided for other time-servers.
3) Check that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-4.
4) Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly (see 5.7.4 and 5.7.5).
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] > Check “SNTP” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
SNTP
IED
IRIG-B000†
Clock
10:00 1/2
Signal [Time] +
A1 2012-11-21 10:00:05
IRIG-B signal
[Format]
generator Unit GND
A3 YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
IRIG-B
Figure 5.7-5 IED connected with the signal generator unit using IRIG-B000 module
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module .
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set IRIG-B for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [IRIG-SYNC].
2) Check that the IRIG-B is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-6.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
Check “IRIG-B” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
IRIG-B
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 5.7-7 IED connected with the signal generator via BI module
†Note:The BI1 circuit is just used for the explanation; hence, an actual BI circuit should
be selected in accordance with wiring cables. For more information of the BI circuit,
see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module.
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC].
2) Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-8.
3) Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID]. For example, as shown in the Figure 5.7-7, when
the user wishes to inject the signal at the BI1 on the IO#1 slot, the user should set
BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID].
4) Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g.,
−0.050s) for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should
be synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the
operating time on the BI circuit.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
BI
Beginning of the DST at 01:00 a.m. in Mar. 29 Ending of the DST at 02:00 a.m. in Oct. 25
March October
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30
30 31
Transposed Transposed
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Figure 5.7-11 DST setting examples by the day (1st or 15th) of month
5.7.6 Setting
Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00
--- / SNTP / BI /
TimeSyncSrc - Time sync source SNTP
MODBUS / IRIG-B
YYYYMMDD /
Date_fmt MMDDYYYY / - YMD/MDY/DMY YYYYMMDD
DDMMYYYY
Date_delimiter -///. - - or / or . -
Time_delimiter :/. - : or period :
Sec_delimiter ./, - . or , .
SummerTime Off / On - Summer time enable Off
IS_UTC_base Off / On - Is setting value base on UTC? On
Start_Month 1 - 12 - Start month 3
Start_Week 1-5 - Start week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue. /
Start_Wday - Start day of week Sun.
Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / Sat.
Start_Hour 0 - 23 - Start hour 1
End_Month 1 - 12 - End month 10
End_Week 1-5 - End week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue. /
End_Wday - End day of week Sun.
Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / Sat.
End_Hour 0 - 23 - End hour 1
Settings
Protection (Relay)
Group1 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group2 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group8 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
consists of a binary input circuit (BI1), a number generation function (‘Binary selection’
provided in basic functions of the PLC editor), and the signal reception point. That is, when
the B1 switch is closed, a signal enters the BI1 circuit and is carried to the Binary selection;
accordingly the Binary selection, which is programmed to generate a group number ‘2’ in
UNIT when signal ‘1’ is injected in BOOL(BIT), can generates and inject the group number ‘2’
at the ‘PLC_Group_ENUM’. Consequently, the Setting function (201400) starts change the
group from number ‘1’ to ‘2’. Note that changing is only performed during the BI1 is closed in
the example logic; hence, the setting number goes back to ‘1’ when the BI1 is open.
GR200 IED
Binary selection
(+) (–)
IO_SLOT1 (200B01)
BI1 8001001110 Entering → Leaving 201400 314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Operation of
BI1 changing
‘1’ in BOOL ‘2’ in UNIT
‘0’ in BOOL ‘1’ in UNIT
BI2 8101011110
BI2
1
DIN_BOOL
FID DO
DTYPE ST
DID
Figure 5.8-3 exemplifies that selecting a group among eight groups is required by the
usage of three BI circuits (i.e., Group 1→Group2, Group3,… Group8).
BI3_2
DIN_BOOL TON DOUT_UNIT_1
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT MUL
DOUT_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST Unit#16#201400 FID ST
Delay time# PT ET
UDINT#16#01011111 DID UDINT#16#2 Unit#16#31 DTYPE
XX ms
Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DI
BI3_3
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 ADD ADD
FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
MUL
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01021111 DID Delay time# PT ET
XX ms UDINT#16#4
UDINT#16#1
(iii) Setting
Setting_PF (Function ID: 201400)
Un Default setting
Setting item Range Contents Notes
its value
3010011001 COM_CHG
3010031001 CTRL_CHG
3010021001 PRO_CHG
3010001001 SYS_CHG
6 Engineering tool
Contents Pages Pages
Common tools 950 Tool for Fault recorder 951
Configuration tools 952 Tool for Disturbance recorder 951
Comparison of settings 950 Tool for Event recorder 951
Configuration in IEC 61850 952 Label creator 950
Configuration in IEC 60870-5-103 953 Logging management 950
Connection with PC 950 MIMIC configuration 953
Double command blocking (DCB) 951 Project management 950
Settings for Relay and control functions 952
Settings for Input and output signals 952
Settings for Event recorder 952
Setting of Interlock (ILK) 952
Signal monitor 951
Status monitor 951
Overview of GR-TIEMS
When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed
into a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states (Table 6.1-1) on a
PC screen connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using the GR-TIEMS.
The GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and
event records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is
connected with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in the GR-TIEMS
operations, see a separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.
Connection
The user can connect the GR-TIEMS with the IED using either the LAN or the USB, as shown
in Figure 6.2-1.
IED
LAN
USB Cable
Personal Computer
Common tools
(i) Project management
Project files are required to engage sub-engineering tolls in the GR-TIEMS. The user can
manage to read/write the project file of the IED using the project management function. The
user can also see the contents of the project files.
(ii) Comparison
When the user wishes to get the comparison between respective IEDs, using the compare
function the user can get the comparison data about Settings, Disturbance record binary
signals, PLCs, Interlock, Large LCD (MIMIC)†, IEC61850, and IEC60870-5-103 data†.
(iv) Logging
The user can view the recorded data with regard to the logging date/time. As the user can also
find operation recorded when an operator/engineer logs into the IED, analyzing a problem is
possible when an error is detected during the IED operations.
Monitoring tools
The user can monitor status and measurement value obtained in the IED using the
monitoring tools. All signals monitored are tabulated in the monitoring list dialog. When the
user wishes to monitor a signal, select a signal in the monitoring list dialog after the operation
of the drag-drop on the monitoring window. The monitoring tools can generate an exporting
layout file in the CSV; it also can obtain the layout file in the CSV.
Record tools
(i) Fault record
Fault records are including measuring information before and after the occurrence of the
faults. Accordingly, the user can see information before the fault so that the user can analyze
the fault more precisely. The user can select a fault from the recorded lists; the user can save
it into the fault information file in the CSV. The user can also view the fault records when the
exported data file in the CSV are retrieved into the IED.
Note: In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time (UTC)
when the clock is selected to operate in UTC. In the record tools within the PC the
date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted
for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock
operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving
time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED
and the PC. For more information about the clock and time, see Chapter Technical
description: Clock function.
7 PLC function
Contents Pages Pages
Error check 955
PLC driver 956
[00000006] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
Figure 7.2-1 Error code at 1st row and 1st column on Monitoring sub-menu
PLC driver
A PLC driver is provided for starting user-programmed logic; the user can assign several
values for the operation. Three-hundred-and-twenty PLC drivers are grouped for 128 BITs, 32
USINTs, 32 UINTs, 32 UDINTs, 32 SINTs, 32 INTs, and 32 DINTs in the function “PLC_DRV
(Function ID: 230302)”.
8 Recording function
Contents Pages Pages
Disturbance recorder 977 Event recorder 969
-Data in COMTRATDE 981 -Setup 975
-Maximum number of recording 978 -Trigger signals 969
-Recording signals 978 -Trigger modes 974
-Recording time and capacities 977 Fault recorder 961
-Relays within disturbance recorder 977 -Screen information 963
-Trigger settings for PLC 981 -Setup 964
-Types of recording information 979
The recording function consists of three recording features: (1) Fault recorder, (2) Event
recorder, and (3) Disturbance recorder. The fault recorder collects the information about the
power system quantities when a fault occurs. The event recorder groups state information
when the changes are detected. The disturbance recorder is designed to memory the various
quantities—numerical analog data and logic data (binary data)—from the monitoring
function and the BIO modules; it is possible to analyze the disturbance using the engineering
tool (GR-TIMES), which can draw several chronological waves.
Fault recorder
During the fault, the fault recorder can memorize reasons by equipment failures/operation
states, system information etc. It commences by injecting a signal coming from the TRC
alarm-signal generation logic, but is also started by a trigger provided by PLC function. The
fault recorder captures the following items for each fault:
Date and time at the fault
Tripped phase information
Operating mode information
FL calculation result (if the FL function operates)
Evolving faults (if the ARC function operates)
Fault and pre-fault quantities
ID201] to [OP Mode ID264] are used for general purposes to record the logical signals.
†Note:A number of the operation identifiers are provided by the protection functions. For
example, the ‘OC1-OPT-A’ operation identifier is used to identify the pickup in the
first element of the overcurrent function (OC1) in phase-A. See respective
protection functions in Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:64 logical signals are selectable for recording. For example in this purpose, the
user may choose an operation signal on the circuits of the BIO modules (BIOs).
Va, Vb, Vc
Voltage in phase, phase-to-phase, and symmetrical Vab, Vbc, Vca
1Note: Terms ‘I0 (i.e., 3I0)’ and ‘V0 (i.e., 3V0)’ are calculated using three-phase quantities.
2Note: The ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ are taken usually with corresponding ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ circuits of the
VCT.
3Note: Those recoding items are provided by the special software, which is selected using
the ‘Software selection’ in the ordering..
have the information about evolving faults, which is able to memory up to 32 developing
faults. Quantitates when the fault occurred are shown below messages○ h .
g ○
Figure 8.1-1 Information of the fault recorder displayed on the IED screen
†Note:For more screen information, see Chapter User interface: Record sub-menu. For
more information about the FL calculation, see Chapter Relay application:
Single-end fault locator.
PreFault values ○
h Pre-fault quantities
Ia
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
Ib
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
Ic
1234.56kVa 123.4deg
logical signal using settings the [OP Mode ID265] etc. For example, the user wishes to recode
the output level of the binary input circuit#1 (BO1) at the IO#1 slot, set its PLC monitoring
point ‘200B01 8002001112’ for the setting [OP Mode ID265]; set the displaying name using the
[OP Mode Name265].
Table 8.1-2 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in ’31’ and ‘32’ software
Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Data IDs Screen names points Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID1] Not assigned [OP Mode Name1] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID97] Not assigned [OP Mode Name97] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID2] Not assigned [OP Mode Name2] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID98] Not assigned [OP Mode Name98] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID3] Not assigned [OP Mode Name3] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] Not assigned [OP Mode Name4] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] Not assigned [OP Mode Name5] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID6] Not assigned [OP Mode Name6] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID102] Not assigned [OP Mode Name102] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID7] Not assigned [OP Mode Name7] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID103] 475001 8000011BB1 [OP Mode Name103] FRQ-S1 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID8] 430001 8000011B23 [OP Mode Name8] Z1S Z1S-OPT [OP Mode ID104] 475001 8100021BB1 [OP Mode Name104] FRQ-S2 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID9] 430001 8100061B23 [OP Mode Name9] Z1XS Z1XS-OPT [OP Mode ID105] 475001 8200031BB1 [OP Mode Name105] FRQ-S3 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID10] 430001 8200021B23 [OP Mode Name10] Z2S Z2S-OPT [OP Mode ID106] 475001 8300041BB1 [OP Mode Name106] FRQ-S4 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID11] 430001 8300031B23 [OP Mode Name11] Z3S Z3S-OPT [OP Mode ID107] 475001 8400051BB1 [OP Mode Name107] FRQ-S5 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID12] 430001 8400041B23 [OP Mode Name12] Z4S Z4S-OPT [OP Mode ID108] 475001 8500061BB1 [OP Mode Name108] FRQ-S6 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID13] 430001 8500051B23 [OP Mode Name13] Z5S Z5S-OPT [OP Mode ID109] 475001 8000111BB1 [OP Mode Name109] DFRQ-S1 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID14] 430001 8300001B2B [OP Mode Name14] SOTF-ZS SOTF-ZS-TRIP [OP Mode ID110] 475001 8100121BB1 [OP Mode Name110] DFRQ-S2 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID15] 431001 8000011B69 [OP Mode Name15] Z1G Z1G-OPT [OP Mode ID111] 475001 8200131BB1 [OP Mode Name111] DFRQ-S3 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID16] 431001 8100061B69 [OP Mode Name16] Z1XG Z1XG-OPT [OP Mode ID112] 475001 8300141BB1 [OP Mode Name112] DFRQ-S4 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID17] 431001 8200021B69 [OP Mode Name17] Z2G Z2G-OPT [OP Mode ID113] 475001 8400151BB1 [OP Mode Name113] DFRQ-S5 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID18] 431001 8300031B69 [OP Mode Name18] Z3G Z3G-OPT [OP Mode ID114] 475001 8500161BB1 [OP Mode Name114] DFRQ-S6 Not assigned
[OP Mode ID19] 431001 8400041B69 [OP Mode Name19] Z4G Z4G-OPT [OP Mode ID115] Not assigned [OP Mode Name115] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID20] 431001 8500051B69 [OP Mode Name20] Z5G Z5G-OPT [OP Mode ID116] Not assigned [OP Mode Name116] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID21] 431001 8300001B2B [OP Mode Name21] SOTF-ZG SOTF-ZG-TRIP [OP Mode ID117] Not assigned [OP Mode Name117] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID22] Not assigned [OP Mode Name22] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID118] Not assigned [OP Mode Name118] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID23] Not assigned [OP Mode Name23] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID119] Not assigned [OP Mode Name119] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID24] Not assigned [OP Mode Name24] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID120] Not assigned [OP Mode Name120] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID25] Not assigned [OP Mode Name25] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID121] Not assigned [OP Mode Name121] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID26] 440001 8000011B68 [OP Mode Name26] OC1 OC1-OPT [OP Mode ID122] Not assigned [OP Mode Name122] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID27] 440001 8100021B68 [OP Mode Name27] OC2 OC2-OPT [OP Mode ID123] Not assigned [OP Mode Name123] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID28] 440001 8200031B68 [OP Mode Name28] OC3 OC3-OPT [OP Mode ID124] Not assigned [OP Mode Name124] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID29] 440001 8300041B68 [OP Mode Name29] OC4 OC4-OPT [OP Mode ID125] Not assigned [OP Mode Name125] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID30] 441001 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name30] EF1 EF1-OPT [OP Mode ID126] Not assigned [OP Mode Name126] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID31] 441001 8100021B60 [OP Mode Name31] EF2 EF2-OPT [OP Mode ID127] Not assigned [OP Mode Name127] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID32] 441001 8200031B60 [OP Mode Name32] EF3 EF3-OPT [OP Mode ID128] Not assigned [OP Mode Name128] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID33] 441001 8300041B60 [OP Mode Name33] EF4 EF4-OPT [OP Mode ID201] Not assigned [OP Mode Name201] - OSTZ-OPT
[OP Mode ID34] 443001 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name34] OCN1 OCN1-OPT [OP Mode ID202] 478001 8200001B6A [OP Mode Name202] OSTZ Not assigned
[OP Mode ID35] 443001 8100021B60 [OP Mode Name35] OCN2 OCN2-OPT [OP Mode ID203] Not assigned [OP Mode Name203] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID36] 443001 8200031B60 [OP Mode Name36] OCN3 OCN3-OPT [OP Mode ID204] Not assigned [OP Mode Name204] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID37] 443001 8300041B60 [OP Mode Name37] OCN4 OCN4-OPT [OP Mode ID205] 453001 8B00011B27 [OP Mode Name205] CBF1 CBF1-RETRIP
[OP Mode ID38] Not assigned [OP Mode Name38] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID206] 453001 8300011B23 [OP Mode Name206] CBF1-RE CBF1_TRIP
[OP Mode ID39] Not assigned [OP Mode Name39] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID207] 453001 8B00021B27 [OP Mode Name207] CBF2 CBF2-RETRIP
[OP Mode ID40] 451001 8100021B60 [OP Mode Name40] THM THM-ALARM [OP Mode ID208] 453001 8300021B23 [OP Mode Name208] CBF2-RE CBF2_TRIP
[OP Mode ID41] 451001 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name41] THM-A THM-TRIP [OP Mode ID209] Not assigned [OP Mode Name209] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID42] 452001 8000001B60 [OP Mode Name42] BCD BCD-OPT [OP Mode ID210] Not assigned [OP Mode Name210] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID43] 454001 8300001B23 [OP Mode Name43] SOTF-OC SOTFOC-TRIP [OP Mode ID211] Not assigned [OP Mode Name211] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID44] 455001 8300001B23 [OP Mode Name44] STUB-OC STUBOC-TRIP [OP Mode ID212] Not assigned [OP Mode Name212] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID45] Not assigned [OP Mode Name45] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID213] Not assigned [OP Mode Name213] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID46] Not assigned [OP Mode Name46] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID214] Not assigned [OP Mode Name214] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID47] Not assigned [OP Mode Name47] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID215] Not assigned [OP Mode Name215] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID48] Not assigned [OP Mode Name48] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID216] Not assigned [OP Mode Name216] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID49] Not assigned [OP Mode Name49] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID217] Not assigned [OP Mode Name217] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID50] Not assigned [OP Mode Name50] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID218] Not assigned [OP Mode Name218] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID51] Not assigned [OP Mode Name51] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID219] Not assigned [OP Mode Name219] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID52] Not assigned [OP Mode Name52] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID220] Not assigned [OP Mode Name220] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID53] Not assigned [OP Mode Name53] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID221] Not assigned [OP Mode Name221] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID54] Not assigned [OP Mode Name54] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID222] Not assigned [OP Mode Name222] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID55] Not assigned [OP Mode Name55] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID223] Not assigned [OP Mode Name223] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID56] Not assigned [OP Mode Name56] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID224] Not assigned [OP Mode Name224] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID57] Not assigned [OP Mode Name57] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID225] Not assigned [OP Mode Name225] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID58] Not assigned [OP Mode Name58] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID226] Not assigned [OP Mode Name226] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID59] Not assigned [OP Mode Name59] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID227] Not assigned [OP Mode Name227] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID60] Not assigned [OP Mode Name60] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID228] Not assigned [OP Mode Name228] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID61] Not assigned [OP Mode Name61] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID229] Not assigned [OP Mode Name229] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID62] Not assigned [OP Mode Name62] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID230] Not assigned [OP Mode Name230] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID63] Not assigned [OP Mode Name63] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID231] Not assigned [OP Mode Name231] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID64] Not assigned [OP Mode Name64] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID232] Not assigned [OP Mode Name232] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID65] Not assigned [OP Mode Name65] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID233] 4A6001 8000011B63 [OP Mode Name233] SPAR1 ARC1_MODE_SPAR
[OP Mode ID66] Not assigned [OP Mode Name66] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID234] 4A6001 8100011B64 [OP Mode Name234] TPAR1 ARC1_TPAR
[OP Mode ID67] Not assigned [OP Mode Name67] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID235] 4A6001 8200011B65 [OP Mode Name235] ORGAR1 ARC1_ORGAR
[OP Mode ID68] Not assigned [OP Mode Name68] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID236] Not assigned [OP Mode Name236] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID69] Not assigned [OP Mode Name69] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID237] 4A6001 8100011B67 [OP Mode Name237] ARC-S2 ARC1 SHOT2
[OP Mode ID70] Not assigned [OP Mode Name70] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID238] 4A6001 8200011B68 [OP Mode Name238] ARC-S3 ARC1 SHOT3
[OP Mode ID71] 460101 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name71] OV1 OV1-OPT [OP Mode ID239] 4A6001 8300011B69 [OP Mode Name239] ARC-S4 ARC1 SHOT4
[OP Mode ID72] 460101 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name72] OV2 OV2-OPT [OP Mode ID240] 4A6001 8400011B6A [OP Mode Name240] ARC-S5 ARC1 SHOT5
[OP Mode ID73] Not assigned [OP Mode Name73] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID241] 4A6001 8400011B6E [OP Mode Name241] FT1 ARC1 FT
[OP Mode ID74] Not assigned [OP Mode Name74] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID242] 4A6001 8700011B70 [OP Mode Name242] AR1 ARC1 RESET
[OP Mode ID75] 461101 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name75] OVS1 OVS1-OPT [OP Mode ID243] 4A6001 8C00011B71 [OP Mode Name243] AF1 ARC1 CLOSE FAIL
[OP Mode ID76] 461101 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name76] OVS2 OVS2-OPT [OP Mode ID244] 4A6001 8000011B72 [OP Mode Name244] AS1 ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS
[OP Mode ID77] Not assigned [OP Mode Name77] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID245] 4A6001 8000021B63 [OP Mode Name245] SPAR2 ARC2_SPAR
[OP Mode ID78] Not assigned [OP Mode Name78] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID246] 4A6001 8100021B64 [OP Mode Name246] TPAR2 ARC2_TPAR
[OP Mode ID79] 462101 8000011B60 [OP Mode Name79] OVG1 OVG1-OPT [OP Mode ID247] 4A6001 8200021B65 [OP Mode Name247] ORGAR2 ARC2_ORGAR
[OP Mode ID80] 462101 8100021B60 [OP Mode Name80] OVG2 OVG2-OPT [OP Mode ID248] Not assigned [OP Mode Name248] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID81] Not assigned [OP Mode Name81] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID249] 4A6001 8400021B6A [OP Mode Name249] FT2 ARC2 FT
[OP Mode ID82] Not assigned [OP Mode Name82] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID250] 4A6001 8700021B6C [OP Mode Name250] AR2 ARC2 RESET
[OP Mode ID83] Not assigned [OP Mode Name83] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID251] 4A6001 8C00021B6D [OP Mode Name251] AF2 ARC2 CLOSE FAIL
[OP Mode ID84] Not assigned [OP Mode Name84] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID252] 4A6001 8000021B6E [OP Mode Name252] AS2 ARC2 CLOSE SUCCESS
[OP Mode ID85] Not assigned [OP Mode Name85] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID253] 4A6001 8300001B64 [OP Mode Name253] EXT-STA EXT.ARC_START
[OP Mode ID86] Not assigned [OP Mode Name86] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID254] Not assigned [OP Mode Name254] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID87] Not assigned [OP Mode Name87] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID255] Not assigned [OP Mode Name255] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID88] Not assigned [OP Mode Name88] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID256] Not assigned [OP Mode Name256] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID89] Not assigned [OP Mode Name89] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID257] Not assigned [OP Mode Name257] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID90] Not assigned [OP Mode Name90] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID258] Not assigned [OP Mode Name258] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID91] 470101 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name91] UV1 UV1-OPT [OP Mode ID259] Not assigned [OP Mode Name259] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID92] 470101 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name92] UV2 UV2-OPT [OP Mode ID260] Not assigned [OP Mode Name260] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID93] Not assigned [OP Mode Name93] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID261] Not assigned [OP Mode Name261] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID94] Not assigned [OP Mode Name94] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID262] Not assigned [OP Mode Name262] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID95] 471101 8000011B65 [OP Mode Name95] UVS1 UVS1-OPT [OP Mode ID263] Not assigned [OP Mode Name263] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID96] 471101 8100021B65 [OP Mode Name96] UVS2 UVS2-OPT [OP Mode ID264] Not assigned [OP Mode Name264] - Not assigned
GEN.TRIP_ALARM OP.MODE-GET
From ARC 0 t
ARC INPROG F.RECORD_TRIG_SPRED
0. 1s
8020001001 1 Drop Off
802000E001 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1
8120011001 0.01s
812001E001 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG2
≥1 ≥1
1 ≥1
8220021001
Drop Off
822002E001 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG3
8320031001 1s
832003E001 ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4 Pick Up
1
≥1
Drop Off
0.01s
From protection function #1(FC1)
FC1_OPT_AR Identifier signals &
FC1_OPT_BR (FC*_OPT_*) coming Setting [OP Mode ID1] Operation mode information recorded
FC1_OPT_CR from protection functions when GEN.TRIP_ALARM signal is
(FC*) are detected & generated in the TRC function
FC1_OPT_ABR changing the logic level Setting [OP Mode ID2]
FC1_OPT_BCR “0(Un-operated)” to
FC1_OPT_CAR “1(Operated)”. &
Setting [OP Mode ID3]
From protection function #2(FC2)
FC1_OPT_AR
FC1_OPT_BR
FC1_OPT_CR Signals about the
FC1_OPT_ABR operation modes in the
FC1_OPT_BCR protection functions are &
set. Setting [OP Mode ID128]
FC1_OPT_CAR
Setting [OP Mode ID1]
&
Setting [OP Mode ID2] Setting [OP Mode ID201]
8.1.5 Setting
Setting of FAULT_RECORD(Function ID: 200602)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 / 300 Sec. Recording time before the fault 10
Op Mode Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID1 –
Op Mode ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier –
Op Mode Name2 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID2 –
Op Mode ID2 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier2 –
Op Mode Name3 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID3 –
Op Mode ID3 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier3 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Op Mode Name264 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID264 –
Op Mode ID264 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier264 –
Event recorder
Signals are generated in the logics of BIO modules etc. in the IED. The event recorder can
memory the generated signals as events. To operate the event recorder, the user should pick a
preferred signal as a trigger of the event recorder; the event recorder can have 768 triggers,
some of which have been set as a default. The user can group the triggers into three
categories; consequently, it is possible that a number of the events are divided depending on
the degree of the errors, the meaning of the operations, and the signals of relay elements, etc.
The user can also program how an event is to be detected. An event is recorded with
millisecond accuracy. The information are memorized until the number of the events reaching
1024; the oldest event will be deleted when a new event appears.
Pulse train
3000001001
FR_CLR List of ‘Event record1’
FAULT RECORD (200602)
Event #3
On 2012-07-25 10:31:12
Event #3 F.Record clear ‘On’
Event #2
3010001001
Active group Active group
2012-07-25 10:56:12
SYS_CHG Set group change
‘3’ Changed to ‘4’
Setting_PF (201400)
Event #2
Figure 8.2-1 Relation between function signals and triggers for Event record1
Figure 8.2-1 illustrates the signals connected with triggers in the event recorder in the
‘30’ model. For example, ‘SYS_CHG’ is connected with trigger#7 using the [Trigger ID7] and
‘FR_CLR’ is connected with trigger#14 using the [Trigger ID14]. Note that the both triggers
(#7 and #14) are smaller than the setting [End of E.Record-1]=256; hence, the both are listed
in the ‘Event recored1’ list. Keep in mind that the event names are set by the [Event Name7]
and [Event Name14]. Table 8.2-1 to Table 8.2-3 tabulates the ones for the ‘31’ & ‘32’ models.
†Note:The GR-TIEMS uses terms ‘Level1’, ‘Level2’, and ‘Level3’ to represent the ‘Event
Record1’, ‘Event Record2’, and ‘Event Record3’. The scope of each level is the same
as the scope of each group. The GR-TIEMS does not show unused triggers and
Trigger ID numbers automatically when the triggers are displayed on the screen.
Table 8.2-1 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 in Software ‘31’ & ‘32’
Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names
[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID2] 220001 3110211001 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID92] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID182] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID183] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID4] 220001 3110231001 On-Off ErrorLevel4 [Trigger ID94] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID184] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID5] 220001 3110241001 On-Off ErrorLevel5 [Trigger ID95] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID185] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID6] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID96] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID186] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] 432001 8000001BB0 On-Off Z1CNT_MPROT
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] 432001 8000001B62 On-Off Z1CNT-TPBLK
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] 432001 8100001B63 On-Off Z1CNT-3PTP
[Trigger ID12] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID102] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID192] 432001 8200001B64 On-Off Z1CNT-ARCBLK
[Trigger ID13] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID103] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID193] 432001 8300001B65 On-Off Z1CNT-INSTOP
[Trigger ID14] 200602 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID15] 200710 3001001001 On E.Record1 clear [Trigger ID105] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID195] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID16] 200710 3002001001 On E.Record2 clear [Trigger ID106] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID196] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID17] 200710 3003001001 On E.Record3 clear [Trigger ID107] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID197] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID18] 20040130A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID19] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID109] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID199] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID20] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID110] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID200] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID21] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID111] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID201] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID22] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID112] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID202] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID23] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID113] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID203] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID24] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID114] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID204] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID25] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID115] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID205] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID26] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID116] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID206] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID27] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID117] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID207] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID28] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID118] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID208] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID29] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID119] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID209] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID30] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID120] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID210] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID31] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID121] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID211] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID32] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID122] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID212] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID33] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID123] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID213] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID34] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID124] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID214] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID35] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID125] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID215] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID36] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID126] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID216] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID37] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID127] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID217] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID38] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID128] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID218] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID39] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID129] 48A001 8000001B73 On-Off CB1-A_CLOSE [Trigger ID219] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID40] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID130] 48A001 8100001B74 On-Off CB1-B_CLOSE [Trigger ID220] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID41] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID131] 48A001 8200001B75 On-Off CB1-C_CLOSE [Trigger ID221] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID42] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID132] 48A001 8000001B7C On-Off CB2-A_CLOSE [Trigger ID222] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID43] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID133] 48A001 8100001B7D On-Off CB2-B_CLOSE [Trigger ID223] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID44] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID134] 48A001 8200001B7E On-Off CB2-C_CLOSE [Trigger ID224] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID45] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID135] 48A001 8E00001B85 On-Off DS_CLOSE [Trigger ID225] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID46] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID136] 48A001 8000001B9C On-Off DEAD_LINE_DETECT [Trigger ID226] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID47] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID137] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID227] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID48] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID138] 4A6001 8000011B60 On-Off ARC1 READY [Trigger ID228] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID49] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID139] 4A6001 8000021B60 On-Off ARC2 READY [Trigger ID229] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID50] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID140] 4A6001 8200001BB4 On-Off ARC_BLOCK [Trigger ID230] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID51] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID141] 4A6001 8000001BB3 On-Off ARC NO ACT [Trigger ID231] 4530018000011BB0 On-Off EXT.CBF1_START-A
[Trigger ID52] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID142] 4A6001 8000001BB0 On-Off EXT.ARC_START-A [Trigger ID232] 4530018100011BB1 On-Off EXT.CBF1_START-B
[Trigger ID53] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID143] 4A6001 8100001BB1 On-Off EXT.ARC_START-B [Trigger ID233] 4530018200011BB2 On-Off EXT.CBF1_START-C
[Trigger ID54] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID144] 4A6001 8200001BB2 On-Off EXT.ARC_START-C [Trigger ID234] 4530018000021BB0 On-Off EXT.CBF2_START-A
[Trigger ID55] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID145] 4A6001 8000011B6C On-Off ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND [Trigger ID235] 4530018100021BB1 On-Off EXT.CBF2_START-B
[Trigger ID56] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID146] 4A6001 8100021B68 On-Off ARC2 CLOSE COMMAND [Trigger ID236] 4530018200021BB2 On-Off EXT.CBF2_START-C
[Trigger ID57] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID147] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID237] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID58] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID148] 490001 8000001B61 On-Off VTF DETECT [Trigger ID238] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID59] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID149] 490001 8100001BB1 On-Off EXTERNAL VTF [Trigger ID239] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID60] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID150] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID240] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID61] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID151] 491001 8000001B62 On-Off CTF DETECT [Trigger ID241] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID62] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID152] 491001 8100001BB1 On-Off EXTERNAL CTF [Trigger ID242] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID63] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID153] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID243] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID64] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID154] 4A0001 8000001B6C On-Off GEN.TRIP-A [Trigger ID244] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID65] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID155] 4A0001 8100001B6D On-Off GEN.TRIP-B [Trigger ID245] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID66] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID156] 4A0001 8200001B6E On-Off GEN.TRIP-C [Trigger ID246] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID67] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID157] 4A0001 8300001B6F On-Off GEN.TRIP [Trigger ID247] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID68] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID158] 4A0001 8400001B64 On-Off GEN.ALARM [Trigger ID248] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID69] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID159] 4A0001 8000001B71 On-Off OPT.PHASE-A [Trigger ID249] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID70] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID160] 4A0001 8100001B72 On-Off OPT.PHASE-B [Trigger ID250] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID161] 4A0001 8200001B73 On-Off OPT.PHASE-C [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID72] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID162] 4A0001 8300001B74 On-Off OPT.PHASE-N [Trigger ID252] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID73] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID163] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID253] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID74] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID164] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID75] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID165] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID255] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID76] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID166] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID256] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID77] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID167] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID78] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID168] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID79] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID169] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID80] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID170] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID81] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID171] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID82] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID172] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID83] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID173] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID84] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID174] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID85] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID175] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID86] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID176] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID87] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID177] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID88] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID178] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID89] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID179] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID90] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID180] (Not Assigned) Off -
Table 8.2-2 Event2 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 [End of E.Record-2]=512
Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names
[Trigger ID257] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID347] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID437] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID258] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID348] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID438] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID259] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID349] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID439] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID260] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID350] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID440] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID261] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID351] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID441] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID262] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID352] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID442] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID263] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID353] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID443] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID264] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID354] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID444] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID265] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID355] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID445] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID266] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID356] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID446] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID267] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID357] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID447] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID268] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID358] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID448] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID269] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID359] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID449] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID270] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID360] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID450] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID271] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID361] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID451] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID272] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID362] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID452] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID273] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID363] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID453] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID274] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID364] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID454] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID275] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID365] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID455] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID276] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID366] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID456] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID277] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID367] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID457] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID278] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID368] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID458] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID279] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID369] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID459] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID280] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID370] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID460] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID281] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID371] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID461] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID282] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID372] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID462] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID283] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID373] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID463] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID284] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID374] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID464] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID285] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID375] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID465] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID286] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID376] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID466] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID287] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID377] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID467] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID288] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID378] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID468] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID289] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID379] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID469] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID290] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID380] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID470] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID291] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID381] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID471] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID292] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID382] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID472] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID293] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID383] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID473] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID294] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID384] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID474] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID295] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID385] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID475] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID296] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID386] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID476] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID297] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID387] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID477] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID298] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID388] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID478] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID299] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID389] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID479] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID300] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID390] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID480] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID301] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID391] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID481] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID302] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID392] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID482] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID303] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID393] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID483] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID304] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID394] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID484] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID305] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID395] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID485] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID306] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID396] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID486] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID307] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID397] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID487] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID308] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID398] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID488] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID309] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID399] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID489] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID310] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID400] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID490] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID311] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID401] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID491] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID312] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID402] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID492] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID313] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID403] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID493] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID314] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID404] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID494] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID315] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID405] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID495] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID316] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID406] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID496] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID317] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID407] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID497] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID318] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID408] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID498] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID319] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID409] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID499] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID320] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID410] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID500] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID321] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID411] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID501] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID322] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID412] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID502] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID323] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID413] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID503] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID324] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID414] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID504] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID325] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID415] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID505] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID326] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID416] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID506] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID327] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID417] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID507] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID328] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID418] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID508] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID329] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID419] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID509] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID330] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID420] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID510] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID331] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID421] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID511] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID332] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID422] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID512] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID333] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID423] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID334] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID424] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID335] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID425] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID336] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID426] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID337] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID427] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID338] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID428] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID339] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID429] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID340] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID430] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID341] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID431] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID342] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID432] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID343] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID433] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID344] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID434] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID345] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID435] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID346] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID436] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID513] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID603] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID693] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID514] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID604] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID694] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID515] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID605] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID695] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID516] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID606] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID696] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID517] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID607] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID697] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID518] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID608] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID698] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID519] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID609] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID699] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID520] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID610] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID700] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID521] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID611] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID701] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID522] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID612] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID702] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID523] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID613] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID703] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID524] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID614] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID704] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID525] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID615] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID705] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID526] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID616] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID706] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID527] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID617] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID707] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID528] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID618] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID708] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID529] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID619] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID709] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID530] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID620] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID710] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID531] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID621] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID711] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID532] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID622] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID712] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID533] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID623] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID713] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID534] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID624] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID714] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID535] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID625] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID715] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID536] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID626] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID716] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID537] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID627] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID717] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID538] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID628] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID718] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID539] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID629] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID719] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID540] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID630] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID720] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID541] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID631] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID721] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID542] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID632] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID722] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID543] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID633] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID723] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID544] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID634] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID724] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID545] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID635] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID725] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID546] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID636] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID726] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID547] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID637] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID727] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID548] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID638] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID728] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID549] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID639] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID729] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID550] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID640] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID730] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID551] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID641] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID731] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID552] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID642] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID732] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID553] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID643] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID733] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID554] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID644] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID734] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID555] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID645] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID735] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID556] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID646] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID736] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID557] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID647] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID737] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID558] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID648] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID738] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID559] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID649] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID739] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID560] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID650] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID740] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID561] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID651] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID741] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID562] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID652] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID742] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID563] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID653] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID743] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID564] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID654] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID744] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID565] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID655] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID745] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID566] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID656] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID746] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID567] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID657] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID747] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID568] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID658] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID748] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID569] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID659] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID749] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID570] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID660] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID760] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID571] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID661] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID761] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID572] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID662] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID762] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID573] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID663] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID763] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID574] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID664] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID764] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID575] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID665] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID765] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID576] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID666] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID766] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID577] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID667] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID767] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID578] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID668] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID768] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID579] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID669] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID580] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID670] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID581] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID671] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID582] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID672] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID583] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID673] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID584] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID674] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID585] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID675] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID586] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID676] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID587] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID677] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID588] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID678] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID589] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID679] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID590] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID680] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID591] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID681] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID592] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID682] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID593] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID683] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID594] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID684] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID595] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID685] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID596] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID686] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID597] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID687] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID598] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID688] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID599] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID689] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID600] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID690] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID601] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID691] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID602] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID692] (Not Assigned) Off -
On
Pulse train
Off
(e.g., the ‘SYS_CHG’ signal; which has been connected with the trigger#9 using the setting
[Trigger ID9], as default; we have been discussed in Chapter Technical description: Group
setting for protection functions.)
occurred for the event#1. Preceding event#2, event#3, etc. are shown below the event#1.
Similarly, the information about the ‘Event Record2’ and ‘Event Record3’ groups are displayed
on the IED screen.
†Note:For more information about the screen operation, see Chapter User interface:
Record sub-menu.
Event Record1 ○
a Event record1 list
10:48 1/4
#1 2012-07-26 ○
b The latest event#1
12:34:51.223
F.Record clear ○
c Trigger information
On ○
d Trigger mode information
#2 2012-07-25
Screen scroll down 10:56:12.021
○
e Event#2
8.2.5 Setting
Setting of EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
End of E.Record-1 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group1 256
End of E.Record-2 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group2 521
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal1 for the operation –
Tigger Mode1 On / Off / On-Off / Change – Mode setting for the detection –
Event name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal1 –
Trigger ID2 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal2 for the operation –
Tigger Mode2 On / Off / On-Off / Change – Mode setting for the detection –
Event name2 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal2 –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
…… …… – …… –
Trigger ID768 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal768 for the operation –
Tigger Mode768 On / Off / On-Off / Change – Mode setting for the detection –
Event name768 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal768 –
Disturbance recorder
Disturbance recorder is to record the phenomenon about the occurrences of the fault with 1ms
accuracy; the disturbance recorder is operated with the reception of the TRC trip command.
The disturbance recorder has exclusive overcurrent and other relays; thus, they can also start
the disturbance recorder when the exclusive relays detects abnormal phenomenon.
Additionally, the disturbance recorder can accept the instruction of the PLC function using
settings. The recording time and the sampling time are programmable; thus, the measuring
values about currents, voltage, frequency, and logic signals are collected in accordance with
the recording and the sampling times. The logic signals are also memorized during the
disturbance phenomenon; the disturbance recorder can hold up to 256 signals. The recording
number of the disturbance phenomena is limited by the recording and sampling times.
8.3.4 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder
Ten analog quantities and 256 logical signals are record in a disturbance phenomenon.
(i) Number of analog quantities
Currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie, Iem) and the voltages (Va, Vb, Vc, Vs, Vs2) are recorded. For more
information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC
analog input.
Table 8.3-3 Setting list for logic signals for the ‘31’ and ‘32’ software
[Binary
[Binary Sig.
Settings Data IDs [Binary Sig. Name] Origins Settings Data IDs Sig. Origins Settings Data IDs Origins
Name]
Name]
[Binary Signal1] 48A001 8000001B73 CB1-A_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal2] 48A001 8100001B74 CB1-B_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal92] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal192] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal3] 48A001 8200001B75 CB1-C_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal93] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal193] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal4] 48A001 8000001B7C CB2-A_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal94] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal194] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal5] 48A001 8100001B7D CB2-B_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal95] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal195] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal6] 48A001 8200001B7E CB2-C_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal96] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal196] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal7] 48A001 8E00001B85 DS_CLOSE PROT_COMM [Binary Signal97] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal197] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal8] 4A0001 8300001B6F GEN.TRIP TRC [Binary Signal98] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal198] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal9] 4A0001 8000001B6C GEN.TRIP-A TRC [Binary Signal99] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal99] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal10] 4A0001 8100001B6D GEN.TRIP-B TRC [Binary Signal100] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal200] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal11] 4A0001 8200001B6E GEN.TRIP-C TRC [Binary Signal101] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal201] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal12] 4A0001 8400001B64 GEN.ALARM TRC [Binary Signal102] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal202] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal13] 490001 8000001B61 VTF_DETECT VTF [Binary Signal103] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal203] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal14] 491001 8000001B62 CTF_DETECT CTF [Binary Signal104] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal204] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal15] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal105] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal205] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal16] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal106] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal206] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal17] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal107] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal207] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal18] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal108] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal208] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal19] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal109] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal209] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal20] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal110] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal210] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal21] 430001 8300011B63 Z1S-ORX ZS [Binary Signal111] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal211] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal22] 430001 8700061B63 Z1XS-ORX ZS [Binary Signal112] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal212] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal23] 430001 8300021B63 Z2S-ORX ZS [Binary Signal113] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal213] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal24] 430001 8700031B63 Z3S-ORX ZS [Binary Signal114] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal214] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal25] 430001 8B00041B63 Z4S-ORX ZS [Binary Signal115] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal215] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal26] 430001 8B00051B63 Z5S-ORX ZS [Binary Signal116] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal216] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal27] 430001 8000011B23 Z1S-OPT ZS [Binary Signal117] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal217] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal28] 430001 8100061B23 Z1XS-OPT ZS [Binary Signal118] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal218] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal29] 430001 8200021B23 Z2S-OPT ZS [Binary Signal119] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal219] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal30] 430001 8300031B23 Z3S-OPT ZS [Binary Signal120] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal220] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal31] 430001 8400041B23 Z4S-OPT ZS [Binary Signal121] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal221] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal32] 430001 8500051B23 Z5S-OPT ZS [Binary Signal122] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal222] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal33] 430001 8000081B61 PSBS_DET ZS [Binary Signal123] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal223] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal34] 431001 8300011B63 Z1G-ORX ZG [Binary Signal124] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal224] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal35] 431001 8700061B63 Z1XG-ORX ZG [Binary Signal125] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal225] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal36] 431001 8300021B63 Z2G-ORX ZG [Binary Signal126] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal226] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal37] 431001 8700031B63 Z3G-ORX ZG [Binary Signal127] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal227] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal38] 431001 8B00041B63 Z4G-ORX ZG [Binary Signal128] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal228] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal39] 431001 8B00051B63 Z5G-ORX ZG [Binary Signal129] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal229] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal40] 431001 8000011B69 Z1G-OPT ZG [Binary Signal130] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal230] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal41] 431001 8100061B69 Z1XG-OPT ZG [Binary Signal131] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal231] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal42] 431001 8200021B69 Z2G-OPT ZG [Binary Signal132] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal232] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal43] 431001 8300031B69 Z3G-OPT ZG [Binary Signal133] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal233] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal44] 431001 8400041B69 Z4G-OPT ZG [Binary Signal134] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal234] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal45] 431001 8500051B69 Z5G-OPT ZG [Binary Signal135] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal235] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal46] 431001 8000081B70 PSBG_DET ZG [Binary Signal136] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal236] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal47] 4A6001 8000011B60 ARC1_READY ARC [Binary Signal137] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal237] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal48] 4A6001 8000021B60 ARC2_READY ARC [Binary Signal138] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal238] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal49] 4A6001 8000011B6C ARC1_CLOSE_COMMAND ARC [Binary Signal139] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal239] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal50] 4A6001 8100021B68 ARC2_CLOSE_COMMAND ARC [Binary Signal150] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal250] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal51] 4A6001 8400011B6E ARC1_FT ARC [Binary Signal151] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal251] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal52] 4A6001 8400021B6A ARC2_FT ARC [Binary Signal152] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal252] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal53] 4A6001 8200001BB4 ARC_BLOCK ARC [Binary Signal153] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal253] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal54] 440001 8000011B68 OC1-OPT OC [Binary Signal154] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal254] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal55] 440001 8100021B68 OC2-OPT OC [Binary Signal155] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal255] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal56] 440001 8200031B68 OC3-OPT OC [Binary Signal156] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal256] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal57] 440001 8300041B68 OC4-OPT OC [Binary Signal157] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal58] 441001 8000011B60 EF1-OPT EF [Binary Signal158] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal59] 441001 8100021B60 EF2-OPT EF [Binary Signal159] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal60] 441001 8200031B60 EF3-OPT EF [Binary Signal160] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal61] 441001 8300041B60 EF4-OPT EF [Binary Signal161] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal62] 443001 8000011B60 OCN1-OPT OCN [Binary Signal162] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal63] 443001 8100021B60 OCN2-OPT OCN [Binary Signal163] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal64] 443001 8200031B60 OCN3-OPT OCN [Binary Signal164] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal65] 443001 8300041B60 OCN4-OPT OCN [Binary Signal165] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal66] 460101 8000011B65 OV1-OPT OV [Binary Signal166] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal67] 460101 8100021B65 OV2-OPT OV [Binary Signal167] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal68] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal168] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal69] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal169] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal70] 461101 8000011B65 OVS1-OPT OVS [Binary Signal170] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal71] 461101 8100021B65 OVS2-OPT OVS [Binary Signal171] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal72] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal172] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal73] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal173] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal74] 462101 8000011B60 OVG1-OPT OVG [Binary Signal174] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal75] 462101 8100021B60 OVG2-OPT OVG [Binary Signal175] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal76] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal176] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal77] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal177] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal78] 470101 8000011B65 UV1-OPT UV [Binary Signal178] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal79] 470101 8100021B65 UV2-OPT UV [Binary Signal179] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal80] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal180] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal81] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal181] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal82] 471101 8000011B65 UVS1-OPT UVS [Binary Signal182] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal83] 471101 8100021B65 UVS2-OPT UVS [Binary Signal183] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal84] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal184] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal85] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal185] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal86] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal186] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal87] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal187] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal88] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal188] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal89] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal189] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal90] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal190] (Not Assigned) - ….
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2
_Record List >
Number of items
5/77
Clear Records +
Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
Operating counter
Figure 8.3-2 Running counter and Max number in the disturbance recorder
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/5
#1 2012-07-25 ○
a Disturbance record#1
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 ○
b Disturbance record#2
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/21 ○
c Disturbance record#3
Screen scroll down 13:11:29.621
#4 2012-07-02 ○
d Disturbance record#4
23:32:09.015
#5 2012-06-20 ○
e Disturbance record#5
09:37:48.915
The information in the disturbance recorder are managed in the COMTRADE format,
hence, the user can transferor the disturbance recording file to the PC using the engineering
tool ‘GR-TIEMS’. Figure 8.3-4 shows the example of the GR-TIMES screen. For more
information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
8.3.7 Setting
Setting of DRT_LP(Function ID: 4B0001)
Default
Range Uni
Setting item Contents setting value Notes
ts
1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A
OC-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-DRT enable Off
OC-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A OC-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
EF-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-DRT enable Off
EF-DRT 0.10 - 50.00 0.50 - 250.00 A EF-DRT relay operating value 0.20 1.00
UV-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger UV-DRT enable –
UV-DRT 5.0 - 130.0 – UV-DRT relay operating value –
UVS-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger UVS-DRT enable –
UVS-DRT 5.0 - 130.0 V UVS-DRT relay operating value –
9 Monitoring function
Contents Pages Pages
Accumulated time 1000 Metering features –
Counter features – -Information 987
-Information in GCNT 999 -Diminishing small value 989
Demand features – -Flow settings for P, Q, S 989
-Information 995 -Measurement settings 988
-Demand cycle 996 -Information on the screen 987
-Resetting data in demand features 996 -Polarity setting for PF 990
-Max/Min/Ave information 996 Peak Demand features –
Dead band features – -Max/Min/Ave. information 998
-V, I, P, Q, S, PF, Frequency. 991 -Reset of peak-demand data 998
-Wh, Varh, Phase, Voltage difference 991 Power settings –
-GCNT 999 -Information on the screen 994
-TOTALTIM 1001 -Regulating power values 994
-Power values settings 994
Total time measurements –
-Information in TOTALTIM 1000
Outline
The monitoring function is provided to measure the number of power quantities and statistics
data obtained within the VCT and BI circuits†. When the measuring instruments start
measures power quantities, mathematical means is applied to the data from the VCT so that
the data are shown accurately on the IED screen. The monitoring function has several screens
together.
†Note:The VCT/BIO structures and their features are discussed in Chapter Technical
description.
currents Ie (1)
Va, Vb, Vc
Voltage in phase, phase-to-phase, and symmetrical Vab, Vbc, Vca
Metering
10:48 1/59
Ia
12.345kA 123.45deg
Ib
12.345kA 123.45deg
Ic
12.345kA 123.45deg
Metering
10:48 1/2
Display Value +
Primary
I-Display Unit +
kA
V-Display Unit +
kV
II
(P<0)
I
(P>0)
II
(P>0)
I
(P<0)
V V (+)
III I
IV
(P>0)
III
(P>0)
I
IV
(P<0) (P<0)
a. Metering (P) for supplying power b. Metering (P) for absorbing power
[Power]=Send [Power]=Receive
Figure 9.2-3 Sign of the active power (P) ruled by setting [Power]
[Current] (Figure 9.2-4.a). On the other hand, the Q value will have the plus sign (+) based on
the P value, when Lead set for the setting (Figure 9.2-4.b).
II
(Q>0)
I
(Q>0)
II
(Q<0)
I
(Q<0)
V
V
III
(Q<0)
I
IV
(Q<0)
III I
IV
(Q>0)
(Q>0)
a. Q (shown in quadrant IV) has a minus sign b. Q (shown in quadrant IV) has a plus sign because
because the Q is supplied by the outside source. the Q is absorbed by the outside source. The
The decision is made with the P (shown in the decision is based on the P (shown in the
quadrant IV, defined with [Power]=Send) having quadrant I, defined with [Power]=Receive)
“a plus sign” when the current lags the voltage. having “a minus sign” when the current leads
the voltage.
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead
Figure 9.2-4 Sign of the reactive power (Q) ruled by setting [Current]
(i) AP setting
When the sign of the PF value is required to match with the sign of the P value, set AP for the
setting [PF_sign].
II I II I
(PF <0) (PF>0) (PF <0) (PF <0)
[Power]=
V [Current
III
(PF <0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF >0)
(PF>0) (PF >0) a. Q has a minus sign be
the outside. The deci
[Power]=Send [Power]=Send sending P having “a
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead lags the voltage.
[Current]=Lag
II I II I
(PF >0) (PF<0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
V
V
III
(PF >0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF<0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
Figure 9.2-5 PF sign matched with the sign of the P value (i.e., [PF sign]=AP)
II I II I
(PF <0) (PF>0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
[Powe
V [Curr
III
(PF >0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF >0)
(PF<0) (PF <0) a. Q has a minus sign
the outside. The d
[Power]=Send [Power]=Send sending P having
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead lags the voltage.
[Current]=Lag
II I II I
(PF >0) (PF<0) (PF <0) (PF >0)
V
V
III
(PF <0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF>0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
Time=e, the value of the entering current will be sent to the network, because the repeated
number is incremented. After that, the repeated number will be set zero (0); the new positon
for the SD feature is set (i.e., from Time=e).
Lower limit
Repeat number
4
3
2
1
0 Time
a b c d e f g h i j k
Units for
Quantities SD settings Setting ranges
settings
Difference of voltages† dVSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
†Note:The values are derived in the VCHK function. For more information, see Chapter
Relay application: Voltage check for autoreclose function.
Metering
10:48 1/8
ISD +
5.00 %
VSD +
0.60 %
dVSD +
0.60 %
Power Value
10:48 1/4
Wh+ +
0.0MWh
Wh- +
0.0MWh
varh+ +
0.0Mvarh
Current in phase-b (Max., Min., and Ave. data) Ib Max, Ib Min, Ib Ave
Current in phase-c (Max., Min., and Ave. data) Ic Max, Ic Min, Ic Ave
Residual current (Max., Min., and Ave. data) Ie Max, Ie Min, Ie Ave(1)
The other residual current on parallel lines (Max., Min., and Averaged) Iem Max, Iem Min, Iem Ave(1)
Voltage applied at phase-a (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Va Max, Va Min, Va Ave
Voltage applied at phase-b (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vb Max, Vb Min, Vb Ave
Demand
value Vc Max, Vc Min, Vc Ave
Voltage applied at phase-c (Max., Min., and Averaged data)
Voltage applied between phases-a-to-b (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vab Max, Vab Min, Vab Ave
Voltage applied between phases-b-to-b (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vbc Max, Vbc Min, Vbc Ave
Voltage applied between phases-c-to-a (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vca Max, Vca Min, Vca Ave
Zero-sequence voltage (Max., Min., and Averaged data) V0 Max, V0 Min, V0 Ave(2)
Reference voltages (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vs Max, Vs Min, Vs Ave
The other reference voltages (Max., Min., and Averaged data) Vs2 Max, Vs2 Min, Vs2 Ave
1Note: The ‘Ie’ and ‘Iem’ are taken usually with corresponding VCT circuits.
2Note: Terms ‘I0 (i.e., 3I0)’ and ‘V0 (i.e., 3V0)’ are gotten in the software calculation using
three-phase quantities.
Demand Value
10:48 1/42
Ia Max
0.00kA
Ia Min
0.00kA
Ia Ave
0.00kA
Metering
10:48 21/23
PhaseSD +
0.50 deg
PeriodSD +
0
Demand_period +
10 min
Demand Value
10:48 1/2
Demand Value >
Reset All Values +
Peak Demand
10:48 1/2
Peak Demand Value >
Reset All Values +
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter General control function: Counter function for the general (GCNT) .
‡Note:See Chapter Relay application: Autoreclose for more information.
Counter
10:48 1/32
ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND +
0
ARC1_SPAR +
0
ARC1_TPAR +
0
Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
ACT_TIME +
***d **h **m
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter Control and monitoring application: Total time measurement function
Total Time
10:48 1/12
TOTAL TIME 1 +
****d **h **m
TOTAL TIME 2 +
****d **h **m
TOTAL TIME 3 +
****d **h **m
(ii) Communication
(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu: Communication. The communication features about the LAN port is discussed in
Chapter Communication protocol: LAN communication. The hardware information is
discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module).
(iii) Binary IO
(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu: Binary I/O. The structure and its operation is discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module).
(v) Diagnostics
(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring
sub-menu: Diagnostics sub-menu. The information about the diagnostics is discussed in
Chapter Automatic supervision).
Setting
Metering settings in MES (Function ID: 710001)
Default
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
setting value
Display Value Primary/Secondary – Display selection of primary or secondary Primary
Power Send/Receive – Power flow definition (Supply or absorb) Send
Current Lead/Lag – The angle compared with the voltage Lead
PF Sign AP/AP+RP – Denison of the sign of the power factor AP+RP
I-Valid Level 0.10 to 5.00 % Cutting off small entering current 4.00
V-Valid Level 0.10 to 5.00 % Cutting off small applied voltage 0.30
I-Display Unit A/kA – Current shown in Ampere or Kilo-Ampere kA
V-Display Unit V/kV – Voltage shown in Volt or Kilo-Volt kV
P-Display Unit kW/MW – Active power shown in Kilo- or Mega-watt MW
Q-Display Unit kvar/Mvar – Reactive power shown in Kilo- or Mega-var Mvar
S-Display Unit kVA/MVA – Apparent power shown in Kilo- or Mega-VA MVA
10 Automatic supervision
Contents Pages Pages
61850 irregular data 1050 Interruption 1023
A/D accuracy error on VCT 1027 LAN error 1047
Abnormal currents flowing on CTs 1028 LAN pinging error 1048
Aux. contacts monitoring 1052 LRE error 1049
BIO module#1 error 1033 MRAM memory error 1019
BIO module#2 error 1034 PLC Data error 1043
BIO module#3 error 1035 Power supply failure 1042
BIO module#4 error 1036 Program code error 1021
BIO module#5 error 1037 RAM error 1017
BIO module#6 error 1038 ROM and RAM mismatch 1015
BIO module#7 error 1039 RUN error 1022
BIO module#8 error 1040 Sampling error 1024
CB failure 1045 Setting error 1025
CB interruption capability error 1074 Sigma Iy error 1076
Check-sum error 1016 Trip circuit error 1070
Clock error 1026 Trip circuit supervision task 1066
CT open circuit 1029 Voltage error in negative-sequence 1032
Current error in zero-sequence 1030 Voltage error in zero-sequence 1032
DS failure 1046 VT error 1044
ECC memory error 1018
FPGA problem 1020
GOOSE publishing error 1051
HMI malfunction 1041
Tips: The alarms can be blocked when Off is set for the switch [A.M.F]. The switch can be
used to remove alarms during testing. See Chapter User interface: Test sub-menu
for more information.
The user can see a current error information in Monitoring sub-menu† on the LCD
screen† (see Figure 10.1-1); Table 10.1-3 shows the six detail information, which the user can
examine carefully using the hexadecimal number. When two or more errors occur at the same
time, an error code is given by the summation of the error codes. That is, when X and Y errors
(e.g., X-error-code ‘00000002’ and Y-error-code ‘00000004’) occur, the sum value ‘00000006’ is
screened.
CP1M(ROM/RAM) error 1/1 Current error indicated by Supervision
10:48 Current local time (Not Error occurring time)
[Serious error] Error degree (level) displayed
Detailed information in Hexadecimal dump
[00000011] [01234567] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[01234567]
[01234567]
[01234567]
[00000000] [ “Top left” ][ “Top right” ]
[ “Middle left” ][ “Middle right” ]
[ “Bottom left” ][ “Bottom right” ]
Figure 10.1-1 Example error codes and detailed information on Diagnostics sub-menu
†See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics. Note that the
information will not be updated automatically. Refresh the information if required.
Table 10.1-3 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in the ROM and the RAM error (example)
Display Meaning of the detailed information
area Left column Right column
00000001: ROM read error
Top row ROM address
00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle row RAM address ROM value
Bottom row RAM value (No information displayed)
Detailed Error
Sec. No. Supervision items (Screen message) Info. Lvl. LED
10.2.32 Supervision of disconnector contacts (DS fail) N/A 3 ON
10.2.33 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error) Displayed 3 ON
10.2.34 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) Displayed 3 ON
10.2.35 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) Displayed 1 ON
10.2.36 Supervision of data in 61850 settings (Commslv error) Displayed 3 ON
10.2.37 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) Displayed 3 ON
10.2.38 Aux. contacts monitoring (DPSY/DOPS/TOPS faulty or undefined) Displayed 3 ON
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 10.2-2 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Generic tasks except the below ✓ ✓
10.2.38 Aux. Contact monitoring NA ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
Middle
RAM address ROM value
row
Bottom
RAM value (No information displayed)
row
where,
Max (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
Min (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The smallest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
k0: 20% of the rated current†
†Note:When the VCT has two or more three-phase-CT circuits, the CT supervision may
be required to operate for respective CT circuits. The rated current above the
equation is defined with VCT setting. For more information regarding the VCT, see
Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input . Settings
are required to respective groups of the three-phase currents.
|Ia + Ib + Ic − Ie |
1. ≥ 0.1 × Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) + k 0 (10.2-2)
3
where,
Ie Residual current
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0: 5% of the rated current†
†Note:The rated current above the equation is defined with the setting of the VCT. For
more information regarding the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input.
The voltage in negative sequence can be used to detect a failure within the voltage input
circuit in high sensitivity. It facilitates the detection of the incorrect phase sequence if cables
are irregularly.
|Va + 𝑎2 Vb + aVc |
1. ≥ 6.35 (V) (10.2-3)
3
where,
a = Phase shift operator of 120
|Va + Vb + Vc |
1. ≥ 6.35 (V) (10.2-4)
3
Middle
(No information is displayed) (No information is displayed)
row
Bottom
(No information is displayed) (No information is displayed)
row
10.2.39 Setting
Setting of CHK_SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
… … … …
PING_IP_ADRS4 0 - 255 1
PING_IP_ADRS4 0 - 255 1
3210111001 CHECKSUMC
32E0001001 CHK_POINT
3210201001 LOADERSUM
3210121001 PROG_SIZE
… … …
… … …
Displaying error message founded by the TCS function is shown in Table 10.3-1; the
error is cleared when recovered
Table 10.3-1 Supervision items and error levels for Trip supervision
Detailed Error
Sec. No. Supervision items(Screen message) Info. Lvl LED
10.3.1 Trip circuit error (TC error) N/A 3 On
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 10.3-2 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
8000011BB2
800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
TCS1-EN On
8100021B60
8200031B60
8300041B60
8400051B60
8500061B60
≥1
8F00001B60
TC_FAIL
(ii) Applications
Example1
Figure 10.3-2 provides an application example of the TCS function. Two binary-input signals
are assigned to PLC connection points “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”.
When the trip circuit is healthy, a small current will flow in the BI circuits, the CB auxiliary
contacts, and the trip coil. This small current can be observed to flow in both the CB-open
condition and the CB-closed condition. If the small current supplied to the trip circuit is lost,
or if the connections between the trip circuit and the BI circuits become open circuit, a signal
"TC1_FAIL" is generated; then, the TCS1 logic will issue a Trip Circuit Fail alarm.
Note: A threshold setting voltage is required for the BI circuits. The user should set the
threshold to one-half of the value of the trip supply voltage. This is because in this
scheme there are two BI circuits connected in series. The supply voltage across the
BI circuit will be divided by two when the 52 contact is closed and the 52b contact
is open. Thus, the BI circuit may fail to operate if the BI sensitivity is only set in
response to the supply voltage. For example, the BI threshold voltage should be set
below 55V when a trip supply voltage of 110V is applied. For the TCS function, the
user should select two BI circuits from the BI2A module or the BIO4 module,
because the BI circuits of both of these modules can have lower threshold voltages
than the BI circuits that are available in other modules.
Trip circuit
()
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
BI1 Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1
circuit &
8000011B60
R 8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
Trip coil
()
LCP & GIS
Example2
In Example2 a binary input signal is assigned to PLC connection point
“TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1”. With this arrangement if the CB is open, the small monitoring
current will not be able to flow in the BI circuit. Therefore, it is recommended that setting
OPT-On is selected for the scheme switch [TCS1-EN] and that a CB-closed-status signal is
applied to PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_COND”. Monitoring is only enabled while the CB
is in the closed position when using this setting. This setting avoids unnecessary monitoring
when the circuit breaker is open when using this scheme.
Trip circuit
()
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
52a
8000011BB2
800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
CB closed TCS1-EN On
status signal
Trip coil
()
LCP & GIS
10.3.3 Setting
Setting of TCS(Function ID: 482001)
Setting item Range Units Contents Default setting value Notes
…. …. …. ….
Displaying error message founded by the sigma_Iy function is shown in Table 10.4-1.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 10.4-2 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “G&T”
Sec. Feature
31 32
– Main features ✓ ✓
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
y y y y
∑ IY =I1 +I2 +I3 +⋯+In (10.4-1)
As setting for a conventional CB with regard to the parameter ‘y’, the user can set a
value ‘2.0’ for the [SIGMA_IY-Y]; that is, the accumulation is performed with the fault currents
squared (I 2). On the other hand, the user can be required to set a less value (say ‘1.0’) for the
[SIGMA_IY-Y] when a special CB is required (that is, for the high voltage system).
Tripping CB
Command issuing #1
Command issuing #2 Tripping CB
Command issuing #n
y y y y
∑ IY =I1 +I2 +I3 +⋯+In
The sigma_Iy function can designed to issue an alarm when the synthesized broken
current value reaches an alarm level set by [SIGMA_IY-Alarm]; issuing an alarm is ready
when the user sets On for scheme switch [SIGMA_IY-AEN].
10.4.3 Setting
Setting of SIGMA_IY (Function ID: 713001)
Setting item Range Units Contents Default setting value Notes
11 Communication protocol
Contents Pages Pages
IEC 60870-5-103 interface – LAN communication –
-Interface 1128 -IP address 1081
-Interoperability 1131 -Hot standby operation 1082
-Protocol 1151 -PRP/HSR operation 1089
IEC 61850 interface – -RSTP operation 1093
-Engineering 1107 -Monitoring (Hot standby) 1084
-Monitor 1123 -Monitoring (PRP/HSR) 1091
-Protocol 1123 Protocol selection 1080
-Quality signal 1124 RS485 communication 1156
-Setting 1122 USB communication 1155
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such protocols depends on the selection of protocols. Several
IED models do not have the protocols. To determine whether the protocols are implemented in
the IED, locate the IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “U position”
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 10.4-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “U”
Sec. Feature
1 2
11.2.1 TCP/IP ✓ ✓
11.2.2 Hot-standby ✓ ✓
11.2.3 PRP/HSR NA ✓1
11.2.4 RSTP NA ✓1
11.3 IEC 61850 ✓2 ✓
11.4 IEC 60870-5-103 ✓2 NA
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
1 LAN modules, designed for PRP/HSR/RSTP marked with “L or N” code at position “E”, shall
be mounted in IED, if network operation in PRP/HSR/RSTP is required.
2 Either 61850 or 103 shall be selected during the operation.
Figure 11.1-1 illustrates the LAN and USBCOM sub-menus provided for the connection
to the LAN, whereas the SLAVE PROTOCOL sub-menu is for the selection of either the
IEC61850 or the IEC103 protocols. The IEC61850 sub-menu has its own settings, so does the
IEC103 menu. The RS485 sub-menu is screened when the IED has the one used for the
IEC103 in the serial communication.
Communication
10:48 1/6
LAN >
USBCOM >
RS485 >
SLAVE PROTOCOL >
IEC61850 >
IEC103 SLV >
Figure 11.1-1 Example of Setting menu ‘IEC61850, IEC103, RS485 and USB’
†Note:The select operation is depends on the IED configurations, which the customer has
determined with the ordering code. Accordingly, the select operation can be
unavailable if the protocol is not provided in the IED. To examine the IED
configuration, check your ordering code referring Appendix: Ordering.
‡Note:We have discussed the specifications regarding the communication interface. See
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
§Note:The setting function is provided with the function ‘CNN_SLAVE’. The setting list
and Signal monitoring point (in Data ID) are shown below:
CNN_SLAVE (Function ID: 300001)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value
Slave Protocol IEC61850 / IEC103 Protocol selection IEC61850
S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Canceling Test-flag in the slave communication Off
LAN operation
11.2.1 LAN address (IP address)
When LAN module(s) are provided, the IED can communicate using the “Transmission
Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”. The user can set IP addresses and other
information in accordance with the requirements of TCP/IP. Table 11.2-1 shows the setting
items provided for the LAN†.
When the wishing to change addresses, the user can use this setting menu. Figure 11.2-1
shows the setting menu provided to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192.168.1.11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255.255.255.1
GATEWAY1 +
192.168.1.1
†Note:For the location of the LAN communication modules, see Chapter Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:IP address setting is dependent on the selection of the communication protocols.
For setting [RedundantMode]=Hot-standby, an IP address should be assigned for
the both A and B pots (i.e., a single one is set for the both; see Table 11.2-4).
Similarly, for [RedundantMode]=PRP/HSR/RSTP, an IP address will be assigned
for the both (see Table 11.2-5).
When setting [RedundantMode]=Fixed, two IP addresses can be assigned for the
respective ports, provided two ports are sited (see Table 11.2-5).
‡Note:Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu describes how to set the address on the
IED screen.
†Note: When the user wishes not to operate Hot-standby, or the network is not ready for
the redundant, set Fixed for the [RedundantMode]. Port B (located at C12 if
provided) can only operate for the connection with the engineering tool
(GR-TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®).
‡Note: See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
(i) Overview
For the Hot-standby communication, the first communication module for Network is used as
the primary port, (i.e. Port A at C11) while a second communication module for Network, (i.e.
Port B at C12) is used as the secondary port; the IED will communicate using Port A for
normal operation. If a communications failure occurs at Port A, the IED can automatically
switch communication from Port A to Port B.
When the IED detects the occurrence of a communications failure, for which the LAN
module is unable to respond to the IED (i.e. a communications link is down), the IED starts a
timer. When the timer exceeds a setting [DownTime], the IED will switch ports. Thus, Port B
is then used for communications. (Note that Port A can be determined to be the secondary port
on the occurrence of the failure. If Port B is unable to continue to operate, then Port A will be
re-switched to run after a predetermined setting [UpTime]. Then, Port B will be discriminated
as the secondary port.)
The user should be aware of the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of Port A for the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of Port B is not used even if communication is carried out on Port
B.
2 The user should ensure that an optical fiber is correctly connected when a
100Base-FX module is used, otherwise a repeat communication failure (link-down)
will be experienced continuously. If the period for which the link-down is shorter
than the setting [DownTime], another port cannot be switched as the primary port.
Thus, the user should determine the setting value to be applied for [DownTime] on
the basis of the system requirement. It is allowable for the user to apply a setting
of zero for [DownTime] so that the switching of the ports will be performed
immediately; conversely, the user can set any value less than 3000ms in order that
the system need not experience chattering failures if the optical fiber were not
connected securely. Switching between the primary and the secondary ports is not
carried out during a value is setting for the [DownTime]. The user should consider
the setting approach for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
3 The auto-negotiation function is executed when the 100Base-TX modules establish
communication over the communications network. The auto-negotiation function
selects a mode for communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the
communication speed. In the case of a link-down condition, the auto-negotiation
function will run again immediately. The link-down condition continues until
auto-negotiation has been completed (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user
can apply a setting for [DownTime] for any value of time less than that required by
the auto-negotiation function in response to the system requirement (i.e. the user
can set [DownTime] to be zero milliseconds). In this case, switching between the
primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i.e. prior to the
auto-negotiation function running. If switching between ports is not required
before the completion of the auto-negotiation function, the user can set the setting
[DownTime] longer than the time required by the auto-negotiation function. The
user can consider the setting for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
(vi) Monitor
LCD screen: The user can examine the statuses about the communion modules by
the monitoring function. Figure 11.2-2 shows the port status about the modules;
terms ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ mean running and stopping, respectively. For menus
operations, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
Port 1 (i.e., Port A) is connected. Ports 1&2 (i.e., Port A&B) are connected.
Port 2 (i.e., Port B) is not connected.
Status signals for Port A and Port B: The user can also examine the LAN status
using PLC signal monitoring points ‘Port1_Link (3100061001)’ and ‘Port2_Link
(3100061001)’ of the HOTST function. For example, when the user wishes to monitor
the status of the Prot1_Link, use the ‘Port1_Link’. Consequently, the user can get the
physical information about the Port A: the value ‘1’ is issued when the
When Hot_Standby is set for the [RedundantMode], the user can find a running port
using the PLC signal monitoring point ‘Using_CH (3100081001)’ of the HOTST
function. Value ‘1’ is provided when the Port A is running, whereas value ‘2’ is
provided when the Port B is running.
Monitor setting: The Hot-standby (HOTST) function can send PING packets to
remote devices thus enabling the Hot-standby function to monitor the state of
the network. The Hot-standby function checks for a response signal from the
remote device. If the Hot-standby function does not receive a response signal, the
Hot-standby function will switch to the other port. The operation is performed
when the user sets the [RedundantMode]= Hot_Standby and [NetMonitor_EN] =
On.
Settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are provided in the Hot-standby function for the
monitoring of remote devices on the network. When the user sets plural remote IP
addresses for the settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function does not
receive a response from any one of these remote devices, the Hot-standby function
determines that a communication failure has occurred. Table 11.2-3 shows the
network monitoring settings for Hot-standby operation.
The user should note that the use of network monitoring could increase the burden
Example1: There is a remote device on the network with the address Ping_IP1.
The Hot-standby function sends ping packets to the remote device every five
seconds; then the Hot-standby function waits for one second until the
Hot-standby function receives a response signal from the remote device. The
Hot-standby function will determine that a communication failure has occurred
if two sequential response signals are not received from the remote device.
Subsequently, the Hot-Standby function will switch from one port to the other
port (See Figure 11.2-3). The following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for setting [Ping_IP1]. (the setting of
IP addresses in the other remote devices is not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Local IED Remote device with
Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 1sec Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports is
performed if a response signal is
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
not received for setting
[Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Example2: It is assumed that there are three remote devices on the network:
Ping_IP1, Ping_IP2, and Ping_IP3. The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet to
every remote device every 10 second (i.e., the IED sends a ping packet to a remote
device every 30 second). Suppose that “1” is set for [Check_Count]. The Hot-standby
function can determine a communication failure after 30 seconds if one of the remote
devices is unable to send a response. Figure 11.2-4 shows the operation. Switching is
not executed, because the IED cannot confirm all no-responses from the remote
addresses in the milled of the figure. Switching is performed after no-response is
confirmed from all remote devices.
・ The IP addresses of the remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP3].
(Setting IP addresses for other remote devices is not required.)
・ 10seconds is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “1” is set for [Check_Count].
5sec
5sec
10sec
NG: due to no response
LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed a response from the IP3.
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response.
IP address at
Not applicable 192.168.1.12‡ 192.168.1.12§
Port B
†Note:Port A ‘192.168.1.11 (default)’ is ready for IEC61850 (GOOSE), but Port B is not
ready for IEC61850.
‡Note: Single IP address is generally set in SNTP. The user is not recommended to have
Time synchronization using different IP addresses with ‘Port A’ and ‘Port B’.
§Note: For the local PC engineering, the use of Port B (192.168.1.12, default) is
recommended, but the user can also use Port A (192.168.1.11, default) for that.
(i) Overview
‘Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP)’ is designed for double LAN networks in order to
construct high availability automation networks. Figure 11.2-5 shows an IED (i.e., Source,
IED1 with Port A and Port B†) and a server (i.e., Destination, Substation computer with Port
A and Port B). They are connected through LAN_A and LAN_B. For duplicating data, the IED
have Link redundancy entity (LRE) so that the IED can transfer data with A-Frame packet
and B-Frame packet at the same time. At the destination, either frames being arrived later is
removed.
Substation computer
CPU
Operator
workstation
Data
Port A Port B
Rx Tx Rx Tx
Destination RedBox‡
A-Frame
LAN_A
B-Frame
LAN_B
TOSHIBA
IN SERVICE
ERROR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
RedBox‡
Tx
I Port A
R Data LAN module
L (C11)
CPU I
O Help Cancel ENTER
R
IED1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 L Data
CPU
Source O Help Cancel ENTER
I
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
IED3
Figure 11.2-5 PRP example for redundant LAN_A and LAN_B with DANP
†Note:For the locations about the LAN module, see Chapter Technical description: Signal
processing and communication modules.
‡Note: IED3 and Operator workstation (connected with singly attached node) can join the
network with Redundancy boxes (RedBox).
‘High-availability Seamless redundancy (HSR)’, for the ring topology, is designed to achieve
high reliability communication. Figure 11.2-6 illustrates IEDs connected over the ring LAN.
As doubly ports (Port A and Port B) are embedded in an IED, the IED can transfer the data
packet (A-Frame and B-Frame) for the destination over the ring LAN.
Source Destination
TOSHIBA
IED1 IN SERVICE
ERROR Substation Computer Operator Workstation
CPU CPU
CPU
Data Data
Data
I Port B Port A Port B Port A
R
L Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Port B Port A
O Help Cancel ENTER
Rx Tx Rx Tx
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
B-Frame B-Frame
A-Frame A-Frame A-Frame
Ring LAN1
A-Frame A-Frame
B-Frame B-Frame B-Frame
TOSHIBA TOSHIBA
IN SERVICE
IN SERVICE
ERROR
ERROR
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Port A Port B QuadBox QuadBox Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12) (C11) (C12)
Data Data
I I
R R
L Ring LAN2 L
CPU CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 IED4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
A-Frame
B-Frame
TOSHIBA
IN SERVICE
ERROR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12)
Data
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
For Figure 11.2-5 example, the IED1 (Source) duplicates data by the LRE. The
duplicated data (in A and B-Frames) are transferred simultaneously over the LAN_A and
LAN_B. In the meantime, both frames cannot arrive at Substation computer (Destination). If
the duplicated frame is older than the setting [EntryForgetTime], the duplicated frame will be
removed.
The [EntryForgetTime] has default 400ms setting, but the user can change it for an
appropriate value among 100 to 10,000ms. The setting value should be taken account of the
time after the entry removed from the duplicate table. The setting value also should be taken
account of the differences of the communication speeds between LANs.
(iv) Supervision
The communication supervisor function is available in PRP and HSR. The user can have
following settings:
Setting [LineCheckInterval]: is the setting of the interval time to send supervision frames
cyclically. The user is able to choice the time among 100ms to 100,000ms, but the
setting has default 2000ms values.
Setting [SV_Dst_MACAddr]: is for a reserved multicast address ’01-15-4E-00-01-xx’. By
default, ‘00’ is set for the ‘xx’. However, if conflict arises, the use can configure to
set any value between 0x00 and 0xFF for the ‘xx’.
Setting [SV_VLAN_EN]: can have On setting when the supervision frame is used in
VLAN. Additionally, the user can set identification specifying the VLAN to which
the supervision frame belongs and the priority of the supervision frame. Use the
settings [SV_VLAN_ID] and [SV_VLAN_Priority]. By default, Off is set for the
[SV_LAN_EN].
(v) Monitor
It is possible for the user to watch the communion statuses about Port A and Port B. Figure
11.2-7 shows the numbers of transferred packets via ports.
RedundantPacketNum
10:48 1/6
PortA_Send 12345
PortA_Recv 12345
PortA_ErrLANID 12345
PortB_Send 12345
PortB_Recv 12345
PortB_ErrLANID 12345
(i) Overview
‘Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)’ is designed to achieve LAN bridge connections in
stable. The RSTP choose one of bridges as the root and BPDU data (called ‘Bridge Protocol
Data Unit) is exchanged periodically over RPST network. Each bridge can listen and learn the
BPDU data so that all bridges in the network can find the shortest path for the root location
(we call it “Path-cost”). Consequently, the RTSP operation clear and recover the network
failure if occurred; no temporary loop will not occur in the network (that is, all terminals can
have loop-free LAN).
(ii) Parameters
When RSTP is set for the [RedundantMode], the user should enter several PSTP parameters
so that the IED is able to enjoy the Spanning Tree topology by the RSTP:
Setting [BridgeHelloTime]: is used to set a BPDU transferring cycle for other terminals
(i.e., BPDU sending interval; they are sent for IEDs, Network bridges, etc.)
Setting [BridgePrioriy]: is allowed for the user to make priority tables in the IEDs. When
a terminal has the smallest number, the terminal can become the root bridge with high
possibility Note that a number can be set in 4096 steps.
Note: the user shall take the above settings based on the IEEE 802.1w equations below:
Setting [PortA_PathCost]: is used to set the distance for the root bridge (path cost), when
the port is used in the LAN network, actually. As a rule, the setting value depends on the
communication bandwidth.
Setting [PortA_Priority]: is set a priority value for the port. Similar to the setting
[BridgePrioriy], a port having the smallest number can have the highest priority. Note
that a number can be set in 16 steps
†Note: Port A (connection for LAN_A) is located at C11 of IED. The second Port B
(connection for Port B) is located at C12 and has similar settings. See Table 11.2-6
for the IP addresses examples. The user can find the contents about LAN
communication module in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and
communication module.
11.2.5 Settings
Setting of TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
Un
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
its
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First IP address in the local IED 192.168.1.11
Port A SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – Subnet mask 255.255.255.1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168.1.1
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – Second IP address in the local IED 192.168.1.11
Port B SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – Subnet mask 255.255.255.1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168.1.1
3111101001 RX2_CNT
3111111001 RX2ER_CNT
3111201001 TX2_CNT
3111211001 TX2ER_CNT
3211021001 PortB_Send frames sent over B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211071001 PortB_Recv frames received over Port B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
Remote
Monitoring
GPS
Communication Substation
Operator Network
Workstation Computer
Engineering
Workstation Printer Router/
Modem
GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL
GOOSE
†Note:When applying IEC 61850 communications, the user should map application
signals with the required logical-nodes (LNs) within the IED. In this manual, we
show the application signals as Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the
Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided
by Toshiba. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
‡Note:Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the
user should verify its IEC 61850 capability by reviewing both the
protocol-implementation-conformance-statement (PICS) and the
When TCP/IP operates, the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer, operator
workstation (OWS), engineering workstation (EWS), remote monitoring system, SNTP server.
In the SAS, the communication is served with the method of data transfer:
Report method of sending event messages like measurement, status, alarm and so on
GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) method of communication
between IEDs like interlock
Control method like controlling the circuit breaker (CB), the disconnector (DS), the
selector device (43), the transformer tap (TAP) and so on
For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and
logical nodes. The user should configure the 61850 Data Model to perform a required function
for the protection and control.
Modular approach achieves data transfer between devices in the IEC 61850 standard.
All function in the IEC 61850 network are grouped into smaller objects called Logical Nodes
(LNs), which contains process objects related data and attributes of a logical device protection
and control function. Logical Node Zero (LLN0) represents specific information of the logical
device. Logical Node Physical Device (LPHD) represents specific information of a physical
device. A generic device is called Physical device (PD). The LPHD contains the properties of
the PD. A specific function in the IED is represented as domain specific LN. The domain
specific LN contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network.
LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged
between PDs. The relation between data object classes, data types, data attributes and
abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model. The LN data model is mapped to
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) functions. Table 11.3-1shows the description of LNs.
All LN classes (LLN0 and domain specific LN) receive the mandatory data of the
common LN except LPHD. Table 11.3-2 exemplifies Function, Logical node and
Communication service used in the IEC 61850 communication.
Figure 11.3-2 exemplifies Physical Model, which is equivalent to the IEC 61850 Model.
The Physical Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with
the SAS using the Ethernet. The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at
LNs in both the PD using different Communication services, which we shall discuss in section
11.3.2.
Monitoring
x Control IED SAS
×
Over current Server / Work
CB Open/Close
relay station
CB Status
Measuring
Harmonics
measurement
Measuring
Control / Monitoring Protection function
Physical Model
“Logical Node” “Communication Service”
IEC 61850 Model Physical Device
LN Physical Device
LN LPHD LN
GOOSE
CB XCBR CALH
LN Enhanced-security Control
LN
CSWI
IHMI
LN Buffered Report
LN
CT PTOC
LN IARC
GOOSE
PTRC
LN
Buffered Report
VT PTUV
LN Unbuffered Report
MHAI
LN GOOSE
Binary
SIMG
Input
Figure 11.3-2 Example of Physical model and its equivalent IEC 61850 model
The LN contains data list with their attributes based on their functionality in SAS. A
data has a well-defined structure and information of SAS. The data and attributes of the LN
in a logical device are exchanged by the communication services according to IEC 61850
protocol. The communication services are implemented by SCSM using Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol.
The data structures of the GOOSE are illustrated in Table 11.3-3; they are grouped for
the system (say, SAS) and other logical devices (say, a relay); they are used in the applications
in the SAS and the IED.
(iii) System
The data model in the LN named “System” is not allowed to modify (that is, a data model is
fixed; other LN data models are configurable to meet the system requirement). Mapping
signals to the GGIO1 is required when the GOOSE should send data faster.
IED
*IEC 61850-7-4
Logical device1 CONTROL
Logical Node
Current
Application
Data Logical device2
BIO ・・・ GOOSE GOOSE
DataSet
Binary
Control Block (outgoing)
Logical Node
Input
Binary
Input
2. Mapping 1. icd(cid)
data
GOOSE
GOOSE subscribe function
(incoming)
3. GOOSE subscribe
To configure the data structure of an IED, the user needs to edit the following items
using the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.3-4 shows the flow diagram for IEC 61850 configuration
using GR-TIEMS.
Edit Signal mapping
Edit Logical Node
Edit DataSet
Edit Report Control Block
Edit GOOSE Control Block
Edit GOOSE Publish
Edit GOOSE Subscribe
Edit Control function
Login to GR-TIEMS
Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree
Once the project is created, the user can add IEDs in the project tree structure as shown in
Figure 11.3-6.
Click ‘IEC 61850’, then check to see that four engineering screens are appeared:
Logical Node Screen
Signal List Screen
GOOSE Publish Screen
GOOSE Subscribe Screen
Import CID/ICD
Export CID
Export ICD
To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check the
mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list. If they have existed, the signals in the signal list
should be matched with the attributes of LNs.
Figure 11.3-10 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default
configuration. For example, to check for mapping of the primary element signal in earth fault
protection (EF1), follow the steps below:
1. To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN, key ‘EF1’ under Signal
Name in the Signal List screen.
Mapped data
3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and
select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in
Figure 11.3-12.
Mapped data
Drop
Drag
Signals
the MS-Excel® and import back into the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.3-14 shows the export / import
options.
Edit DataSet
Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in Figure 11.3-16.
For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below:
1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as shown in
Figure 11.3-16.
2. Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK.
*Note: 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have
maximum of 32 elements.
If the user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation, follow the steps below:
1. Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 11.3-18.
2. Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE.
Note: The user can assign any signal to GGIO1->Ind1~16 for high-speed GOOSE, as
required.
Drop
Drag
As shown in the above figure, signals are assigned to “System/GGIO1$Ind1”. The user
can assign signals to other GGIOs (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3 and so on) which are not
meant for high-speed GOOSE operation.
Figure 11.3-19 shows the GOOSE Publish screen, where “System” is fixed and is not
configurable for GGIO1, whereas “Ctrl” (Control) and “Prot” (Protection) are configurable. The
user can add new variables from the “Logical Node” screen to the GOOSE Publish screen
using drag & drop* method. Figure 11.3-19 shows an example for GOOSE Publish, where
“System/GGIO2$Ind1$stVal” is added to the GOOSE Publish screen.
*Note: Only “stVal” and “q” variables can be added to GOOSE Publish screen.
Drag
Fixed
Drop
In the example shown below, select the required variable and click Add. Similarly, the
user can delete the variables.
When the user adds a signal to the GOOSE subscribe list from the other IED, then the
same signal is automatically added in the Signal List of the current IED.
List 2
List 1 List 2
For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands from the
sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user should map an
input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure 11.3-21). Mapping period for
*Note: For more information of the input points, see chapter General control function or
Control and monitoring application, if available.
SBOW
Oper
DEV01_CONTROL_REQ
Cancel
†Note:For more information for the BI, BO, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module.
†Note:For example, Figure 11.3-23 shows the signal flow between a substation computer
(SC), an IED and a target device (e.g. CB). If the requirement is to close the CB on
request of the SC, the SC will send the operation command “Operate” to the IED;
the time information (T) is also sent along with the operation command. When
receiving the operation command and observing that the CB has closed, the IED
will send a response signal “CommTerm” to the SC along with the time information.
However, this time information is not the actual operation time of the CB, but the
same time information originally sent with the operation command. The IEC
61850 standard defines this rule; hence, general operations in the IEC 61850
standard are subject to this rule. However, the server communication provided by
Toshiba is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting ‘CommTerm’
is required in the Toshiba communication. The user should also note that Off is set
for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.
Command Open
Response
Process Closed
CommTerm+(T) Response
SLAVE PROTOCOL
10:48 1/1
Slave protocol +
IEC61850
Figure 11.3-24 Slave protection for the IEC61850 protocol (on IED setting menu)
Note: The menu is just screened when a couple of communication protocols are embedded
in the IED. Thus, the menu is not provided when the communication protocol
without the IEC 61850 standard is not embedded in the IED.
11.3.8 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
Monitoring point
GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
Element ID Name Description
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE being subscribed are not subscribed.
Monitoring point
GOOSE (Function ID: 301101)
Element ID Name Description
3100051001 SUB_QUAL#5 GOOSE subscription quality for record #5
11.4.1 Overview
For the communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the user should create the data with
regard the protocol, which is grouped into a slave and a master. The user can edit the slave
Data or the master Data using the GR-TIEMS.
(i) Management
As cited earlier, the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is grouped into the slave and the master. In an
IED the user should select either the master mode or the slave mode; the user should edit
either the master data or the slave Data. The both modes can provide the same functions
equally. The GR-TIEMS can provide the user the management means for the following data.
Data management
Import data are provided in the CSV file. The data are categorized as “adding items”,
“editing items”, “deleting items”, and “arranging items”.
Process management
Creation of the new data
Registration, clear, and change name of a slave IED
Registration and clear of signals
Edition of the dialog prototype
External Interfaces
Logging and Access Security
(ii) Configuration†
Table 11.4-1 and Table 11.4-2 show that the items should be programmed using the
GR-TIEMS. We shall see how to set and edit data of the IEC 60870-5-103 configuration in
section 11.4.5
Data request
Data request
Response frame
Figure 11.4-1 Ping cycles between the master station and the IED
11.4.3 Interoperability
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol provides a physical layer and an application layer for the
communication to secure the interoperability.
Optical interface
Several optical communication modules are available
(iv) Commands2
The user can customize the supported commands. The IED can replay for unsupported
commands using the cause of transmission (COT) negative acknowledgement of a command.
1Note: With regard to the GI list, see Appendix IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability. When
the user wishes to understand the details, refer to the section 7.4.3 of the IEC
60870-5-103 standard.
2Note: For details, refer to the section 7.4.4 of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
3Note: For details, refer to the section 7.4.5 of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
4Note: For details, refer to the section 7.4.6 of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Measurand period
This setting is used to set the transmission cycle (s) of Measurand frame. The setting range
is 0 to 60s. If no Measurand frame is provided by measurand setting, this setting is
disabled.
The test mode in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is enabled by the operation on the
IED screen or the GR-TIEMS. When the set signal changes “ON” and Time-tagged
message or Time-tagged measured of spontaneous cause (COT=1) or measurand frame or
cyclic transmission (Type ID=3 or 9) occurs, its COT shifts COT=7 (Test mode).
The time (ms), which is from the establishment of a set signal to the detection of a
status change, is added the set frame as RET value. FAN (Fault number), attached the
frame of Type ID=2 or 4, has the same number during the set signal ON. (Whenever the set
signal is ON, the FAN increases.) When setting to “0”, RET value is always “0” (RET=0).
The default setting is set to the OR signal of elements operation. When Type ID=2 frame is
provided with OC trip as send condition, for example, the time from OC element operation
to OC tripping is attached to the frame as RET. Though, the RET of GI frame is always “0”
in spite of this setting.
T1
T2
T3 t
Signal “ON” Type ID=2 Type ID=4 Signal “OFF” Type ID=2
i occurs ii occurs iii occurs
Figure 11.4-4 Occurrences after the signal “ON”
When the “Time-tagged message” tab is selected, the “Time-tagged message” setting
screen is displayed on the start screen.
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative
time) can be set in this screen. In one frame of Time-tagged message, the Type ID, INF,
FUN, DPI and COT must be set and the maximum 256 frames of Time-tagged message can
be set. The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most
left item “No.” is only serial number and can be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† in the IEC 60870-5-103
standard.
†Note:For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.
In the transmission format of Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) and Type ID=2
(Time-tagged message with relative time), customized items are shown in Table 11.4-3 and
Table 11.4-4.
Table 11.4-3 Time-tagged message (Type ID=1)
Oct. Item Value Remarks
1 Start 68H
2 Length 14
3 Length 14
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 08H+ACD+D
FC
6 Address 1-254 Setting from the relay
7 Type identification (Type ID) 1 Customized by GR-TIEMS
8 Variable structure qualifier 81H
Description
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
function of IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
The Data ID† (Sig. No.) showing the status of the frame is set from the signal list of the
relay. If the setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related events are disable and
the frame is not provided.
†Note:A relevant Data ID is required to select; the description is obtained
automatically.
Type ID
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)
is selected to set the frame type. It is recommended that the frame related to status is set
to Type ID=1 and the frame related to faults is set to Type ID=2. In Type ID=2, the trigger
signal for the relative time should be set. For the setting, see Section 11.4.5(i).
INF
Information number (INF) of the frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255. When the
standard frame is provided, the INF according to the Appendix† is recommended. If the
frame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-5 and the
Appendix†.
Table 11.4-5 INF category of Monitor direction
INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 Status
32 to 47 Supervision
48 to 63 earth fault
64 to 127 short circuit
128 to 143 auto-reclosure
144 to 159 Measurands
160 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions
†Note:See Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability: Semantics of Information
number.
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to Table 11.4-6. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When
clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed to
the setting values at Common setting.
Table 11.4-6 Semantics of Function type
0 - 127 private range
128 distance protection
129 not used
144 not used
145 not used
160 overcurrent protection
161 not used
176 transformer differential protection
177 not used
DPI/Off, DPI/On
Double-point information (DPI) is set using the menu as follows:
DPI/Off: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is OFF.
DPI/On: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is ON.
Note: If selecting “-”(=don’t care), the frame is not transmitted even though the
DPI/Sig.No. signal set change to the set status. In general, the frames related to
tripping such as “Time-tagged message” and Time-tagged measurand”, etc.,
which are not an object of GI (General Interrogation), are not transmitted when
the DPI changes “On” to “Off”. In this case, set the “DPI/Off” to “-”(=don’t care).
Note: When selecting “DP” for both “DPI/Off” and “DPI/On”, the DPI number is
transmitted as the number (=0/1/2/3) using the same information number (INF).
Regarding the frame related to a device control, the “undefined/failed” status
may be required in addition to the “close/open” status for the extension. When
selecting “DP”, “undefined(00)/close(01)/open(10)/failed(11)” status is applied in
the same information number (INF).
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but also two or more
COT can be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the
frame are as follows:
(1) If two or all of COT=1, 11 and 12 are checked per No., each frame of the No. become
the following conditions.
Table 11.4-7 COT
COT Conditions
COT=12
TR[ms] after receiving any command of the IEC 60870-5-1031
(remote operation)
COT=11
TL[ms] after Key operation on the relay front panel1
(local operation)
(2) If one of COT is specified per No., the frame is always supplemented with the
Table 11.4-8 shows the summary of (1), (2) and (3) above.
Table 11.4-8 COT setting pattern and COT supplemented frame
COT setting
pattern COT supplemented frame when status changes GI
1 9 11 12
Always “1” No
Events don’t occur. Yes
Always “11” No
Always “12” No
Always “1” Yes
“11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) No
“12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) No
Always “11” Yes
Always “12” Yes
“11” (cause at local) or “12” (cause at remote) or “1”
(other causes) No
“11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) Yes
“12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) Yes
“11” (cause at local) or “12” (cause at remote) or “1”
(other causes) No
“11” (cause at local) or “12” (cause at remote) or “1”
(other causes) Yes
“11” (cause at local) or “12” (cause at remote) or “1”
(other causes) Yes
Always “1” in spite of cause of event occurrence No
Note: When being in the test mode, the COT=1(Spontaneous) is shifted to 7(Test mode)
When the “Time-tagged measurand” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting
screen is displayed.
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time) can be set in this screen. In
one frame of Time-tagged measurand, the INF, FUN, Sig No., Rev, COT and SCL must be
set and the maximum eight frames of Time-tagged measurand can be set. The information
number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item “No.” is only
serial number and can be skipped.
In the transmission format of Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time),
customized items are shown in Table 11.4-9.
Description
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
The frame cannot be set to the object of GI and cannot be transmitted even though
the status of set signal changes from ON to OFF. If the metering values at the newest fault
record are transmitted as the status change frame, select the Data ID of “F.Record_DONE”
or “FAULT RECORD DONE” in the signal list of the relay.
†Note:A relevant Data ID is required to select in the signal list. The description of the
Data ID is obtained automatically on the setting.
Inverse
This setting is used to invert the logic of the signal assigned to the Data ID above. If the
frame is transmitted when the signal assigned to the Data ID is ON, leave the Inverse
check box blank. If the frame is transmitted when the signal is OFF, click the inverse check
box to be marked with “”.
Type ID
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with Relative time) is fixed. In Type ID=4, the trigger
signal for the relative time should be set. For the setting, see Section 11.4.5(i).
INF
Information number (INF) of the frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255. When the
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the
fame out of the standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-3 and the
Appendix†.
†Note:For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to the Table 11.4-4. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255.
When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are
changed to the setting values at Common setting.
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but two or more COT
can be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the frame
are according to Table 11.4-6. Though, the COT=9 (General Interrogation) cannot be
selected.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using
floating-point number. The SCL is a value which the power system quantity specified as
above is multiplied by this setting value.
When the “General command” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting screen
is displayed.
The frame of Type ID=20 (General command) and Command ACK/NACK can be set
in this screen. In one command of General command, the INF, FUN and DCO must be set.
The Command ACK/NACK is for detail setting and must not be set usually. (If do not check
the Ext check box, the setting of Command ACK/NACK is disabled and the Command ACK
and Command NACK respond according to the default response.)
The maximum 32 frames of General command and Command ACK/NACK can be set.
The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item
“No.” is only serial number and can be skipped.
In this setting screen, if a Data ID except “0” is set to “Sig Off” and “Sig On”, the
command at INF setting value is provided and Command ACK or Command NACK is sent
back when receiving the command from upper station. If both “Sig Off” and “Sig On” have
“0”, the fixed length NACK is always sent back then and the command is not provided.
Though the command is provided, however, Command NACK is always sent back and
no control is performed in the following cases:
(1): When receiving any General command from the upper station before Command
ACK/NACK is sending back from the relay.
(2): Under Monitor direction block condition (“IECBLK” setting is “blocked”.) when
receiving General command.
(3): When receiving an incorrect value of DCO of General command, that is DCO is
neither “1” nor “2”.
Primary Secondary
station station
General
Command
ACK
Class 1
Command
ACK/NACK
In the transmission format of General command (Type ID=20), customized items are
shown in Table 11.4-10.
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not
affect the function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Description
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Type ID
Type ID=20 (General command) is fixed.
INF
Information number (INF) of the frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255. When the
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the
frame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-12 and the
appendix†.
Table 11.4-12 INF category of Monitor direction
INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 status
32 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions
FUN
Function type (FUN) applied to a command response frame is set referring to Table 11.4-13.
The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common
setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting.
DCO/Sig Off Name, Signal Off Desc., DCO Signal On Name, Signal On Desc.,
Inverse
“Sig off” and “Sig On” are used to set the Data ID of control object in General command.
(Hereafter, these are described as “command output signal”.) “Inverse” is used to reverse
the logic when controlling the command output signal.
When the command output signal is treated as two signals (Sig Off Sig On), the
control scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving
command DCO and Inverse setting.
For example, when the DCO=Off command is received under “Inverse” no-checked,
the command output signal of “Sig Off” is controlled to “1”. “Sig On” is not controlled.
Table 11.4-13 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified to
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off Sig.on
command DCO
When the command output signal is treated as one signal (Sig Off Sig On), the
control scheme is shown in Table 11.4-14. For example, when the DCO=On command is
received under “Inverse” checked, the command output signals of “Sig On” and “Sig Off”
are controlled to “0”. “Sig On” is not controlled.
Table 11.4-14 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off = Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off to Sig.on
command DCO
When setting the “Sig Off”, “Sig On” and “Inverse”, check the specifications of the
command output signals of communication and others, and then set them.
Valid time
Valid time is used to set the time (ms) to control the command output signal. The command
output signal is controlled based on the control scheme described in section 11.4.5(iv)-5 for
the setting time after receiving General command, and is reset by communication side
after the set time. However, if the time is set to “0”, the control is not reset and is continued.
Set the time with a margin for interface of other applications.
ACK/NACK / Ext
This setting is used to enable the extension setting of Command ACK/NACK response
scheme or not. If “Ext” is not specified (Ext check box is not checked.), Command NACK (in
cases of (1)–(3) of the section 11.4.5(iii) and Command ACK (in case of others) respond
according to the default response. If “Ext” is specified, the setting of Command ACK/NACK
described later is enabled and the response scheme can be customized. When required the
stricter handshake by using Command ACK/NACK, it is better to specify the “Ext”. This
setting is not influenced by the control scheme of the command output signal.
When the command response signal is treated as two signals (ACK Sig NACK Sig),
the judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving
command DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is when (1), (2), (3) or (4) in Table
11.4-15 is established. If the neither (1), (2), (3) nor (4) is established (that is ACK sig =
NACK Sig = 1 or ACK sig = NACK Sig = 0) for the period from the command receiving to
the timeout setting time, Command NACK responds at that time.
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” no-checked,
Command ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = 0” and NACK Sig = 1”.
Table 11.4-15 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
When the command response signal is treated as one signal (ACK Sig = NACK Sig),
the judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving
command DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is after the timeout setting time
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” checked,
Command ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = NACK Sig = 1” after the timeout setting
time.
Table 11.4-16 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig = NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
When the “Measurands” item is selected on the start screen of the GR-TIEMS, the
setting screen is displayed.
In one frame of Measurand, the Type ID, INF, FUN settings, and its position setting
(Measurement Name/Measurement Description/Lower Limit/Upper Limit/Coefficient)
must be set. “No.” shows the position of power system quantity. (For details, describe later.)
The maximum 16 items of Measurands and the maximum 32 power system quantities per
one frame can be set.
Description
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
function of the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Type ID
Type ID=3 (Measurands I) or Type ID=9 (Measurands II) can be selected to set the frame
type of Measurand frame. In general, the maximum MEA number of Type ID=3 uses 1 or 2
or 4 and that of Type ID=9 uses 9. (However, the maximum MEA number of both types can
extend up to 32 in the GR-TIEMS. In this case, there are no difference between the
transmission format of Type ID=3 and that of Type ID=9.)
INF
Information number (INF) of the Measurand frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255.
When the standard frame† is provided, the INF according to the standard is recommended.
If the fame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-3
and the appendix†.
FUN
Function type (FUN) of the Measurand frame is set referring to the Table 11.4-4. The FUN
can be set to 0 to 255. If click the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all
FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting.
Name
Any comment with maximum eight characters can be entered. This setting does not affect
the function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
If MEA value exceeds the full scale (if the value expressed as B1 to B12 is less than
4096 or more than 4095), the MEA is clamped at 4096 or 4095 and OV flag is established.
However, if IV flag is established, OV flag is not established.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using
floating-point number. The MEA is a value which the power system quantity specified as
above is multiplied by this setting value.
SLAVE PROTOCOL
10:48 1/1
Slave protocol +
IEC103
Figure 11.4-11 Slave protection for the IEC103 protocol (on IED setting menu)
Note: The menu is just screened when a couple of communication protocols are embedded
in the IED.
Figure 11.4-12 shows the editing screen of the GR-TIEMS; the screen has a remark field
concerning to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication. Note the available length of the remark
field is up to 12 in the one-byte character. The remark field is utilized for the control of the
setting data.
11.4.8 Setting
Setting of 103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
USB communication
The IED front panel has an USB receptacle in a B-type to connect with a local PC for
engineering. The user can select a transmission speed, which is shown below, by the operation
of the setting menu, as shown in Figure 11.5-1.
USBCOM
10:48 1/1
USBCOM_BRATE_SW +
921.6kbps
USBCOM_BRATE_SW 115.2 / 921.6 kbps Baud rate Switch for USB Com port 921.6
RS485 communication
When the IED has an RS485 module for the communication, the user can select and set its
transmission and error check parity codes. Figure 11.6-1 shows the setting screen when the
RS485 module (#1) operates.
RS485
10:48 1/2
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
19.2kbps
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
NONE
Module RS485_1_BRATE_SW 9.6 / 19.2 / 38.4 /57.6 / 115.2 kbps Transmission speed 19.2
#1 RS485_1_PAR_SW NONE / ODD /EVEN – Parity check code NONE
12 User interface
Contents Pages Pages
Outline 1158 Time sub-menu 1197
-Front panel 1158 -Clock 1197
-LCD screen 1158 -Time zone 1198
-LEDs 1158 -Time synchronization 1198
-Function Keys 1159 -Display format 1200
-Operation Keys 1159 -Summer time(DST) 1202
HMI operation 1161 Test sub-menu 1203
-General operation 1161 -Test screen 1203
-Main-menu and sub-menu 1161 -Test mode screen 1203
Record sub-menu 1164 -Test flag enabling screen 1207
-Fault record 1164 -Mode change screen 1208
-Event record 1166 -Signal monitoring screen 1208
-Disturbance record 1167 Information sub-menu 1209
Monitoring sub-menu 1169 Security setting sub-menu 1210
-Metering 1169 Control sub-menu 1211
-Binary I/O 1170 -CB operation 1212
-Communication 1170
-Relay elements 1172
-Statistics 1173
-Goose monitoring 1175
-Diagnostics 1175
Setting sub-menu 1176
-Setting method 1176
-Confirmation dialog 1180
-On/Off 1183
- Group setting 1183
-Function key 1185
I/O setting 1189
-AC analog input 1189
-Binary input 1191
-Binary output 1193
-LED 1195
Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through the USB cable. This section discusses the
configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu hierarchy of
the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
LEDs
LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
(iii) LEDs
As shown in Table 12.1-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LEDs are user-configurable. Users can use them with or without latch function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section 12.6(iv).
†Note: The user can program to light the LEDs by itself. Setting are similar to the ones of
the Table 12.1-1 (For setting, see section 12.6(iv)). Note the manufacture programs
to light the respective LEDs in default prior to shipping.
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 12.1-3.
Table 12.1-3 Features of operation keys
Label Functions and Remarks
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: The MIMIC key is only available when Large LCD screen is mounted on the front
panel. The pixel resolution (dot) is 240(W) × 320(H). Note that this mode is only
provided when the user has programmed MIMIC feature using GR-TIEMS. See
chapter Engineering tool: MIMIC configuration tool.
HMI operation
By using the LCD screen, the operation keys and the function keys, the user can access
functions such as recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The operation of the LCD screen is more or less common in all IED models.
However, the contents of the LCD screen depend upon the IED model.
Sub-menu
An example of setting the sub-menu screen is shown in the right of Figure 12.2-1. By
using the key ▼ and the key ▲, the user can move the cursor downward or upward
to view all of the items. By using the keys ◄ ►, the user can return to a previous
level of hierarchy or go to the next level of hierarchy.
Screen structure
The LCD screen is composed of a title area and a data area. The title area is fixed on
the top two lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line on the
left-hand side displays local time, whereas the right-hand side displays either the
current line number, cursor position number and the maximum page number, or the
item number. For example, the display “2/4” means the current cursor position, which
is at the second item of a maximum of four items.
Main Menu OC
10:48 1/8 10:48 2/4
_Record > OC1EN +>
Monitoring > On
Setting > _OC2EN +>
I/O Setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu
Figure 12.2-2 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several
Sub-menus. Table 12.2-1 shows the configuration of Main-Menu.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record Record List Main Menu
Fault Record Clear Records
Event Record1 Record List
Clear Records Setting
Event Record2 Record List
Clear Records Statistics Counter(GCNT01~)
Event Record3 Record List Sigma Iy
Clear Records Function Key F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Disturbance Record Record List
Clear Records Diagnostics Detail
Clear All Records
Protection Common
Security Setting Change Password
Active Group
Copy Group(A->B)
Security
Group1
Group2
Group3 Login / Logout
Group4
Group5
Group6
Group7
Group8
Record sub-menu
The Record sub-menu is composed of several sub-menus: fault record, event record,
disturbance record, and clearance of all records. In each sub-menu, the user can clear records
separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Fault Record
10:48 1/2 2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
_Record List >
Clear Records + sub menu.
Fault Record
3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6 cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
#1 2012-07-25 >
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2
10:48 1/222 4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
Phase AB
Trip AB
OC1
53.4km (23%)
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
10:48 1/2 2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Fault Record 3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault
Clear Records
2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Clear All records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
“Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Event Record1
3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
Event Record1 3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Clear records?
Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2 2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record
_Record List >
Clear Records + List sub menu.
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25 3). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Record
10:48 2/6 1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record 2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the
10:48 1/2
Record List > Clear Records sub menu.
_Clear Records +
Disturbance Record 3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Monitoring sub-menu
The “Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display the current status of the IED. The data is
updated every second on the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the
Monitoring sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iii. Communication sub-menu
iv. Relay Elements sub-menu
v. Statistics sub-menu
vi. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu1
vii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
In the “Metering” sub-menu, the value and direction of current, voltage etc. can be displayed.
The user can change the units as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 12.4-1
shows an example of the Metering sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/25
Va
23.231kV 121.34deg
Vb
23.200kV 120.14deg
Vc
22.713kV 121.50deg
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
▼
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Slot#1
10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
▼
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
(iii) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 12.4-5.
61580STAT
The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
LAN sub-menu: the communication port name and status are shown on one
line. When an IED has a communication module for Network, or when the
setting of dual-port communication is set to non-operation (Off is set for
scheme switch [RLNSCH]), the communication port status will be as shown
in Figure 12.4-6.
LAN
10:48 1/2
PortStatus >
NetMonitor Inactive
The following two sub-menus are displayed to show the communication status
when the IED has dual LAN comunication modules.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
► ◄
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Power Value sub-menu: With regard to statistics item, its name and its
value are shown in the figure below. The user can also change the unit of
each value by the setting1. It is allowed to reset or revise the statistics
value.2
Power Value
10:48 1/4
Wh+ +
0.0MWh
Wh- +
0.0MWh
varh+ +
0.0Mvarh
changed from "2000:1" to "4000:1", then the value is displayed as "156MW" on the
IED screen. Therefore when the CT ratio setting is changed, the user should key in
the value of "78MW" again to display the compensated value.
Counter sub-menu: the name and number of statistical items are shown in
two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first
line.
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
COUNT2 (No Assign) +
0
COUNT3 (No Assign) +
0
► ◄
▲
CANCEL Counter
ENTER 10:48 1/8
OUTPUT COUNT +
0
COUNT2 (No Assign) +
The data is revised. 1
COUNT3 (No Assign) +
0
Accumulated Time sub-menu: the name and the total time over which the
statistical item has run are shown in two lines. The total time is displayed for
each statistical item in “d (date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can
clear each value of accumulated time using the clear step (reset) is shown in
Figure 12.4-15.
ENTER
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRx200-11-603 OK
GRx200-21-603 OK
GRx200-31-603 NG
(vii) Diagnostics
Errors are shown for each monitoring element. If there are no errors, an error message is not
displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
PLC data error >
Data(commslv) error >
Setting sub-menu
The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view and change settings for the following functions:
Recording, Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. In this
section, we show the “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection
setting”, and others. Furthermore, this section describes the confirmation of setting, and the
“On/Off” function that is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures in this chapter are examples only. The user should confirm
setting values after their values are changed.
Element Setting Mode: The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting
numerical values. For each setting, the setting name, setting value and the
unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 12.5-1 provides an example of the
element setting mode.
OC1 OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + *OC1-b +
123.00000 124.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been
changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the
change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For
the setting of a value, follow the steps as shown in Figure 12.5-21:
[▲] [▼]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
OC1 OC1
OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*OC1-b + [▼] *OC1-b + [ENTER]
*OC1-b +
124.00000 124.00000
124.00000
_OC1-c + [▲] OC1-c +
OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000 [ENTER] 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
45 deg
Table 12.5-1 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9
1 2 6 8 0
[▲]
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 [▼] 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
[◄]
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
2 1 : 2 3 [►] 2 1 : 2 3
Switch Setting Mode: The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the
selection of two modes. Figure 12.5-3 provides an example of the switch
setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the selected item are
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is
canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 12.5-4
shows the operation of the switch setting mode.
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
*OC1-2fBlk + *OC1-2fBlk +
[▼] Block
Block
_OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip [▲] Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
the main-setting-screen, the setting name and the selected item are
displayed. Press the key ENTER to begin the setting process; the screen for
selection list will appear. Once a setting has been changed, the [*] mark will
appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is canceled or
confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically.
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56
*OC1-2fBlk + [▼] *OC1-2fBlk +
Block-3P Block-3P
_OC1-VTFBlk + OC1-VTFBlk +
Non [▲] Non
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
Signal Selection Mode: Figure 12.5-6 shows the steps to select a signal.
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
F1 Key
10:48 1/2
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Logic +
Toggle
[►] [◄]
OC OC Trip
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 1/12
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN + [►] *OC >
On On UV >
OC2EN + OC2EN + ZS >
Off [CANCEL] Off [◄] ZG >
OC3EN + OC3EN + EF >
Off Off DIFF >
OC [CANCEL] OC Group1
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 2/3
*OC1EN +> *OC1EN +> [◄] x 2 Telecommunication >
Off Off *Trip >
OC2EN + [ENTER] OC2EN + Autoreclose >
Off Off
[►] x 2
OC3EN + OC3EN +
Off Off
[◄]
Protection Protection
[ENTER]
10:48 3/10 The changed Setting
Active group > Change setting?
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > The changed Setting
Group 3 > [CANCEL]
Group 4 >
is canceled.
[►] [◄]
[ENTER] [CANCEL]
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 2/5
*850BLK + [◄] [◄] Change setting?
LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
*IEC61850 >
GSECHK + IEC103 >
ON
[►] Modbus >
SI1-1 + DNP >
254
Setting [ENTER]
The changed setting is
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > The changed setting is
Counter >
[CANCEL]
canceled.
Function key >
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
OC OC OC
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4
[►] / [◄] /
10:48 1/4
*OC1EN +>
[ENTER] *OC1EN +>
[▲] / [▼]
*OC1EN +
On On Off
OC2EN + OC2EN + OC2EN +
Off [CANCEL] Off [►] / [◄] / Off
OC3EN + OC3EN + [▲] / [▼] OC3EN +
Off Off Off
[ENTER]
Protection OC
10:48 1/4
Change setting? *OC1EN +
The changed setting [ENTER] ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
is confirmed. OC2EN +
[◄] x 3
Off
OC3EN +
Off
Protection OC
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/4
Active group > *OC1EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “OC” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. OC2EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 > OC3EN +
Group 4 > Off
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. Jump to the “Element Setting Menu” if a relay setting
is requied.
Change active group: An example for changing the active group is shown in
the following figure.
[▲] x 2 [▼] x 2
Protection
Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Change Setting? [ENTER]
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Protection
10:48 1/10
Common
The changed setting [►]
Active Group >
is confirmed. Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 3 >
Copy group setting: The user can copy an active setting from one group to
another group. As an example, in the following figure “Group3” will be copied
to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 12.5-12.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
GRZ200 (Soft Z31 & Z32)
- 1184 -
6F2S1935 (0.04)
[ENTER]
[◄]
Protection
Protection
10:48 1/11
Common
Active Group >
1
Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Change group settings: Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings
are set. Therefore, in each group, the user can change the settings of the
protection functions and other features. To change the settings in each group,
refer to the setting method discussed in section 12.5(i).
programmed using settings. Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6),
respectively, as the default settings shown in Table 5.6-3.
Screen jump function: To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps
as shown in the figure below.
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function
10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
[◄] [CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[ ]x2 [▼] x 2
[ENTER]
[An Example]
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push [F1]
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Key?
confirmed. Do the
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
next step to select On
OC3EN +
a screen.
Off
[ENTER]
The selected screen is assigned to [F1].
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu OC
10:48 2/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [F1] _OC1EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > OC2EN +>
[F1]
IO setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
[ENTER]
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on F1 key.
Signal control function: To assign a test signal to a function key, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 12.5-16.
[▲] [▼]
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
Setting F1 Key
[ENTER] [◄] x 2 10:48 1/3
The changed setting Change Setting? *Signal +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 123101AF00003001
is confirmed.
Logic +
Instant
Selection of ratio: For example, Figure 5.2-1 shows how the channel
selection is made for the AC analog input on a VCT module (AI#1 = VCT#1).
Move the cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the
next level in the hierarchy.
[►]
AI#1
10:48 1/2
AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
2000
AI1_Ch1_Rating +
DEP
Rating check: Figure 12.6-2 is a check example for channel#1. Using this
screen, the user should confirmed DEP being set in each CT channel.
AI#1 AI1_Ch1_Rating
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/3
AI1_Ch1_Ratio + DEP
2000 [►] 1A
AI1_Ch1_Rating + 5A
DEP
Selection of CT polarity: For example, Figure 12.6-3 shows how change the
CT polarity on a VCT module (AI#1 = VCT#1). Using the cursor by pressing
keys ▲ and ▼ and pressing key ►, go for required setting items.
[►]
Polarity Change
10:48 1/3
Pol–1CT +
Positive
Pol–1CT-Ie +
Positive
Pol–1CT-Iem +
Positive
[►]
APPL-VCT
10:48 1/3
Off
Ve
Vs2
The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting
function. To configure the binary input circuits, the user should follow the procedure in steps
((ii)-1 and (ii)-2)
Selection of binary input circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-5 illustrates the
selection of a binary input circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next hierarchy.
Common
10:48 1/2
Thres_Level +
Low
Cmp_Num +
4
For example, Figure 12.6-7 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit (BI1).
The timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On is set for setting
[BI1_CPL]. Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or parameter.
BI1
10:48 1/2
BI1_CPL +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
SW
Inverse-SW +
Normal
Selection of binary output circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-8 illustrates the
selection of a binary output circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the hierarchy.
CPL Setting: For example, Figure 12.6-9 illustrates the setting of a binary
output circuit (BO1). Using setting [BI1_CPL] On, the CPL logic in BO1 is
available. Similarly, assigned signals, timers and switches can be set in this
menu. Note that detailed setting items are shown when On is keyed into
setting [BI*_CPL].
BO1
10:48 1/17
BO1_CPL +
Off
Input signal1 +
No Assign
Input Signal2 +
No Assign
Input Signal3 +
No Assign
Signal8 +
No Assign
LOGIC-SW
AND
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
Logic Timer +
0.000 s
FF-SW +
Off
Reset Signal +
No Assign
[►] [CANCEL]
Select Element
10:48 2/155
No Assign
_CO-OC-A 8000001B60
CO-OC-B 8100001B61
CO-OC-C 8200001B62
CO-EF 8300001B63
EXT.ARC_S 8300001B64
Selection of LED: Figure 12.6-11 shows the LED selection screen; the user
can select a setting item by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the
next level in the hierarchy.
LED
10:48 1/31
_LED3 >
LED4 >
LED5 >
LED6 >
LED7 >
LED8 >
LED26 >
F1 Key >
F2 Key >
:
Figure 12.6-11 LED selecting screen
LED Setting: As shown in Figure 12.6-12, the user can set the logical gate,
timer, color of LED and assign signals in this screen.
LED3
10:48 1/16
Color >
RED
Input signal1 +
No assign
Input signal 2 +
No assign
Input signal 8 +
No assign
Reset signal +
No assign
LOGIC-SW +
AND
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Logic Timer +
0.00 s
Color +
Figure 12.6-12 LED setting screen
Time sub-menu
In the Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of Clock function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time display and so on. Figure below shows the Time
sub-menu. (For more information, see Chapter Technical description: Clock function)
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Time menu
(1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
Clock
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
ActiveSyncSrc menu
ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Time Zone
10:48 1/1 (1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
_Time zone +
0.00hour Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time
zone in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the
servers can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of
higher-accuracy) and select the server with the smallest value.
SNTP menu
IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
1) To confirm that the SNTP synchronization function is set for
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
SNTP
10:48 1/4 2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.
SNTP When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
10:48 1/4
Server1 + ENTER.
0. 0. 0.176
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
BI SYNC menu
When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in BI SYNC menu, the user can choose a binary input circuit
(BI) as a synchronization standard. Adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC
1) Key the Data ID of the BI output
10:48 1/2 2) Set adjustment time for [SYNC ADJ]
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s The “IRIG SYNC” setting is similar to activate by using the
On/Off switch.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter
10:48 1/3 (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the
_-
/ desired format type.
.
Display Format
10:48 3/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
Display Format
10:48 4/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
Notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure If summertime is started or
ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week must be filled “5”. The IED
controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of the month on Start_Week or
End_Week automatically.
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/13 Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
_Summer time +
Off After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer
time in detail.
Summer Time
10:48 1/9 (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time.
Summer Time
10:48 4/9 The following procedure is a case of starting weekday setting.
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday + (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
Sun
Start_SM(Wday)
10:48
1/8 (2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time
10:48 4/9
Start_Month + (3) Starting weekday is set.
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Test sub-menu
Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen
The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a remote
terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid that the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED under
test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
Function test screen: Function test screen is provided for testing; the use
can program test operations, which can be implemented in protection and
control functions. Figure 12.8-4 exemplifies the Test screen. Automatic
supervision will stop when the user sets Off for A.M.F (for more information
about the automatic supervision, see Chapter Automatic supervision).
Function Test
10:48 1/65
A.M.F. +
On
BU1_Exclusion +
Off
BU2_Exclusion +
Off
Binary input test screen: The user can have a virtual signal to a binary input
circuit using the binary input test screen. Figure 12.8-5 shows an example;
the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content displayed will differ
depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to Chapter Technical
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the
items required for simulation.
ON: BI1 output is set forcibly to ON(Logic level=high(1)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
OFF: BI1 output is set forcibly to OFF(Logic level=low(0)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Use the screen shown in Figure 12.8-7 only to configure the BI signals for the
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 12.8-7,
if the user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the
screen shown in Figure 12.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner
similar to that described for BI01.
After selecting OP in Figure 12.8-6, use the following screen to start the simulation
test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Binary output test screen: The user is able to test a binary output circuit by
using GR-TIEMS. Figure 12.8-10 is an example of how to select a binary
output from the Test Mode screen.
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 12.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2).
The procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit.
(Refer to Figure 12.8-7 to Figure 12.8-9)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary
output circuit.
ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 12.8-15). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Information sub-menu
In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory. Figure 12.9-1 shows the Information sub-menu. Table 12.9-1
shows detail of information that is displayed in this screen.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE]
GRZ200
__-00-111-22-33-44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
operate F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in the
Security setting.
Control sub-menu
The user can control external devices using the IED front panel. Control sub-menus are
provided to operate; the user can operate the devices by pressing Operation keys. Note that
Control sub-menus are only available when the IED is in “LOCAL” mode†. When the IED is in
“REMOTE” mode, an error message will be shown on the screen. Remember that the IED will
change to “REMOTE” mode if there is no operation for a while; then the IED can be monitored
remotely. Figure 12.11-1 shows “Control” sub-menu.
Control
10:48 1/6
_Circuit Breaker >
SPOS >
DPOS >
TPOS >
Software Switch >
Auto Sequence >
Table 12.11-1 shows how to operate by the IED front panel. The IED can have several
control functions, which are dependent on the ordering code. For more information, see
Chapter Control and monitoring application or Appendix: Ordering for more information).
(i) CB operation
Figure 12.11-2 shows how to open CB (Off position).
Control
10:48 1/6
_Circuit Breaker >
Double DIR mode
SPOS >
DPOS >
responses?
TPOS >
Software Switch > SBO mode
Executing screen
Auto Sequence >
Output the command DPOS_SYN_Dev1
[ENTER]
10:48
Control Control execution
10:48 1/6 Push O button [CANCEL]
Waiting for the Select control POS:
_DPOS_SYN_Dev1 >
On
second response On
O
10:48
Selecting...
Open
Selecting succeeded.
[ENTER]
DPOS_SYN_Dev1
DPOS_SYN_Dev1 10:48
10:48 Controlling... [CANCEL]
Current status:
On
Select control POS:
_Off
Change start? CANCEL: Operation stop Cancel succeeded.
Controlling failed Cancel failed
ENTER:Yes CANCEL:No
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Handling precautions
The inside module should be handled in the electro static charge free environment. That is,
the user shall use an anti-electrostatic-wrist-band, which is grounded.
CAUTION
Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface connected to
the earth.
We strongly recommend the user to do a detailed investigation on the electronic circuitry that
should be carried out for the handling area, which is defined in the IEC 60747 standard.
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 2 2 0
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 2 2 0
VCT type (VCT12B)
AC rating (In) = 5A
The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules (BI, BO, or BIO)
using the ordering codes. For example, the user can find BI3A and BO1A modules in IED
depending the ordering cords “4H” at Positions A&B. The user can also know the
configuration with IO configuration label.
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 2 2 0
Figure 13.3-3 IO configuration label example (viewing from the back in 3/4 case)
Note: See Section IED case and module slot in Chapter Technical description to find the
structure of IED cases and terminals. For more information about the BI, BO, and
BIO circuits, see Section Binary IO module in the same chapter.
- 1 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 2 2 0
Positions
7 S G T E F U 9 V
- 1 Z 3 1 - 6 6 2 - 3 E
GRZ200- --
Selected language
Selected protocol
Selected software
Flange covers
Figure 13.3-6 Flange covers and labels attached on IED
Rack mounting type: silver-flanges, left and right sides, are jointed with the case using
countersunk screws. When wishing to place the case with the silver-flanges into the 19-inch
rack, the user should put white-plastics-sheets over the countersunk screws (see Figure
13.3-7). The white-plastic-sheets are bundled in the package. If the cases are jointed using
mounting kits, detach the silver-flange from the case. Remind that the user needs to put the
white-plastic-sheet over the countersunk screws on each side. For more information about
rack mounting using the optional joints kit, see Appendix: Rack mounting. The kits are shown
in Appendix: Ordering.
Left silver-flange Right silver-flange
White White
plastic Countersunk plastic
sheet Relay case sheet
screws
Figure 13.3-7 Covering the screw holes with white plastic sheets
Note: When the case is ordered in 1/1 size, the flange is integrated with the case so that
the countersunk screws and white-plastic-sheets are not provided.
Flush-mounting type: the flanges on the both sides are integrated with the case. Thus, the
white-plastics-sheets are not bundled.
To shift the rated current to 1A, remove jumpers shown in Table 13.4-2.
To shift the rated current to 5A, insert jumpers shown in Table 13.4-2.
To identify the VCT type, see the code at Position 7; look up the VCT type in Table 13.4-2.
For example, the IED below has VCT12B because the code at Positon 7 is printed “1”.
†Note:For the restoration, refer to the succeeding Section Replacement of modules for
more detail
‡Note:For connection about the power cable, refer to Chapter Technical description:
Power supply module.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE] Altered code
GRZ200
-11-213-00-1J-30-110 Code at Rated
__-1031-1J2-2E Positon K current
[Serial No.] 1 1A
No XXXXXXX123 2 5A
Rated current (In) in the IED: 1A rated changed by the user
Figure 13.4-1 How to check the new rated current with the altered code
†Note: For the LCD screen operation, see Chapter User interface: Information sub-menu.
‡Note: To know how to read the code, refer to the preceding section Unpack and
inspection of hardware and software.
Front Rear
AC
Terminal
Input Type of Jumper analog W1
Screw
Connector
W4 Tr.3 Tr.4
1 2 Va Voltage NA Ch1
W5
3 4 Vb Voltage NA Ch2 W6
W7 Tr.5 Tr.6
5 6 Vc Voltage NA Ch3 W8
W9
7 8 Vs Voltage NA Ch4 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
9 10 Vs2/Ve Voltage NA Ch5 W11
W12
11 12 Ia Current W6 Ch6 W13
W14
13 14 Ib Current W7 Ch7
Tr.12 Tr.13
15 16 Ic Current W8 Ch8
17 18 Ie Current W13 Ch9
19 20 – – – –
21 22 – – – –
23 24 – – – –
25 26 – – – –
27 28 Iem Current W12 Ch14
- 1 1 - 2 1 3 - 0 0 - 1 J - 3 0 - 1 2 0
Rated current changed by the user
- x 1 - x x x - x x - x x - x x - x x x
CAUTION
Note: The connection between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw No. 37 is made
with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. The user shall remove
this short-wire when undertaking the dielectric voltage test for the IED.
Remember that the user shall reconnect the terminals with this short-wire after
the test (See Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test).
WARNING
Switch off the DC power supply. Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after
switching off the DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and place the modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components may get damaged. After replacing the module, check all of the settings including
the data related to the PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.
Lateral beams
Screws Screws
Lateral beams
Screws Screws
Support pillar
Screws Screws
Screws
Removing direction
Step 2: To remove the flat cable, release the locks at the connector.
Connector released
Step 3: Detach the terminals where the user wants to replace a broken module with the new
one.
Step 1: Check whether the power not been supplied for the device. Unscrew four screws on the
terminal.
Remove the screws on
the terminals
Step 2: For detaching, insert the hook in the gap between the terminal and the rear panel by
the means of the illustration below. Check the hook thrusts into the gap between. Then pull
the terminal toward you..
Screws
Replace a module
Step 3: Make the connection securely between the CPU and the BIOs using the flat cable. To
check the locks are enabled to the connector.
Screws
Screws
Looseness
Step 2: Fasten the upper terminal and lower terminals by using the four screws.
†The description is intended for the instruction of the “Compressed type terminal”. Hence,
the works for other types are not matched, but the user shall check all the
terminals including the above terminals are also attached securely.
Step 2: Cover the front panel by tightening the four screws; then the device is ready.
Screws
CAUTION
Supply DC power after checking that all the modules are in their original positions and the
flat cables are plugged in. If the flat cables are plugged in enough, then the module may get
damaged.
Rack mounting
(i) Mounting 1/1 case
Figure 13.7-1 shows the dimensions for 1/1 case. The mounting procedure is illustrated in
Figure 13.7-2. Remember that flange covers for the front panel is provided in the package.
Figure 13.7-1 Dimension (19 inch × 1/1 case; dimension shown in millimeters)
the two cases combined is ready to furnished in the 19-inch rack, when the optional kit is
attached on the relay case. The procedure to mount the other cases for the 19-inch rack is
similar to the instruction of Figure 13.7-2. To find the other cases and kits, see Appendixes
Rack mounting and Case outline.
Remove gray-stickers on
screw holes.
Screw with
spring and flat
washer
Paste white-plastic-sheets on
the joint portions.
Countersunk
screw
Figure 13.7-4 Optional kit for mounting ‘1/2 case’ into the 19-inch rack
Note: The above work is not applicable when the case is in flash mounting type.
Figure 13.7-5 shows how to joint two cases using the silver plates. The user can put the front
panel face down on the table etc. for work. Caution not to scratch the front panel during the
work. The case with the optional kits becomes heavy so that you need to work with your
colleague.
Silver plate
Countersunk screw
Figure 13.7-5 Work for the combination of two cases using joint silver boards
Wiring work
Busbar Busbar VT1
Figure 13.8-1 Cable wiring; example for VCT12B and the other modules
Figure 13.8-1 illustrates example wirings. Power, Current, Voltage, communication signals,
contact signals, and signals for engineering tools are connected with the IED.
Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue with insulation 5.5 mm2 or larger
Figure 13.8-2 Ring tongue terminations for VCT; ferrule for BI, BO
Note: Use appropriate ferrules depending on the wire thickness.
Terminals for
voltages
Terminals for
currents
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring
which circuits functions when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements
Timers
Protection schemes
Autoreclose
Metering and recording
Fault locator
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment,
telecommunication equipment and other external equipment.
The following tests are included in these tests:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Signaling circuit test
Tripping and reclosing circuit test
Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
Class 1M laser radiation when remove cap for models with 30km class optical
interface. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
To examine the IED with a PC locally, connect the PC with the IED using a USB cable. The
GR-TIEMS software is required to install in the PC.
Tips: The user can perform LED test by pressing the keys ◄ and ►. Press the both keys
on the front panel for a few seconds. If there is no problem, all LEDs will be lit.
Monitoring
Setting
Setting for communication test
U
n
Default setting
Setting item Range i Contents Notes
value
t
s
TestFlag-EN Off / On - Change test flag on Protocol On
GOSNDBLK Off / On - GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off / On - GOOSE subscription block Off
Note: For testing setting [ZS-Test.CTRL] is designed to invalidate the Zmin feature,
which is used to select faulted phases.
Signal
Signal monitoring point
TEST (Function ID: 201301)
Element ID Name Description
3100051197 SIM FAULT OUTPUT for Sim.Fault Display
C100_S8 2000641120 Constant value 100 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C100_S16 2100641121 Constant value 100 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit
C100_U16 3100641125 Constant value 100 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit
C100_U32 3200641126 Constant value 100 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
2. Panel cut out figure (1/1×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
2. Panel cut out figure (3/4×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
2. Panel cut out figure (1/2×19 inches) for “Compression type terminal” case
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
BI8 BO8 BI8 Ic
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9 BI9 Ie
18 (-) 18 18
21 21 (+) 21
27 27 (+) 27
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15
32 (-) 32 IRIG-B000 30
32
35
33 (+) 33 •A1
33
36 BI16 •B1• SIG
BO7 BO16 (-) 34
34 34
A2 DISUSE
37 •B2
(+) 35 • DISUSE
38 35 35
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36 •A3
36
36 (+) 37 •B3• GND
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRZ/GRL (1.0)
- 1268 -
1.2. 1/2 case size for Compression-type terminal (GRZ200-11-211-00-33-_0-110)
BI3 6
Vc
(-) 6
8
10 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 8
Vs/Ve
9 (-) 8
FAIL2
7 (+) 9 9
BI5 10
Vs2/Ve
(-) 10
(+) 11 11
BI6 12
Ia
(-) 12
(+) 13 13
BI7 14
Ib
(-) 14
15
C13 15
BO1(SF) 16
Ic
16
17 17
BO2(SF) 18
Ie
18
21
BO3(SF)
22
23
BO4(SF)
24 C14
25
BO5(SF)
26
27
BO6(SF)
28
(+) 29 27
29
30
DC/DC BO7 28
Iem
30
(-) 31 31 C15
32 BO8 30
32
35 IRIG-B000
33
36
BO9
•A1
34 •B1• SIG
37 A2 DISUSE
38 35
•B2
37
• DISUSE
36
•A3
BO10 •B3• GND
38
GRZ/GRL (1.0)
- 1269 -
1.3. 1/2 case size for Compression-type terminal (GRZ200-11-224-00-34-_0-110)
BO3(SF) BI3 Vc
6 (-) 6 6
8
10 7 (+) 7 C12 7
11 (+) 11 11
BO6(SF) BI6 Ia
12 (-) 12 12
13 (+) 13 13
BO7 BI7 Ib
14 (-) 14 14
15 (+) 15
C13 15
BO8 BI8 Ic
16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9 BI9 Ie
18 (-) 18 18
21 (+) 21
BO10 BI10
22 (-) 22
2¥¥
23 (+) 23
BO11 BI11
24 (-) 24 C14
25 (+) 25
BO12 BI12
26 (-) 26
27 (+) 27
BO13 BI13
28 (-) 28
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29
30
DC/DC BO14 BI14 Iem
30 (-) 30 28
(-) 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO15 BI15
(-) 32 IRIG-B000 30
32
35
(+) 33 •A1
33
36 BI16 •B1• SIG
BO16 (-) 34
34 A2 DISUSE
37 •B2
(+) 35 • DISUSE
38 35
BO17 BI17
(-) 36
36 •A3
37
(+) 37 •B3• GND
BI18
BO18 (-) 38
38
GRZ/GRL (1.0)
- 1270 -
6F2S1935 (0.04)
VCT1-11 VCT12B
CT 12
13
14 1
CB 15 BI1
2 A1
16
17 3
1 B1
18 BI2 4
BO1 Semi-fast BO A2
2 5
1 B2
3 BI3
2 6 A3
VT BO2 4 Semi-fast BO
3 7
4 5 B3
5 BI4 8
BO3 Semi-fast BO A4
6 6
9 B4
7
7 BI5 10
BO4 Semi-fast BO A5
BUS VT1 8 8
11 B5
9 9
BI6 12 A6
BUS VT2 10 BO5 10 Semi-fast BO
13 B6
27 11
3I0 from adjacent line BI7 A7
28 BO6 12 Semi-fast BO 14
13 15 B7
BO7 BI8 16 A8
14
30 B8
20- 15
21 A9
BO8 16
BIO3A BO1 Fast BO
22 B9
1 17
23 A10
2 BI1 BO9 18 BO2 Fast BO
BO1A 24 B10
3 21
BO10 25 A11
4 BI2 22 BO3 Fast BO
26 B11
5 23
BO11 27 A12
BI3 24
6 BO4 28 Fast BO B12
7 25
29 A13
BO12 26
8 BI4 BO5 Fast BO
30 B13
9 27
31 A14
BO13 28
10 BI5 BO6 Fast BO
32 B14
11 29
33 A15
BO14 30
12 BI6 BO7 34
31 B15
13 A16
BO15 32 35
14 BI7 36 B16
33
15 A17
BO16 34 37
16 BI8 BO8
35 B17
17 38 A18
BO17 36
Programmable BI 18 BI9 B18
37
21 BI1A
BO18 38
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
COM-A A1
27 B1
A2
28 BI13 COM-B B2
RS485 I/F
29 A3
COM-0V B3 (option)
Ethernet LAN I/F
30 BI14 RJ45 (option)
31
COM Optical I/F
32 BI15 (option)
33
34 BI16 SIG A1
B1
35 DISUSE A2
B2 IRIG-B
36 BI17 A3
GND B3 (option)
37
38 BI18
PWS1A
RELAY FAIL. 2
1
DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
SUPPLY DC-DC FAIL RELAY FAILURE 1
31
(-) 32 1
0V
8
35
36 10
37
9
38 FAIL RELAY FAILURE 2
FG 7
E
IEC61850 PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
GRZ200
INTRODUCTION
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of
the IEC 61850 interface in GR series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series
version upper than E (G2M850-01-E).
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O Y
Server
S1 GetServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 GetLogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O Y
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 data-update (dupd) N
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S27-3 data-update (dupd) N
S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEDataOffset O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O Y
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O Y
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M Y
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O Y
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 1ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 1ms T1
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 1ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been
declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
proposedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalling m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber m m shall be 2.1 m m shall be 2.1 Y
negotiatedParameterCBB m m m m Y
servicesSupportedCalled m m m m Y
additionalSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled c1 x c1 x N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled c1 x c1 x N
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
Client-CR Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB IED
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
deleteProgramInvocation o i o i N
start o i o i N
stop o i o i N
resume o i o i N
reset o i o i N
kill o i o i N
getProgramInvocationAttributes o i o i N
obtainFile o c9 o c9 N
defineEventCondition o i o i N
deleteEventCondition o i o i N
getEventConditionAttributes o i o i N
reportEventConditionStatus o i o i N
alterEventConditionMonitoring o i o i N
triggerEvent o i o i N
defineEventAction o i o i N
deleteEventAction o i o i N
alterEventEnrollment o i o i N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus o i o i N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes o i o i N
acknowledgeEventNotification o i o i N
getAlarmSummary o i o i N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary o i o i N
readJournal o c13 o c13 N
writeJournal o o o o N
initializeJournal o o o c12 N
reportJournalStatus o i o i N
createJournal o i o i N
deleteJournal o i o i N
fileOpen o c8 o c8 Y
fileRead o c8 o c8 Y
fileClose o c8 o c8 Y
fileRename o i o i N
fileDelete o c9 o c9 N
fileDirectory o c11 o c11 Y
unsolicitedStatus o i o i N
informationReport o c7 o c7 Y
eventNotification o i o i N
attachToEventCondition o i o i N
attachToSemaphore o i o i N
conclude m m m m Y
cancel o o o m Y
getDataExchangeAttributes o c10 o c10 N
exchangeData o c10 o c10 N
Client-CR Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB IED
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
defineAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
getAccessControlListAttributes o c10 o c10 N
reportAccessControlledObjects o c10 o c10 N
deleteAccessControlList o c10 o c10 N
alterAccessControl o c10 o c10 N
reconfigureProgramInvocation o c10 o c10 N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS
write service is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.
- 1287 -
6F2S1935 (0.04)
The GR relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables.
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
LLNO class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
PDIS class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y
Settings
PoRch ASG Polar Reach is the diameter of the Mho diagram O Y
PhStr ASG Phase Start Value O Y
GndStr ASG Ground Start Value O Y
DirMod ING Directional Mode O Y
PctRch ASG Percent Reach O N
Ofs ASG Offset O Y
PctOfs ASG Percent Offset O N
RisLod ASG Resistive reach for load area O N
AngLod ASG Angle for load area O N
TmDlMod SPG Operate Time Delay Mode O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay O Y
PhDlMod SPG Operate Time Delay Multiphase Mode O N
PhDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay for Multiphase Faults O N
GndDlMod SPG Operate Time Delay for Single Phase Ground Mode O N
GndDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay for single phase ground faults O N
X1 ASG Positive sequence line (reach) reactance O Y
LinAng ASG Line Angle O Y
RisGndRch ASG Resistive Ground Reach O Y
RisPhRch ASG Resistive Phase Reach O Y
K0Fact ASG Residual Compensation Factor K0 O N
K0FactAng ASG Residual Compensation Factor Angle O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Time Delay O N
PHAR class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Settings
HarRst ING Number of harmonic restrained O N
PhStr ASG Start Value O Y
PhStop ASG Stop Value O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PSCH class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
ProTx SPS Teleprotection signal transmitted T M Y
ProRx SPS Teleprotection signal received T M Y
Str ACD_ABC Carrier Send M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y
CarRx ACT Carrier received after unblock logic O N
LosOfGrd SPS Loss of guard O N
Echo ACT_ABC Echo signal from weak end infeed function O Y
WeiOp ACT_ABC Operate signal from weak end infeed function O Y
RvABlk ACT_ABC Block signal from current reversal function O Y
GrdRx SPS Guard Received O N
Settings
SchTyp ING Scheme Type O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
CrdTmms ING Co-ordination timer for blocking scheme O Y
DurTmms ING Minimum duration of carrier send signal O N
UnBlkMod ING Unblock function mode for scheme type O N
SecTmms ING Pickup security timer on loss of carrier guard signal O N
WeiMod ING Mode of weak end infeed function O N
WeiTmms ING Co-ordination time for weak end infeed function O N
PPVVal ASG Voltage level for weak end infeed function -phase-phase O N
PhGndVal ASG Voltage level for weak end infeed function -phase-ground O N
RvAMod ING Mode of current reversal function O N
RvATmms ING Pickup time for current reversal logic O N
RvRsTmms ING Delay time for reset of current reversal output O Y
PTOC class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
PTOF class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOV class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTRC class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Tr ACT_ABC Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
PTTR class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured Values
Amp MV Current for thermal load model O N
Tmp MV Temperature for thermal load O N
TmpRl MV Relation between temperature and max. temperature O N
LodRsvAlm MV Load reserve to alarm O N
LodRsvTr MV Load reserve to trip O N
AgeRat MV Ageing rate O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start O Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
AlmThm ACT Thermal Alarm O Y
TmTmpSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmTmpCrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement O N
TmACrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model O N
TmpMax ASG Maximum allowed temperature O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
ConsTms ING Time constant of the thermal model O N
AlmVal ASG Alarm Value O N
PTUC class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
PTUV class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTUF class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
RBRF class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD_ABC Start, timer running O Y
OpEx ACT Breaker failure trip (“external trip”) T C N
OpIn ACT_ABC Operate, retrip (“internal trip”) T C Y
Setting
Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both,
FailMod ING O Y
other)
FailTmms ING Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip O Y
SPlTrTmms ING Single Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
TPTrTmms ING Three Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
DetValA ASG Current Detector Value O Y
ReTrMod ING Retrip Mode O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.
RFLO class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured values
FltZ CMV Fault Impedance M Y
FltDiskm MV Fault Distance in km M Y
Status Information
FltLoop INS Fault Loop O Y
Setting
LinLenKm ASG Line length in km O Y
R1 ASG Positive-sequence line resistance O Y
X1 ASG Positive-sequence line reactance O Y
R0 ASG Zero-sequence line resistance O Y
X0 ASG Zero-sequence line reactance O Y
Z1Mod ASG Positive-sequence line impedance value O N
Z1Ang ASG Positive-sequence line impedance angle O N
Z0Mod ASG Zero-sequence line impedance value O N
Z0Ang ASG Zero-sequence line impedance angle O N
Rm0 ASG Mutual resistance O Y
Xm0 ASG Mutual reactance O Y
Zm0Mod ASG Mutual impedance value O N
Zm0Ang ASG Mutual impedance angle O N
RPSB class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start (Power Swing Detected) C1 Y
Op ACT Operate (Out of step Tripping) T C2 N
BlkZn SPS Blocking of correlated PDIS zone C1 Y
Setting
ZeroEna SPG Zero Enable O N
NgEna SPG Negative Sequence Current Supervision Enabled O N
MaxEna SPG Max Current Supervision Enabled O N
SwgVal ASG Power Swing Delta O Y
SwgRis ASG Power Swing Delta R O N
SwgReact ASG Power Swing Delta X O N
SwgTmms ING Power Swing Time O Y
UnBlkTmms ING Unblocking Time O N
Maximum number of pole slips until tripping (Op, Out of step
MaxNumSlp ING O N
tripping)
EvTmms ING Evaluation time (time window, Out of step tripping) O N
Condition C1: Mandatory if RPSB is used for “Power swing blocking”
Condition C2: Mandatory if RPSB is used for “Out of step tripping”
RREC class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Controls
BlkRec SPC Block Reclosing O N
ChkRec SPC Check Reclosing O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic Operation (external switch status) O N
Op ACT Operate (used here to provide close to XCBR) T M Y
AutoRecSt INS Auto Reclosing Status M Y
Setting
Rec1Tmms ING First Reclose Time O N
Rec2Tmms ING Second Reclose Time O N
Rec3Tmms ING Third Reclose Time O N
PlsTmms ING Close Pulse Time O Y
RclTmms ING Reclaim Time O Y
RSYN class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Controls
RHz SPC Raise Frequency O N
LHz SPC Lower Frequency O N
RV SPC Raise Voltage O N
LV SPC Lower Voltage O N
Status Information
Rel SPS Release M Y
VInd SPS Voltage Difference Indicator O N
AngInd SPS Angle Difference Indicator O N
HzInd SPS Frequency Difference Indicator O N
SynPrg SPS Synchronising in progress O N
Measured values
DifVClc MV Calculated Difference in Voltage O N
DifHzClc MV Calculated Difference in Frequency O N
DifAngClc MV Calculated Difference of Phase Angle O N
Setting
DifV ASG Difference Voltage O N
DifHz ASG Difference Frequency O N
DifAng ASG Difference Phase Angle O Y
LivDeaMod ING Live Dead Mode O N
DeaLinVal ASG Dead Line Value O N
LivLinVal ASG Live Line Value O N
DeaBusVal ASG Dead Bus Value O N
LivBusVal ASG Live Bus Value O N
PlsTmms ING Close Pulse Time O N
BkrTmms ING Closing time of breaker O N
CILO class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Status Information
EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M Y
EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y
CSWI class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Controls
Pos DPC Switch, general M Y
PosA DPC Switch L1 O N
PosB DPC Switch L2 O N
PosC DPC Switch L3 O N
OpOpn ACT Operation “Open Switch” T O N
OpCls ACT Operation “Close Switch” T O N
GAPC class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic operation O N
Str ACD_ABC Start M Y
Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y
Setting
StrVal ASG Start Value O N
GGIO class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
Loc SPS Local operation O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind02 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind03 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind04 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind05 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind06 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind07 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind08 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind09 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
Ind64 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
GGIO_GOOSE class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
Loc SPS Local operation O N
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind02 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind03 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind04 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind05 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind06 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind07 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind08 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind09 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind11 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind12 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind13 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind14 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind15 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
Ind16 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
MMXU class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O Y
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O Y
PhV WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y
A WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O Y
W WYE Phase active power (P) O Y
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O Y
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O Y
PF WYE Phase power factor O Y
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
MSQI class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
Measured values
SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C Y
SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
XCBR class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRZ
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O Y
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
ACT class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
ACT_ABC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
ACD class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) N
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) N
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) N
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) N
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) N
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) N
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
ACD_ABC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
MV class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21
CMV class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal Vector MX O N
cVal Vector MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21
WYE class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 N
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21
WYE_ABCN class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21
DEL class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
phsAB CMV GC_1 Y
phsBC CMV GC_1 Y
phsCA CMV GC_1 Y
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | O N
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21
SEQ class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
configuration, description and extension
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B |C |… O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 21
SPC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 31
DPC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M Y
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O Y
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M Y
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M Y
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on | M Y
bad-state
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
Substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on | PICS_SUBST N
bad-state
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 31
INC class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 31
ING class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y(*3)
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
configuration, description and extension
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 39
(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.
ASG class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
configuration, description and extension
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 42
DPL class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 45
LPL class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRZ
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
configuration, description and extension
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only; AC_LN0_EX N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 45
- 1321 -
6F2S1935 (0.04)
Note: The template of this document is “Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for
Testing (PIXIT) for the IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED” published by UCA
International Using Group with note” PIXIT template extracted from server test
procedures version 2.3 and updated according to TPCL version 1.5” in March
12,2012 .
1. INTRODUCTION
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of
the IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series
version upper than E (G2M850-01-E).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
What is the scan cycle for binary events? More than 1.6 milliseconds
Rp10
Is this fixed, configurable Configurable
Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a
Rp11 N
specific client in the SCL
This is incremented when DatSet is
Rp12 ConfRev value
updated.
Rp13 Is it supported to change LLN0.Mod online? N
(NOTE)
But each data size shall be less than 32
bits.
What is the slow retransmission time? 60 seconds with TAL = 120 seconds
Go12
Is it fixed or configurable? Fixed.
What is the minimum supported retransmission 1sec
time?
What is the maximum supported retransmission 1 – 60sec(configurable)
Go13
time?
Note:
Subscribed payload data structure is
checked to determine if IED
accepts/discards the data; however the
TAL timeout is reset even when such
data is discarded.
The device starts sending GOOSE from
Go20 What is the behavior when the device starts up?
stNum=1 and sqNum=1.
Go21 Is it supported to set the “ndsCom” as TRUE? N
TAL = Time Allowed to Live
[Example2]
Set ctlCat same as stVal
-> Cause AddCause as
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Operate
Ct12 “Position-reached(5)”
request?
SBOes:
Same as above. Or,
[Example3]
Set Oper parameters as different
parameter from the parameter of
SelectWithVal
-> Cause AddCause as
“Parameter-change-in-execution (6)”
not-supported (0):N
bay-control (1):N
station-control (2):Y
remote-control (3):Y
Ct13 Which origin categories are supported? automatic-bay (4):N
automatic-station (5):Y
automatic-remote (6):Y
maintenance (7):N
process (8):N
DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes:
Ct14 What happens if the orCat value is not supported?
“test-not-ok” IED respond
Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue/Operate
Ct15 DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes: N
with the same ctlVal as the current status value?
DOns: N
SBOns: N
DOes: N
Does the IED accept a select/operate on the same SBOes: N
Ct16 control object from 2 different clients at the same
time? Note:
Commands are refused until the new
position is not reached or a timeout does
not occur.
Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue SBOns: N
Ct17 from the same client when the control object is SBOes: N
already selected (tissue 334)
Is for SBOes the internal validation performed Yes for both SelectWithValue and
Ct18
during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate step? Operate
N.A.
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off or
Ct19 (Only “On” and ”Test” are supported as
Blocked
Mod.)
Ct20 Does the IED support local / remote operation? Y
Does the IED send an InformationReport with
SBOns: N
Ct21 LastApplError as part of the Operate response-
DOns: N
for control with normal security?
Test flag
FALSE TRUE
IED On Accepted Rejected
Mode Test Rejected Accepted
The behavior of DUT according to the relationship
Ct29 between IED mode and Test flagged control Accepted:
request The control request is accepted by IED,
and Activate Binary Output
Rejected:
The control request is rejected by IED
with AddCause “Blocked-by-Mode”.
(NOTE)
At root directory in IED,
Ft1 the directory “/COMTRADE/” is
hidden.
Therefore a client shall directly
access this directory.
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are Not zipped
included in each zip file?
Directory names are separated from the file name
Ft2 “/”
by
The maximum file name size including path
Ft3 64 chars
(recommended 64 chars)
Ft4 Are directory/file name case sensitive N
Maximum file size Not limited by implementation or
Ft5 configuration. It depends on available
memory.
Is the requested file path included in the MMS
Ft6 N
fileDirectory respond file name?
Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory
Ft7 N
request?
Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same
Ft8 Y
time?
Ft9 Is the IETF FTP protocol also implemented? N
1. Introduction
According to the UCA IUG QAP the tissue conformance statement is required to perform a
conformance test and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01
series version upper than D (G2M850-01-D).
Tissue Description
Part Y/n.a.
Nr Implemented
116 GetNameList with empty response? Y
8-1 165 Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues Y
183 GetNameList error handling Y
7-4 None
28 Definition of APC n.a.
54 Point def xVal, not cVal n.a.
55 Ineut = Ires ? n.a.
7-3 60 Services missing in tables Y
63 mag in CDC CMV Y
219 operTm in ACT n.a.
270 WYE and DEL rms values Y
30 control parameter T Y
31 Typo n.a.
32 Typo in syntax n.a.
35 Typo Syntax Control time n.a.
36 Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing n.a.
37 Syntax GOOSE "T" type Y
39 Add DstAddr to GoCB Y
40 GOOSE Message “AppID” to “GoID” Y
41 GsCB “AppID” to “GsID” n.a.
42 SV timestamp: “EntryTime” to “TimeStamp" n.a.
43 Control "T" semantic Y
44 AddCause - Object not sel n.a.
45 Missing AddCauses (neg range) Y
46 Synchro check cancel n.a.
7-2
47 "." in LD Name? Y
49 BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
50 LNName start with number? Y
51 ARRAY [0..num] missing n.a.
52 Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum Y
53 Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV n.a.
151 Name constraint for control blocks etc. Y
166 DataRef attribute in Log n.a.
185 Logging - Integrity periode n.a.
189 SV Format n.a.
190 BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
191 BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of #453) Y
234 New type CtxInt (Enums are mapped to 8 bit integer) n.a.
275 Confusing statement on GI usage (part of #453) Y
278 EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453) Y
1 Syntax Y
5 tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted Y
8 SIUnit enumeration for W n.a.
6 10 Base type for bitstring usage Y
17 DAI/SDI elements syntax Y
169 Ordering of enum differs from 7-3 Y
534 Dpos Y
Note: Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of the optional tissue #453, all other
technical tissues in the table are mandatory if applicable.
Note: Editorial tissues are marked as “n.a.”.
Note: Final proposal on tissue 45 is not defined yet
Tissue Implemented
Part Description
Nr Y/N/n.a.
8-1 246 Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError N
8-1 545 Skip file directories with no files Y
7-2 333 Enabling of an incomplete GoCB n.a.
7-2 453 Combination of all reporting and logging tissues N
6 245 Attribute RptId in SCL N
6 529 Replace sev - Unknown by unknown n.a.
21 Test mode Available of test mode OK 1 9,11 103SLV 304001 3100003601 103TST
Local
22 parameter OK 1 Not applicable
setting
Type Function
INF Semantics Contents GI COT Function Element ID Name
ID ID
Supervision of the
Measured current of the
32 OK 1 1, 9 CHK_IZ 221901 3210001001 RESULT
supervision I zero-sequence and the
CT error
Supervision of the
Measured
33 voltage of the OK 1 1, 9 CHK_VZ 221B01 221B01 RESULT
supervision V
zero-sequence
Phase Supervision of the
35 sequence voltage of the OK 1 1, 9 CHK_V2 221A01 221A01 3210001001
supervision negative-sequence
Trip circuit Supervision of a trip
36 OK 1 1, 9 Not supported
supervision circuit
I>> back-up Status on the OC relay
37 OK 1 1, 9 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND
operation being in DT mode
VT fuse
38 VTF OK 1 1, 9 VTF 490001 8000001B62 VTF_ALARM
failure
Tele-protectio
39 Communication fail OK 1 1, 9 Not supported
n disturbed
Group MNT_LO
46 minor error OK 1 1,9 220001 3110121001 MINR_ERR
warning GIC
MNT_LO
47 Group alarm serious error OK 1 1, 9 220001 3110111001 SERI_ERR
GIC
Earth Fault Earth fault with regard
48 OK 1 1, 9 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND
L1 to phase-A
Earth Fault Earth fault with regard
49 OK 1 1, 9 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND
L2 to phase-B
Earth Fault Earth fault with regard
50 OK 1 1, 9 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND
L3 to phase-C
Earth Fault Earth fault in the
51 OK 1 1, 9 Not supported
Fwd, i.e. line forward direction
Earth Fault
Earth fault in the
52 Rev, i.e. OK 1 1, 9 Not supported
reverse direction
busbar
Start/pick-up Relay operation in
64 OK 1 1, 9 TRC 4A0001 8000001B71
L1 phase-A
Start/pick-up Relay operation in
65 OK 1 1, 9 TRC 4A0001 8100001B72
L2 phase-B
Start/pick-up Relay operation in
66 OK 1 1, 9 TRC 4A0001 8200001B73
L3 phase-C
Start/pick-up Relay operation in
67 OK 1 1, 9 No default setting
N phase-N
Trip operation
68 General trip performed in the NA 2 1 TRC 4A0001 8300001B6F GEN.TRIP
three-phase
Trip operation in
69 Trip L1 NA 2 1 No default setting
phase-A
Trip operation in
70 Trip L2 NA 2 1 No default setting
phase-B
Trip operation in
71 Trip L3 NA 2 1 No default setting
phase-C
Trip
Status on the OC relay
72 I>>(back-up NA 2 1 No default setting
being in IDMT mode
operation)
Type Function
INF Semantics Contents GI COT Function Element ID Name
ID ID
Fault location
determined (the
Fault location
73 condition of sending NA 4 1 Carried out by Time tagged measured function
X in ohms
events are the same as
the FMR)
Fault Fault occurred in the
74 NA 2 1 Not supported
forward/ line forward direction
Fault reverse/ Fault occurred in the
75 NA 2 1 Not supported
busbar reverse direction
Tele-protectio
76 n Signal Sending a carrier signal NA 2 1 No default setting
transmitted
Tele-protectio
Reception of a carrier
77 n Signal NA 2 1 No default setting
signal
received
78 Zone1 Zone1 trip NA 2 1 No default setting
79 Zone2 Zone2 trip NA 2 1 No default setting
80 Zone3 Zone3 trip NA 2 1 No default setting
81 Zone4 Zone4 trip NA 2 1 No default setting
82 Zone5 Zone5 trip NA 2 1 No default setting
83 Zone6 Zone6 trip NA 2 1 Not supported
The OR signal
General
84 generated by operated OK 2 1,9 No default setting
start/pick-up
relays
Breaker
85 CBF relay trip NA 2 1 CBF 453001 8B00011B27 CBF1_TRIP
failure
Trip
86 measuring NA 2 1 Not supported
system L1
Trip
87 measuring NA 2 1 Not supported
system L2
Trip
88 measuring NA 2 1 Not supported
system L3
Trip
89 measuring NA 2 1 Not supported
system E
OC trip in the IDMT
90 Trip I> NA 2 1 No default setting
mode
ARC1 CLOSE
128 CB ‘on’ by AR NA 1 1 ARC 4A6001 8000011B6C
COMMAND
CB ‘on’ by
129 NA 1 1 Not supported
long-time AR
130 AR blocked OK 1 1, 9 ARC 4A6001 8200001BB4 ARC_BLOCK
Flt Flag
- The flag raises at
Signal the start in the FL 4 73 – FL-Z 495001 8000101349 FltFlag
operation; it downs in
a pre-fixed time
Fault distance
SCL
- Decision made in 4 73 1 FL-Z 495001 4200001340 FltDiskm
Measured
kilometer
1.4 Measured
INF 128 Function: MSE_EANAGEMENT
Ia, Ib, Ic,
Sema I1,I2,I0,Ie Function Correspondent Element
Name MEA Type ID
ntics Va,Vb,Vc,V1,V2,V0,Vs, ID ID for the primary values
P, Q, f
I Not applicable 711001 4301001078 Ib primary
Note: The above coefficients can be derived with the following equations:
(1) Currents in three-phase (IL1, IL2, IL3) and in symmetrical component (I1, I2, I0):
4096
Coefficient=
In×2.4
where, In: Secondary current rating
For example, in In=1A , we can have coefficient 1706.666667.
(2) Earth fault current (Ie) and Ie used for SEF (Ise) :
4096
Coefficient=
In×1.2
where, In: Secondary current rating (or Ise rating current)
For example, in In=1A , we can have coefficient 3413.333333.
(3) Voltages in three-phase (VL1, VL2, VL3), in symmetrical component (V1, V2, V0), in
earth-fault (Ve) , and in reference (Vs):
4096
Coefficient=
Vn⁄ ×1.2
√3
where, Vn: Secondary phase-phase voltage rating
For example, in Vn=110V , we can have coefficient 53.74606142.
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation
Type ID: Type IDentification
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type
DPI: Double-point Information
DCO: Double Command
2. Troubleshooting
Object† Procedure
Start bit, stop bit and parity Go over the following settings via the
settings of data that BCU
transmits to relay is BCU. Relay setting is fixed in
incorrect. accordance with the following
BCU settings.
- Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even‡
Object† Procedure
The requirement frame from Check to set the time-out for the
the BCU and the reply frame reply frame from the relay.
from relay contend. Time-out setting: more than 100ms
(The sending and receiving BCU (acceptable value of response time
timing coordination is 50ms plus margin)
irregular in half-duplex
communication.)
HMI does not The relevant event sending Change the event sending condition
display condition is not valid. (signal number) of the IEC103
IEC103 event configurator if there is a setting
RY
on the SAS error. When the setting is correct,
side. check the signal condition using the
programmable LED, etc.
The relay is not initialised Check the sum value of the IEC103
after writing the IEC103 setting data on the LCD screen.
configurator setting. RY When differing from the sum value
on the IEC103 configurator,
initialise the relay.
Object† Procedure
Time can be BCU does not transmit the Transmit the time synchronisation
BCU
not time synchronisation frame. frame.
synchronised
3 The settling of the time Change the settling of time
with IEC103
synchronisation source is set synchronisation source to IEC.
RY
communicati
to other than IEC.
on.
Appendix 6 Ordering
Positions
[Hardware selection] 7 8 - 9 A B - C D - E F - G H - J K L
Configurations G R Z 2 0 0 - - - 0 0 - - - 0
System Frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
AC rated current
1A 1
5A 2
DC rated voltage†1
110-250 Vdc 1
Outline
Standard LCD,1/2 case×19”rack; flush mounting 2
Standard LCD,3/4 case×19”rack; flush mounting 3
Standard LCD,1/1case×19”rack; flush/rack mounting 4
LargeLCD,1/2 case×19”rack; flush mounting 6
Large LCD,3/4 case×19”rack; flush mounting 7
Large LCD,1/1case×19”rack; flush/rack mounting 8
Standard LCD,1/2case×19”rack; rack mounting†2 F
Standard LCD,3/4case×19”rack; rack mounting†2 G
Large LCD,1/2 case×19”rack; rack mounting†2 J
Large LCD,3/4 case×19”rack; rack mounting†2 K
BI/BO Module †3
See “Number of BI/BO”
BI/BO Terminal Type
Compression plug type terminal 0
Network / Time Sync. module†4
See “Selection of Serial, Ether, Time sync. Ports”
Software functions†5
See ”Functional table” 3
†1 Operation of PWS module is not guaranteed in AC power source (100 –220Vac).
†2 Mounting kits can be supplied if EP-201–206 optional accessories have been ordered.
†3 It can be selected using the table on Page 1362 to 1369.
†4 It can be selected using the table on Page 1358.
†5 It can be selected using the table on Page 1361.
Tips:
The user can find an actual ordering number from the information menu on the LCD. (See
Chapter User interface: Information sub-menu)
Positions
[Hardware selection] 7 8 - 9 A B - C D - E F - G H - J K L
Configurations G R Z 2 0 0 -
Positions
E F Serial ports, and/or Ethernet ports, and/or Time Synch ports
100Base-TX/ 1000base-
RS485 Fiber optical 100Base-FX 1000Base-T LX IRIG-B Remark
1 4 – – 1 – – –
3 4 – – 1 – – 1
4 C 1 – 1 – – –
4 G – 1 1 – – –
6 C 1 1 – – 1
6 G – 1 1 – – 1
4 6 – – 2 – – – For Hot-standby†
6 6 – – 2 – – 1 For Hot-standby†
7 D 1 – 2 – – – For Hot-standby†
7 H – 1 2 – – – For Hot-standby†
9 D 1 – 2 – – 1 For Hot-standby†
9 H – 1 2 – – 1 For Hot-standby†
L 6 – – 2 – – – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
L D 1 – 2 – – – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
L H – 1 2 – – – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N 6 – – 2 – – 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N D 1 – 2 – – 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N H – 1 2 – – 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
1 J – – – 1 – –
3 J – – – 1 – 1
4 N 1 – – 1 – –
4 S – 1 – 1 – –
6 N 1 – – 1 – 1
6 S – 1 – 1 – 1
4 L – – – 2 – For Hot-standby†
6 L – – – 2 – 1 For Hot-standby†
7 P 1 – – 2 – – For Hot-standby†
7 T – 1 – 2 – – For Hot-standby†
9 P 1 – 2 – 1 For Hot-standby†
9 T – 1 – 2 – 1 For Hot-standby†
L L – – – 2 – – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
L P 1 – – 2 – – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
L T – 1 – 2 – – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N L – – – 2 – 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N P 1 – – 2 – 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N T – 1 – 2 – 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
1 K – – – – 1 –
3 K – – – – 1 1
4 Q 1 – – – 1 –
4 U – 1 – – 1 –
6 Q 1 – – – 1 1
6 U – 1 – – 1 1
4 M – – – – 2 – For Hot-standby†
6 M – – – – 2 1 For Hot-standby†
7 R 1 – – – 2 – For Hot-standby†
7 V – 1 – – 2 – For Hot-standby†
9 R 1 – – – 2 1 For Hot-standby†
9 V – 1 – – 2 1 For Hot-standby†
L M – – – – 2 – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
L R 1 – – – 2 – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
L V – 1 – – 2 – For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N M – – – – 2 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N R 1 – – – 2 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N V – 1 – – 2 1 For PRP/HSR/RSTP†
Note:
†The LAN modules (L or N code at position E) are designed for PRP/HSP/RSTP protocols. When it
is required to have Hot-standby communication, select dual LAN modules at Position E and F.
Positions
[Software selection] 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R Z 2 0 0 - Z 3 - -
†1Choice has been made at ‘7’ positon in ‘Hardware selection’ on Page 1357.
†2Choice has been made by seeing ‘Functional tables’ on Page 1361.
†3Choice has been made at ‘E’ and ‘F’ positons of ‘Hardware selection’ on Page 1358.
†4 When the user requires PRP/HSR/RSTP or Hot-standby protocol, choose LAN models designed
for the protocol at positions E and F (see Page 1358).
†5Choice has been made at ‘9’ positon of ‘Hardware selection’ on Page 1357.
Function table
Ordering
Function
Protection function No.§1
Block
31 32
21 Distance protection(for phase fault) with 6zones
ZS
68 Power swing block ● ●
(6zones)
SOTF-OC Switch on to fault protection
21N Distance protection(for earth fault) with 6zones
ZG
68 Power swing block ● ●
(6zones)
SOTF-OC Switch on to fault protection
DEFCAR 85-67N Directional earth fault carrier command protection ● ●
DISCAR 85-21 Distance carrier command protection ● ●
50/67 Non-directional / directional definite time over-current protection
OC ● ●
51/67 Non-directional / directional inverse time over-current protection
50N/67N Non-directional / directional definite time earth fault over-current protection
EF ● ●
51N/67N Non-directional / directional inverse time earth fault over-current protection
OCN 46/67 Non-Directional / directional Negative sequence phase over-current protection ● ●
THM 49 Thermal overload protection ● ●
BCD 46BC Broken conductor protection ● ●
CBF 50BF Circuit breaker failure protection ● ●
STUB OC 50STUB Stub protection ● ●
OV 59 Phase over-voltage protection ● ●
OVS 59 Phase-phase over-voltage protection ● ●
OVG 59N Earth fault over-voltage protection ● ●
UV 27 Phase under-voltage protection ● ●
UVS 27 Phase-phase under-voltage protection ● ●
FRQ 81 Frequency protection ● ●
OSTZ 56Z Out of step tripping by distance ● ●
ICD ICD Inrush current detection function ● ●
FS FS Fail-safe function ● ●
VTF VTF VTF detection function ● ●
CTF CTF CTF detection function ● ●
FL-Z 21FL Fault locator ● ●
ARC 79 Autoreclosing function ● ●
VCHK 25 Voltage check for autoreclosing ● ●
TRC 94 Trip circuit ● ●
CLP – Cold load protection function ● ●
LEDR LED reset ● ●
General
GCNT Counter function for the general ● ●
control
MDCTRL Mode control function ● ●
SPOS Single position device function ●
DPSY Double position controller with synchronizing ●
SOFTSW Software switch controller ●
OPTR Operation time reset ●
TOTALTIM Total time measurement ●
Ctrl and
SYNDIF Synchronizing check for different network ●
Monitor
INTERLOCK Software interlock ●
DPOS Double position device function ●
TPOS Three position device function ●
GENBI Event detection function for general BIs ●
ASEQ Automatic sequence control function ●
With general control
§1 Ordering number selected will be set at ‘G’ & ‘T’ positions of Software selection (see Page 1360).
[Number of BI/BO]
One module being ordered; a slot being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Independent type & variable thresholds Binary output circuits (BO)
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
7 - - - 6 4 - 11 1xBIO1A
12 - - - 3 2 - 12 1xBIO2A
8 - - 6 - 2 - 13 1xBIO3A
- 6 - - - 2 6 14 1xBIO4A
18 - - - - - - 15 1xBI1A
- 12 - - - - - 16 1xBI2A
- - 32 - - - - 17 1xBI3A
Note
†1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’.
---: Not available
Two modules being ordered; two slots being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
- - 32 - 6 12 - 21 1xBI3A+1xBO1A
7 - 32 - 6 4 - 22 1xBI3A+1xBIO1A
12 - 32 - 3 2 - 23 1xBI3A+1xBIO2A
18 - - - 6 12 - 24 1xBI1A+1xBO1A
25 - - - 6 4 - 25 1xBI1A+1xBIO1A
30 - - - 3 2 - 26 1xBI1A+1xBIO2A
8 - - 6 6 14 - 27 1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
15 - - 6 6 6 - 28 1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
7 - - - 12 16 - 29 1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
16 - - 12 - 4 - 2A 2xBIO3A
- - 32 - - - 16 2B 1xBI3A+1xBO2A
- 12 - - 6 12 - 2C 1xBI2A+1xBO1A
- - - - - - - -
20 - - 6 3 4 - 2E 1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
Note
‡1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’. The Ordering No. herein is not
chosen when the IED is 1/3 case size.
---: Not available
Three modules being ordered; three slots being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
15 - - 6 12 18 - 31 1xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
20 - - 6 9 16 - 32 1xBO1A+1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
23 - - 12 6 8 - 33 1xBIO1A+2xBIO3A
26 - - 6 6 14 - 34 ‡2 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
8 - 32 6 6 14 - 35 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
24 - - 18 - 6 - 36 3xBIO3A
25 - - - 12 16 - 37 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
36 - - - 6 12 - 39 2xBI1A+1xBO1A
- 24 - - 6 12 - 3A 2xBI2A+1xBO1A
18 6 - - 6 14 6 3B 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO4A
7 - 32 - 6 4 16 3C 1xBI3A+1xBIO1A+1xBO2A
7 - 32 - 12 16 - 3D 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - 32 - 6 12 16 3E 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
16 - - 12 6 16 - 3G 1xBO1A+2xBIO3A
- 6 32 - 6 14 6 3H 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO4A
26 - - 6 6 14 - 3J ‡2 1xBO1A+1xBIO3A+1xBI1A
- - 64 - 6 12 - 3K 2xBI3A+1xBO1A
14 - 32 - 12 8 - 3L 1xBI3A+2xBIO1A
- - 96 - - - - 3M 3xBI3A
8 12 - 6 6 14 - 3N 1xBI2A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 32 - 12 24 - 3P 1xBI3A + 2xBO1A
36 - - - - - 16 3Q 2xBI1A+ 1xBO2A
Note
†1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’. The Ordering No. herein is not
chosen when the IED is 1/3 case size.
‡2 The difference between ‘34’ and ‘3J’ is the implementation location.
---: Not available
Four modules being ordered; four slots being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
26 - - 6 12 26 - 41 ‡2 1xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
32 - - 24 - 8 - 42 4xBIO3A
8 - 32 6 12 26 - 43 1xBI3A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 64 - 12 24 - 44 2xBI3A+2xBO1A
54 - - - 6 12 - 46 3xBI1A+1xBO1A
20 - 32 6 9 16 - 47 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
26 - - 6 12 26 - 48 ‡2 1xBO1A+1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
20 - 6 15 28 49 2xBO1A+1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
34 - - 12 6 16 - 4B 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+2xBIO3A
- - 64 - - - 32 4C 2xBI3A+2xBO2A
21 - 32 - 18 12 - 4D 1xBI3A+3xBIO1A
- - 128 - - - - 4E 4xBI3A
7 - 96 6 4 - 4F 3xBI3A+1xBIO1A
8 24 - 6 6 14 - 4G 2xBI2A +1xBO1A +1xBIO3A
- - 32 - 18 36 - 4H 1xBI3A + 3xBO1A
26 12 - 6 6 14 - 4J 1xBI1A + 1xBI2A + 1xBO1A+ 1xBIO3A
24 - 32 - 12 16 - 4K 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+2xBIO2A
15 - - 6 18 30 - 4L 2xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
7 - - - 24 40 - 4M 3xBO1A+1xBIO1A
36 - - - 12 24 - 4N 2xBI1A+2xBO1A
8 - 64 6 6 14 - 4P 2xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
36 - - - 6 12 16 4Q 2xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
Note
†1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’. The Ordering No. herein is not
chosen when the IED is 1/3 or 1/2 case size.
‡2 The difference between ‘41’ and ‘48’ is the implementation location.
---: Not available
Five modules being ordered; five slots being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
33 - - 6 6 6 32 51 1xBI1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A+2xBO2A
44 - - 6 12 26 - 52 2xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
25 - 96 - 6 4 - 53 1xBI1A+3xBI3A+1xBIO1A
8 - 96 6 6 14 - 54 3xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
62 - - 6 6 14 - 56 3xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
54 6 - - 6 14 6 57 3xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO4A
- - 96 - 12 24 - 5B 3xBI3A+2xBO1A
- - 128 - 6 12 - 5E 4xBI3A+1xBO1A
- - 160 - 6 12 - 5F 5xBI3A
44 12 - 6 6 14 - 5G 2xBI1A + 1xBI2A + 1xBO1A + 1xBIO3A
15 - - 6 24 42 - 5H 3xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 64 - 18 36 - 5J 2xBI3A+3xBO1A
- - - - 30 60 - 5L 5xBO1A
Note
†1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’. The Ordering No. herein is not
chosen when the IED is 1/3 or 1/2 case size.
---: Not available
Six modules being ordered; six slots being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
51 - - 6 18 30 - 61 2xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
8 - 96 6 12 26 - 62 3xBI3A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 128 - 12 24 - 63 4xBI3A+2xBO1A
8 - 128 6 6 14 - 64 4xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
52 - - 12 - 4 32 69 2xBI1A+2xBIO3A+2xBO2A
52 - - 12 12 28 - 6A 2xBI1A+2xBO1A+2xBIO3A
36 - - - 24 48 - 6B 2xBI1A+4xBO1A
36 - 64 - 12 24 - 6C 2xBI1A+2xBI3A+2xBO1A
44 - - 6 18 38 - 6D 2xBI1A+3xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 160 - 6 12 - 6E 5xBI3A+1xBO1A
7 - 160 - 6 4 - 6F 5xBI3A+1xBIO1A
Note
†1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’. The Ordering No. herein is not
chosen when the IED is 1/3 or 1/2 case size.
---: Not available
Seven modules being ordered; seven slots being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
80 - - 6 12 26 - 71 4xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
72 6 - - 12 26 6 72 4xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO4A
8 - 96 6 18 38 - 73 3xBI3A+3xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- 60 - - 6 12 16 78 5xBI2A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
- - 160 - 12 24 - 79 5xBI3A+2xBO1A
54 - 64 - 12 24 - 7B 3xBI1A + 2xBI3A + 2xBO1A
- - 128 - 18 36 - 7D 4xBI3A+3xBO1A
7 - 160 - 12 16 - 7E 5xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - 192 - 6 12 - 7F 6xBI3A+1xBO1A
7 - 192 - 6 4 - 7G 6xBI3A+1xBIO1A
- - 224 - - - - 7H 7xBI3A
Note
†1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’. The Ordering No. herein is not
chosen when the IED is 1/3, 1/2, or 3/4 case size.
---: Not available
Eight modules being ordered; eight slots being occupied in IED case
Number of circuits on a module Selection of modules
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Ordering No.†1
Common circuit type
Hybrid type
- - 160 - 18 36 - 83 5xBI3A+3xBO1A
- 60 - - 6 12 32 87 5xBI2A+1xBO1A+2xBO2A
8 - 128 6 18 38 - 88 4xBI3A+3xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 256 - - - - 8C 8xBI3A
7 - 224 - 6 4 - 8G 7xBI3A+1xBIO1A
- - 192 - 12 24 - 8H 6xBI3A+2xBO1A
7 - 192 - 12 16 - 8J 6xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
7 - 96 - 30 52 - 8M 3xBI3A+4xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - 128 - 24 48 - 8N 4xBI3A+4xBO1A
Note
†1 Ordering No. will be set at A & B positions in ‘Hardware selection’. The Ordering No. herein is only
chosen when the IED is 1/1 case size.
---: Not available
[Optional accessories]
[Label sheet]
Accessory names Quantity per order Codes
Pocket sheet label for LEDs(White) 10 EP-211-00
Pocket sheet label for function keys(White) 10 EP-212-00
[Rating jumpers]
Accessory names Quantity per order Codes
Jumpers to change rated current 20 EP-221
[Monitoring plugs]
Accessory names Quantity per order Codes
Plugs for monitoring jacks on the front 4 EP-222
[Engineering tools]
Accessory names Quantity per order Codes
GR-TIEMS 1 license EP-251
PLC-EDITOR 1 license EP-261
Technical data
Analog Inputs
Rated current In 1A or 5A (selectable)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency Either 50Hz or 60Hz (specified when the ordering)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 minutes
6 times rated current for 2 minutes
30 times rated current for 10 seconds
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs 0.1VA at In = 1A, 0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs 0.3VA at In = 1A, 0.4VA at In = 5A
Sensitive earth fault inputs 0.3VA at In = 1A, 0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs 0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2~ 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 ~ 132Vdc),
110/250Vdc (Operative range: 88 ~ 300Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply 15%
Supply interruption 20ms at 110Vdc
Restart time < 5ms
Power consumption 15W (quiescent)
25W (maximum)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
48/110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Note: Pick-up setting is available in BI2 and BIO4 (Setting
range: 18V to 222V)
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged
into the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an
external resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 3 ms
Semi-fast operating contacts
Make and carry 8A continuously
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 6 ms
Auxiliary contacts
Make and carry 8A continuously
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 8 ms
Hybrid contacts (10 A breaking)
Make and carry 8A continuously
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=5ms)
Break 10A, 220Vdc (L/R=20ms)
10A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 1 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 10kg (1/3 size), 12kg (1/2 size), 15kg (3/4 size), 25kg
(1/1 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
Function keys
Number 7
Local PC Interface (front port)
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2 meters (less than)
Terminal structure
CT/VT input M3.5 Ring terminal (ring lug type terminal only)
1000BASE-LX
Connector type LC duplex connector
Wave length 1310nm fibre
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range:–25C to +55C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit:–25C to +70C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC
60068-2-14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per
IEC 60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals
and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent
circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-27 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50s, 0.5J between all
terminals and between all terminals and
earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:
60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:
1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage
and discharged into the input terminals with
an external resistance
Environmental performance
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4
Electromagnetic GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850 and
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
25MHz to 1GHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential modes:
IEC 61000-4-5 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes†
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
†For differential mode, ‘CMP_NUM’ setting utilized.
Metering Function
AC current Accuracy 0.5% (at rating)
AC voltage Accuracy 0.5% (at rating)
Energy (Wh, varh) Accuracy 1.0% (at rating)
Power (P, Q) Accuracy 1.0% (at rating when power quantities being fed)
Frequency Accuracy 0.03%
Time Synchronisation
Protocol SNTP
Cabling
The table below shows the recommended cables in the cross-section and rated-voltage for the
connection with the transformer module (VCT), the binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and
the power supply module (PWS). Rated-voltage required for the cable is 600Vac.
Table Cables for the connection with module
Origin of Required cable-cross-section
Required end-terminal
connection (AWG)
For Ring-lug type:
M3.5 ring-tongue terminal with insulation
BI, BO, BIO 1.5 mm squired or larger
and PWS (Either AWG14 or 15)
For Compression-plug type:
Not applicable
2.5 mm squired or larger
VCT M3.5 ring tongue terminal with insulation
(AWG13)
Protective 5.5 mm squired or larger
M5 ring tongue terminal with insulation
earth (AWG9)
Fuses
The table below shows the required fuse in the PWS. DO NOT change the fuse by the user.
The fuse is complies with IEC60127-2 Sheet 5.
Table Fuse specification in PWS
Specification Description
Rated current 3.15A
Rated voltage 500Vac & 400Vdc
Cutoff velocity Type “T”
Manufacture Littelfuse, Inc.
Type 04773.15XP
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
7 TIME SYNC.FAIL Yellow Lit on a time synchronization failure between IED and the Time-server.
8 LAN COMM. FAIL Yellow Lit on a communication failure between IED and the Server.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
2 ERROR o Red - x Lit when failure is detected. User configurable only Logic condition.
7 TIME SYNC.FAIL Yellow Lit on a time synchronization failure between IED and the Time-server.
8 LAN COMM. FAIL Yellow Lit on a communication failure between IED and the Server.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
PF-Key
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Model
Fault Event Event Event
GRZ200 Metering ― ―
Record Record1 Record2 Record3
Appendix 9 CT requirement
For the GRZ series relays, the requirement for minimum CT knee-point voltage is evaluated
in three cases:
(1) Stability for faults beyond the Zone1 reach-point:
Vk > k1 × If_z1_max × (Rct + R2)
(2) Stability for close-up faults in the reverse:
Vk> k2 × If_rev_max × (Rct + R2)
(3) Dependability of tripping for close-up faults in the forward:
Vk> k3 ×If_max × (Rct + R2)
where,
Vk: Knee point voltage.
If_z1_max: Maximum current of the fault located within the Zone1.
If_rev_max: Maximum current of the close-up fault located in the reverse.
If_max: Maximum current of the close-up fault located in the forward.
Rct: Resistance of CT.
R2: Burden including connecting leads.
k1, k2, k3: Transient dimensioning factor
(All values refer to the CT secondary side)
The minimum requirement for Vk is determined for each of the three cases and the
highest of the three results is used to dimension the CT. k1, k2 and k3 are chosen depending on
the primary system time constant as follows:
< 35 6 2 2
< 50 7 3 2
< 75 8 6 2
< 100 8 6 2
< 150 8 6 2
Notes:
1. Knee-point voltage, Vk, is defined according to IEC 60044-1 as the minimum
sinusoidal e.m.f. (r.m.s.) at rated power frequency when applied to the secondary
terminals of the transformer, all other terminals being open circuited, which when
increased by 10%, causes the r.m.s. exciting current to increase by no more than
50%.
2. In cases where CTs are specified as P-class protective current transformers
according to IEC 60044-1 (e.g. 5P10, 5P20 etc.), the knee point voltage can be
approximated as follows:
Vk 0.8 × n × In × (Rct + RVA)
where,
Vk: Knee point voltage.
In: Rated current at secondary CT.
Rct: Resistance of CT.
RVA: Rated burden.
n: Accuracy limiting factor of CT (e.g. 20 for 5P20)
(All values refer to the CT secondary side)
3. Remanent flux has not been considered. In cases where a high level of remanent
flux may be experienced, it may be necessary to include an additional margin when
dimensioning the CT.
4. The data provided is valid for 50Hz and 60Hz power systems.
Table-1 shows mounting kits for 19” inch rack. Cases (i.e., 3/4 and 1/2 cases) are
accommodated for the rack by the use of optional mounting kits (see Table-2). Combined
mounting is also available when two 1/2 cases are purchased along with the kits. Step1 to
step3 illustrate how to place the case in the 19” inch rack:
Step1: Remove the flange(s) on the sides of the case.
Step2: Attach the optional kit parts; e.g. joint plates, lock bracket, and screws.
Step3: Place the case in the rack with rack-mounting-screws‡
‡Rack-mounting-screws are not included in the kits below. Prepare the screws by yourself.
Combined mounting in double 1/2 cases Joint kits for two 1/2 case EP−205 Figure-2
Simple mounting for a 3/4 case Joint kits for single 3/4 case EP−206 Figure-3
Screw with
spring and flat
washer
Countersunk
screw
Remove gray-stickers on
screw holes.
Screw with
spring and flat
washer
Paste white-plastic-sheets on
the joint portions.
Countersunk
screw
Remove gray-stickers on
screw holes.
Bundled screw
with spring and
flat washer
Bundled
countersunk
screw
Paste white-screw-stickers on
the joint portions.
Dielectric voltage testing shall be carried out after reading the below notices carefully.
Cable connections
Figure-11.A illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During
dielectric voltage testing, two short-wires attached on PSW shall be carefully handled; follow the
below instructions (1) and (2).
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1)
(+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG